International Code of Nomenclature Algae, Fungi, and Plants: Prepared and Edited by

1
International Code of
Nomenclature
for
algae, fungi, and plants
(Shenzhen Code)
adopted by the Nineteenth International Botanical Congress
Shenzhen, China, July 2017
prepared and edited by
NICHOLAS J. TURLAND, Chair

JOHN H. WIERSEMA, Secretary
and
FRED R. BARRIE
WERNER GREUTER
DAVID L. HAWKSWORTH
PATRICK S. HERENDEEN
SANDRA KNAPP
WOLF-HENNING KUSBER
DE-ZHU LI
KAROL MARHOLD
TOM W. MAY
JOHN MCNEILL
ANNA M. MONRO
JEFFERSON PRADO
MICHELLE J. PRICE
GIDEON F. SMITH
Members of the Editorial Committee
Koeltz Botanical Books

2018
2
Regnum Vegetabile Volume 159

ISSN 0080-0694 — ISBN 978-3-946583-16-5
DOI https://doi.org/10.12705/Code.2018
http://www.koeltz.com/product.aspx?pid=212180
Regnum Vegetabile is the book series of the International Association for Plant Taxonomy and is devoted to systematic and evolutionary biology
with emphasis on algae, fungi, and plants. Preference is given to works of a broad scope that are of general importance for taxonomists. Authors
interested in publishing in Regnum Vegetabile are requested to send an outline of their book, including a brief description of the content, to the
Editor-in-chief.
Editor-in-chief: S. Robbert Gradstein, Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle – Sorbonne Universités, Institut de Systématique, Évolution,
Biodiversité (UMR 7205 – CNRS, MNHN, UPMC, EPHE), 57 rue Cuvier, CP 39, 75005 Paris, France; robbert.gradstein@mnhn.fr
Production Editor: Franz Stadler, Institute of Botany, Slovak Academy of Sciences, Bratislava, Slovak Republic and Vienna, Austria;
production@iapt-taxon.org
Publisher: Koeltz Botanical Books, Heftrichter Str. 1, 61479 Glashütten, Germany (koeltz@t-online.de, http://www.koeltz.com) on behalf of the
International Association for Plant Taxonomy, c/o Institute of Botany, Slovak Academy of Sciences, Dúbravská cesta 9, SK-845 23 Bratislava,
Slovakia (office@iapt-taxon.org, http://www.iapt-taxon.org).
© 2018, International Association for Plant Taxonomy. All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by
any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system, or be translated
into any other language, without written permission from the copyright holder.
Cover illustration: The cover illustration was drawn by Pollyanna von Knorring (Stockholm). The design is based on the ginkgo theme that was
featured at the XIX International Botanical Congress in Shenzhen, China in July 2017 and includes representatives of the three groups mentioned
in the title of the Code, as well as fossils. Plants are represented by leaves of Ginkgo biloba L.; algae are represented by thalli of the Antarctic
marine red alga Nereoginkgo adiantifolia Kylin; fungi are represented by the dark spots on the ginkgo leaves and the teliospores and basidia of
the basidiomycete Bartheletia paradoxa G. Arnaud ex Scheuer & al., which grows on the fallen leaves of G. biloba; and fossils are represented
by the reconstruction of Ginkgo yimaensis Zhi-Yan Zhou & Bo-Le Zhang from the Jurassic of China. Note that the images are not to scale.
How to cite this Code: Turland, N. J., Wiersema, J. H., Barrie, F. R., Greuter, W., Hawksworth, D. L., Herendeen, P. S., Knapp, S., Kusber, W.-H., Li,
D.-Z., Marhold, K., May, T. W., McNeill, J., Monro, A. M., Prado, J., Price, M. J. & Smith, G. F. (eds.) 2018: International Code of Nomenclature for
algae, fungi, and plants (Shenzhen Code) adopted by the Nineteenth International Botanical Congress Shenzhen, China, July 2017. Regnum
Vegetabile 159. Glashütten: Koeltz Botanical Books. DOI https://doi.org/10.12705/Code.2018
Important note concerning names of organisms treated as fungi: After publication of this Code, the content of its Chapter F (Names of Organisms
Treated as Fungi) may be modified by the International Mycological Congresses of 2018 and 2022. Mycologists should therefore always consult
the online version of the Shenzhen Code in case of subsequent changes (http://www.iapt-taxon.org/nomen/main.php).
3
EDITORIAL COMMITTEE FOR THIS CODE

Nicholas J. Turland, Botanischer Garten und Botanisches Museum Berlin, Freie Universität Berlin, Königin-Luise-Str. 6–8, 14195 Berlin, Germany;
n.turland@bgbm.org (Chair)
John H. Wiersema, USDA, Agricultural Research Service, National Germplasm Resources Laboratory, Bldg. 003, BARC-West, Beltsville, Maryland
20705, U.S.A.; john.wiersema@ars.usda.gov (Secretary)
Fred R. Barrie, Missouri Botanical Garden, P.O. Box 299, St. Louis, Missouri 63166-0299, U.S.A.; address for correspondence: Department of
Science and Education, The Field Museum, 1400 S. Lake Shore Drive, Chicago, Illinois 60605, U.S.A.; fbarrie@fieldmuseum.org
Werner Greuter, Herbarium Mediterraneum, c/o Orto Botanico, Via Lincoln 2/A, 90123 Palermo, Italy; and Botanischer Garten und Botanisches
Museum Berlin, Freie Universität Berlin, Königin-Luise-Str. 6–8, 14195 Berlin, Germany; w.greuter@bgbm.org
David L. Hawksworth, Comparative Plant and Fungal Biology, Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, Richmond, Surrey TW9 3AE, U.K.; and Department of
Life Sciences, The Natural History Museum, Cromwell Road, London SW7 5BD, U.K.; and Jilin Agricultural University, Changchun, Jilin 130118,
China; d.hawksworth@nhm.ac.uk
Patrick S. Herendeen, Chicago Botanic Garden, 1000 Lake Cook Road, Glencoe, Illinois 60022, U.S.A.; pherendeen@chicagobotanic.org
Sandra Knapp, Department of Life Sciences, The Natural History Museum, Cromwell Road, London SW7 5BD, U.K.; s.knapp@nhm.ac.uk
Wolf-Henning Kusber, Botanischer Garten und Botanisches Museum Berlin, Freie Universität Berlin, Königin-Luise-Str. 6–8, 14195 Berlin,
Germany; w.h.kusber@bgbm.org
De-Zhu Li, Kunming Institute of Botany, Chinese Academy of Sciences, 132 Lanhei Road, Heilongtan, Kunming, Yunnan 650201, P. R. China;
dzl@mail.kib.ac.cn
Karol Marhold, Plant Science and Biodiversity Centre, Slovak Academy of Sciences, Dúbravská cesta 9, 845 23 Bratislava, Slovak Republic; and
Department of Botany, Faculty of Science, Charles University, Benátská 2, 128 01 Praha, Czech Republic; karol.marhold@savba.sk
Tom W. May, Royal Botanic Gardens Victoria, 100 Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, Victoria 3004, Australia; tom.may@rbg.vic.gov.au
John McNeill, Royal Botanic Garden, Edinburgh, 20A Inverleith Row, Edinburgh EH3 5LR, U.K.; and Royal Ontario Museum, Toronto, Canada;
jmcneill@rbge.org.uk
Anna M. Monro, Australian National Herbarium, Centre for Australian National Biodiversity Research, GPO Box 1700, Canberra ACT 2601,
Australia; anna.monro@environment.gov.au
Jefferson Prado, Instituto de Botânica, Av. Miguel Estéfano 3687, CEP 04301-902, São Paulo, SP, Brazil; jprado.01@uol.com.br
Michelle J. Price, Conservatoire et Jardin botaniques de la Ville de Genève (CJBG), chemin de l’Impératrice 1, 1292 Chambésy, Genève,
Switzerland; michelle.price@ville-ge.ch
Gideon F. Smith, Department of Botany, P.O. Box 77000, Nelson Mandela University, Port Elizabeth, 6031 South Africa; and Centre for Functional
Ecology, Departamento de Ciências da Vida, Universidade de Coimbra, 3001-455 Coimbra, Portugal; smithgideon1@gmail.com
4
The Nomenclature Section of the XIX International Botanical Congress, Shenzhen, China, 20 July 2017, with the Bureau of Nomenclature seated
on the front row (left to right): Li Zhang, Yun-Fei Deng (Recorders), Anna M. Monro (Recorders' Assistant), John H. Wiersema (Vice-rapporteur),
Nicholas J. Turland (Rapporteur-général), Sandra Knapp (President), Renée H. Fortunato, John McNeill, Werner Greuter, Gideon F. Smith, and
Karen L. Wilson (Vice-presidents).
PREFACE
The rules that govern the scientific naming of algae, fungi, and plants are revised at the Nomenclature Section of an
International Botanical Congress (IBC). This edition of the International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and
plants embodies the decisions of the XIX IBC, which took place in Shenzhen, China in July, 2017. This Shenzhen Code
supersedes the Melbourne Code (McNeill & al. in Regnum Veg. 154. 2012), published six years ago after the XVIII IBC
in Melbourne, Australia, and like its five predecessors, it is written entirely in (British) English. The Melbourne Code
was translated into Chinese, French, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish, and Turkish; it is anticipated that
the Shenzhen Code, too, will become available in several languages. In questions about the meaning of provisions in
translated editions of this Code, the English edition is definitive.
Amending the Code – from Melbourne to Shenzhen
Altogether, 397 numbered proposals to amend the Melbourne Code were published in Taxon, the journal of the
International Association for Plant Taxonomy (IAPT), between February 2014 and December 2016. A synopsis of the
proposals, with comments by the Rapporteur-général and Vice-rapporteur, appeared in February 2017 (Turland &
Wiersema in Taxon 66: 217–274. 2017) and served as the basis for the preliminary guiding vote cast by members of
the IAPT, authors of the proposals, and members of the Permanent Nomenclature Committees, as specified in Division
III of the Melbourne Code. Tabulation of the preliminary guiding vote (“mail vote”) was handled at the central office
of the IAPT in Bratislava by Eva Senková and Matúš Kempa. These results were published as an online “fast-track”
article on 26 June 2017 ahead of the Nomenclature Section (Turland & al. in Taxon 66: 995–1000. 2017).
The Nomenclature Section met from Monday to Friday, 17–21 July 2017 in Lecture Hall 502, 5th Floor, Peking
University HSBC Business School, University Town, Nanshan District, Shenzhen 518055, Guangdong, China (and was
followed, from 23–29 July, by the main part of the IBC at the Shenzhen Convention & Exhibition Center). There were
155 registered members in attendance, carrying 427 institutional votes in addition to one personal vote each, making
a total of 582 possible votes. The Section officers, previously appointed in conformity with Division III of the Melbourne
Code, were Sandra (Sandy) Knapp (President), Nicholas (Nick) Turland (Rapporteur-général), John Wiersema (Vice-
rapporteur), and Yun-Fei Deng and Li Zhang (Recorders). As in Melbourne, the Recorders were expertly assisted by
Anna Monro. The discussions of the Section were conducted in English.
5
Each Nomenclature Section is entitled to define its own procedural rules within the limits set by the Code. This time,
before discussions began on proposals to amend the Code, the Section adopted the relevant procedural rules set out
in the proposed new Division III, which was formally discussed and voted on later in the Section. These procedures are
detailed in the Report of Congress action mentioned in the next paragraph. Of the 397 published proposals to amend
the Melbourne Code, 113 were accepted and 103 were referred to the Editorial Committee; an additional seven were
accepted from among 16 new proposals made from the floor of the Section.
The rules of the Shenzhen Code became effective immediately upon acceptance of the resolution, moved on behalf of
the Section at the closing plenary session of the XIX IBC on 29 July 2017, that the decisions and appointments of the
Nomenclature Section be approved. The “Report of Congress action on nomenclature proposals”, detailing the
committees and officers appointed by the IBC and the results of the proposals, was published as an online “fast-track”
article on 14 August 2017 (Turland & al. in Taxon 66: 1234–1245. 2017). The full, day-to-day proceedings of the Section
will form a separate publication, planned for late 2018 or 2019. The audio recordings of the Section were transcribed
by Pacific Transcription, Indooroopilly, Australia, between November 2017 and January 2018, co-ordinated by Anna
Monro and financially supported by the IAPT. The transcription will be edited into the usual indirect speech format of
previous Nomenclature Section Reports (see, e.g., Flann & al. in PhytoKeys 41: 1–289. 2014 [Melbourne] and Flann &
al. in PhytoKeys 45: 1–341. 2015 [Vienna]).
The Nomenclature Section also elected the Editorial Committee for the Shenzhen Code. As is traditional, and in
accordance with Div. III Prov. 7.4, the Nominating Committee proposed members of the Section who were physically
present there to serve on the Editorial Committee, with the Rapporteur-général and Vice-rapporteur serving as the
Chair and Secretary, respectively. The Editorial Committee was increased in size from the previous 14 to the present
16 members to ensure representation from each continent, to include expertise in the main groups of organisms
covered by the Code (vascular plants, bryophytes, fungi, and algae, both extant and fossil), and to improve gender
balance (there are now three women on the Committee, compared with one previously).
As usual, the Editorial Committee had a mandate to deal with matters specifically referred to it, to incorporate into
the new Code the changes agreed by the Section, to clarify any ambiguous wording so long as the meaning is not
changed, to ensure consistency and optimal placement of provisions while retaining the present numbering insofar as
possible, and to add (or remove) Examples to best illustrate the provisions.
A draft of the main body of the Shenzhen Code, incorporating the changes decided by the Section, was prepared
between August and October 2017 by eight members of the Editorial Committee, as follows: Barrie (Art. 16–28),
Greuter (Art. 60–62, with restructuring of Art. 60), May (Chapter F), McNeill (Art. 51–58), Monro (Art. 46–50, Chapter
H), Price (Glossary), Turland (Preamble, Principles, Art. 29–45, Division III), and Wiersema (Art. 1–14). This draft of the
Code was distributed by e-mail to the full Committee on 16 October 2017. It was updated according to comments
subsequently received from the members and was used at the Editorial Committee meeting as the basis for discussion.
The full Editorial Committee met from 11–15 December 2017 at the Botanischer Garten und Botanisches Museum
Berlin, Germany, for five days of hard work: scrutinizing the entire Code, reviewing not only the changes made in
Shenzhen and the Examples referred to the Committee, but also reviewing the existing wording and finding new
Examples where necessary. Essential details of the new Chapter F were decided, as was how to incorporate protected
names (Art. F.2, formerly Art. 14.13) into the Appendices. It was an intense but highly productive week.
Following the meeting, a revised draft of the Shenzhen Code was completed and distributed to all Editorial Committee
members on 13 January 2018 for further scrutiny. After a multitude of comments and some five weeks of e-mail
discussions, a near-final draft of the Code was compiled and circulated to all members on 21 February. After a final
round of checking and correcting, the finished text was sent to Franz Stadler, the Production Editor of Regnum
Vegetabile, on 26 March to begin the formatting and page layout. The Index of scientific names, compiled by Knapp
and Turland, and the Subject index, compiled by Monro, followed shortly afterward. After formatting, page layout,
proofreading, and final corrections, the Shenzhen Code was sent to Koeltz Botanical Books for publication.
Names of organisms treated as fungi
The most extreme change to the Code resulting from the Shenzhen IBC was the Nomenclature Section’s decision that
future proposals to amend the Code relating solely to names of organisms treated as fungi will be decided exclusively
by the Nomenclature Session of an International Mycological Congress (IMC), the decisions of which will be binding
on the next IBC. However, the IMC will have no authority to amend any other provisions of the Code. If there is any
doubt as to whether proposals to amend the Code relate solely to names of fungi, the General Committee in
6
consultation with the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi has the final say. These new rules were developed by the
Special Subcommittee on Governance of the Code with respect to Fungi (May & al. in Taxon 65: 918–920; May in Taxon
65: 921–925. 2016), established by the Melbourne IBC of 2011 to report to the Shenzhen IBC, and are included in the
new Division III, Provisions for Governance of the Code, which is discussed below.
Fungal provisions now in Chapter F
A significant amendment to the proposal of the Special Subcommittee on Governance of the Code with respect to
Fungi was accepted at the Section, namely to bring together all the provisions of the Code that deal solely with names
of organisms treated as fungi into a special Chapter, which has been called Chapter F (the “F” standing, of course, for
fungi), so that the IMC has exclusive authority over this Chapter and the IBC has exclusive authority over the rest of
the Code. Chapter F immediately follows Art. 62 and consists of nine Articles, numbered Art. F.1–F.9 (paralleling Art.
H.1–H.12 on the names of hybrids in Chapter H), with the Key to the re-numbering of Articles, Notes, and
Recommendations on p. xxx showing which provisions in the Melbourne Code have been moved to Chapter F and
which are new. Art. F.1 concerns the nomenclatural starting-point for fungi, extracted from Art. 13.1. Art. F.2 permits
names of fungi, submitted as lists, to be protected and included in the Appendices of the Code (Art. 14.13 of the
Melbourne Code). In this Article, the term “protected” was introduced in Shenzhen along with an expanded concept
that includes lichen-forming fungi and treats protected names as conserved against competing unlisted synonyms and
homonyms. Art. F.3 concerns sanctioned names and includes the whole of the former Art. 15, also drawing together
some material on sanctioning previously included in other Articles. The sanctioning works formerly mentioned under
starting-points in Art. 13.1 (in which they had ceased to be starting-points in the Sydney Code of 1983) have been
moved to Art. F.3.1. A sanctioned name may be indicated by adding “: Fr.” or “: Pers.” to a formal citation, and there
is now, under Rec. F.3A.1, an alternative means of indicating them by adding “nom. sanct.” (nomen sanctionatum) to
the citation. Art. F.4 rules on the rank-denoting term “tribus” in Fries’s Systema mycologicum and is the former Art.
37.9. Art. F.5concerns registration of fungal names and includes the former Art. 42. In addition to the requirement to
register nomenclatural novelties, starting on 1 January 2019 designation of a lectotype, neotype, or epitype will require
citation of an identifier issued by a recognized repository (Art. F.5.4). Art. F.6 and F.7 concern rejection of names,
where Art. F.6 is a new rule that a fungal name published on or after 1 January 2019 is illegitimate if it is a later
homonym of a prokaryotic or protozoan name. Art. F.7 is the former Art. 56.3, permitting names of fungi, submitted
as lists, to be rejected and included in the Appendices of the Code, although as yet no such lists of names have been
approved. Art. F.8 is the former Art. 59 on names of fungi with a pleomorphic life cycle, and Art. F.9 is the former Art.
60.13 on orthography of epithets of fungal names derived from the generic name of an associated organism.
Comprehensive re-numbering of the provisions from Art. 15 onward has been avoided in this edition of the Code by
retaining for the sake of clarity and continuity “Article 15” and “Article 59” as headings in the regular sequence, but
with cross-references to Chapter F to which their content has been transferred.
The introduction to Chapter F includes an emphatic reminder that most of the rest of the Code applies to names of
fungi just as much as it does to names of algae and plants, and that Chapter F is certainly not the only part of the Code
relevant to mycologists. An annotated list of particularly relevant provisions in other parts of the Code is provided.
Because Chapter F may be amended by either or both of the International Mycological Congresses in 2018 and 2022,
mycologists should always consult the online version of the Code, where the amendments will be incorporated in such
a way that it is clear that they originated from a specific IMC.
Governance of the Code – a new Division III
The second major change to the Code accepted at the Shenzhen IBC is the replacement of Division III, the Provisions
for Governance of the Code, with an almost completely new and much-expanded version. This was developed by the
Special Committee on By-laws for the Nomenclature Section (Knapp & al. in Taxon 65: 661–664; 665–669. 2016)
established by the Melbourne IBC to report to Shenzhen. The Committee decided that the operating procedures of
the Nomenclature Section and, during the period between IBCs, of the Permanent Nomenclature Committees, were
largely based on tradition, partly recorded in various reports published mostly in Taxon, but partly also surviving in the
memories of individuals (e.g. the Rapporteur-général) from one IBC to another. It was decided that, to protect this
knowledge, stabilize practice over time, and to make nomenclature less arcane, these traditions should be crystallized
into actual provisions of the Code, in an updated and expanded Division III. The majority of the new Division III reflects
current practice, although some procedures are new, notably those concerning institutional votes (Prov. 3), which
were developed by the Special Committee on Institutional Votes (Funk & Turland in Taxon 65: 1449–1454. 2016) and
those on proposals to amend the Code relating solely to names of fungi (Prov. 8), developed by the Special
7
Subcommittee on Governance of the Code with respect to Fungi, as mentioned above. Prov. 1 consists of general
provisions on governance, Prov. 2 concerns proposals to amend the Code, Prov. 4 defines the roles and responsibilities
of the Nomenclature Section, Prov. 5 governs procedure and voting at the Nomenclature Section, Prov. 6 specifies the
reports that will appear after an IBC, and Prov. 7 details the nine Permanent Nomenclature Committees and their
membership, functions, and procedural rules. There are two new Permanent Nomenclature Committees: the
Committee on Institutional Votes and the Registration Committee. The Committees for Vascular Plants, Bryophytes,
Fungi, Algae, and Fossils are now collectively known as “Specialist Committees” and what were previously called
Special Committees (established by one IBC to report to the next, with a specific mandate) become “Special-purpose
Committees”.
Other new rules in Division III include the method by which the Bureau of Nomenclature is appointed. The President
of the Nomenclature Section is now elected by the General Committee and the Vice-rapporteur is appointed by the
Rapporteur-général and approved by the General Committee. This makes the General Committee responsible for
these officers instead of the Organizing Committee of an IBC, the members of which do not necessarily have
nomenclatural experience.
Governance of fungal provisions
As specified in Division III, the IMC operates along much the same principles as the IBC, except that it has a Fungal
Nomenclature Session (not Section), with a Fungal Nomenclature Bureau comprising a Chair, Secretary, and Deputy
Secretary, who are equivalent to President, Rapporteur-général, and Vice-rapporteur, respectively. A preliminary
guiding vote is organized prior to an IMC, but there are no institutional votes at a Fungal Nomenclature Session. The
Rapporteur-général is invited to attend the Session as a non-voting advisor. The Session has its own Nominating
Committee and elects the Secretary of the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau for the next IMC and the members of the
Nomenclature Committee for Fungi which, in turn, nominates a member of the Editorial Committee. Relevant
publications concerning proposals to amend Chapter F of the Code are published in the journal IMA Fungus instead of
Taxon. The relevant Provisions of Division III are Prov. 1.4 and footnote, 4.13, 7.1(g), 7.4, 7.8, 7.10, 7.14, and 8.1–8.12.
Note that for individual proposals concerning fungal names (including names of fossil fungi) there is no change to the
procedure to conserve or reject names or suppress works, nor to the procedure to request binding decisions. All such
individual proposals or requests that concern names of fungi must continue to be submitted to the General
Committee, which will refer them for examination to the relevant specialist committees, and submission is currently
effected by publication in Taxon, not in IMA Fungus. However, lists of names proposed for protection under Art. F.2.1
or rejection under Art. F.7.1 must be submitted to the General Committee by publication in IMA Fungus.
Registration of algal and plant names

The third major change to the Code in Shenzhen was the acceptance of most of the proposals developed by the Special
Committee on Registration of Algal and Plant Names (including fossils) (Barkworth & al. in Taxon 65: 656–658; 670–
672. 2016). These are now included in Art. 42 (with the content of the Melbourne Code Art. 42, which does not concern
algal or plant names, transferred to Chapter F, under Art. F.5). The mechanism by which registration of algal and plant
names could operate is laid out in Art. 42.1–42.3, although such registration is not yet a requirement for valid
publication and cannot become so before the XX IBC in Rio de Janeiro in 2023. A Registration Committee has been
established to assist with the design, implementation, monitoring, and functioning of nomenclatural repositories and
to advise the General Committee (see Div. III Prov. 7).
Other amendments to the Code
Numerous other, smaller changes to the Code were made in Shenzhen, and they are discussed below. The following
list is not intended to cover every change, but it includes the more important items.
The rules in Art. 6 on defining the status of a name as either a replacement name or the name of a new taxon have
been revised. While a replacement name is normally proposed as an explicit substitute (avowed substitute) for an
earlier name (Art. 6.11), a name not explicitly proposed as a substitute may nevertheless be a replacement name (Art.
6.12), or be treated as either a replacement name or the name of a new taxon (Art. 6.13). An incorrect statement
about the status of a name, e.g. name of a new taxon, new combination, or replacement name, does not preclude its
valid publication with a different status (Art. 6.14).
8
Art. 7.5 has been refined to make clearer how a name that is illegitimate because it was nomenclaturally superfluous
when published (Art. 52) is typified. The clause concerning a subordinate taxon not including the intended type of the
illegitimate name has been separated as Art. 7.6.
Under Art. 8.2, the definition of a gathering, which was only implicit in the Melbourne Code, has been made explicit in
a footnote.
The definition of a holotype in Art. 9.1 has been amended to show that a holotype is the one specimen or illustration
indicated by the author as the type or, when not so indicated, used by the author. For older names, where no type
was indicated, it is often impossible to be sure that the author used only a single specimen or illustration, because
specimens may have been in the author’s possession that have since been lost or destroyed. Moreover, mention of a
single specimen or illustration in the protologue is not to be interpreted as indication of the type, except under Art.
40.3, which applies only for the purpose of Art. 40.1, i.e. only to names published on or after 1 January 1958, and
ceases to apply on 1 January 1990 when one must explicitly designate a type using the word “typus” or “holotypus”
or an equivalent (Art. 40.6).
Art. 9.4 has been amended to make it clear that original material includes illustrations published as part of the
protologue. Also, specimens and illustrations are original material if the author associated them with the taxon and
they were available to the author at the appropriate time. This replaces the rather awkward requirement, first
introduced in the Tokyo Code of 1994, to show that the validating description or diagnosis was based on certain
specimens or illustrations in order for them to qualify as original material.
The notion of “second-step” lectotypification or neotypification under Art. 9.17, where a first type designation is later
found to refer to a single gathering but to more than one specimen, has been extended to apply also to epitypification.
Under Art. 9.19 of the Melbourne Code, a lectotype or neotype that was in serious conflict with the protologue could
be superseded if another element was available that did not conflict. However, if all the elements of original material
conflicted, the only options were to accept the consequent nomenclatural disruption or to propose the name for
conservation with a conserved type. Under the amended Art. 9.19, a conflicting lectotype may be superseded only by
a non-conflicting element; and when no such elements exist, a neotype may be designated.
Since 1 January 2001, Art. 9.23 has required use of the term “lectotypus” or “neotypus” or an equivalent for the
designation of a lectotype or neotype. When designating an epitype, one must now use the term “epitypus” or an
equivalent, and this is retroactive to 2001, which should not cause any problems because presumably all epitype
designations must have used such a term since the concept first entered the Tokyo Code of 1994.
The Special Committee on Publications Using a Largely Mechanical Method of Selection of Types (Art. 10.5(b))
developed a set of proposals (McNeill & al. in Taxon 65: 1441–1442; 1443–1448. 2016) to deal with the old problem
of type choices that used a largely mechanical method of selection, e.g. by authors following the American Code of
Botanical Nomenclature (Arthur & al. in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 34: 172–174. 1907). The proposals were accepted in
Shenzhen. Under an amended Art. 10.5, such type choices are supersedable unless they have been “affirmed” by a
subsequent selection of the same type not using such a method. Art. 10.6 defines “a largely mechanical method of
selection”, and Art. 10.7 lays out the criteria by which it can be determined that an author used such a method.
Another change to Art. 10.5 was the deletion of the redundant clause (a), which concerned supersession of a type that
seriously conflicted with the protologue. Either such an element is part of the protologue, and cannot therefore
conflict with it, or otherwise supersession is already permitted by Art. 10.2.
The correct name for a taxon below the rank of genus could be determined under Art. 11.4 of the Melbourne Code,
except when the resulting combination could not be validly published (because it would be a tautonym) or when it
would be illegitimate (because it would be a later homonym). In such cases, there was no explicit guidance to
determine the correct name. A new final sentence of Art. 11.4 now explains what is to be done, i.e. the final epithet
of the next earliest legitimate name in the same rank is to be used, if available, or else a replacement name or the
name of a new taxon may be published.
In Art. 14.3 a sentence has been added to rule that the application of conserved and rejected names of nothogenera
is determined by a statement of parentage, not by the type, which such names do not have according to Art. H.9.1.
The amendment was sparked by the case of ×Brassolaeliocattleya J. G. Fowler, which was recently proposed for
conservation with that spelling against two earlier synonyms (Shaw in Taxon 65: 887. 2016).
9
Amendments to Art. 14.15 now permit the date of conservation of a name to be determined. The Code was previously
silent as to this date, which can be important, especially in determining whether or not a name was nomenclaturally
superfluous when published, because Art. 52.2(c) permits definite inclusion of type to be effected by citation of the
previously conserved type. For names conserved from 1954 onward, conservation takes effect upon effective
publication of the General Committee’s approval of the relevant conservation proposal, and this can be looked up in
the online database of the Appendices of the Code (http://botany.si.edu/references/codes/props/index.cfm). This also
applies to names protected under Art. F.2.
When the previous Editorial Committee was preparing the Melbourne Code, it shied away from universally changing
the words “based on” to “formed from” in Art. 16–19, where this applied to an automatically typified suprageneric
name formed from a generic name, e.g. Asteraceae formed from Aster, whereas “based on” could wrongly imply that
Aster was the basionym of Asteraceae. Following a proposal referred to the Editorial Committee in Shenzhen, “based
on” has been changed to “formed from” wherever appropriate throughout the Code.
Art. 16.3 has been amended so that names of algae at the ranks of division or phylum and subdivision or subphylum
now end in -phyta and -phytina, respectively, instead of -phycota and -phycotina as in the Melbourne Code. However,
for names of algae at the ranks of class and subclass, the endings -phyceae and -phycidae are still required.
The rules on electronic publication introduced at the Melbourne IBC have for the most part proved resilient. The most
controversial aspect has perhaps been the use of preliminary page numbers in articles published online ahead of
inclusion in a paginated online and/or print issue or volume of a journal. It had been suggested that preliminary page
numbers were evidence of a “preliminary version that was, or is to be, replaced by a version that the publisher
considers final”, which under Art. 30.2 of the Melbourne Code would not have been effectively published. In the
Shenzhen Code, the emphasis has been shifted to the content of the electronic publication, which is ruled as excluding
volume, issue, article, and page numbers (Art. 30.3), so that when there is evidence that the content is merely
preliminary and was, or is to be, replaced by content that the publisher considers final, only the version with that final
content is effectively published (Art. 30.2).
Rec. 30A.1, urging that preliminary and final versions of an electronic publication should be clearly indicated as such
upon issue, has been reinforced with the advice that the phrase “Version of Record” should only be used to indicate a
final version in which the content will not change.
The possibility for a publication to be suppressed under Art. 34.1 and included in App. I, so that new names at specified
ranks in that publication are not validly published, has been extended to render ineffective any nomenclatural act in
the publication that is associated with any name at the specified ranks. Art. 34.2 has also been amended to rule that
suppression has retroactive effect.
Under Art. 36.3, alternative names published on or after 1 January 1953 are not validly published. The definition of
alternative names has been amended so that, not only are they “two or more different names based on the same type
… proposed simultaneously for the same taxon by the same author”, but they are names “accepted simultaneously …
and accepted as alternatives by that author in the same publication”. If these criteria apply, none of these names, if
new, is validly published.
Art. 38.4 permits binding decisions as to whether or not a name is validly published when it is doubtful whether a
descriptive statement satisfies the requirement of Art. 38.1(a). It is now ruled that such binding decisions have
retroactive effect.
As mentioned above under Art. 9.1 on holotypes, the second sentence of Art. 40.3 has been amended to make it clear
that it applies only for the purpose of Art. 40.1, i.e. only for the indication of a type as a requirement for valid
publication of the name of a new taxon of the rank of genus or below published on or after 1 January 1958. All the
other Articles of Art. 40 were already explicitly limited by date and none applied to names published prior to 1958.
Art. 40.8 is new, and requires that, for names published on or after 1 January 2019, when the type is a culture, the
protologue must include a statement that the culture is preserved in a metabolically inactive state.
Author citation has been dauntingly complicated for several editions of the Code, but a new Art. 46 Note 1 (following
Art. 46.1) may make things a little easier by pointing out that “A name of a taxon is attributed to the author(s) of the
publication in which it appears … unless one or more of the provisions of Art. 46 rules otherwise.”
10
Art. 46.4 rules that a validly published name taken up from a different “name” that was not validly published (i.e. a
different designation) is to be attributed only to the authors of the validly published name. The scope of the rule has
now been extended so that it no longer applies only to binary names and designations (i.e. at specific rank).
Art. 52.2 lists the ways in which definite inclusion of the type of a name may be effected for the purpose of Art. 52.1,
concerning nomenclatural superfluity. One of these ways is “by citation of the name itself or any name homotypic at
that time”. A new rule, Art. 52.3, rules that such citation of a name can be effected “by a direct and unambiguous
reference to it”, which could be citation of its “original sequential number or exact diagnostic phrase name”, with the
latter meaning, e.g., a Linnaean polynomial rather than its corresponding binomial. In addition, the new Art. 52 Note
3 points out that citation of a later isonym can in some cases be equivalent to citation of the name itself.
Art. 53.4 permits binding decisions as to whether or not names are to be treated as homonyms when it is doubtful
whether they or their epithets are sufficiently alike to be confused. It is now ruled that such binding decisions have
retroactive effect.
Cross-Code homonymy is dealt with under Art. 54.1, where two clauses are new. First, a name of an organism covered
by and validly published under the International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants, but originally
published for a taxon under another Code, is illegitimate if it is unavailable for use under that other Code, usually
because of homonymy (Art. 54.1(b)(1)). Second, a name of a genus is treated as an illegitimate later homonym if it is
spelled identically with an earlier intergeneric graft hybrid “name” established under the International Code of
Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants (Art. 54.1(c)). Also concerning cross-Code homonymy, the new Art. F.6.1,
mentioned under Chapter F above, rules that a fungal name published on or after 1 January 2019 is illegitimate if it is
a later homonym of a prokaryotic or protozoan name.
Art. 55.4 is new, and explicitly allows a combination originally placed under a species or generic name that is a later
homonym to be placed under the respective earlier homonym (where it is in effect the same combination) without
any change to authorship or date of valid publication.
Art. 56.3 has been augmented to rule that the rejection of a name under either Art. 56 or F.7 takes effect on the date
of effective publication of the General Committee’s approval of the relevant rejection proposal. As with conservation
or protection proposals, this can be looked up in the online database of the Appendices of the Code.
Art. 57.2, which concerned a particular situation among names of pleomorphic fungi, was not transferred to Chapter
F but was deleted as a result of a proposal accepted in Shenzhen.
In response to a proposal referred to the Editorial Committee in Shenzhen, Art. 60, dealing with orthography of names,
has been restructured, arranging the rules into a more logical order and eliminating the two “back-door rules” whereby
Art. 60.8 enforced Rec. 60G.1(a) while Art. 60.12 enforced Rec. 60C.1. The relevant material from those two
Recommendations has now been incorporated into the rules, as Art. 60.8 on terminations and Art. 60.10 on
compounding forms.
The new Art. 60.6 may seem superficially similar to Art. 60.5 but, whereas Art. 60.5 concerns use of the letters u, v or
i, j used interchangeably or in any other way incompatible with modern typographical practices, Art. 60.6 concerns
their use in any way incompatible with modern nomenclatural practices (hence japonicus, not ‘iaponicus’), and
additionally contains rules on transcription of the Greek diphthong ευ as eu not ev (hence Euonymus, not ‘Evonymus’).
Art. 60.12 is also new and rules that a hyphen in the name of a fossil-genus is always treated as an error to be corrected
by deletion of the hyphen. In non-fossil generic names, a hyphen present in the protologue must be maintained and
can only be removed through conservation.
Finally, the former App. I, on the names of hybrids, is no longer an Appendix but part of the main body of the Code,
following a proposal accepted in Shenzhen. The previous numbering of its Articles (Art. H.1–H.12) has been
maintained, and it forms Chapter H (the “H” standing for hybrids), immediately following Chapter F and immediately
preceding Division III.
Bibliographic references in the Examples
The Editorial Committee was concerned about inconsistency in the Examples, whereby names were followed, in
parentheses, by either the year of publication or the full bibliographic reference. There had been a rationale for this
difference in citation: names that could be found in nomenclatural indices (e.g. the International Plant Names Index
[IPNI]) were cited with the year only, whereas names more difficult to find, such as names of infraspecific taxa
published prior to 1976 or names of fossil-taxa, were provided with a full reference. However, sometimes full
11
references were provided when names could readily be found in indices, partly as a result of those indices having been
developed since the Examples entered the Code (e.g. Index Fungorum, MycoBank, and Index Nominum Algarum) and,
conversely, sometimes only the year was cited when the full reference would not be easy to find. Rather than delete
references already provided, the Editorial Committee decided that whenever a date was cited it should be expanded
to a full reference, thus making the Code more self-contained. Sandra Knapp is especially thanked for completing the
arduous task of looking up and inserting most of these references, which were then reviewed by the Rapporteur-
général.
The Glossary
The Glossary has retained its basic structure but has been revised and updated. New entries in the Glossary include:
“affirmation”, “attributed”, “identifier”, “nomenclatural act”, “pro synonymo”, “protected name”, and “superseded”,
while some existing entries have been substantially revised, e.g. “autonym”, “holotype”, and “rank”; the entry for
“alternative family name” has been changed to “nomen alternativum” to accord with the preferred term in the Code.
This reflects the fundamental role of the Glossary, which is strictly to explain terms used in the Code, and where
possible to do so using the precise wording associated with these terms in the Code. The Glossary does not seek to
cover all terms useful in the nomenclature of algae, fungi, and plants; for that, users can refer to a work such as
Hawksworth, Terms used in Bionomenclature (2010; online at https://www.gbif.org/document/80577).
The Appendices
The Appendices of the Code (excluding the former App. I, now Chapter H, on names of hybrids) have been maintained
over the last several years by John Wiersema as an online database currently hosted by the Department of Botany at
the Smithsonian National Museum of Natural History in Washington, DC
(http://botany.si.edu/references/codes/props/index.cfm). They will continue to be available online in this form, while
the possibility of publication as printed matter or in Portable Document Format (PDF) is not precluded.
When the former App. I (names of hybrids) became Chapter H, the remaining Appendices required re-numbering. The
Editorial Committee decided that the former App. VI (suppressed works), could logically become the new App. I,
because its impact can affect names at all ranks. App. II–V therefore remain unchanged, and the former App. VII and
VIII (binding decisions), which were relatively new to the Code, become App. VI and VII, respectively. The lists of
protected names of fungi (Art. F.2) approved in Shenzhen are incorporated as individual names, indicated as protected,
in App. IIA, III, and IV according to their rank. No lists of rejected names of fungi (Art. F.7) have yet been approved.
Formatting and standards used in the Code
Recent editions of the Code have used three different sizes of type, with the Recommendations and Notes set in
smaller type than the Articles, and the Examples and footnotes in smaller type than the Recommendations and Notes.
These type sizes, which have been maintained in this edition, reflect the distinction between mandatory rules
(Articles), complementary information or advice (Notes and Recommendations), and explanatory material (Examples
and footnotes). Notes, which explain something that may not at first be readily apparent but is covered explicitly or
implicitly elsewhere in the Code, are appropriately identified (at least in the print edition of the Code) with an “i” for
“information”, highlighted in the same way as the Article numbers. Notes have binding effect but, unlike Articles, do
not introduce any new provision or concept. Examples are distinguished, in addition to the smaller font size, by being
indented. There are 19 Examples that illustrate particular, lettered clauses of Articles (Art. 9.19, 10.7, 36.1, 41.8, and
54.1), in which case the respective letter is cited in parentheses at the beginning of the Example, e.g. “(a)”.
As in all recent editions, scientific names under the jurisdiction of the Code, irrespective of rank, are consistently
printed in italic type. The Code sets no binding standard in this respect, as typography is a matter of editorial style and
tradition, not of nomenclature. Nevertheless, editors and authors, in the interest of international uniformity, may wish
to consider following the practice exemplified by the Code, which has been well received in general and is followed in
a number of botanical and mycological journals. To set off scientific names even better, italics are not used for
technical terms and other words in Latin, although they are still used for word elements that are part of a scientific
name.
The Editorial Committee has tried hard to achieve uniformity in bibliographic style and formal presentation. Author
citations of scientific names appearing in the Code are standardized in conformity with Brummitt & Powell, Authors of
plant names (1992), updated as necessary from the International Plant Names Index (http://www.ipni.org/), albeit
with additional spacing, as mentioned in Rec. 46A Note 1. The titles of books in bibliographic citations are abbreviated
in conformity with Taxonomic literature, ed. 2 (TL-2; Stafleu & Cowan in Regnum Veg. 94, 98, 105, 110, 112, 115, 116.
12
1976–1988; Supplements 1–6 by Stafleu & Mennega in Regnum Veg. 125, 130, 132, 134, 135, 137. 1992–2000;
Supplements 7 & 8 by Dorr & Nicolson in Regnum Veg. 149, 150. 2008 & 2009; online at
http://www.sil.si.edu/digitalcollections/tl-2/index.cfm) or, when not in TL-2, by analogy, but always with capital initial
letters. For journal titles, the abbreviations follow Bridson & al., BPH-2. Periodicals with botanical content. Constituting
a second edition of Botanico-periodicum-huntianum (2004; online at
http://huntbotanical.org/databases/show.php?1) or, when not in BPH-2, by analogy. Standard herbarium codes follow
Thiers, Index herbariorum (continuously updated; online at http://sweetgum.nybg.org/science/ih/).
Acknowledgements
We first thank our fellow members of the Editorial Committee for their hard work, patience, helpfulness, and
friendship, and acknowledge the support for their work on nomenclature by their respective institutions.
We are grateful to the following for their contributions at the Nomenclature Section: De-Yuan Hong for an inspiring
opening speech at the Section; the Recorders, Li Zhang and Yun-Fei Deng; the Recorders’ Assistant, Anna Monro; the
Vice-presidents, Renée Fortunato, Werner Greuter, De-Zhu Li, John McNeill, Gideon Smith, and Karen Wilson; the
members of the Nominating Committee, Alina Freire-Fierro, Vicki Funk, Dmitry Geltman, David Hawksworth, Regina
Hirai, Jin-Shuang Ma, David Middleton, Gideon Smith, and Kevin Thiele; the Tellers, Heather Lindon, Melanie Schori,
Gustavo Shimizu, and Yi-Hua Tong; and of course the Organizing Committee of the IBC and all the local staff and
volunteers in Shenzhen who helped the Section run smoothly.
The Council and officers of the IAPT, including its successive Presidents, Vicki Funk and Patrick Herendeen, and
Secretary-General, Karol Marhold, are thanked for maintaining the IAPT’s traditional commitment to nomenclature by
funding the Editorial Committee meeting in Berlin. Eva Senková, the Managing Secretary at the IAPT central office in
Bratislava, is especially thanked for her help with the preliminary guiding vote, institutional votes, and travel logistics
and expenses for the IBC and Editorial Committee meeting. Matúš Kempa, also at the IAPT central office, provided IT
support for the preliminary guiding vote.
Thomas Borsch, Director of the Botanischer Garten und Botanisches Museum Berlin (BGBM), Freie Universität Berlin,
is thanked for hosting the Editorial Committee meeting, providing a conference room, library facilities, and internet
access. We are also grateful to Gabriela Michaelis, in the Directorate at BGBM, for valuable help with the logistics of
the meeting. The staff of the BGBM Library are also thanked for providing publications that were not available online.
The staff of the Library of the Natural History Museum, London, helped Sandra Knapp with access to various
publications during her task of adding bibliographic references to the Examples of the Code.
We thank Paul van Rijckevorsel for editorial suggestions and especially for creating such a helpful resource in his
“Overview of the Codes since 1867”, hosted on the IAPT website (http://www.iapt-taxon.org/historic/index.htm). This
has been invaluable in tracing provisions of the Code back in time to clarify meanings that were not immediately
obvious.
We also gratefully acknowledge others who have provided editorial suggestions, ideas, or Examples: Robert Andersen,
John David, Vincent Demoulin, Yun-Fei Deng, Kanchi Gandhi, Mark Garland, Rafaël Govaerts, Martin Head, Paul Kirk,
Joseph Kirkbride, David Mabberley, Gregory Mueller, Luis Parra, Richard Rabeler, Rosa Rankin, Alexander Sennikov,
Judith Skog, Mark Watson, Karen Wilson, Peter Wilson, William Woelkerling, Xiang-Yun Zhu, and Gea Zijlstra.
Franz Stadler, the Production Editor of Regnum Vegetabile, is thanked for his excellent editing, formatting, and page
layout of the final draft of the Shenzhen Code. The cover design was skilfully drawn by Pollyanna von Knorring. The
photograph of the Nomenclature Section was taken and provided by Li Zhang, Recorder. Sven and Per Koeltz, of Koeltz
Botanical Books, are thanked for publishing the Shenzhen Code and permitting its online publication by the IAPT.
The Rapporteur-général thanks his wife, Christine Turland, for remaining so tolerant and understanding during the
time he devoted to this edition of the Code.
The implementation of the Code between Congresses depends continuously on the effort invested by members of the
Permanent Nomenclature Committees, altogether some 130 individuals, who work principally on proposals for
conservation, protection, or rejection of names, suppression of works, and requests for binding decisions. There are
also the members of the Special-purpose Committees established by an IBC with a mandate to investigate particular
nomenclatural problems and to report with solutions to the next IBC. Augmenting these efforts with considerable
input of time and expertise are the relevant column editors of the journals Taxon and IMA Fungus, where the
proposals, requests for decisions, and committee reports are published. The nomenclature of algae, fungi, and plants
13
is remarkable for being supported by a vast amount of meticulous and effective work undertaken voluntarily by so
many taxonomists. All users of this Code benefit from these efforts, and we are sincerely grateful to all who participate
in this work.
The online version of the main text of the Code and the online database of its Appendices are dependent on the
continued support of the two institutions that host the websites: the central office of the IAPT (Bratislava), for the
main text, and the Department of Botany at the Smithsonian National Museum of Natural History (Washington, DC)
for the Appendices.
The International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants is published under the authority of the
International Botanical Congress (IBC), while its Chapter F, on names of organisms treated as fungi, is published under
the authority of the International Mycological Congress (IMC). Provisions for the amendment of the Code are detailed
in Division III. The next IMC, IMC11, will take place in San Juan, Puerto Rico from 16–21 July 2018, with its
Nomenclature Session on 19 July. IMC12 will take place in 2022. The next IBC, the XX IBC, will take place in Rio de
Janeiro, Brazil from 23–29 July 2023, with its Nomenclature Section meeting during the preceding week (17–21 July).
Proposals to amend this Code (excluding Chapter F) may be published in Taxon starting in 2020 and ending in 2022. In
late 2019 or early 2020 a notice will appear in Taxon announcing the opening of the Proposals column and providing
instructions on procedure and format. Proposals to amend Chapter F, to be considered at IMC12 in 2022, may be
published in IMA Fungus, in which a similar notice will appear.
This Code, as with previous editions, is the culmination of a multi-year process of international cooperation and
collaboration. Its scientific standing is dependent on the voluntary acceptance of its rules by authors, editors,
publishers, and other users of the names of algae, fungi, and plants. We trust that you, as one of these users, will be
happy to accept this Shenzhen Code.
Berlin and Beltsville, 24 May 2018
Nicholas J. Turland John H. Wiersema
14
KEY TO THE RE-NUMBERING OF ARTICLES, NOTES,

AND RECOMMENDATIONS
This key includes all changes to the re-numbering of Articles, Notes, and Recommendations in the Code, including
changes resulting from moving provisions expressly limited to organisms treated as fungi to Chapter F. Voted Examples
and footnotes are also included, but regular Examples are omitted because these can readily be traced via the Indices,
through the scientific names mentioned.
1. MELBOURNE CODE TO SHENZHEN CODE
Art. 6 Note 3.............................................Art. 6 Note 4

Art. 6 Note 4.............................................Art. 6 Note 5
Art. 7.5......................................................Art. 7.5 and 7.6
Art. 7.6......................................................Art. 7.7
Art. 7.7......................................................Art. 7.8
Art. 7.8......................................................Art. 7.9
Art. 7.9......................................................Art. 7.10
Art. 7.10....................................................Art. 7.11
Art. 7 *Ex. 13.............................................Art. 7 *Ex. 16
Art. 8.1 footnote.......................................Art. 6.1 footnote
Art. 8.3 footnote (3rd sentence)…………....Art. 8.2 footnote (2nd sentence)
Rec. 8A.4 footnote....................................Art. 6.13 footnote
Rec. 8B.3...................................................deleted
Art. 9.2......................................................Art. 9.3
Art. 9.3......................................................Art. 9.4
Art. 9.3(b, c)..............................................Art. 9.4(c, d)
Art. 9 Note 4.............................................Art. F.3 Note 2
Art. 9.4.....................................................Art. 9.5
Art. 9.5.....................................................Art. 9.6
Art. 9.6.....................................................Art. 9.7
Art. 9.7.....................................................Art. 9.8
Art. 9.8.....................................................Art. 9.9
Art. 9.9.....................................................Art. 9.10
Art. 9.10...................................................Art. F.3.9
Art. 9.19(b, c)...........................................Art. 9.19(c, b)
Art. 9 Note 7............................................Art. 9 Note 8
Rec. 9C.1..................................................Art. 9.4 footnote
Rec. 9D.....................................................Rec. 9C
Art. 10.5(a)...............................................deleted
Art. 10 *Ex. 7............................................converted to Art. 10 Ex. 6
Art. 10.6...................................................Art. 10.9
Art. 10.7...................................................Art. 10.10
Art. 10 Note 3 ............... deleted
Art. 11.4(b, c) ............... Art. 11.4(c, b)
Art. 11.4 footnote ............ Art. 6.10 footnote
Art. 13.1(d) ................ Art. F.1.1 (in part) and F.3.1
Art. 14.13 ................. Art. F.2.1
Art. 14.14 ................. Art. 14.13
Art. 14.15 ................. Art. 14.14
Art. 14.16 ................. Art. 14.15
Art. 15.1 .................. Art. F.3.2
Art. 15.2 .................. Art. F.3.4
Art. 15.3 .................. Art. F.3.5
Art. 15.4 .................. Art. F.3.6
Art. 15 Note 1 ............... Art. F.3 Note 1
Art. 15.5 .................. Art. F.3.7
Art. 15.6 .................. Art. F.3.8
Art. 22.6 .................. Art. 10.8
Art. 22 Note 2 ............... deleted
Art. 23 *Ex. 19 .............. Art. 23 *Ex. 23
Rec. 29A.2(c) ............... deleted
Art. 30 Note 1 ............... Art. 29 Note 2
Art. 30.3 .................. Art. 30.4
15
Art. 30 Note 2 (amended) ....... Art. 30.3

Art. 30.4 .................. Art. 30.5
Art. 30.5 .................. Art. 30.6
Art. 30.6 .................. Art. 30.7
Art. 30.7 .................. Art. 30.8
Art. 30 Note 3 ............... Art. 30 Note 2
Art. 30.8 .................. Art. 30.9
Art. 30 Note 4 ............... Art. 30 Note 3
Rec. 30A.2 ................. Rec. 30A.4
Rec. 30A.3 ................. Rec. 30A.5
Rec. 30A.4 ................. Rec. 30A.6
Art. 32 Note 2 ............... Art. 32 Note 3
Art. 32 Note 3 ............... Art. 32 Note 4
Art. 36.1(a) ................ Art. 36.1 (1st clause)
Art. 36.1(b, c) ............... Art. 36.1(a, b)
Art. 36.1(d) ................ Art. 36.2
Art. 36.2 .................. Art. 36.3
Art. 37.9 .................. Art. F.4.1
Rec. 38B.1 ................. Rec. 38B.2
Rec. 40A.2 ................. Rec. 40A.4
Rec. 40A.3 ................. Rec. 40A.5
Rec. 40A.4 ................. Rec. 40A.6
Art. 42.1 .................. Art. F.5.1
Art. 42.2 .................. Art. F.5.2
Art. 42.3 .................. Art. F.5.3
Rec. 42A.1 ................. Rec. F.5A.1
Rec. 42A.2 ................. Rec. F.5A.2
Art. 46 Note 1 ............... Art. 46 Note 2
Art. 46 Note 2 ............... Art. 46 Note 4
Art. 46 Note 3 ............... Art. 46 Note 5
Art. 48.3 .................. Art. F.3.10
Art. 49 Note 1 ............... Art. 49 Note 2
Rec. 50E.3 ................. Rec. F.3A.1
Art. 52.3 .................. Art. 52.4
Art. 52 Note 3 ............... Art. 52 Note 4
Art. 53 Note 1 ............... Art. 53 Note 2
Art. 53.2 .................. Art. F.3.3
Art. 53.3 .................. Art. 53.2
Art. 53.4 .................. Art. 53.3
Art. 53 Note 2 ............... Art. 53 Note 3
Art. 53.5 .................. Art. 53.4
Art. 53.6 .................. Art. 53.5
Art. 53 Note 3 ............... Art. 53 Note 4
Art. 56.3 .................. Art. F.7.1
Art. 56.4 .................. Art. 56.3
Art. 57.2 .................. deleted
Art. 59.1 .................. Art. F.8.1
Art. 60 *Ex. 2 ............... Art. 60 *Ex. 3
Art. 60 *Ex. 5 ............... Art. 60 *Ex. 6
Art. 60 *Ex. 8 ............... Art. 60 *Ex. 10
Art. 60.6 .................. Art. 60.7
Art. 60.7 .................. Art. 60.9
Art. 60 Note 2 ............... Art. 60 Note 5
Art. 60.8 .................. Art. 60.10 (in part)
Art. 60.9 .................. Art. 60.11
Art. 60 Note 3 ............... Art. 60 Note 6
Art. 60.10 ................. Art. 60.13
Art. 60.11 ................. Art. 60.14
Art. 60.12 ................. Art. 60.8 (in part)
Art. 60.13 ................. Art. F.9.1
Rec. 60C.1 ................. Art. 60.8 (in part)
Rec. 60C Note 1 ............. Art. 60 Note 2
Rec. 60C.2 ................. Rec. 60C.1
16
Rec. 60C.3 ................. Rec. 60C.2

Rec. 60C.4 ................. Rec. 60C.3
Rec. 60C.5 ................. Rec. 60C.4
Rec. 60G.1(a) ............... Art. 60.10 (in part)
Rec. 60G.1(b) ............... Rec. 60G.1(a)
Rec. 60G.1(c) and Note 1 ....... Rec. 60G.1(b)
Rec. 60G Note 2 ............. Rec. 60G Note 1
Div.III.1 .................. Div. III Prov. 1.2
Div.III.2 .................. included in Div. III Prov. 4.8, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, and 7.11
Div.III.3 .................. included in Div. III Prov. 4.5, 4.6, 4.8, 4.9, and 4.10
Div.III.4 and footnote .......... included in Div. III Prov. 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, and 5.9
App. I (Art. H.1–H.12) ......... Chapter H (Art. H.1–H.12)
App. VI ................... App. I
App. VII .................. App. VI
App. VIII .................. App. VII
17
KEY TO THE RE-NUMBERING OF ARTICLES, NOTES,

AND RECOMMENDATIONS
This key includes all changes to the re-numbering of Articles, Notes, and Recommendations in the Code, including
changes resulting from moving provisions expressly limited to organisms treated as fungi to Chapter F. Voted Examples
and footnotes are also included, but regular Examples are omitted because these can readily be traced via the Indices,
through the scientific names mentioned.
2. SHENZHEN CODE TO MELBOURNE CODE
Art. 6.1 footnote ............. Art. 8.1 footnote

Art. 6.10 footnote ............ Art. 11.4 footnote
Art. 6 Note 3 ............... new
Art. 6 Note 4 ............... Art. 6 Note 3
Art. 6 Note 5 ............... Art. 6 Note 4
Art. 6.12 .................. new
Art. 6.13 .................. new
Art. 6.13 footnote ............ Rec. 8A.4 footnote
Art. 6.14 .................. new
Art. 7.5 and 7.6 .............. Art. 7.5
Art. 7.7 ................... Art. 7.6
Art. 7.8 ................... Art. 7.7
Art. 7.9 ................... Art. 7.8
Art. 7.10 .................. Art. 7.9
Art. 7.11 .................. Art. 7.10
Art. 7 *Ex. 16 ............... Art. 7 *Ex. 13
Art. 8.2 footnote ............. new, plus Art. 8.3 footnote (3rd sentence)
Art. 8 Note 1 ............... new
Art. 9.2 ................... new
Art. 9.3 ................... Art. 9.2
Art. 9.4 ................... Art. 9.3
Art. 9.4(b) ................. new
Art. 9.4(c, d) ................ Art. 9.3(b, c)
Art. 9.4 footnote ............. Rec. 9C.1
Art. 9.5 ................... Art. 9.4
Art. 9 Note 4 ............... new
Art. 9.6 ................... Art. 9.5
Art. 9.7 ................... Art. 9.6
Art. 9.8 ................... Art. 9.7
Art. 9.9 ................... Art. 9.8
Art. 9.10 .................. Art. 9.9
Art. 9.19(b, c) ............... Art. 9.19(c, b)
Art. 9 Note 7 ............... new
Art. 9 Note 8 ............... Art. 9 Note 7
Rec. 9B.2 .................. new
Rec. 9C ................... Rec. 9D
Art. 10 Note 3 ............... new
Art. 10.6 .................. new
Art. 10.7 .................. new
Art. 10.7 footnote ............ new
Art. 10.8 .................. Art. 22.6
Art. 10.9 .................. Art. 10.6
Art. 10.10 ................. Art. 10.7
Rec. 10A.2 ................. new
Art. 11.4(b, c) ............... Art. 11.4(c, b)
Art. 14.13 ................. Art. 14.14
Art. 14.14 ................. Art. 14.15
Art. 14.15 ................. Art. 14.16
Art. 14 Note 4 ............... new
Art. 19 Note 3 ............... new
Art. 23 *Ex. 23 .............. Art. 23 *Ex. 19
Art. 29 Note 2 ............... Art. 30 Note 1
Art. 30 Note 1 ............... new
18
Art. 30.3 .................. Art. 30 Note 2 (amended)

Art. 30.4 .................. Art. 30.3
Art. 30.5 .................. Art. 30.4
Art. 30.6 .................. Art. 30.5
Art. 30.7 .................. Art. 30.6
Art. 30.8 .................. Art. 30.7
Art. 30 Note 2 ............... Art. 30 Note 3
Art. 30.9 .................. Art. 30.8
Art. 30 Note 3 ............... Art. 30 Note 4
Rec. 30A.2 ................. new
Rec. 30A.3 ................. new
Rec. 30A.4 ................. Rec. 30A.2
Rec. 30A.5 ................. Rec. 30A.3
Rec. 30A.6 ................. Rec. 30A.4
Rec. 31B.2 ................. new
Art. 32 Note 2 ............... new
Art. 32 Note 3 ............... Art. 32 Note 2
Art. 32 Note 4 ............... Art. 32 Note 3
Art. 36.1 (1st clause) .......... Art. 36.1(a)
Art. 36.1(a, b) ............... Art. 36.1(b, c)
Art. 36.2 .................. Art. 36.1(d)
Art. 36.3 .................. Art. 36.2
Art. 38 Note 2 ............... new
Rec. 38B.1 ................. new
Rec. 38B.2 ................. Rec. 38B.1
Art. 40.8 .................. new
Rec. 40A.2 ................. new
Rec. 40A.3 ................. new
Rec. 40A.4 ................. Rec. 40A.2
Rec. 40A.5 ................. Rec. 40A.3
Rec. 40A.6 ................. Rec. 40A.4
Rec. 41A.2 ................. new
Art. 42.1 .................. new
Art. 42.2 .................. new
Art. 42.3 .................. new
Art. 42 Note 1 ............... new
Art. 43 Note 2 ............... new
Art. 46 Note 1 ............... new
Art. 46 Note 2 ............... Art. 46 Note 1
Art. 46 Note 3 ............... new
Art. 46 Note 4 ............... Art. 46 Note 2
Art. 46 Note 5 ............... Art. 46 Note 3
Art. 49 Note 1 ............... new
Art. 49 Note 2 ............... Art. 49 Note 1
Art. 52.3 .................. new
Art. 52 Note 3 ............... new
Art. 52.4 .................. Art. 52.3
Art. 52 Note 4 ............... Art. 52 Note 3
Art. 53 Note 1 ............... new
Art. 53 Note 2 ............... Art. 53 Note 1
Art. 53.2 .................. Art. 53.3
Art. 53.3 .................. Art. 53.4
Art. 53 Note 3 ............... Art. 53 Note 2
Art. 53.4 .................. Art. 53.5
Art. 53.5 .................. Art. 53.6
Art. 53 Note 4 ............... Art. 53 Note 3
Art. 54.1(b)(1) .............. new
Art. 54.1(b) footnote .......... new
Art. 54.1(c) ................ new
Art. 54.1(c) footnote .......... new
Art. 55 Note 1 ............... new
Art. 55.4 .................. new
Art. 56 Note 1 ............... new
Art. 56.3 .................. Art. 56.4
Art. 56 Note 2 ............... new
19
Art. 60 *Ex. 2 ............... new

Art. 60 *Ex. 3 ............... Art. 60 *Ex. 2
Art. 60 *Ex. 6 ............... Art. 60 *Ex. 5
Art. 60 *Ex. 10 .............. Art. 60 *Ex. 8
Art. 60.6 .................. new
Art. 60.7 .................. Art. 60.6
Art. 60.8 .................. Art. 60.12 and Rec. 60C.1
Art. 60 Note 2 ............... Rec. 60C Note 1
Art. 60 Note 3 ............... new
Art. 60.9 .................. Art. 60.7
Art. 60 Note 5 ............... Art. 60 Note 2
Art. 60.10 ................. Art. 60.8 and Rec. 60G.1(a)
Art. 60.11 ................. Art. 60.9
Art. 60 Note 6 ............... Art. 60 Note 3
Art. 60.12 ................. new
Art. 60.13 ................. Art. 60.10
Art. 60.14 ................. Art. 60.11
Rec. 60C.1 ................. Rec. 60C.2
Rec. 60C.2 ................. Rec. 60C.3
Rec. 60C.3 ................. Rec. 60C.4
Rec. 60C.4 ................. Rec. 60C.5
Rec. 60G.1(a) ............... Rec. 60G.1(b)
Rec. 60G.1(b) ............... Rec. 60G.1(c) and Note 1
Rec. 60G Note 1 ............. Rec. 60G Note 2
Art. F.1.1 .................. Art. 13.1 (1st sentence) and (d) (in part)
Art. F.1 Note 1 .............. new
Art. F.2.1 .................. Art. 14.13
Art. F.3.1 .................. Art. 13.1(d) (2nd sentence)
Art. F.3.2 .................. Art. 15.1
Art. F.3.3 .................. Art. 53.2
Art. F.3.4 .................. Art. 15.2
Art. F.3.5 .................. Art. 15.3
Art. F.3.6 .................. Art. 15.4
Art. F.3 Note 1 .............. Art. 15 Note 1
Art. F.3.7 .................. Art. 15.5
Art. F.3.8 .................. Art. 15.6
Art. F.3.9 .................. Art. 9.10
Art. F.3.10 ................. Art. 48.3
Art. F.3 Note 3 .............. new
Rec. F.3A.1 ................ Rec. 50E.3
Rec. F.3A.1 footnote .......... new
Art. F.4.1 .................. Art. 37.9
Art. F.5.1 .................. Art. 42.1
Art. F.5.2 .................. Art. 42.2
Art. F.5 Note 2 .............. new
Art. F.5.3 .................. Art. 42.3
Art. F.5.4 .................. new
Art. F.5 Note 3 .............. new
Art. F.5.5 .................. new
Art. F.5 Note 4 .............. new
Rec. F.5A.1 ................ Rec. 42A.1
Rec. F.5A.2 ................ Rec. 42A.2
Art. F.6.1 .................. new
Art. F.7.1 .................. Art. 56.3
Art. F.8.1 .................. Art. 59.1
Art. F.9.1 .................. Art. 60.13
Chapter H (Art. H.1–H.12) ...... App. I (Art. H.1–H.12)
Div. III Prov. 1.2 ............. Div.III.1
Div. III Prov. 4.8, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4,
and 7.11 (in part) ............ Div.III.2
Div. III Prov. 4.5, 4.6, 4.8, 4.9, and
4.10 (in part) ............... Div.III.3
20
Div. III Prov. 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, and 5.9

(in part) .................. Div.III.4 and footnote
Div. III: all other provisions ...... new
App. I .................... App. VI
App. VI ................... App. VII
App. VII .................. App. VIII
21
IMPORTANT DATES IN THE CODE
DATES UPON WHICH PARTICULAR PROVISIONS OF THE CODE

BECOME OR CEASE TO BE EFFECTIVE
1 May 1753 Art. 7.9, 13.1(a, c, e), 13 Note 1, F.1.1

4 August 1789 Art. 13.1(a, c)
1 January 1801 Art. 13.1(b)
31 December 1820 Art. 13.1(f)
1 January 1848 Art. 13.1(e)
1 January 1887 Art. 37.2
17 June 1905 Art. 14 Note 4(a)
1 January 1908 Art. 38.7, 38.8
18 May 1910 Art. 14 Note 4(b)
1 January 1912 Art. 20.2, 43.2
1 January 1921 Art. 10.7(c–f)
1 January 1935 Art. 10.7(a–f), 39.1
1 June 1940 Art. 14 Note 4(c)(1)
20 July 1950 Art. 14 Note 4(c)(2)
1 January 1953 Art. 30.5, 30.7, 30.8, 30.9, 36.3, 37.1, 37.3, 38.13, 41.3, 41.4, 41.5, 41.6, 41.8
1 January 1958 Art. 40.1, 44.1, 44.2
1 January 1973 Art. 30.7, 33.1
1 January 1990 Art. 9.22, 40.6, 40.7
1 January 2001 Art. 7.11, 9.15, 9.23, 43.3
1 January 2007 Art. 40.4, 41.5
31 December 2011 Art. 39.1, 44.1
1 January 2012 Art. 29.1, 29 Note 1, 39.2
1 January 2013 Art. F.5.1, F.8.1
1 January 2019 Art. 40.8, F.5.4, F.6.1
PROVISIONS INVOLVING DATES APPLICABLE TO PARTICULAR GROUPS
All groups Art. 7.11, 9.22, 9.23, 10.7, 14.15, 14 Note 4(a, b), 20.2, 29.1, 29 Note 1, 30.5, 30.7, 30.8, 30.9, 33.1, 36.3,
37.1, 37.2, 37.3, 37.4, 38.7, 38.8, 38.13, 39.2, 40.1, 40.6, 40.7, 41.3, 41.4, 41.5, 41.6, 41.8
Algae Art. 7.9, 13.1(e), 13 Note 1, 40.4, 40.8, 44.1, 44.2
Bryophytes Art. 7.9, 13.1(b, c), 13 Note 1, 39.1, 40.4
Fossils Art. 7.9, 9.15, 13.1(f), 43.1, 43.2, 43.3
Fungi Art. 13 Note 1, 14 Note 4(c)(2), 39.1, 40.4, 40.8, F.1.1, F.5.1, F.5.4, F.6.1, F.8.1
Vascular plants Art. 13.1(a), 13 Note 1, 14 Note 4(c)(1), 39.1, 40.4
PROVISIONS DEFINING THE DATES OF CERTAIN WORKS
Art. 13.1(a–c, e, f), 13 Note 1, F.1.1

22
INTERNATIONAL CODE OF NOMENCLATURE

FOR ALGAE, FUNGI, AND PLANTS
PREAMBLE
1. Biology requires a precise and simple system of nomenclature that is used in all countries, dealing on the one hand
with the terms that denote the ranks of taxonomic groups or units, and on the other hand with the scientific names
that are applied to the individual taxonomic groups. The purpose of giving a name to a taxonomic group is not to
indicate its characters or history, but to supply a means of referring to it and to indicate its taxonomic rank. This Code
aims at the provision of a stable method of naming taxonomic groups, avoiding and rejecting the use of names that
may cause error or ambiguity or throw science into confusion. Next in importance is the avoidance of the useless
creation of names. Other considerations, such as absolute grammatical correctness, regularity or euphony of names,
more or less prevailing custom, regard for persons, etc., notwithstanding their undeniable importance, are relatively
accessory.
2. Algae, fungi, and plants are the organisms covered by this Code.
1
[footnote] In this Code, unless otherwise indicated, the word “organism” applies only to the organisms covered by this Code, i.e. those
1
traditionally studied by botanists, mycologists, and phycologists (see Pre. 8).
3. The Principles form the basis of the system of nomenclature governed by this Code.
4. The detailed provisions are divided into rules, which are set out in the Articles (Art.) (sometimes with clarification
in Notes), and Recommendations (Rec.). Examples (Ex.) are added to the rules and recommendations to illustrate
2
them. A Glossary defining terms used in this Code is included.

[footnote] See also Art. 7 *Ex. 16 footnote.
2
5. The object of the rules is to put the nomenclature of the past into order and to provide for that of the future; names
contrary to a rule cannot be maintained.
6. The Recommendations deal with subsidiary points; their object is to achieve greater uniformity and clarity,
especially in future nomenclature; names contrary to a Recommendation cannot, on that account, be rejected, but
they are not examples to be followed.
7. The Provisions regulating the governance of this Code form its last Division (Div. III).
8. The provisions of this Code apply to all organisms traditionally treated as algae, fungi, or plants, whether fossil or
non-fossil, including blue-green algae (Cyanobacteria) , chytrids, oomycetes, slime moulds, and photosynthetic protists
3
with their taxonomically related non-photosynthetic groups (but excluding Microsporidia). Provisions for the names
of hybrids appear in Chapter H.
[footnote] For the nomenclature of other prokaryotic groups, see the International Code of Nomenclature of Prokaryotes. Prokaryotic Code
3
(2008 Revision); DOI: https://doi.org/10.1099/ijsem.0.000778; formerly the International Code of Nomenclature of Bacteria (Bacteriological
Code).
9. Names that have been conserved, protected, or rejected, suppressed works, and binding decisions are given in
Appendices I–VII.
10. The Appendices form an integral part of this Code, whether published together with, or separately from, the main
text.
11. The International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants is prepared under the authority of the International
Commission for the Nomenclature of Cultivated Plants and deals with the use and formation of names applied to
special categories of organisms in agriculture, forestry, and horticulture.
12. The only proper reasons for changing a name are either a more profound knowledge of the facts resulting from
adequate taxonomic study or the necessity of giving up a nomenclature that is contrary to the rules.
13. In the absence of a relevant rule or where the consequences of rules are doubtful, established custom is followed.
14. This edition of the Code supersedes all previous editions.
23
DIVISION I
PRINCIPLES
PRINCIPLE I
The nomenclature of algae, fungi, and plants is independent of zoological and prokaryotic nomenclature. This Code
applies equally to names of taxonomic groups treated as algae, fungi, or plants, whether or not these groups were
originally so treated (see Pre. 8).
PRINCIPLE II
The application of names of taxonomic groups is determined by means of nomenclatural types.
PRINCIPLE III
The nomenclature of a taxonomic group is based upon priority of publication.
PRINCIPLE IV
Each taxonomic group with a particular circumscription, position, and rank can bear only one correct name, the earliest
that is in accordance with the rules, except in specified cases.
PRINCIPLE V
Scientific names of taxonomic groups are treated as Latin regardless of their derivation.
PRINCIPLE VI
The rules of nomenclature are retroactive unless expressly limited.
24
DIVISION II
RULES AND RECOMMENDATIONS
CHAPTER I
TAXA AND THEIR RANKS
ARTICLE 1
1.1. Taxonomic groups at any rank will, in this Code, be referred to as taxa (singular: taxon).
1.2. A taxon (diatom taxa excepted) the name of which is based on a fossil type is a fossil-taxon. A fossil-taxon
comprises the remains of one or more parts of the parent organism, or one or more of their life-history stages, in one
or more preservational states, as indicated in the original or any subsequent description or diagnosis of the taxon (see
also Art. 11.1 and 13.3).
Ex. 1. Alcicornopteris hallei J. Walton (in Ann. Bot. (Oxford), ser. 2, 13: 450. 1949) is a fossil-species for which the original description included
rachides, sporangia, and spores of a pteridosperm, preserved in part as compressions and in part as petrifactions.
Ex. 2. Protofagacea allonensis Herend. & al. (in Int. J. Pl. Sci. 156: 94. 1995) is a fossil-species for which the original description included
dichasia of staminate flowers, with anthers containing pollen grains, fruits, and cupules, and thus comprises more than one part and more
than one life-history stage.
Ex. 3. Stamnostoma A. G. Long (in Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh 64: 212. 1960) is a fossil-genus that was originally described with a single species,
S. huttonense A. G. Long, comprising anatomically preserved ovules with completely fused integuments forming an open collar around the
lagenostome. Rothwell & Scott (in Rev. Palaeobot. Palynol. 72: 281. 1992) subsequently modified the description of the genus, expanding its
circumscription to include also the cupules in which the ovules were borne. The name Stamnostoma can be applied to a genus with either
circumscription or to any other that may involve other parts, life-history stages, or preservational states, so long as it includes S. huttonense,
but not the type of any earlier legitimate generic name.
ARTICLE 2
2.1. Every individual organism is treated as belonging to an indefinite number of taxa at consecutively subordinate
ranks, among which the rank of species is basic.
ARTICLE 3
3.1. The principal ranks of taxa in descending sequence are: kingdom (regnum), division or phylum (divisio or phylum),
class (classis), order (ordo), family (familia), genus (genus), and species (species). Thus, each species is assignable to a
genus, each genus to a family, etc.
Note 1. Species and subdivisions of genera must be assigned to genera, and infraspecific taxa must be assigned to species, because
their names are combinations (Art. 21.1, 23.1, and 24.1), but this provision does not preclude the placement of taxa as incertae
sedis with regard to ranks higher than genus.
Ex. 1. The genus Haptanthus Goldberg & C. Nelson (in Syst. Bot. 14: 16. 1989) was originally described without being assigned to a family.
Ex. 2. The fossil-genus Paradinandra Schönenberger & E. M. Friis (in Amer. J. Bot. 88: 478. 2001) was assigned to “Ericales s.l.” but its family
placement was given as “incertae sedis”.
3.2. The principal ranks of hybrid taxa (nothotaxa) are nothogenus and nothospecies. These ranks are the same as
genus and species. The prefix “notho-” indicates the hybrid character (see Art. H.1.1).
25
ARTICLE 4
4.1. The secondary ranks of taxa in descending sequence are tribe (tribus) between family and genus, section (sectio)
and series (series) between genus and species, and variety (varietas) and form (forma) below species.
4.2. If a greater number of ranks of taxa is desired, the terms for these are made by adding the prefix “sub-” to the
terms denoting the principal or secondary ranks. An organism may thus be assigned to taxa at the following ranks (in
descending sequence): kingdom (regnum), subkingdom (subregnum), division or phylum (divisio or phylum),
subdivision or subphylum (subdivisio or subphylum), class (classis), subclass (subclassis), order (ordo), suborder
(subordo), family (familia), subfamily (subfamilia), tribe (tribus), subtribe (subtribus), genus (genus), subgenus
(subgenus), section (sectio), subsection (subsectio), series (series), subseries (subseries), species (species), subspecies
(subspecies), variety (varietas), subvariety (subvarietas), form (forma), and subform (subforma).
Note 1. Ranks formed by adding “sub-” to the principal ranks (Art. 3.1) may be formed and used whether or not any secondary
ranks (Art. 4.1) are adopted.
4.3. Further ranks may also be intercalated or added, provided that confusion or error is not thereby introduced.
4.4. The subordinate ranks of nothotaxa are the same as the subordinate ranks of non-hybrid taxa, except that
nothogenus is the highest rank permitted (see Chapter H).
Note 2. Throughout this Code the phrase “subdivision of a family” refers only to taxa at a rank between family and genus and
“subdivision of a genus” refers only to taxa at a rank between genus and species.
Note 3. For the designation of special categories of organisms used in agriculture, forestry, and horticulture, see Pre. 11 and Art.
28 Notes 2, 4, and 5.
Note 4. In classifying parasites, especially fungi, authors who do not give specific, subspecific, or varietal value to taxa characterized
from a physiological standpoint but scarcely or not at all from a morphological standpoint may distinguish within the species
special forms (formae speciales) characterized by their adaptation to different hosts, but the nomenclature of special forms is not
governed by the provisions of this Code.
ARTICLE 5
5.1. The relative order of the ranks specified in Art. 3 and 4 must not be altered (see Art. 37.6 and F.4.1).
Recommendation 5A
5A.1. For purposes of standardization, the following abbreviations are recommended: cl. (class), ord. (order), fam. (family), tr.
(tribe), gen. (genus), sect. (section), ser. (series), sp. (species), var. (variety), f. (forma). The abbreviations for additional ranks
created by the addition of the prefix sub-, or for nothotaxa with the prefix notho-, should be formed by adding the prefixes, e.g.
subsp. (subspecies), nothosp. (nothospecies), but subg. (subgenus) not “subgen.”
26
CHAPTER II
STATUS, TYPIFICATION, AND PRIORITY OF NAMES
SECTION 1
STATUS DEFINITIONS
ARTICLE 6
6.1. Effective publication is publication in accordance with Art. 29–31. Except in specified cases (Art. 8.1, 9.4(a), 9.22,
Rec. 9A.3, and Art. 40.7), text and illustrations must be effectively published to be taken into account for the purposes
1
of this Code.
[footnote] Here and elsewhere in this Code, the term “illustration” designates a work of art or a photograph depicting a feature or features of
1
an organism, e.g. a drawing, a picture of a herbarium specimen, or a scanning electron micrograph.
6.2. Valid publication of names is publication in accordance with the relevant provisions of Art. 32–45, F.4, F.5.1, F.5.2,
and H.9 (see also Art. 61).
Note 1. For nomenclatural purposes, valid publication creates a name, and sometimes also an autonym (Art. 22.1 and 26.1), but
does not itself imply any taxonomic circumscription beyond inclusion of the type of the name (Art. 7.1).
6.3. In this Code, unless otherwise indicated, the word “name” means a name that has been validly published, whether
it is legitimate or illegitimate (see Art. 12; but see Art. 14.9 and 14.14).
Note 2. When the same name, based on the same type, has been published independently at different times, perhaps by different
authors, then only the earliest of these “isonyms” has nomenclatural status. The name is always to be cited from its original place
of valid publication, and later isonyms may be disregarded (but see Art. 14.14).
Ex. 1. Baker (Summary New Ferns: 9. 1892) and Christensen (Index Filic.: 44. 1905) independently published the name Alsophila kalbreyeri as
a replacement for A. podophylla Baker (in J. Bot. 19: 202. 1881) non Hook. (in Hooker’s J. Bot. Kew Gard. Misc. 9: 334. 1857). As published by
Christensen, A. kalbreyeri is a later isonym of A. kalbreyeri Baker without nomenclatural status (see also Art. 41 Ex. 24).
Ex. 2. In publishing “Canarium pimela Leenh. nom. nov.”, Leenhouts (in Blumea 9: 406. 1959) re-used the illegitimate C. pimela K. D. Koenig
(in Ann. Bot. (König & Sims) 1: 361. 1805), attributing it to himself and basing it on the same type. He thereby created a later isonym without
nomenclatural status.
Ex. 3. The name Dalbergia brownie (Jacq.) Schinz (in Bull. Herb. Boissier 6: 731. 1898) was nomenclaturally superfluous when published
because Schinz cited the legitimate name Hedysarum ecastaphyllum L. (Syst. Nat., ed. 10: 1169. 1759) as a synonym. Because D. brownie has
a basionym (Amerimnon brownie Jacq.), it is nevertheless legitimate (Art. 52.4). On excluding H. ecastaphyllum, Urban (Symb. Antill. 4: 295.
1905) published “D. Brownei Urb.” as a replacement name. This is a later isonym that has no nomenclatural status.
6.4. An illegitimate name is one that is designated as such in Art. 18.3, 19.6, 52–54, F.3.3, or F.6.1 (see also Art. 21
Note 1 and Art. 24 Note 2). A name that according to this Code was illegitimate when published cannot become
legitimate later unless Art. 18.3 or 19.6 so provide; unless it is conserved (Art. 14), protected (Art. F.2), or sanctioned
(Art. F.3); or unless the name is superfluous under Art. 52 and its intended basionym is conserved or protected.
Ex. 4. Skeletonemopsis P. A. Sims (in Diatom Res. 9: 389. 1995) was illegitimate when published because it included the original type of
Skeletonema Grev. (in Trans. Microscop. Soc. London, n.s., 13: 43. 1865). When Skeletonema was conserved with a different type,
Skeletonemopsis nevertheless remained illegitimate and had to be conserved in order to be available for use (see App. III).
6.5. A legitimate name is one that is in accordance with the rules, i.e. one that is not illegitimate as defined in Art. 6.4.
6.6. At the rank of family or below, the correct name of a taxon with a particular circumscription, position, and rank is
the legitimate name that must be adopted for it under the rules (see Art. 11).
Ex. 5. The generic name Vexillifera Ducke (in Arch. Jard. Bot. Rio de Janeiro 3: 140. 1922), based on the single species V. micranthera Ducke,
is legitimate. The same is true of the generic name Dussia Krug & Urb. ex Taub. (in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam. 3(3): 193. 1892), based
27
on the single species D. martinicensis Krug & Urb. ex Taub. Both generic names are correct when the genera are thought to be separate.
Harms (in Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni Veg. 19: 291. 1924), however, united Vexillifera and Dussia in a single genus; the latter is the correct name
for the genus with that particular circumscription. The legitimate name Vexillifera may therefore be correct or incorrect according to different
taxonomic concepts.
6.7. The name of a taxon below the rank of genus, consisting of the name of a genus combined with one or two
epithets, is termed a combination (see Art. 21, 23, and 24).
Ex. 6. Combinations: Mouriri subg. Pericrene Morley (in Univ. Calif. Publ. Bot. 26: 280. 1953), Arytera sect. Mischarytera Radlk. (in Engler,
Pflanzenr. IV. 165 (Heft 98f): 1271. 1933), Gentiana lutea L. (Sp. Pl.: 227. 1753), Gentiana tenella var. occidentalis J. Rousseau & Raymond (in
Naturaliste Canad. 79(2): 77. 1952), Equisetum palustre var. americanum Vict. (in Contr. Lab. Bot. Univ. Montréal 9: 51. 1927), Equisetum
palustre f. fluitans Vict. (l.c.: 60. 1927).
6.8. Autonyms are names that are established automatically under Art. 22.3 and 26.3, whether or not they actually
appear in the publication in which they are created (see Art. 32.3, Rec. 22B.1 and 26B.1).
6.9. The name of a new taxon (e.g. genus novum, gen. nov., species nova, sp. nov.) is a name validly published in its
own right, i.e. one not based on a previously validly published name; it is not a new combination, a name at new rank,
or a replacement name.
Ex. 7. Cannaceae Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 62. 1789), Canna L. (Sp. Pl.: 1. 1753), Canna indica L. (l.c. 1753), Heterotrichum pulchellum Fisch. (in Mém.
Soc. Imp. Naturalistes Moscou 3: 71. 1812), Poa sibirica Roshev. (in Izv. Imp. S.-Peterburgsk. Bot. Sada 12: 121. 1912), Solanum umtuma
Voronts. & S. Knapp (in PhytoKeys 8: 4. 2012).
6.10. A new combination (combinatio nova, comb. nov.) or name at new rank (status novus, stat. nov.) is a new name
based on a legitimate, previously published name, which is its basionym. The basionym does not itself have a
basionym; it provides the final epithet , name, or stem of the new combination or name at new rank. (See also Art.
1
41.2).
[footnote] Here and elsewhere in this Code, the phrase “final epithet” refers to the last epithet in sequence in any particular name, whether of
1
a subdivision of a genus, a species, or an infraspecific taxon.

Ex. 8. The basionym of Centaurea benedicta (L.) L. (Sp. Pl., ed. 2: 1296. 1763) is Cnicus benedictus L. (Sp. Pl.: 826. 1753), the name that provides
the epithet.
Ex. 9. The basionym of Crupina (Pers.) DC. (in Ann. Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat. 16: 157. 1810) is Centaurea subg. Crupina Pers. (Syn. Pl. 2: 488. 1807),
the epithet of which name provides the generic name; it is not Centaurea crupina L. (Sp. Pl.: 909. 1753) (see Art. 41.2(b)).
Ex. 10. The basionym of Anthemis subg. Ammanthus (Boiss. & Heldr.) R. Fern. (in Bot. J. Linn. Soc. 70: 16. 1975) is Ammanthus Boiss. & Heldr.
(in Boissier, Diagn. Pl. Orient., ser. 1, 11: 18. 1849), the name that provides the epithet.
Ex. 11. The basionym of Ricinocarpaceae Hurus. (in J. Fac. Sci. Univ. Tokyo, Sect. 3, Bot. 6: 224. 1954) is Ricinocarpeae Müll. Arg. (in Bot.
Zeitung (Berlin) 22: 324. 1864), but not Ricinocarpos Desf. (in Mém. Mus. Hist. Nat. 3: 459. 1817) (see Art. 41.2(a); see also Art. 49.2), from
which the names of both family and tribe are formed.
Note 3. A descriptive name (Art. 16.1(b)) used at a rank different from that at which it was first validly published is not a name at
new rank because descriptive names may be used unchanged at different ranks.
Note 4. The phrase “nomenclatural novelty”, as used in this Code, refers to any or all of the categories: name of a new taxon, new
combination, name at new rank, and replacement name.
Note 5. A new combination can at the same time be a name at new rank (comb. & stat. nov.); a nomenclatural novelty with a
basionym need not be either of these.
Ex. 12. Aloe vera (L.) Burm. f. (Fl. Indica: 83. 1768), based on A. perfoliate var. vera L. (Sp. Pl.: 320. 1753), is both a new combination and a
name at new rank.
Ex. 13. Centaurea jacea subsp. Weldeniana (Rchb.) Greuter, “comb. in stat. nov.” (in Willdenowia 33: 55. 2003), based on C. weldeniana Rchb.
(Fl. Germ. Excurs.: 213. 1831), was not a new combination because C. jacea var. weldeniana (Rchb.) Briq. (Monogr. Centaurées Alpes Marit.:
69. 1902) had been published previously; nor was it a name at new rank, due to the existence of C. amara subsp. Weldeniana (Rchb.) Kušan
(in Prir. Istraž. Kral. Jugoslavije 20: 29. 1936); it was nevertheless a nomenclatural novelty.
28
6.11. A replacement name (nomen novum, nom. nov.) is a new name published as an explicit substitute (avowed
substitute) for a legitimate or illegitimate, previously published name, which is its replaced synonym. The replaced
synonym, when legitimate, does not provide the final epithet, name, or stem of the replacement name (see also Art.
41.2 and 58.1).
Ex. 14. Gussone (Fl. Sicul. Syn. 2: 468. 1844) described plants from the Eolie Islands near Sicily under the name Helichrysum litoreum Guss.,
citing in synonymy Gnaphalium angustifolium Lam. (Encycl. 2: 746. 1788), but without indication that the existing H. angustifolium (Lam.) DC.
(in Candolle & Lamarck, Fl. Franç., ed. 3, 6: 467. 1815) was an illegitimate later homonym of H. angustifolium Pers. (in Syn. Pl. 2: 415. 1807)
that needed replacement. At the end of the protologue, Gussone wrote: “nomen mutavi confusionis vitendi gratia [I changed the name to
avoid confusion]”. This makes explicit Gussone’s intent to propose H. litoreum as a replacement name based on the type of G. angustifolium
(from Posillipo near Naples), not on the material he described and cited in the protologue.
Ex. 15. Mycena coccineoides Grgur. (in Fungal Diversity Res. Ser. 9: 287. 2003) was published as an explicit substitute (“nom. nov.”) for
Omphalina coccinea Murrill (in Britton, N. Amer. Fl. 9: 350. 1916) because M. coccinea (Murrill) Singer (in Sydowia 15: 65. 1962) is an
illegitimate later homonym of M. coccinea (Sowerby) Quél. (in Bull. Soc. Amis Sci. Nat. Rouen, ser. 2, 15: 155. 1880).
Ex. 16. Centaurea chartolepis Greuter (in Willdenowia 33: 54. 2003) was published as an explicit substitute (“nom. nov.”) for the legitimate
name Chartolepis intermedia Boiss. (Diagn. Pl. Orient., ser. 2, 3: 64. 1856) because the epithet intermedia was unavailable in Centaurea due
to Centaurea intermedia Mutel (in Rev. Bot. Recueil Mens. 1: 400. 1846).
6.12. A name not explicitly proposed as a substitute for an earlier name is nevertheless a replacement name either (a)
if it is validated solely by reference to that earlier name or (b) under the provisions of Art. 7.5.
6.13. A name not explicitly proposed as a substitute for an earlier name and not covered by Art. 6.12 may be treated
either as a replacement name or as the name of a new taxon if in the protologue both (a) a potential replaced synonym
1
is cited and (b) all requirements for valid publication of the name of a new taxon are independently met. Decision on
the status of such a name is to be based on predominant usage and is to be effected by means of appropriate type
designation (Art. 9 and 10).
[footnote] Protologue (from Greek πρώτος, protos, first; λόγος, logos, discourse): everything associated with a name at its valid publication, e.g.
1
description, diagnosis, illustrations, references, synonymy, geographical data, citation of specimens, discussion, and comments.
Ex. 17. When describing Astragalus penduliflorus Lam. (Fl. Franç. 2: 636. 1779) using material from the French Alps, Lamarck also cited in
synonymy Phaca alpine L. (Sp. Pl.: 755. 1753) [non Astragalus alpinus L., Sp. Pl.: 760. 1753], described from Siberia. It is questionable whether
Linnaeus’s and Lamarck’s plants belong to the same species. Greuter (in Candollea 23: 265. 1969) designated different types for the two
names, so that, in conformity with predominant usage, A. penduliflorus is treated as the name of a new, European species.
6.14. A factually incorrect statement of a name’s status, as defined in Art. 6.9–6.11, does not preclude valid publication
of that name with a different status; it is treated as a correctable error (see also Art. 41.4 and 41.8).
Ex. 18. Racosperma nelsonii was published by Pedley (in Bot. J. Linn. Soc. 92: 249. 1986) as a new combination (“comb. nova”) citing Acacia
nelsonii Maslin (in J. Adelaide Bot. Gard. 2: 314. 1980) as “basionym”. However, A. nelsonii Maslin is illegitimate under Art. 53.1 because it is
a later homonym of A. nelsonii Saff. (in J. Wash. Acad. Sci. 4: 363. 1914). Racosperma nelsonii Pedley is therefore validly published as a
replacement name (Art. 6.11), with A. nelsonii Maslin its replaced synonym, and Pedley’s statement is treated as a correctable error.
SECTION 2
TYPIFICATION
ARTICLE 7
7.1. The application of names of taxa at the rank of family or below is determined by means of nomenclatural types
(types of names of taxa). The application of names of taxa at the higher ranks is also determined by means of types
when the names are formed from a generic name (see Art. 10.10).
7.2. A nomenclatural type (typus) is that element to which the name of a taxon is permanently attached, whether as
the correct name or as a synonym. The nomenclatural type is not necessarily the most typical or representative
element of a taxon.
29
7.3. A new combination or a name at new rank (Art. 6.10) is typified by the type of the basionym even though it may
have been applied erroneously to a taxon now considered not to include that type (but see Art. 48.1).
Ex. 1. Pinus mertensiana Bong. (in Mém. Acad. Imp. Sci. St.-Pétersbourg, Sér. 6, Sci. Math. 2: 163. 1832) was transferred to the genus Tsuga
by Carrière (in Traité Gén. Conif., ed. 2: 250. 1867), who, as is evident from his description, erroneously applied the new combination T.
mertensiana to another species of Tsuga, namely T. heterophylla (Raf.) Sarg. (Silva 12: 73. 1899). The combination T. mertensiana (Bong.)
Carrière must not be applied to T. heterophylla but must be retained for P. mertensiana when that species is placed in Tsuga; the citation in
parentheses (under Art. 49.1) of the name of the original author, Bongard, indicates the basionym, and hence the type, of the name.
Ex. 2. Delesseria gmelinii J. V. Lamour. (in Ann. Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat. 20: 124. 1813) is a legitimate replacement name for Fucus palmetta S. G.
Gmel. (Hist. Fuc.: 183. 1768), the change of epithet necessitated by the simultaneous publication of D. palmetta (Stackh.) J. V. Lamour. (see
Art. 11 Note 2). All combinations based on D. gmelinii (and not excluding the type of F. palmetta; see Art. 48.1) have the same type as F.
palmetta even though the material possessed by Lamouroux is now assigned to a different species, D. bonnemaisonii C. Agardh (Spec. Alg.:
186. 1822).
Ex. 3. The new combination Cystocoleus ebeneus (Dillwyn) Thwaites (in Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2, 3: 241. 1849) is typified by the type of its
basionym Conferva ebenea Dillwyn (Brit. Conferv.: t. 101. 1809) even though the material illustrated by Thwaites was of Racodium rupestre
Pers. (in Neues Mag. Bot. 1: 123. 1794).
7.4. A replacement name (Art. 6.11) is typified by the type of the replaced synonym even though it may have been
applied erroneously to a taxon now considered not to include that type (but see Art. 41 Note 3 and 48.1).
Ex. 4. Myrcia lucida McVaugh (in Mem. New York Bot. Gard. 18(2): 100. 1969) was published as a replacement name for M. laevis O. Berg (in
Linnaea 31: 252. 1862), an illegitimate homonym of M. laevis G. Don (Gen. Hist. 2: 845. 1832). The type of M. lucida is therefore the type of
M. laevis O. Berg (non G. Don).
7.5. A name that is illegitimate under Art. 52 is a replacement name, typified automatically by the type of the name
(the replaced synonym) that itself or the epithet of which ought to have been adopted under the rules (Art. 7.4; but
see Art. 7.6), unless a different type was designated or definitely indicated in the protologue, in which case it is either
(a) a replacement name with a different replaced synonym or (b) treated as the name of a new taxon. Automatic
typification does not apply to names sanctioned under Art. F.3.
Ex. 5. Bauhinia semla Wunderlin (in Taxon 25: 362. 1976) is illegitimate under Art. 52 (see Art. 52 Ex. 8), but its publication as a replacement
name for B. retusa Roxb. (Fl. Ind., ed. 1832, 2: 322. 1832) non Poir. (in Lamarck, Encycl. Suppl. 1: 599. 1811) is definite indication of a different
type (that of B. retusa Roxb.) from that of the name (B. roxburghiana Voigt, Hort. Suburb. Calcutt.: 254. 1845) that ought to have been
adopted.
Ex. 6. Hewittia bicolor Wight & Arn. (in Madras J. Lit. Sci. 5: 22. 1837), which provides the type of Hewittia Wight & Arn., is illegitimate under
Art. 52 because, in addition to the illegitimate intended basionym Convolvulus bicolor Vahl (Symb. Bot. 3: 25. 1794) non Desr. (in Lamarck,
Encycl. 3: 564. 1792), the legitimate C. bracteatus Vahl (Symb. Bot. 3: 25. 1794) was cited as a synonym. Wight & Arnott’s adoption of the
epithet bicolor is definite indication that the type of H. bicolor, and therefore the type of Hewittia, is the type of C. bicolor, not that of C.
bracteatus, the epithet of which ought to have been adopted.
7.6. If the type of the name causing illegitimacy (Art. 52.2) is included in a subordinate taxon that does not include the
intended type of the illegitimate name, then typification is not automatic (see Art. 7.5).
Ex. 7. Mason & Grant (in Madroño 9: 212. 1948) validly published the names Gilia splendens and G. splendens subsp. grinnellii, the former
without indicating a type (because they believed the name to be already validly published) and the latter for “a long-tubed form of the
species”. Under Art. 52, G. splendens was illegitimate because of the inclusion of the type of G. grinnellii Brand (in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV. 250
(Heft 27): 101. 1907), the basionym of subsp. grinnellii. But, because subsp. grinnellii was applied to a subordinate taxon that did not include
the intended type of the illegitimate name, the type of G. grinnellii is not automatically that of G. splendens. The names G. splendens and G.
grinnellii have since been conserved and rejected, respectively (see App. IV and V).
7.7. The type of an autonym is the same as that of the name from which it is derived.
Ex. 8. The type of Caulerpa racemose (Forssk.) J. Agardh var. racemose is that of C. racemosa; the type of C. racemose is that of its basionym,
Fucus racemosus Forssk. (Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.: 191. 1775), i.e. Herb. Forsskål No. 845 (C).
7.8. A name of a new taxon validly published solely by reference to a previously and effectively published description
or diagnosis (Art. 38.1(a)) (and not by a reproduction of such a description or diagnosis) is to be typified by an element
30
selected from the entire context of the validating description or diagnosis, unless the validating author has definitely
designated a different type, but not by an element explicitly excluded by the validating author (see also Art. 7.9).
Ex. 9. Adenanthera bicolor Moon (Cat. Pl. Ceylon: 34. 1824) was validly published solely by reference to the description associated with an
illustration devoid of analysis, “Rumph. amb. 3: t. 112”, cited by Moon. Because Moon did not definitely designate as type the specimen
collected by him (in K, labelled “Adenanthera bicolor”), that specimen is unavailable as type. In the absence of the material on which the
validating description was based, the lectotype can only be the associated illustration (Rumphius, Herb. Amboin. 3: t. 112. 1743).
Ex. 10. Echium lycopsis L. (Fl. Angl.: 12. 1754) was published without a description or diagnosis but with reference to Ray (Syn. Meth. Stirp.
Brit., ed. 3: 227. 1724), in which a “Lycopsis” species was discussed with no description or diagnosis but with citation of earlier references,
including Bauhin (Pinax: 255. 1623). The accepted validating description of E. lycopsis is that of Bauhin, and the type must be chosen from
the context of his work. Consequently the Sherard specimen in the Morison herbarium (OXF), selected by Klotz (in Wiss. Z. Martin-Luther-
Univ. Halle-Wittenberg, Math.-Naturwiss. Reihe 9: 375–376. 1960), although probably consulted by Ray, is not eligible as type. The first
acceptable choice of lectotype is that of the illustration, cited by both Ray and Bauhin, of “Echii altera species” in Dodonaeus (Stirp. Hist.
Pempt.: 620. 1583), suggested by Gibbs (in Lagascalia 1: 60–61. 1971) and formally made by Stearn (in Ray Soc. Publ. 148, Introd.: 65. 1973).
Ex. 11. Hieracium oribates Brenner (in Meddeland. Soc. Fauna Fl. Fenn. 30: 142. 1904) was validly published without accompanying descriptive
matter but with reference to the validating description of H. saxifragum subsp. oreinum Dahlst. ex Brenner (in Meddeland. Soc. Fauna Fl.
Fenn. 18: 89. 1892). Because Brenner definitely excluded his earlier infraspecific name and part of its original material, H. oribates is the name
of a new taxon, not a replacement name, and may not be typified by an excluded element.
7.9. A name of a taxon assigned to a group with a nomenclatural starting-point later than 1 May 1753 (see Art. 13.1)
is to be typified by an element selected from the context of its valid publication (Art. 32–45).
Note 1. The typification of names of fossil-taxa (Art. 1.2) and of any other analogous taxa at or below the rank of genus does not
differ from that indicated above.
7.10. For purposes of priority (Art. 9.19, 9.20, and 10.5), designation of a type is achieved only by effective publication
(Art. 29–31).
7.11. For purposes of priority (Art. 9.19, 9.20, and 10.5), designation of a type is achieved only if the type is definitely
accepted as such by the typifying author, if the type element is clearly indicated by direct citation including the term
“type” (typus) or an equivalent, and, on or after 1 January 2001, if the typification statement includes the phrase
“designated here” (hic designatus) or an equivalent.
Note 2. Art. 7.10 and 7.11 apply only to the designation of lectotypes (and their equivalents under Art. 10), neotypes, and epitypes;
for holotypes see Art. 9.1.
Ex. 12. The original material for the name Quercus acutifolia Née includes nine specimens in MA. In 1985, Breedlove labelled one of these
(barcode MA 25953) as “Lectotype”, but, because this was not effectively published, Breedlove did not achieve a designation of type (see Art.
7.10). Valencia-A. & al. (in Phytotaxa 218: 289–294. 2015) effectively published a type designation of the same specimen as “lectotype”, but
did not include the words “designated here” or a linguistic equivalent, as required by Art. 7.11. Nixon & Barrie (in Novon 25: 449. 2017)
published an effective lectotypification statement “TYPE: Mexico. Guerrero, Née s.n. (lectotype, designated here, MA [bc] MA25953 as
image!)” fulfilling all of the requirements of Art. 7.11.
Ex. 13. The protologue of Dryopteris hirsutosetosa Hieron. (in Hedwigia 46: 343–344, t. 6. 1907) cited only a locality (“Aequatoria: crescit in
altiplanicie supra Allpayacu inter Baños et Jivaría de Píntuc”) and Stübel collecting number (“n. 903”), but did not specify a herbarium, thus
indicating all specimens of that gathering as syntypes (Art. 40 Note 1). In citing “Type from Ecuador: Baños-Pintuc, Stübel nr. 903 (B!)”
Christensen (in Kongel. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Skr., Naturvidensk. Math. Afd., ser. 8, 6: 112. 1920) designated the specimen in B as the
lectotype of D. hirsutosetosa satisfying the requirements of Art. 7.11. A duplicate specimen in BM is an isolectotype.
Ex. 14. The absence of any original material (Art. 9.13) for Ocimum gratissimum L. (Sp. Pl.: 1197. 1753) means that Cramer’s (in Dassanayake
& Fosberg, Revis. Handb. Fl. Ceylon 3: 112. 1981) citation of “Type: Hortu Upsalensi, 749.2 (LINN)” as “type” is to be accepted as designation
(Art. 7.11) of a neotype, antedating the superfluous neotypification by Paton (in Kew Bull. 47: 411. 1992).
Ex. 15. Chlorosarcina Gerneck (in Beih. Bot. Centralbl., Abt. 2, 21: 224. 1907) originally comprised two species, C. minor Gerneck and C. elegans
Gerneck. Vischer (in Beih. Bot. Centralbl., Abt. 1, 51: 12. 1933) transferred C. minor to Chlorosphaera G. A. Klebs and retained C. elegans in
Chlorosarcina. He did not, however, use the term “type” or an equivalent, so that his action does not constitute typification of Chlorosarcina.
The first to designate a type, as “LT.”, was Starr (in ING Card No. 16528, Nov 1962), who selected Chlorosarcina elegans.
*Ex. 16. The phrase “standard species” as used by Hitchcock & Green (in Sprague, Nom. Prop. Brit. Bot.: 110–199. 1929) is now treated as
1
equivalent to “type”, and hence type designations in that work are acceptable.
[footnote] Here and elsewhere in this Code, a prefixed asterisk denotes a “voted Example”, accepted by an International Botanical Congress in
1
order to govern nomenclatural practice when the corresponding Article of the Code is open to divergent interpretation or does not
31
adequately cover the matter. A voted Example is therefore comparable to a rule, as contrasted with other Examples provided by the Editorial
Committee solely for illustrative purposes.
Ex. 17. Pfeiffer (Nomencl. Bot. 1: [Praefatio, p. 2]. 1871) explained that he cited species names only when he intended to indicate the type of
names of genera and sections: “Species plantarum in libro meo omnino negliguntur, excepta indicatione illarum, quae typum generis novi
aut novo modo circumscripti vel sectionis offerunt. [Species of plants are entirely disregarded in my book, except for the indication of those
that are presented as the type of a new or re-circumscribed genus or of a section.]” This explanation includes the term type, and the citation
of a species name has therefore been accepted as designation of a type.
Recommendation 7A
7A.1. It is strongly recommended that the material on which the name of a taxon is based, especially the holotype, be deposited
in a public herbarium or other public collection with a policy of giving bona fide researchers access to deposited material, and that
it be scrupulously conserved.
ARTICLE 8
8.1. The type (holotype, lectotype, or neotype) of a name of a species or infraspecific taxon is either a single specimen
conserved in one herbarium or other collection or institution, or a published or unpublished illustration (but see Art.
8.5; see also Art. 40.4, 40.5, and Art. 40 Ex. 6).
8.2. For the purpose of typification a specimen is a gathering , or part of a gathering, of a single species or infraspecific
1
taxon, disregarding admixtures (see Art. 9.14). It may consist of a single organism, parts of one or several organisms,
or of multiple small organisms. A specimen is usually mounted on a single herbarium sheet or in an equivalent
preparation, such as a box, packet, jar, or microscope slide.
[footnote] Here and elsewhere in this Code, the term “gathering” is used for a collection presumed to be of a single taxon made by the same
1
collector(s) at the same time from a single locality. The possibility of a mixed gathering is always to be considered, especially when designating
a type.
Ex. 1. The holotype of Asparagus kansuensis F. T. Wang & Tang ex S. C. Chen (in Acta Phytotax. Sin. 16(1): 94. 1978), Hao 416 (PE [barcode
00034519]) belongs to a gathering of a dioecious species made at one time at a single locality. It consists of a staminate branch and a pistillate
branch, i.e. parts of two individuals, mounted on a single herbarium sheet.
Ex. 2. The diatom species Tursiocola denysii Frankovich & M. J. Sullivan (in Phytotaxa 234: 228. 2015) was described from material collected
from neck skin of four loggerhead turtles and the type designated as “Type:—UNITED STATES. Florida: Florida Bay, samples removed from
the skin in the dorsal neck area of loggerhead sea turtles Caretta caretta, 24° 55’ 01” N, 80° 48’ 28” W, B.A. Stacy, 24 June 2015 (holotype
CAS! 223049, illustrated as Figs 1–4, 6, 12, 15–30, paratypes ANSP! GC59142, BM! 101 808, illustrated as Figs 7–10, 14, BRM! ZU10/31, Figs
5, 11, 13).” Because the specimens were collected on the same date, at the same place, by the same collector they comprise a single gathering,
admixtures excepted, and the authors’ citation of “paratypes” is correctable to isotypes under Art. 9.10.
Ex. 3. “Echinocereus sanpedroensis” (Raudonat & Rischer in Echinocereenfreund 8(4): 91–92. 1995) was based on a “holotype” consisting of
a complete plant with roots, a detached branch, an entire flower, a flower cut in halves, and two fruits that, according to the label, were
taken from the same cultivated individual at different times and preserved, in alcohol, in a single jar. Because this material was collected at
more than one time, it belongs to more than one gathering and cannot be accepted as a type. Raudonat & Rischer’s name is not validly
published under Art. 40.2.
Note 1. Field numbers, collecting numbers, accession numbers, or specimen identifiers alone do not necessarily denote different
gatherings.
Ex. 4. Solidago ×snarskisii Gudžinskas & Žalneravičius (in Phytotaxa 253: 148. 2016) was validly published (Art. 40.2) with a single gathering
in BILAS indicated as type, the parts of which were numbered separately in the field, mounted on separate sheets and designated as follows:
“Holotype:—LITHUANIA. Trakai district, Aukštadvaris Regional Park, environs of Zabarauskai village, in an abandoned meadow on the edge
of forest (54.555191° N; 24.512987° E), 13 September 2014, Z. Gudžinskas & E. Žalneravičius 76801 (generative shoot) and 76802 (vegetative
shoot) (BILAS, on two cross-referenced sheets). Isotypes:—Z. Gudžinskas & E. Žalneravičius 76803, 76804 (BILAS).”
8.3. A specimen may be mounted as more than one preparation, as long as the parts are clearly labelled as being part
of that same specimen, or bear a single, original label in common. Multiple preparations from a single gathering that
are not clearly labelled as being part of a single specimen are duplicates , irrespective of whether the source was one
1
individual or more than one.

[footnote] Here and elsewhere in this Code, the word “duplicate” is given its usual meaning in curatorial practice. A duplicate is part of a single
1
gathering of a single species or infraspecific taxon.

32
Ex. 5. The holotype specimen of Delissea eleeleensis H. St. John, Christensen 261 (BISH), is mounted as two preparations, a herbarium sheet
(BISH No. 519675 [barcode BISH1006410]) bearing the annotation “fl. bottled” and an inflorescence preserved in alcohol in a jar labelled
“Cyanea, Christensen 261”. The annotation indicates that the inflorescence is part of the holotype specimen and not a duplicate, nor is it part
of the isotype specimen (BISH No. 519676 [barcode BISH1006411]), which is not labelled as including additional material preserved in a
separate preparation.
Ex. 6. The holotype specimen of Johannesteijsmannia magnifica J. Dransf., Dransfield 862 (K), consists of a leaf mounted on five herbarium
sheets, an inflorescence and infructescence in a box, and liquid-preserved material in a bottle.
Ex. 7. The holotype of Cephaelis acanthacea Standl. ex Steyerm., Cuatrecasas 16572 (F), consists of a single specimen mounted on two
herbarium sheets, labelled “sheet 1” and “sheet 2”. Although the two sheets have separate herbarium accession numbers, F No. 1153741
and F No. 1153742, respectively, the cross-labelling indicates that they constitute a single specimen. A third sheet of Cuatrecasas 16572, F
No. 1153740, is not cross-labelled and is therefore a duplicate. (The valid publication of this name was discussed by Taylor in Novon 25: 331–
332. 2017.)
Ex. 8. The holotype specimen of Eugenia ceibensis Standl., Yuncker & al. 8309, is mounted on a single herbarium sheet in F. A fragment was
removed from the specimen subsequent to its designation as holotype and is now conserved in LL. The fragment is mounted on a herbarium
sheet along with a photograph of the holotype and is labelled “fragment of type!”. The fragment is no longer part of the holotype specimen
because it is not permanently conserved in the same herbarium as the holotype. It is a duplicate, i.e. an isotype.
Ex. 9. In the Geneva herbaria, a single specimen is often prepared on two or more sheets, which are not therefore duplicates. Although the
individual sheets are usually not labelled as being part of the same specimen, they are physically kept together in their own specimen folder
and bear a single, original label in common.
Ex. 10. Three specimens collected by Martius (Brazil, Maranhão, “in sylvis ad fl. Itapicurú”, May 1819, Martius s.n., M) are syntypes of Erythrina
falcata Benth. (in Martius, Fl. Bras. 15(1): 172. 1859). Only one of the sheets (barcode M-0213337) has Martius’s original blue label, whereas
the other two (barcodes M-0213336 and M-0213338) have been labelled with the locality to identify them as the same gathering. Because
the three specimens do not bear a single, original label in common, and are not cross-labelled, they are treated as duplicates.
8.4. Type specimens of names of taxa must be preserved permanently and may not be living organisms or cultures.
Nevertheless, cultures of algae and fungi, if preserved in a metabolically inactive state (e.g. by lyophilization or deep-
freezing to remain alive in that inactive state), are acceptable as types (see also Art. 40.8).
Ex. 11. “Dendrobium sibuyanense” (Lubag-Arquiza & al. in Philipp. Agric. Sci. 88: 484–488. 2005) was described with the statement “Type
specimen is a living specimen being maintained at the Orchid Nursery, Department of Horticulture, University of the Philippines Los Baños
(UPLB). Collectors: Orville C. Baldos & Ramil R. Marasigan, April 5, 2004”. However, this is a living collection and, as such, is not acceptable as
a type. Consequently no type was indicated and the name was not validly published (Art. 40.1).
Ex. 12. The strain CBS 7351 is acceptable as the type of the name Candida populi Hagler & al. (in Int. J. Syst. Bacteriol. 39: 98. 1989) because
it is permanently preserved in a metabolically inactive state by lyophilization (see also Rec. 8B.2).
8.5. The type, epitypes (Art. 9.9) excepted, of the name of a fossil-taxon at the rank of species or below is always a
specimen (see Art. 9.15). One whole specimen is to be considered as the nomenclatural type (see Rec. 8A.3).
Recommendation 8A
8A.1. When a holotype, a lectotype, or a neotype is an illustration, the specimen or specimens upon which that illustration is based
should be used to help determine the application of the name (see also Art. 9.15).
8A.2. When an illustration is designated as the type of a name under Art. 40.5, the collection data of the illustrated material should
be given (see also Rec. 38D.2).
8A.3. If the type specimen of a name of a fossil-taxon is cut into pieces (sections of fossil wood, pieces of coalball plants, etc.), all
parts originally used in establishing the diagnosis should be clearly marked.
8A.4. When a single specimen designated as type is mounted as multiple preparations, this should be stated in the protologue,
and the preparations appropriately labelled.
Recommendation 8B
8B.1. Whenever practicable a living culture should be prepared from the holotype material of the name of a newly described taxon
of algae or fungi and deposited in at least two institutional culture or genetic resource collections. (Such action does not obviate
the requirement for a holotype specimen under Art. 8.4.)
8B.2. In cases where the type of a name is a culture permanently preserved in a metabolically inactive state (see Art. 8.4), any
living isolates obtained from it should be referred to as “ex-type” (ex typo), “ex-holotype” (ex holotypo), “ex-isotype” (ex isotypo),
etc., in order to make it clear they are derived from the type but are not themselves the nomenclatural type.
33
ARTICLE 9
9.1. A holotype of a name of a species or infraspecific taxon is the one specimen or illustration (but see Art. 40.4) either
(a) indicated by the author(s) as the nomenclatural type or (b) used by the author(s) when no type was indicated. As
long as the holotype is extant, it fixes the application of the name concerned (but see Art. 9.15).
Note 1. Any designation of the type made by the original author, if definitely expressed at the time of the original publication of
the name of the taxon, is final (but see Art. 9.11, 9.15, and 9.16). If the author used only one specimen or illustration, either cited
or uncited, when preparing the account of the new taxon, it must be accepted as the holotype, but the possibility that the author
used additional, uncited specimens or illustrations (which may have been lost or destroyed) must always be considered. If a name
of a new taxon is validly published solely by reference to a previously published description or diagnosis, the same considerations
apply to specimens or illustrations used by the author of that description or diagnosis (see Art. 7.8; but see Art. 7.9).
Ex. 1. When Tuckerman established Opegrapha oulocheila Tuck. (Lich. Calif.: 32. 1866) he referred to “the single specimen, from Schweinitz’s
herbarium (Herb. Acad. Sci. Philad.) before me”. Even though the term “type” or its equivalent was not used in the protologue, that specimen
(in PH) was clearly the one specimen used by the author and is therefore the holotype.
Ex. 2. In the protologue of Coronilla argentea L. (Sp. Pl.: 743. 1753), Linnaeus cited an illustration by Alpini (Pl. Exot.: 16. 1627) and did not
designate a type. Although no uncited specimens or illustrations are known to exist, making Alpini’s illustration the only extant element of
original material, it is not the holotype because it is not certain that Linnaeus used only this one element when preparing the account of the
new taxon; he could have possessed a specimen that has since been lost or destroyed. Moreover, citation of the illustration cannot be
accepted as indication of the type under the second sentence of Art. 40.3 because that provision applies only for the purpose of Art. 40.1, i.e.
indication of type as a requirement of valid publication of names published on or after 1 January 1958. Alpini’s illustration was designated as
the lectotype of C. argentea by Greuter (in Ann. Mus. Goulandris 1: 44. 1973).
9.2. If a designation of holotype made in the protologue of the name of a taxon is later found to contain errors (e.g. in
locality, date, collector, collecting number, herbarium code, specimen identifier, or citation of an illustration), these
errors are to be corrected provided that the intent of the original author(s) is not changed. However, omissions of
required information under Art. 40.6–40.8 are not correctable.
Ex. 3. The name Phoebe calcarean S. Lee & F. N. Wei (in Guihaia 3: 7. 1983) was validly published with the holotype designated as Du’an
Expedition “4-10-004” in IBK, but no specimen with this collecting number exists in IBK. However, a specimen in IBK annotated with “Phoebe
calcarean sp. nov.”, “Typus”, and matching all other details of the protologue bears the collecting number Du’an Expedition 4-10-0243.
Therefore, the original type citation is obviously erroneous and is to be corrected.
9.3. A lectotype is one specimen or illustration designated from the original material (Art. 9.4) as the nomenclatural
type, in conformity with Art. 9.11 and 9.12, if the name was published without a holotype, or if the holotype is lost or
destroyed, or if a type is found to belong to more than one taxon (see also Art. 9.14). For sanctioned names (Art. F.3),
a lectotype may be selected from among elements associated with either or both the protologue and the sanctioning
treatment (Art. F.3.9).
Ex. 4. Adansonia grandidieri Baill. (in Grandidier, Hist. Phys. Madagascar 34: t. 79B bis, fig. 2 & t. 79E, fig. 1. 1893) was validly published when
accompanied solely by two illustrations with analysis (see Art. 38.8). Baum (in Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 82: 447. 1995) designated one of the
sheets of Grevé 275 (flowering specimen in P [barcode P00037169]), which he presumed to be the very specimen from which most or all of
the components of t. 79E, fig. 1 were drawn, as the lectotype of this name.
9.4. For the purposes of this Code, original material comprises the following elements: (a) those specimens and
illustrations (both unpublished and published prior to publication of the protologue) that the author associated with
the taxon, and that were available to the author prior to, or at the time of, preparation ofthe description, diagnosis,
or illustration with analysis (Art. 38.7 and 38.8) validating the name; (b) any illustrations published as part of the
protologue; (c)the holotype and those specimens which, even if not seen by the author of the description or diagnosis
validating the name, were indicated as types (syntypes or paratypes) of the name at its valid publication; and (d) the
isotypes or isosyntypes of the name irrespective of whether such specimens were seen by either the author of the
1
validating description or diagnosis or the author of the name (but see Art. 7.8, 7.9, and F.3.9).
[footnote] Duplicate specimens of a syntype, lectotype, neotype, and epitype are isosyntypes, isolectotypes, isoneotypes, and isoepitypes,
1
respectively.
Note 2. For names falling under Art. 7.9, only elements from the context of the protologue itself are considered as original material.
34
Note 3. For names falling under Art. 7.8, only elements from the context of the validating description are considered as original
material, unless the validating author has definitely designated a different type.
9.5. An isotype is any duplicate of the holotype; it is always a specimen.

Note 4. The term isotype is also used for a duplicate of the type of the conserved name of a species because, under Art. 14.8, such
a type, like a holotype, may only be changed by the procedure of conservation.
9.6. A syntype is any specimen cited in the protologue when there is no holotype, or any one of two or more specimens
simultaneously designated in the protologue as types (see also Art. 40 Note 1). Reference to an entire gathering, or a
part thereof, is considered citation of the included specimens.
Ex. 5. In the protologue of Laurentia frontidentata E. Wimm. (see Art. 40 Ex. 2) a single gathering in two herbaria was designated as the type.
Therefore, there must exist at least two specimens and these are syntypes.
Ex. 6. In the protologue of Anemone alpine L. (Sp. Pl.: 539. 1753), two specimens are cited under the (unnamed) varieties β and γ, as “Burs.
IX: 80” and “Burs. IX: 81”. These specimens, held in the Burser Herbarium (UPS), are syntypes of A. alpina.
9.7. A paratype is any specimen cited in the protologue that is neither the holotype nor an isotype, nor one of the
syntypes if in the protologue two or more specimens were simultaneously designated as types.
Ex. 7. The holotype of the name Rheedia kappleri Eyma (in Meded. Bot. Mus. Herb. Rijks Univ. Utrecht 4: 26. 1932), which applies to a
polygamous species, is a male specimen, Kappler 593a (U). The author designated a hermaphroditic specimen, Forestry Service of Surinam B.
W. 1618 (U), as a paratype.
Note 5. In most cases in which no holotype was designated there will also be no paratypes because all the cited specimens will be
syntypes. However, when an author designated two or more specimens as types (Art. 9.6), any remaining cited specimens are
paratypes and not syntypes.
Ex. 8. In the protologue of Eurya hebeclados Y. Ling (in Acta Phytotax. Sin. 1: 208. 1951) the author simultaneously designated two specimens
as types, Y. Ling 5014 as “typus, ♂” and Y. Y. Tung 315 as “typus, ♀”, which are therefore syntypes. Ling also cited the specimen Y. Ling 5366
but without designating it as a type; it is therefore a paratype.
9.8. A neotype is a specimen or illustration selected to serve as nomenclatural type if no original material exists, or as
long as it is missing (see also Art. 9.16 and 9.19(c)).
9.9. An epitype is a specimen or illustration selected to serve as an interpretative type when the holotype, lectotype,
or previously designated neotype, or all original material associated with a validly published name, is demonstrably
ambiguous and cannot be critically identified for purposes of the precise application of the name to a taxon.
Designation of an epitype is not effected unless the holotype, lectotype, or neotype that the epitype supports is
explicitly cited (see Art. 9.20).
Ex. 9. Podlech (in Taxon 46: 465. 1997) designated Herb. Linnaeus No. 926.43 (LINN) as the lectotype of Astragalus trimestris L. (Sp. Pl.: 761.
1753). He simultaneously designated an epitype (Egypt, Dünen oberhalb Rosetta am linken Nilufer bei Schech Mantur, 9 May 1902,
Anonymous, BM) because the lectotype lacks fruits, “which show important diagnostic features for this species”.
Ex. 10. The lectotype of Salicornia europaea L. (Herb. Linnaeus No. 10.1, LINN, designated by Jafri & Rateeb in Jafri & El-Gadi, Fl. Libya 58: 57.
1978) does not show the relevant characters by which it could be identified for the precise application of this name in a critical group of taxa
that are best characterized molecularly. Therefore, Kadereit & al. (in Taxon 61: 1234. 2012) designated as the epitype a molecularly tested
specimen from the type locality (Sweden, Gotland, W shore of Burgsviken Bay, Näsudden Cape, Piirainen & Piirainen 4222,only the plant
numbered G38-1, MJG).
9.10. The use of a term defined in the Code (Art. 9.1, 9.3 and 9.5–9.9) as denoting a type, in a sense other than that in
which it is so defined, is treated as an error to be corrected (for example, the use of the term lectotype to denote what
is in fact a neotype).
Ex. 11. Borssum Waalkes (in Blumea 14: 198. 1966) cited Herb. Linnaeus No. 866.7 (LINN) as the holotype of Sida retusa L. (Sp. Pl., ed. 2: 961.
1763). However, illustrations in Plukenet (Phytographia: t. 9, fig. 2. 1691) and Rumphius (Herb. Amboin. 6: t. 19. 1750) were cited by Linnaeus
in the protologue. Therefore, the original material of S. retusa comprises three elements (Art. 9.4(a)), and Borssum Waalkes’s use of holotype
is an error to be corrected to lectotype.
35
Note 6. A misused term may be corrected only if the requirements of Art. 7.11 (for correction to lectotype, neotype, and epitype)
are met and Art. 40.6 (for correction to holotype) does not apply.
9.11. If the name of a species or infraspecific taxon was published without a holotype (Art. 9.1), or when the holotype
or previously designated lectotype has been lost or destroyed, or when the material designated as type is found to
belong to more than one taxon, a lectotype or, if permissible (Art. 9.8), a neotype as a substitute for it may be
designated (see also Art. 9.16).
9.12. In lectotype designation, an isotype must be chosen if such exists, or otherwise a syntype or isosyntype if such
exists. If no isotype, syntype or isosyntype is extant, the lectotype must be chosen from among the paratypes if such
exist. If none of the above specimens exists, the lectotype must be chosen from among the uncited specimens and
cited and uncited illustrations that comprise the remaining original material, if such exist.
Ex. 12. Baumann & al. (in J. Eur. Orch. 34: 176. 2006) designated an illustration cited in the protologue of Gymnadenia rubra Wettst. (in Verh.
K. K. Zool.-Bot. Ges. Wien 39: 83. 1889) as “lectotype”. Because Wettstein also cited syntypes, which always have precedence over illustrations
in lectotype designation, Baumann’s choice was not in conformity with Art. 9.12 and must not be followed. Later, Baumann & Lorenz (in
Taxon 60: 1775. 2011) correctly designated one of the syntypes as the lectotype.
9.13. If no original material is extant or as long as it is missing, a neotype may be selected. A lectotype always takes
precedence over a neotype, except as provided by Art. 9.16 and9.19(c).
9.14. When a type (herbarium sheet or equivalent preparation) contains parts belonging to more than one taxon (see
Art. 9.11), the name must remain attached to the part (specimen as defined in Art. 8.2) that corresponds most nearly
with the original description or diagnosis.
Ex. 13. The type of the name Tillandsia bryoides Griseb. ex Baker (in Abh. Königl. Ges. Wiss. Göttingen 24: 334. 1878) is Lorentz 128 (BM); the
material on this sheet, however, proved to be mixed. Smith (in Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts 70: 192. 1935) acted in accordance with Art. 9.14 in
designating one part of the sheet in BM as the lectotype.
9.15. The holotype (or lectotype) of a name of a fossil-species or infraspecific fossil-taxon (Art. 8.5) is the specimen (or
one of the specimens) on which the validating illustrations (Art. 43.2) are based. When, prior to 1 January 2001 (see
Art. 43.3), in the protologue of a name of a new fossil-taxon at the rank of species or below, a type specimen is
indicated (Art. 40.1) but not identified among the validating illustrations, a lectotype must be designated from among
the specimens illustrated in the protologue. This choice is superseded if it can be demonstrated that the original type
specimen corresponds to another validating illustration.
9.16. When a holotype or a previously designated lectotype has been lost or destroyed and it can be shown that all
the other original material differs taxonomically from the lost or destroyed type, a neotype may be selected to
preserve the usage established by the previous typification (see also Art. 9.18).
9.17. A designation of a lectotype, neotype, or epitype that later is found to refer to a single gathering but to more
than one specimen must nevertheless be accepted (subject to Art. 9.19 and 9.20), but may be further narrowed to a
single one of these specimens by way of a subsequent lectotypification, neotypification, or epitypification (see also
Art. 9.14).
Ex. 14. Erigeron plantagineus Greene (in Pittonia 3: 292. 1898) was described from material collected by R. M. Austin in California. Cronquist
(in Brittonia 6: 173. 1947) wrote “Type: Austin s.n., Modoc County, California (ND)”, thereby designating the Austin material in ND as the
lectotype [first-step]. Strother & Ferlatte (in Madroño 35: 85. 1988), noting that there were two specimens of this gathering in ND, designated
one of them, “ND-G, 057228” [barcode NDG57228], as the [second-step] lectotype. In subsequent references, both lectotypification steps
may be cited in sequence.
9.18. A neotype selected under Art. 9.16 may be superseded if it can be shown to differ taxonomically from the
holotype or lectotype that it replaced.
36
9.19. The author who first designates (Art. 7.10, 7.11, and F.5.4) a lectotype or a neotype in conformity with Art. 9.11–
9.13 must be followed, but that choice is superseded if (a) the holotype or, in the case of a neotype, any of the original
material is found to exist; the choice may also be superseded if it can be shown that (b) it is contrary to Art. 9.14 or (c)
it is in serious conflict with the protologue, in which case an element that is not in conflict with the protologue is to be
chosen; a lectotype may only be superseded by a non-conflicting element of the original material, if such exists; if none
exists it may be superseded by a neotype.
Ex. 15. (b) Navarro & Rosúa (in Candollea 45: 584. 1990) designated a sheet in G-DC as lectotype of Teucrium gnaphalodes L’Hér. (Stirp. Nov.:
84. 1788), but this preparation contains more than one gathering and a heterogeneous mixture of more than one species, not all of which
matched L’Héritier’s diagnosis. Ferrer-Gallego & al. (in Candollea 67: 38. 2012) superseded the previous lectotype in choosing one of the
specimens on the same preparation that corresponds most nearly with the original diagnosis.
Ex. 16. (c) Fischer (in Feddes Repert. 108: 115. 1997) designated Herb. Linnaeus No. 26.58 (LINN) as lectotype of Veronica agrestis L. (Sp. Pl.:
13. 1753). However, Martínez-Ortega & al. (in Taxon 51: 763. 2002) established that the designated lectotype was in serious conflict with
Linnaeus’s diagnosis and that three sheets of original material not conflicting with the protologue were available in the Celsius herbarium.
One of them was designated as the new lectotype of V. agrestis, superseding the choice of Fischer.
Note 7. Only a choice of uncited material as lectotype may be superseded under Art. 9.19(c); cited specimens and illustrations are
part of the protologue and cannot therefore be in serious conflict with it.
9.20. The author who first designates (Art. 7.10, 7.11, and F.5.4) an epitype must be followed; a different epitype may
be designated only if the original epitype is lost or destroyed (see also Art. 9.17). A lectotype or neotype supported by
an epitype may be superseded in accordance with Art. 9.19 or, in the case of a neotype, in accordance with Art. 9.18.
If it can be shown that an epitype and the type it supports differ taxonomically and that neither Art. 9.18 nor 9.19
applies, the name may be proposed for conservation with a conserved type (Art. 14.9; see also Art. 57).
Note 8. An epitype supports only the type to which it is linked by the typifying author. If the supported type is lost, destroyed, or
superseded, the epitype has no standing with respect to the replacement type.
9.21. Designation of an epitype is not effected unless the herbarium, collection, or institution in which the epitype is
conserved is specified or, if the epitype is a published illustration, a full and direct bibliographic reference (Art. 41.5)
to it is provided.
9.22. On or after 1 January 1990, lectotypification or neotypification of a name of a species or infraspecific taxon by a
specimen or unpublished illustration is not effected unless the herbarium, collection, or institution in which the type
is conserved is specified.
9.23. On or after 1 January 2001, lectotypification, neotypification, or epitypification of a name of a species or

infraspecific taxon is not effected unless indicated by use of the term “lectotypus”, “neotypus”, or “epitypus”, its
abbreviation, or its equivalent in a modern language (see also Art. 7.11 and 9.10).
Recommendation 9A
9A.1. Typification of names for which no holotype was designated should only be carried out with an understanding of the author’s
method of working; in particular it should be realized that some of the material used by the author in describing the taxon may
not be in the author’s herbarium or may not even have survived, and conversely, that not all the material surviving in the author’s
herbarium was necessarily used in describing the taxon.
9A.2. Designation of a lectotype should be undertaken only in the light of an understanding of the group concerned. In choosing
a lectotype, all aspects of the protologue should be considered as a basic guide. Mechanical methods, such as the automatic
selection of the first element cited or of a specimen collected by the person after whom a species is named, should be avoided as
unscientific and leading to possible future confusion and further change.
9A.3. In choosing a lectotype, any indication of intent by the author of a name should be given preference unless such indication
is contrary to the protologue. Such indications are manuscript notes, annotations on herbarium sheets, recognizable figures, and
epithets such as typicus, genuinus, etc.
9A.4. When two or more heterogeneous elements were included in or cited with the original description or diagnosis, the
lectotype should be so selected as to preserve current usage. In particular, if another author has already segregated one or more
37
elements as other taxa, one of the remaining elements should be designated as the lectotype provided that this element is not in
conflict with the original description or diagnosis (see Art. 9.19(c)).
Recommendation 9B
9B.1. In selecting a neotype, particular care and critical knowledge should be exercised because there is usually no guide except
personal judgement as to what best fits the protologue; if this selection proves to be faulty it may result in further change.
9B.2. Authors designating an epitype should state in what way the holotype, lectotype, neotype, or all original material is
ambiguous such that epitypification is necessary.
Recommendation 9C
9C.1. Specification of the herbarium, collection, or institution of deposition should be followed by any available number
permanently and unambiguously identifying the lectotype, neotype, or epitype specimen (see also Rec. 40A.6).
ARTICLE 10
10.1. The type of a name of a genus or of any subdivision of a genus is the type of a name of a species (except as
provided by Art. 10.4). For purposes of designation or citation of a type, the species name alone suffices, i.e. it is
considered as the full equivalent of its type (see also Rec. 40A.3).
Note 1. Terms such as “holotype”, “syntype”, and “lectotype”, as presently defined in Art. 9, although not applicable to the types
of names at ranks higher than species, have sometimes been so used by analogy.
10.2. If in the protologue of a name of a genus or of any subdivision of a genus the holotype or lectotype of one or
more previously or simultaneously published species name(s) is definitely included (see Art. 10.3), the type must be
chosen from among these types, unless (a) the type was indicated (Art. 10.8, 40.1, and 40.3) or designated by the
author of the name; or (b) the name was sanctioned (Art. F.3), in which case the type may also be chosen from among
the types of species names included in the sanctioning treatment. If no type of a previously or simultaneously
published species name was definitely included, a type must be otherwise chosen, but the choice is to be superseded
if it can be demonstrated that the selected type is not conspecific with any of the material associated with either the
protologue or the sanctioning treatment.
Ex. 1. The genus Anacyclus, as originally circumscribed by Linnaeus (Sp. Pl.: 892. 1753), comprised three validly named species. Cassini (in
Cuvier, Dict. Sci. Nat. 34: 104. 1825) designated Anthemis valentina L. (l.c.: 895. 1753) as type of Anacyclus, but this was not an original
element of the genus. Green (in Sprague, Nom. Prop. Brit. Bot.: 182. 1929) designated Anacyclus valentinus L. (l.c.: 892. 1753), “the only one
of the three original species still retained in the genus”, as the “standard species” (see Art. 7 *Ex. 16), and her choice must be followed (Art.
10.5). Humphries (in Bull. Brit. Mus. (Nat. Hist.), Bot. 7: 109. 1979) designated a specimen in the Clifford Herbarium (BM) as lectotype of
Anacyclus valentinus, and that specimen thereby became the type of Anacyclus.
Ex. 2. Castanella Spruce ex Benth. & Hook. f. (Gen. Pl. 1: 394. Aug 1862) was described on the basis of a single specimen collected by Spruce
and without mention of a species name. Swart (in ING Card No. 2143. 1957) was the first to designate a type (as “T.”): C. granatensis Planch.
& Linden (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 4, 18: 365. Dec 1862), based on Linden 1360. As long as the Spruce specimen is considered to be
conspecific with Linden’s material, Swart’s type designation cannot be superseded, even though the Spruce specimen became the type of
Paullinia paullinioides Radlk. (Monogr. Paullinia: 173. 1896), because the latter is not a “previously or simultaneously published species
name”.
10.3. For the purposes of Art. 10.2, definite inclusion of the type of a name of a species is effected by citation of, or
reference (direct or indirect) to, a validly published species name, whether accepted or synonymized by the author,
or by citation of the holotype or lectotype of a previously or simultaneously published species name.
Ex. 3. The protologue of Elodes Adans. (Fam. Pl. 2: 444, 553. 1763) includes references to “Elodes” of Clusius (Alt. App. Rar. Pl. Hist., App. Alt.
Auct.: [7]. 1611, i.e. “Ascyrum supinum ἑλώδης”), “Hypericum” of Tournefort (Inst. Rei Herb. 1: 255. 1700, i.e. “Hypericum palustre, supinum,
tomentosum”), and Hypericum aegypticum L. (Sp. Pl.: 784. 1753). The last is the only reference to a validly published species name, and
neither of the other elements is the type of a species name. The type of H. aegypticum is therefore the type of Elodes even though subsequent
authors designated H. elodes L. (Amoen. Acad. 4: 105. 1759) as the type (see Robson in Bull. Brit. Mus. (Nat. Hist.), Bot. 5: 305, 337. 1977).
38
10.4. By and only by conservation (Art. 14.9), the type of a name of a genus may be a specimen or illustration,
preferably used by the author in the preparation of the protologue, other than the type of a name of an included
species.
Note 2. If the element designated under Art. 10.4 is the type of a species name, that name may be cited as the type of the generic
name. If the element is not the type of a species name, a parenthetical reference to the correct name of the type element may be
added.
Ex. 4. Physconia Poelt (in Nova Hedwigia 9: 30. 1965) was conserved with the specimen “‘Lichen pulverulentus’, Germania, Lipsia in Tilia, 1767,
Schreber (M)” as the conserved type. That specimen is the type of P. pulverulacea Moberg (in Mycotaxon 8: 310. 1979), the name now cited
in the type entry in App. III.
Ex. 5. Pseudolarix Gordon (Pinetum: 292. 1858) was conserved with a specimen from the Gordon herbarium (K No. 3455) as its conserved
type. Because this specimen is not the type of any species name, its accepted identity “[=P.amabilis(J. Nelson) Rehder …]” has been added to
the corresponding entry inApp. III.
10.5.The author who first designates (Art. 7.10,7.11, andF.5.4) a type of a name of a genus or subdivision of a genus
must be followed, but the choice may be superseded if the author used a largely mechanical method of selection (Art.
10.6). A type chosen using a largely mechanical method of selection is superseded by any later choice of a different
type not made using such a method, unless, in the interval, the supersedable choice has been affirmed by its adoption
in a publication that did not use a mechanical method of selection.
Note 3. The effective date of a typification (cf. Art. 22.2, 48.2 and 52.2(b)) subject to supersession under Art. 10.5 remains that of
the original selection, unless the type has been superseded.
10.6. For the purposes of Art. 10.5, “a largely mechanical method of selection” is defined as one in which the type is
selected following a set of objective criteria such as those set out in “Canon 15” of the so-called “Philadelphia Code”
(Arthur & al. in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 31: 255–257. 1904) or in “Canon 15” of the American Code of Botanical
Nomenclature (Arthur & al. in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 34: 172–174. 1907).
Ex. 6. The first type designation for Delphinium L. was by Britton (in Britton & Brown, Ill. Fl. N. U.S., ed. 2, 2: 93. 1913), who followed the
American Code and whose selection of D. consolida L. is therefore considered to have been largely mechanical. His choice has been
superseded under Art. 10.5 by the designation of D. peregrinum L. by Green (in Sprague, Nom. Prop. Brit. Bot.: 162. 1929).
10.7. Unless the author(s) specifically state that they are not using a mechanical method of type selection, the
following criteria determine whether a particular publication, appearing prior to 1 January 1935, has adopted a largely
mechanical method of type selection:
(a) any statement to that effect, including that the American Code or the “Philadelphia Code” was being followed or
that types were determined in a particular mechanical way (e.g. the first species in order); or
(b) adoption of any provision of the “Philadelphia Code” or the American Code that was contrary to the provisions of
the International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature in force at that time, e.g. the inclusion of one or more
tautonyms as species names.
Additionally for publications appearing prior to 1 January 1921:
(c) if an author of the publication was a signatory of the “Philadelphia Code” (and was therefore also a signatory of
1
the American Code);

[footnote] A list of the 23 signatories of the “Philadelphia Code” was published in Taxon 65: 1448. 2016, as well as in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 31:
1
250. 1904.
(d) if an author of the publication stated publicly (e.g. in another publication) that in the typification of generic names
the “Philadelphia Code” or the American Code was followed;
(e) if an author of the publication was an employee or a recognized associate of the New York Botanical Garden; or
(f) if an author of the publication was an employee of the United States government.
Ex. 7. (a) Fink (in Contr. U. S. Natl. Herb. 14: 2. 1910) specified that he was “stating the types of the genera according to the ‘first species’
rule”. His type designations may therefore be superseded under Art. 10.5. For example, Fink had designated Biatorina griffithii (Ach.) A.
39
Massal. as the type of Biatorina A. Massal.; but his choice was superseded when the next subsequent designation, by Santesson (in Symb.
Bot. Upsal. 12: 428. 1952), stated a different type, B. atropurpurea (Schaer.) A. Massal.
Ex. 8. (a) Underwood (in Mem. Torrey Bot. Club 6: 247–283. 1899) wrote (p. 251): “For each genus established the first named species will be
regarded as type”. Therefore, his designation (p. 276) of Caenopteris furcate Bergius as type of Caenopteris Bergius (in Acta Acad. Sci. Imp.
Petrop. 1782(2): 249. 1786) is supersedable; this has been effected by Copeland (Gen. Filicum: 166. 1947), who designated C. rutifolia Bergius
as type.
Ex. 9. (a) Murrill (in J. Mycol. 9: 87. 1903), referring to generic types, wrote: “The principles by which I have been chiefly guided are also quite
well known having been stated and explained by Underwood” [see Ex. 8]. Consequently Murrill (l.c.: 95, 98. 1903) listed the first-named
species treated by Quélet (Enchir. Fung.: 175. 1886), Coriolus lutescens (Pers.) Quél., as type of Coriolus Quél. (l.c.), and later (in Bull. Torrey
Bot. Club 32: 640. 1906) listed Polyporus zonatus Nees as type because it was “the first species accompanied by a correct citation of a figure”.
Both lectotypifications are considered to be mechanical and were superseded by the choice of Polyporus versicolor (L.) Fr. by Donk (Revis.
Niederl. Homobasidiomyc.: 180. 1933).
Ex. 10. (b) Britton & Wilson (Bot. Porto Rico 6: 262. 1925) designated Cucurbita lagenaria L. as type of Cucurbita L. (Sp. Pl.: 1010. 1753).
However, because they were evidently following the American Code (they included many tautonyms in their publication, e.g. “Abrus Abrus
(L.) W. Wight”, “Acisanthera Acisanthera (L.) Britton”, and “Ananas Ananas (L.) Voss”), their type selections used a largely mechanical method.
Their selection of C. lagenaria (currently treated as Lagenaria siceraria (Molina) Standl.) has been superseded by the selection of C. pepo L.
by Green (in Sprague, Nom. Prop. Brit. Bot.: 190. 1929).
Ex. 11. (d) In considering the typification of Achyranthes L. in a preliminary to his account of Amaranthaceae in the North American Flora,
Paul C. Standley (in J. Wash. Acad. Sci. 5: 72. 1915) selected A. repens L. as type stating that “there seems, moreover, no doubt as to the type
of the genus Achyranthes under the American Code of nomenclature”, noting that, as a result, “the name Achyranthes must be used in a
sense other than that in which it has generally been employed in recent years”. As a result of this published statement of acceptance of the
American Code, not only is Standley’s selection of A. repens superseded by that of A. aspera L. by Hitchcock (in Sprague, Nom. Prop. Brit. Bot.:
135. 1929), but types cited in Standley’s other publications (e.g. in Britton, N. Amer. Fl. 21: 1–254. 1916–1918) are supersedable under Art.
10.5. Therefore, Standley’s statement (l.c.: 134. 1917) that A. repens was the type of Achyranthes does not constitute affirmation of his earlier
selection; similarly his publication of type designations previously made by Britton & Brown, such as Chenopodium rubrum L. (l.c.: 9. 1916)
and Amaranthus caudatus L. (l.c.: 102. 1917), does not constitute affirmation of their selection; the typification of Chenopodium L. has been
superseded by the selection of C. album L. by Hitchcock (in Sprague, Nom. Prop. Brit. Bot.: 137. 1929) and that of Amaranthus L. was first
affirmed by Green (in Sprague, l.c.: 188. 1929).
10.8. When the epithet in the name of a subdivision of a genus is identical with or derived from the epithet in one of
the originally included species names, the type of the higher-ranking name is the same as that of the species name,
unless the original author of the higher-ranking name designated another type.
Ex. 12. The type of Euphorbia subg. Esula Pers. (Syn. Pl. 2: 14. 1806) is the type of E. esula L., one of the species names included by Persoon;
the designation of E. peplus L. (also included by Persoon) as type by Croizat (in Revista Sudamer. Bot. 6: 13. 1939) has no standing.
Ex. 13. The type of Cassia [unranked] Chamaecrista L. (Sp. Pl.: 379. 1753) is the type of C. chamaecrista L., nom. rej. (App. V), one of the five
species names included by Linnaeus.
10.9. The type of a name of a family or of any subdivision of a family is the same as that of the generic name from
which it is formed (see Art. 18.1). For purposes of designation or citation of a type, the generic name alone suffices.
The type of a name of a family or subfamily not formed from a generic name is the same as that of the corresponding
alternative name (Art. 18.5 and 19.8).
10.10. The principle of typification does not apply to names of taxa above the rank of family, except for names that
are automatically typified by being formed from generic names (see Art. 16(a)), the type of which is the same as that
of the generic name.
Recommendation 10A
10A.1. When a combination at the rank of a subdivision of a genus has been published under a generic name that has not yet been
typified, the type of the generic name should be selected from the subdivision of the genus that was designated as nomenclaturally
typical, if that is apparent.
10A.2. In citing a type chosen using a largely mechanical method of selection that has since been affirmed by an author not using
such a method, both the place of original selection and that of affirmation should be cited, e.g. “Quercus L. … Type: Q. robur L.
designated by Britton & Brown (Ill. Fl. N. U.S., ed. 2, 1: 616 1913); affirmed by Green (in Sprague, Nom. Prop. Brit. Bot.: 189. 1929)”.
40
SECTION 3
PRIORITY
ARTICLE 11
11.1. Each family or lower-ranked taxon with a particular circumscription, position, and rank can bear only one correct
name. Special exceptions are made for nine families and one subfamily for which alternative names are permitted (see
Art. 18.5 and 19.8). The use of separate names is allowed for fossil-taxa that represent different parts, life-history
stages, or preservational states of what may have been a single organismal taxon or even a single individual (Art. 1.2).
Ex. 1. The generic name Sigillaria Brongn. (in Bull. Sci. Soc. Philom. Paris 1822: 26. 1822) was established for fossils of “bark” fragments, but
Brongniart (in Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat. 1: 405. 1839) subsequently included stems with preserved anatomy within his concept of Sigillaria. Cones
with preserved anatomy that may in part represent the same biological taxon are referred to as Mazocarpon M. J. Benson (in Ann. Bot.
(Oxford) 32: 569. 1918), whereas such cones preserved as adpressions are known as Sigillariostrobus Schimp. (Traité Paléont. Vég. 2: 105.
1870). All these generic names can be used concurrently in spite of the fact that they may, at least in part, apply to the same organism.
11.2. A name has no priority outside the rank at which it is published (but see Art. 53.3).
Ex. 2. When Campanula sect. Campanopsis R. Br. (Prodr.: 561. 1810) is treated as a genus, it is called Wahlenbergia Roth (Nov. Pl. Sp.: 399.
1821), a name conserved against the heterotypic (taxonomic) synonym Cervicina Delile (Descr. Egypte, Hist. Nat.: 150. 1813), and not
Campanopsis (R. Br.) Kuntze (Revis. Gen. Pl. 2: 378. 1891).
Ex. 3. Solanum subg. Leptostemonum Bitter (in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 55: 69. 1919) is the correct name of the subgenus that includes its type, S.
mammosum L., because it is the earliest available name at that rank. The homotypic S. sect. Acanthophora Dunal (Hist. Nat. Solanum: 131,
218. 1813), the inclusion of which caused the illegitimacy of S. sect. Leptostemonum Dunal (in Candolle, Prodr. 13(1): 29, 183. 1852), has no
priority outside its own rank.
Ex. 4. Helichrysum stoechas subsp. Barrelieri (Ten.) Nyman (Consp. Fl. Eur.: 381. 1879) when treated at specific rank is called H. conglobatum
(Viv.) Steud. (Nomencl. Bot., ed. 2, 1: 738. 1840), based on Gnaphalium conglobatum Viv. (Fl. Libyc. Spec.: 55. 1824), and not H. barrelieri
(Ten.) Greuter (in Boissiera 13: 138. 1967), based on G. barrelieri Ten. (Fl. Napol. 5: 220. 1835–1838).
Ex. 5. Magnolia virginiana var. foetida L. (Sp. Pl.: 536. 1753) when raised to specific rank is called M. grandiflora L. (Syst. Nat., ed. 10: 1082.
1759), not M. foetida (L.) Sarg. (in Gard. & Forest 2: 615. 1889).
Note 1. The provisions of Art. 11 determine priority between different names applicable to the same taxon; they do not concern
homonymy.
11.3. For any taxon from family to genus, inclusive, the correct name is the earliest legitimate one with the same rank,
except in cases of limitation of priority by conservation or protection (see Art. 14 and F.2) or where Art. 11.7, 11.8,
19.4, 56, 57, F.3, or F.7 apply.
Ex. 6. When Aesculus L. (Sp. Pl.: 344. 1753), Pavia Mill. (Gard. Dict. Abr., ed. 4: Pavia. 1754), Macrothyrsus Spach (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser.
2, 2: 61. 1834), and Calothyrsus Spach (l.c.: 62. 1834) are referred to a single genus, its correct name is Aesculus.
11.4. For any taxon below the rank of genus, the correct name is the combination of the final epithet of the earliest
legitimate name of the taxon at the same rank, with the correct name of the genus or species to which it is assigned,
except (a) in cases of limitation of priority under Art. 14, 56, 57, F.2, F.3, or F.7, or (b) if Art. 11.7, 11.8, 22.1, or 26.1
rules that a different combination be used, or (c) if the resulting combination could not be validly published under Art.
32.1(c) or would be illegitimate under Art. 53. If (c) applies, the final epithet of the next earliest legitimate name at the
same rank is to be used instead or, if there is no final epithet available, a replacement name or the name of a new
taxon may be published.
Ex. 7. Primula sect. Dionysiopsis Pax (in Jahresber. Schles. Ges. Vaterländ. Kultur 87: 20. 1909) when transferred to Dionysia Fenzl becomes
D. sect. Dionysiopsis (Pax) Melch. (in Mitt. Thüring. Bot. Vereins 50: 164–168. 1943); the replacement name D. sect. Ariadna Wendelbo (in
Bot. Not. 112: 496. 1959) is illegitimate under Art. 52.1.
Ex. 8. Antirrhinum spurium L. (Sp. Pl.: 613. 1753) when transferred to Linaria Mill. is called L. spuria (L.) Mill. (Gard. Dict., ed. 8: Linaria No. 15.
1768).
Ex. 9. When transferring Serratula chamaepeuce L. (Sp. Pl.: 819. 1753) to Ptilostemon Cass., Cassini illegitimately (Art. 52.1) named the species
P. muticus Cass. (in Cuvier, Dict. Sci. Nat. 44: 59. 1826). In Ptilostemon, the correct name is P. chamaepeuce (L.) Less. (Gen. Cynaroceph.: 5.
1832).
41
Ex. 10. The correct name for Rubus aculeatiflorus var. taitoensis (Hayata) T. S. Liu & T. Y. Yang (in Annual Taiwan Prov. Mus. 12: 12. 1969) is
R. taitoensis Hayata var. taitoensis because R. taitoensis Hayata (in J. Coll. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo 30(1): 96. 1911) has priority over R.
aculeatiflorus Hayata (Icon. Pl. Formosan. 5: 39. 1915).
Ex. 11. When transferring Spartium biflorum Desf. (Fl. Atlant. 2: 133. 1798) to Cytisus Desf., Ball correctly proposed the replacement name C.
fontanesii Spach ex Ball (in J. Linn. Soc., Bot. 16: 405. 1878) because of the previously and validly published C. biflorus L’Hér. (Stirp. Nov.: 184.
1791); the combination C. biflorus based on S. biflorum would be illegitimate under Art. 53.1.
Ex. 12. Spergula stricta Sw. (in Kongl. Vetensk. Acad. Nya Handl. 20: 235. 1799) when transferred to Arenaria L. is called A. uliginosa Schleich.
ex Schltdl. (in Mag. Neuesten Entdeck. Gesammten Naturk. Ges. Naturf. Freunde Berlin 7: 207. 1808) because of the existence of the name
A. stricta Michx. (Fl. Bor.-Amer. 1: 274. 1803), based on a different type; but on further transfer to the genus Minuartia L. the epithet stricta
is again available and the species is called M. stricta (Sw.) Hiern (in J. Bot. 37: 320. 1899).
Ex. 13. Arum dracunculus L. (Sp. Pl.: 964. 1753) when transferred to Dracunculus Mill. is named D. vulgaris Schott (Melet. Bot. 1: 17. 1832).
The use of the Linnaean epithet in Dracunculus would result in a tautonym (Art. 23.4), which would not be validly published (Art. 32.1(c)).
Ex. 14. Cucubalus behen L. (Sp. Pl.: 414. 1753) when transferred to Behen Moench was legitimately renamed B. vulgaris Moench (Methodus:
709. 1794) to avoid the tautonym “B. behen”. In Silene L., the epithet behen is unavailable because of the existence of S. behen L. (Sp. Pl.:
418. 1753). Therefore, the replacement name S. cucubalus Wibel (Prim. Fl. Werth.: 241. 1799) was proposed. This, however, is illegitimate
(Art. 52.1) because the specific epithet vulgaris was available. In Silene, the correct name of the species is S. vulgaris (Moench) Garcke (Fl. N.
Mitt.-Deutschland, ed. 9: 64. 1869).
Ex. 15. Helianthemum italicum var. micranthum Gren. & Godr. (Fl. France 1: 171. 1847) when transferred as a variety to H. penicillatum
Thibaud ex Dunal retains its varietal epithet and is named H. penicillatum var. micranthum (Gren. & Godr.) Grosser (in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV.
193 (Heft 14): 115. 1903).
Ex. 16. The final epithet in the combination Thymus praecox subsp. Arcticus (Durand) Jalas (in Veröff. Geobot. Inst. ETH Stiftung Rübel Zürich
43: 190. 1970), based on T. serpyllum var. arcticus Durand (Pl. Kaneanae Groenl.: 196. 1856), was first used at the rank of subspecies in the
combination T. serpyllum subsp. Arcticus (Durand) Hyl. (in Uppsala Univ. Årsskr. 1945(7): 276. 1945). However, if T. Britannicus Ronniger (in
Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni Veg. 20: 330. 1924) is included in this taxon, the correct name at subspecific rank is T. praecox subsp. Britannicus
(Ronniger) Holub (in Preslia 45: 359. 1973), for which the final epithet was first used at this rank in the combination T. serpyllum subsp.
Britannicus (Ronniger) P. Fourn. (Quatre Fl. France: 841. 1938, “S.-E. [Sous-Espèce] Th. Britannicus”).
Ex. 17. Transfer of Polypodium tenerum Roxb. (in Calcutta J. Nat. Hist. 4: 490. 1844) to Cyclosorus Link (Hort. Berol. 2: 128. 1833) would result
in a later homonym due to the existence of C. tener (Fée) Christenh. (in Bot. J. Linn. Soc. 161: 250. 2009), based on Goniopteris tenera Fée
(Mém. Foug. 11: 60. 1866). The correct name is a heterotypic synonym, C. ciliates (Wall. ex Benth.) Panigrahi (in Res. J. Pl. Environm. 9: 66.
1993), based on the next earliest legitimate name of the taxon at the same rank, Aspidium ciliatum Wall. ex Benth. (Fl. Hongkong.: 455. 1861).
Note 2. The valid publication of a name at a rank lower than genus precludes any simultaneous homonymous combination (Art.
53), irrespective of the priority of other names with the same final epithet that may require transfer to the same genus or species.
Ex. 18. Tausch included two species in his new genus Alkanna: A. tinctorial Tausch (in Flora 7: 234. 1824), a new species based on “Anchusa
tinctoria” in the sense of Linnaeus (Sp. Pl., ed. 2: 192. 1762), and A. matthioli Tausch (l.c. 1824), a replacement name based on Lithospermum
tinctorium L. (Sp. Pl.: 132. 1753). Both names are legitimate and take priority from 1824.
Ex. 19. Raymond-Hamet transferred to the genus Sedum both Cotyledon sedoides DC. (in Mém. Agric. Econ. Soc. Agric. Seine 11: 11. 1808)
and Sempervivum sedoides Decne. (in Jacquemont, Voy. Inde 4(Bot.): 63. 1844). He combined the epithet of the later name, Sempervivum
sedoides, under Sedum, as S. sedoides (Decne.) Raym.-Hamet (in Candollea 4: 26. 1929), and published a replacement name, S. candollei
Raym.-Hamet (l.c. 1929), for the earlier name. Both of Raymond-Hamet’s names are legitimate.
11.5. When, for any taxon at the rank of family or below, a choice is possible between legitimate names of equal
priority at the corresponding rank, or between available final epithets of names of equal priority at the corresponding
rank, the first such choice to be effectively published (Art. 29-31) establishes the priority of the chosen name, and of
any legitimate combination with the same type and final epithet at that rank, over the other competing name(s) (but
see Art. 11.6; see also Rec. F.5A.2).
Note3. A choice as provided for in Art. 11.5 is effected by adopting one of the competing names, or its final epithet in the required
combination, and simultaneously rejecting or relegating to synonymy the other(s) or their homotypic (nomenclatural) synonyms.
Ex. 20. When Dentaria L. (Sp. Pl.: 653. 1753) and Cardamine L. (l.c.: 654. 1753) are united, the resulting genus is called Cardamine because
that name was chosen by Crantz (Cl. Crucif. Emend.: 126. 1769), who first united them.
Ex. 21. When Claudopus Gillet (Hyménomycètes: 426. 1876), Eccilia (Fr. : Fr.) P. Kumm. (Führer Pilzk.: 23. 1871), Entoloma(Fr. ex Rabenh.) P.
Kumm. (l.c.: 23. 1871), Leptonia (Fr. : Fr.) P. Kumm. (l.c.: 24. 1871), and Nolanea (Fr. : Fr.) P. Kumm. (l.c.: 24. 1871) are united, one of the four
generic names simultaneously published by Kummer must be used for the combined genus. Donk (in Bull. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg, ser. 3, 18(1):
157. 1949) selected Entoloma, which is therefore treated as having priority over the other names.
Ex. 22. Brown (in Tuckey, Narr. Exped. Zaire: 484. 1818) was the first to unite Waltheria Americana L. (Sp. Pl.: 673. 1753) and W. indica L. (l.c.
1753). He adopted the name W. indica for the combined species, and this name is accordingly treated as having priority over W. americana.
42
Ex. 23. Baillon (in Adansonia 3: 162. 1863), when uniting for the first time Sclerocroton integerrimus Hochst. (in Flora 28: 85. 1845) and S.
reticulatus Hochst. (l.c. 1845), adopted the name Stillingia integerrima (Hochst.) Baill. for the combined taxon. Consequently Sclerocroton
integerrimus is treated as having priority over.S. reticulatus irrespective of the genus (Sclerocroton, Stillingia, or any other) to which the
species is assigned.
Ex. 24. Linnaeus (Sp. Pl.: 902. 1753) simultaneously published the names Verbesina alba and V. prostrata. Later (Mant. Pl.: 286. 1771), he
published Eclipta erecta, an illegitimate name because V. alba was cited in synonymy, and E. prostrata, based on V. prostrata. The first author
to unite these taxa was Roxburgh (Fl. Ind., ed. 1832, 3: 438. 1832), who adopted the name E. prostrata (L.) L. Therefore, V.prostrata is treated
as having priority over V. alba.
Ex. 25. Donia speciose and D. formosa, which were simultaneously published by Don (Gen. Hist. 2: 468. 1832), were illegitimately renamed
Clianthus oxleyi and C. dampieri, respectively, by Lindley (in Trans. Hort. Soc. London, ser. 2, 1: 522. 1835). Brown (in Sturt, Narr. Exped. C.
Australia 2: 71. 1849) united both in a single species, adopting the illegitimate name C. dampieri and citing D. speciose and C. oxleyi as
synonyms; his choice is not of the kind provided for by Art. 11.5. Clianthus speciosus (G. Don) Asch. & Graebn. (Syn. Mitteleur. Fl. 6(2): 725.
1909), published with D. speciose and C. dampieri listed as synonyms, is an illegitimate later homonym of C. speciosus (Endl.) Steud. (Nomencl.
Bot., ed. 2, 1: 384. 1840); again, conditions for a choice under Art. 11.5 were not satisfied. Ford & Vickery (in Contr. New South Wales Natl.
Herb. 1: 303. 1950) published the legitimate combination C. formosus(G. Don) Ford & Vickery and cited D. Formosa and D. speciose as
synonyms, but because the epithet of the latter was unavailable in Clianthus Sol. ex Lindl. a choice was not possible and again Art. 11.5 does
not apply. Thompson (in Telopea 4: 4. 1990) was the first to effect an acceptable choice when publishing the combination Swainsona Formosa
(G. Don) Joy Thomps. and indicating that D. speciose was a synonym of it.
11.6. An autonym is treated as having priority over the name(s) of the same date and rank that upon their valid
publication established the autonym (see Art. 22.3 and 26.3).
Note 4. When the final epithet of an autonym is used in a new combination under the requirements of Art. 11.6, the basionym of
that combination is the name from which the autonym is derived, or its basionym if it has one.
Ex. 26. The publication of Synthyris subg. Plagiocarpus Pennell (in Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 85: 86. 1933) simultaneously established
the autonym Synthyris Benth. (in Candolle, Prodr. 10: 454. 1846) subg. Synthyris. If Synthyris, including subg. Plagiocarpus, is recognized as a
subgenus of Veronica L. (Sp. Pl.: 9. 1753), the correct name is V. subg. Synthyris(Benth.) M. M. Mart. Ort. & al. (in Taxon 53: 440. 2004), which
has precedence over a combination in Veronica based on S. subg. Plagiocarpus.
Ex. 27. Heracleum sibiricum L. (Sp. Pl.: 249. 1753) includes H. sibiricum subsp. Lecokii (Godr. & Gren.) Nyman (Consp. Fl. Eur.: 290. 1879) and
H. sibiricum subsp. sibiricumautomatically established at the same time. When H. sibiricum, so circumscribed, is included in H. sphondylium
L. (l.c. 1753) as a single subspecies, the correct name of that subspecies is H. sphondylium subsp. Sibiricum (L.) Simonk. (Enum. Fl. Transsilv.:
266. 1887), not “H. sphondylium subsp. lecokii”.
Ex. 28. The publication of Salix tristis var. microphylla Andersson (Salices Bor.-Amer.: 21. 1858) simultaneously established the autonym S.
tristis Aiton (in Hort. Kew. 3: 393. 1789) var. tristis. If S. tristis, including var. microphylla, is recognized as a variety of S. humilis Marshall
(Arbust. Amer.: 140. 1785), the correct name is S. humilis var. tristis (Aiton) Griggs (in Proc. Ohio Acad. Sci. 4: 301. 1905). However, if both
these varieties of S. tristis are recognized as varieties of S. humilis, then the names S. humilis var. tristis and S. humilis var.
microphylla(Andersson) Fernald (in Rhodora 48: 46. 1946) are used.
11.7. For purposes of priority, names of fossil-taxa (diatom taxa excepted) compete only with names based on a fossil
type.
Ex. 29. The name Polysphaeridium zoharyi (M. Rossignol) J. P. Bujak & al. (in Special Pap. Palaeontol. 24: 34. 1980), based on
Hystrichosphaeridium zoharyi M. Rossignol (in Pollen & Spores 4: 132. 1962), may be retained for a fossil-species of cysts even though cysts
of the same kind are known to be part of the life cycle of the non-fossil species Pyrodinium bahamenseL. Plate (in Arch. Protistenk. 7: 427.
1906).
Ex. 30. Reid (in Nova Hedwigia 29: 429–462. 1977) indicated that his new fossil-species Votadinium calvum was the resting cyst of the non-
fossil dinoflagellate Peridinium oblongum(Auriv.) Cleve (in Kongl. Svenska Vetensk. Acad. Handl., n.s., 32(8): 20. 1900). Votadinium calvum
can be used as the correct name for the cyst fossil-species because it has a fossil type and therefore does not compete for priority with P.
oblongum.
11.8. Names of organisms (diatoms excepted) based on a non-fossil type are treated as having priority over names at
the same rank based on a fossil type where these names are treated as synonyms for a non-fossil taxon.
Ex. 31. If Platycarya Siebold & Zucc. (in Abh. Math.-Phys. Cl. Königl. Bayer. Akad. Wiss. 3: 741. 1843), based on a non-fossil type, and
Petrophiloides Bowerb. (Hist. Fruits London Clay: 43. 1840), based on a fossil type, are treated as heterotypic synonyms for a non-fossil genus,
the name Platycarya is correct even though it is antedated by Petrophiloides.
Ex. 32. The generic name Metasequoia Miki (in Jap. J. Bot. 11: 261. 1941) was based on the fossil type of M. disticha (Heer) Miki. After
discovery of the non-fossil species M. glyptostroboides Hu & W. C. Cheng, conservation of Metasequoia Hu & W. C. Cheng (in Bull. Fan Mem.
Inst. Biol., Bot., ser. 2, 1: 154. 1948) as based on the non-fossil type was approved. Otherwise, any new generic name based on M.
glyptostroboides would have been treated as having priority over Metasequoia Miki.
43
Ex. 33. Hyalodiscus Ehrenb. (in Ber. Bekanntm. Verh. Königl. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1845: 71. 1845), based on the fossil type of H. laevis
Ehrenb. (l.c.: 78. 1845), is the name of a diatom genus that includes non-fossil species. If later synonymous generic names based on a non-
fossil type exist, they are not treated as having priority over Hyalodiscus because Art. 11.8 excepts diatoms.
Ex. 34. Boalch & Guy-Ohlson (in Taxon 41: 529–531. 1992) synonymized the two non-diatom algal generic names Pachysphaera Ostenf. (in
Knudsen & Ostenfeld, Iagtt. Overfladevand. Temp. Salth. Plankt. 1898: 52. 1899) and Tasmanites E. J. Newton (in Geol. Mag. 12: 341. 1875).
Pachysphaera is based on a non-fossil type and Tasmanites on a fossil type. Under the Code in effect in 1992, Tasmanites had priority and
was therefore adopted. Under the current Art. 11.8, which excepts only diatoms and not algae in general, Pachysphaera is the correct name
for a non-fossil genus for which both of these names are treated as heterotypic synonyms.
Ex. 35. The non-fossil species Gonyaulax ellegaardiae K. N. Mertens & al. (in J. Phycol. 51: 563. 2015) was indicated in the protologue to
produce a cyst corresponding to the fossil-species Spiniferites pachydermus (M. Rossignol) P. C. Reid (in Nova Hedwigia 25: 607. 1974). Both
names were correct because Mertens & al. did not treat them as synonyms. However, if these names are treated as synonyms for the non-
fossil species, G. ellegaardiae is treated as having priority even though it is antedated by S. pachydermus.
Note 5. In accordance with Art. 53, later homonyms are illegitimate whether the type is fossil or non-fossil.
Ex. 36. Endolepis Torr. (in Pacif. Railr. Rep. 12(2, 2): 47. 1860–1861), based on a non-fossil type, is an illegitimate later homonym of Endolepis
Schleid. (in Schmid & Schleiden, Geognos. Verhältnisse Saalthales Jena: 72. 1846), based on a fossil type.
Ex. 37. Cornus paucinervis Hance (in J. Bot. 19: 216. 1881), based on a non-fossil type, is an illegitimate later homonym of C. paucinervis Heer
(Fl. Tert. Helv. 3: 289. 1859), based on a fossil type.
Ex. 38. Ficus crassipes F. M. Bailey (Rep. Pl. Prelim. Gen. Rep. Bot. Meston’s Exped. Bellenden-Ker Range: 2. 1889), F. tiliifolia Baker (in J. Linn.
Soc., Bot. 21: 443. 1885), and F. tremula Warb. (in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 20: 171. 1894), each based on a non-fossil type, were illegitimate later
homonyms of, respectively, F. crassipes (Heer) Heer (Fl. Foss. Arct. 6(2): 70. 1882), F. tiliifolia (A. Braun) Heer (Fl. Tert. Helv. 2: 68. 1856), and
F. tremula Heer (in Abh. Schweiz. Paläontol. Ges. 1: 11. 1874), each based on a fossil type. The three names with non-fossil types have been
conserved against their earlier homonyms in order to maintain their use (see App. IV).
11.9. For purposes of priority, names given to hybrids are subject to the same rules as are those of non-hybrid taxa at
equivalent rank (but see Art. H.8).
Ex. 39. The name ×Solidaster H. R. Wehrh. (in Bonstedt, Pareys Blumengärtn. 2: 525. 1932) has priority over×Asterago Everett (in Gard. Chron.,
ser. 3, 101: 6. 1937) for the hybrids between Aster L. and Solidago L.
Ex. 40. Anemone ×hybrida Paxton (in Paxton’s Mag. Bot. 15: 239. 1849) has priority over A. ×elegans Decne. (pro sp.) (Rev. Hort. (Paris) 1852:
41. 1852). The former is correct when both are considered to apply to the same hybrid, A. hupehensis (Lemoine & É. Lemoine) Lemoine & É.
Lemoine × A. vitifolia Buch.-Ham. ex DC. (Art. H.4.1).
Ex. 41. Camus (in Bull. Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat. 33: 538. 1927) published the name ×Agroelymus E. G. Camus ex A. Camus without a description
or diagnosis, mentioning only the names of the parent genera (Agropyron Gaertn. And Elymus L.). Because this name was not validly published
under the Code then in force, Rousseau (in Mém. Jard. Bot. Montréal 29: 10–11. 1952) published a Latin diagnosis. However, under the
present Code (Art. H.9), the date of valid publication of ×Agroelymus is 1927, not 1952, and therefore it has priority over the name
×Elymopyrum Cugnac (in Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Ardennes 33: 14. 1938).
11.10. The principle of priority does not apply above the rank of family (but see Rec. 16A).
ARTICLE 12
12.1. A name of a taxon has no status under this Code unless it is validly published (see Art. 6.3; but see Art. 14.9 and
14.14).
SECTION 4
LIMITATION OF THE PRINCIPLE OF PRIORITY
ARTICLE 13
13.1. Valid publication of names for organisms of different groups is treated as beginning at the following dates (for
each group a work is mentioned that is treated as having been published on the date given for that group):
Non-fossil organisms:
44
(a) SPERMATOPHYTA and PTERIDOPHYTA, names at ranks of genus and below, 1 May 1753 (Linnaeus, Species plantarum,
ed. 1); suprageneric names, 4 August 1789 (Jussieu, Genera plantarum).
(b) MUSCI (except Sphagnaceae), 1 January 1801 (Hedwig, Species muscorum frondosorum).
(c) SPHAGNACEAE and HEPATICAE (including Anthocerotae), names at ranks of genus and below, 1 May 1753 (Linnaeus,
Species plantarum, ed. 1); suprageneric names, 4 August 1789 (Jussieu, Genera plantarum).
(d) FUNGI (Pre. 8), see Art. F.1.1.
(e) ALGAE, 1 May 1753 (Linnaeus, Species plantarum, ed. 1). Exceptions:
NOSTOCACEAE HOMOCYSTEAE, 1 January 1892 (Gomont, “Monographie des Oscillariées”, in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 7,
15: 263–368; 16: 91–264). The two parts of Gomont’s “Monographie”, which appeared in 1892 and 1893,
respectively, are treated as having been published simultaneously on 1 January 1892.
NOSTOCACEAE HETEROCYSTEAE, 1 January 1886 (Bornet & Flahault, “Révision des Nostocacées hétérocystées”, in Ann.
Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 7, 3: 323–381; 4: 343–373; 5: 51–129; 7: 177–262). The four parts of the “Révision”, which
appeared in 1886, 1886, 1887, and 1888, respectively, are treated as having been published simultaneously on 1
January 1886.
DESMIDIACEAE (s. l.), 1 January 1848 (Ralfs, British Desmidieae).
OEDOGONIACEAE, 1 January 1900 (Hirn, “Monographie und Iconographie der Oedogoniaceen”, in Acta Soc. Sci. Fenn.
27(1)).
Fossil organisms (diatoms excepted):
(f) ALL GROUPS, 31 December 1820 (Sternberg, Flora der Vorwelt, Versuch 1: 1–24, t. 1–13). Schlotheim’s
Petrefactenkunde (1820) is regarded as published before 31 December 1820.
13.2. The group to which a name is assigned for the purposes of Art. 13.1 and F.1 is determined by the accepted
taxonomic position of the type of the name.
Ex. 1. The genus Porella and its single species, P. pinnata, were referred by Linnaeus (Sp. Pl.: 1106. 1753) to theMusci; because the type
specimen of P. pinnata is now accepted as belonging to the Hepaticae, the names were validly published in 1753.
Ex. 2. The designated type of Lycopodium L. (Sp. Pl.: 1100. 1753) is L. clavatum L. (l.c.: 1101. 1753), the type specimen of which is currently
accepted as a pteridophyte. Accordingly, although the genus is listed by Linnaeus among the Musci, the generic name and the names of the
pteridophyte species included by Linnaeus under it were validly published in 1753.
13.3. For nomenclatural purposes, a name is treated as pertaining to a non-fossil taxon unless its type is fossil in origin
(Art. 1.2). Fossil material is distinguished from non-fossil material by stratigraphic relations at the site of original
occurrence. In cases of doubtful stratigraphic relations, and for all diatoms, provisions for non-fossil taxa apply.
13.4. Generic names that appear in Linnaeus’s Species plantarum, ed. 1 (1753) and ed. 2 (1762–1763), are associated
with the first subsequent description given under those names in Linnaeus’s Genera plantarum, ed. 5 (1754) and ed.
6 (1764). The spelling of the generic names included in Species plantarum, ed. 1, is not to be altered because a different
spelling has been used in Genera plantarum, ed. 5.
Note 1. The two volumes of Linnaeus’s Species plantarum, ed. 1 (1753), which appeared in May and August, 1753, respectively,
are treated as having been published simultaneously on 1 May 1753 (Art. 13.1).
Ex. 3. The generic names Thea L. (Sp. Pl.: 515. 24 May 1753; Gen. Pl., ed. 5: 232. 1754) and Camellia L. (Sp. Pl.: 698. 16 Aug 1753; Gen. Pl., ed.
5: 311. 1754) are treated as having been published simultaneously on 1 May 1753. Under Art. 11.5, the combined genus bears the name
Camellia because Sweet (Hort. Suburb. Lond.: 157. 1818), who was the first to unite the two genera, chose that name and cited Thea as a
synonym.
Ex. 4. Sideroxylon L. (Sp. Pl.: 192. 1753) is not to be altered because Linnaeus spelled it ‘Sideroxylum’ in Genera plantarum, ed. 5 (p. 89. 1754);
usage of Brunfelsia L. (Sp. Pl.: 191. 1753, orth. cons., ‘Brunsfelsia’), which Linnaeus adopted in 1754, has been made possible only through
conservation (see App. III).
45
ARTICLE 14
14.1. In order to avoid disadvantageous nomenclatural changes entailed by the strict application of the rules, and
especially of the principle of priority in starting from the dates given in Art. 13 and F.1, this Code provides, in App. II–
IV, lists of names of families, genera, and species that are conserved (nomina conservanda) (see Rec. 50E.1). Conserved
names are legitimate even though initially they may have been illegitimate. The name of a subdivision of a genus or of
an infraspecific taxon may be conserved with a conserved type and listed in App. III and IV, respectively, when it is the
basionym or replaced synonymof a name of a genus or species that could not continue to be used in its current sense
without conservation.
14.2. Conservation aims at retention of those names that best serve stability of nomenclature.
14.3. The application of both conserved and rejected names is determined by nomenclatural types. The type of the
species name cited as the type of a conserved generic name may, if desirable, be conserved and listed in App. IV.
Application of conserved and rejected names of nothogenera is determined by a statement of parentage (Art. H.9.1).
14.4. A conserved name of a family or genus is conserved against all other names at the same rank with the same type
(homotypic, i.e. nomenclatural, synonyms, which are to be rejected) whether or not these are cited in the
corresponding list as rejected names, and against those names with different types (heterotypic, i.e. taxonomic,
synonyms) that are listed as rejected. A conserved name of a species is conserved against all names listed as rejected,
1
and against all combinations based on the rejected names.

[footnote] The International Code of Zoological Nomenclature uses the terms “objective synonym” and “subjective synonym” for homotypic and
1
heterotypic synonym, respectively.

Note 1. Except as by Art. 14.14 (see also Art. 14.9), the Code does not provide for conservation of a name against itself, i.e. against
an “isonym” (Art. 6 Note 2: the same name with the same type but with a different place and date of valid publication and perhaps
with a different author). Only the earliest known isonyms are listed in App. IIA, III, and IV.
Note 2. A species name listed as conserved or rejected in App. IV may have been published as the name of a new taxon, or as a
combination based on an earlier name. Rejection of a name based on an earlier name does not in itself preclude the use of the
earlier name because that name is not “a combination based on a rejected name” (Art. 14.4).
Ex. 1. Rejection of Lycopersicon lycopersicum (L.) H. Karst. (Deut. Fl.: 966. 1882) in favour of L. esculentum Mill. (Gard. Dict., ed. 8: Lycopersicon
No. 1. 1768) does not preclude the use of the homotypic Solanum lycopersicum L. (Sp. Pl.: 185. 1753).
14.5. When a conserved name competes with one or more names based on different types and against which it is not
explicitly conserved, the earliest of the competing names is adopted in accordance with Art. 11, except for the
conserved family names listed in App. IIB, which are conserved against unlisted names.
Ex. 2. If Mahonia Nutt. (Gen. N. Amer. Pl. 1: 211. 1818) is united with Berberis L. (Sp. Pl.: 330. 1753), the combined genus will bear the prior
name Berberis, although Mahonia is conserved and Berberis is not.
Ex. 3. Nasturtium W. T. Aiton (Hort. Kew., ed. 2, 4: 109. 1812) was conserved only against the homonym Nasturtium Mill. (Gard. Dict. Abr.,
ed. 4: Nasturtium. 1754) and the homotypic (nomenclatural) synonym Cardaminum Moench (Methodus: 262. 1794); consequently if reunited
with Rorippa Scop. (Fl. Carniol.: 520. 1760) it must bear the name Rorippa.
Ex. 4. Combretaceae R. Br. (Prodr.: 351. 1810) is conserved against the unlisted earlier heterotypic name Terminaliaceae J. St.-Hil. (Expos.
Fam. Nat. 1: 178. 1805).
14.6. When a name of a taxon has been conserved against an earlier heterotypic synonym, the latter is to be restored,
subject to Art. 11, if it is considered the name of a taxon at the same rank distinct from that of the conserved name.
Ex. 5. The generic name Luzuriaga Ruiz & Pav. (Fl. Peruv. 3: 65. 1802) is conserved against the earlier names Enargea Banks ex Gaertn. (Fruct.
Sem. Pl. 1: 283. 1788) and Callixene Comm. ex Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 41. 1789). If, however, Enargea is considered to be a separate genus, the name
Enargea is retained for it.
Ex. 6. To preserve the name Roystonea regia (Kunth) O. F. Cook (in Science, n.s., 12: 479. 1900), its basionym Oreodoxa regia Kunth (in
Humboldt & al., Nov. Gen. Sp. 1, ed. qu.: 305; ed. fol.: 244. 1816) is conserved against Palma elata W. Bartram (Travels Carolina: iv, 115–116.
46
1791). However, the name R. elata (W. Bartram) F. Harper (in Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 59: 29. 1946) can be used for a species distinct from
R. regia.
14.7. A rejected name, or a combination based on a rejected name, may not be restored for a taxon that includes the
type of the corresponding conserved name.
Ex. 7. Enallagma (Miers) Baill. (Hist. Pl. 10: 54. 1888) is conserved against Dendrosicus Raf. (Sylva Tellur.: 80. 1838), but not against Amphitecna
Miers (in Trans. Linn. Soc. London 26: 163. 1868); if Enallagma, Dendrosicus, and Amphitecna are united, the combined genus must bear the
name Amphitecna, although the latter is not explicitly conserved against Dendrosicus.
14.8. The listed type and spelling of a conserved name (evident misspellings excepted) may only be changed by the
procedure outlined in Art. 14.12.
Ex. 8. Bullock & Killick (in Taxon 6: 239. 1957) published a proposal that the listed type of Plectranthus L’Hér. be changed from P. punctatus
(L. f.) L’Hér. To P. fruticosus L’Hér. This proposal was approved by the appropriate committees and by an International Botanical Congress
(see App. III).
14.9. A name may be conserved with a different type from that designated by the author or determined by application
of the Code (see also Art. 10.4). Such a name may be conserved either (a) from its place of valid publication (even
though the type may not then have been included in the named taxon) or (b)from a later publication by an author who
did include the type as conserved. In the second case the name as conserved is treated as validly published in the later
publication, whether or not the name as conserved was accompanied by a description or diagnosis of the taxon named;
the original name and the name as conserved are treated as homonyms (see Art. 14.10).
Ex. 9. Bromus sterilis L. (Sp. Pl.: 77. 1753) has been conserved from its place of valid publication even though its conserved type, a specimen
(Hubbard 9045, E) collected in 1932, was not originally included in Linnaeus’s species.
Ex. 10. Protea L. (Sp. Pl.: 94. 1753) did not include the conserved type of the generic name, P. cynaroides (L.) L. (Mant. Pl.: 190. 1771), which
in 1753 was placed in the genus Leucadendron. Protea was therefore conserved from the 1771 publication, and Protea L. (Mant. Pl.: 187.
1771), although not intended to be a new generic name and still including the original type elements, is treated as if it were a validly published
homonym of Protea L. (1753).
14.10. A conserved name, with any corresponding autonym, is conserved against all earlier homonyms. An earlier
homonym of a conserved name is not made illegitimate by that conservation but is unavailable for use; if not otherwise
illegitimate, it may serve as basionym of another name or combination based on the same type (see also Art. 55.3).
Ex. 11. The generic name Smithia Aiton (Hort. Kew. 3: 496. 1789), conserved against Damapana Adans. (Fam. Pl. 2: 323, 548. 1763), is
conserved automatically against the earlier, listed homonym Smithia Scop. (Intr. Hist. Nat.: 322. 1777). – Blumea DC. (in Arch. Bot. (Paris) 2:
514. 1833) is conserved automatically against Blumea Rchb. (Consp. Regn. Veg.: 209. 1828–1829), although the latter name is not listed
alongside the former in App. III.
14.11. A name may be conserved in order to preserve a particular spelling or gender. A name so conserved is to be
attributed without change of date to the author who validly published it, not to an author who later introduced the
conserved spelling or gender.
Ex. 12. The spelling Rhodymenia, used by Montagne (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 2, 12: 44. 1839), has been conserved against the original
spelling ‘Rhodomenia’, used by Greville (Alg. Brit.: xlviii, 84. 1830). The name is cited as Rhodymenia Grev. (1830).
Note 3. The date upon which a name was conserved does not affect its priority (Art. 11), which is determined only on the basis of
the date of its valid publication (Art. 32–45; see also Art. F.4, F.5.1, F.5.2, and H.9; but see Art. 14.9 and 14.14).
14.12. The lists of conserved names will remain permanently open for additions and changes. Any proposal of an
additional name must be accompanied by a detailed statement of the cases both for and against conservation. Such
proposals must be submitted to the General Committee, which will refer them for examination to the specialist
committees for the various taxonomic groups (see Rec. 14A, Div. III Prov. 2.2, 7.9, and 7.10; see also Art. 34.1 and
56.2).
47
14.13. Entries of conserved names may not be deleted.

Ex. 13. In the Seattle Code of 1972 (p. 254), “Alternaria C. G. Nees ex Wallroth, Fl. Crypt. Germ. 148. 1833” was listed as conserved against
“Macrosporium E. M. Fries, Syst. Mycol. 3: 373. 1832” because Macrosporium Fr. Antedated Alternaria “C. G. Nees ex Wallroth” in relation
to the then starting-point work for fungi (Fries, Systema mycologicum, vol. 1, 1 January 1821). Conservation became unnecessary following
the abolition of later starting-point dates for fungi at the Sydney Congress of 1981 and in the Sydney Code of 1983, which resulted in Alternaria
being recognized as having been validly published by Nees (Syst. Pilze: 72. 1816). In addition, it was realized that Alternaria had been adopted
by Fries in the introduction to the sanctioning work (Syst. Mycol. 1: xlvi. 1821; Art. F.3.1). Because the entry cannot be deleted, Alternaria
Nees : Fr. continues to be listed in App. III, but without a corresponding rejected name.
14.14. The places of publication cited for conserved names of families in App. IIB are treated as correct in all
circumstances and consequently are not to be changed, except under the provisions of Art. 14.12, even when
otherwise such a name would not be validly published or when it is a later isonym.
14.15. When a proposal for the conservation (Art. 14) or protection (Art. F.2) of a name has been approved by the
General Committee after study by the specialist committee for the taxonomic group concerned, retention of that
name as approved is authorized subject to the decision of a later International Botanical Congress (see also Art. 34.2
and 56.3). Before 1 January 1954, conservation takes effect on the date of decision by the relevant International
Botanical Congress. On or after that date, conservation or protection takes effect on the date of effective publication
(Art. 29–31) of the General Committee’s approval.
Note 4. The effective dates for International Botanical Congress (IBC) decisions on conservation of names made before 1954 are
as follows:
(a) Conservation of names in the 1906 Vienna Rules became effective on 17 June 1905 at the II IBC in Vienna (see Verh.
Int. Bot. Kongr. Wien 1905: 135–137. 1906).
(b) Conservation of names in the 1912 Brussels Rules became effective on 18 May 1910 at the III IBC in Brussels (see
Actes Congr. Int. Bot. Bruxelles 1910: 67–83. 1912).
(c) Conservation of names in the 1952 Stockholm Code include: (1) those of the Special Committee for Phanerogamae
and Pteridophyta, which became effective on 1 June 1940 under the authority of the VI IBC held in Amsterdam in
1935 (see Bull. Misc. Inform. Kew 1940: 81–134); (2) those of the Special Committee for Fungi, which became
effective on 20 July 1950 at the VII IBC in Stockholm (see Regnum Veg. 1: 549–550. 1953).
The date, from 1954 onward, of the General Committee’s approval of a particular conservation or protection proposal
can be determined by consulting the International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants Appendices
database (http://botany.si.edu/references/codes/props/index.cfm).
Recommendation 14A
14A.1. When a proposal for the conservation (Art. 14) or protection (Art. F.2) of a name has been referred to the appropriate
specialist committee for study, authors should follow existing usage of names as far as possible pending the General Committee’s
recommendation on the proposal (see also Rec. 34A and 56A).
ARTICLE 15
(SANCTIONED NAMES)
SEE ART. F.3 IN CHAPTER F

48
CHAPTER III
NOMENCLATURE OF TAXA ACCORDING TO THEIR RANK
SECTION 1
NAMES OF TAXA ABOVE THE RANK OF FAMILY
ARTICLE 16
16.1. The name of a taxon above the rank of family is treated as a noun in the plural and is written with an initial capital
letter. Such names may be either (a)automatically typified names (Art. 10.10), formed from a generic name in the
same way as family names (Art. 18.1; but see Art. 16.4) by adding the appropriate rank-denoting termination (Art. 16.3
and 17.1), preceded by the connecting vowel -o- if the termination begins with a consonant; or (b)descriptive names,
not so formed, which may be used unchanged at different ranks (see also Art. 6 Note 3).
Ex. 1. Automatically typified names above the rank of family: Lycopodiophyta, formed from Lycopodium; Magnoliophyta, from Magnolia;
Gnetophytina, from Gnetum; Pinopsida, from Pinus; Marattiidae, from Marattia; Caryophyllidae and Caryophyllales, from Caryophyllus;
Fucales, from Fucus; Bromeliineae, from Bromelia.
Ex. 2. Descriptive names above the rank of family: Angiospermae, Anthophyta, Ascomycetes, Ascomycota, Ascomycotina, Centrospermae,
Chlorophyta, Coniferae, Enantioblastae, Gymnospermae, Lycophyta, Parietales.
16.2. For automatically typified names, the name of the subdivision or subphylum that includes the type of the
adopted name of a division or phylum, the name of the subclass that includes the type of the adopted name of a class,
and the name of the suborder that includes the type of the adopted name of an order are to be formed from the same
generic name (see also Art. 16.4) as the corresponding higher-ranked name.
Ex. 3. Pteridophyta Schimp. (in Zittel, Handb. Palaeont., Palaeophyt.: 1. 1879) and Pteridophytina B. Boivin (in Bull. Soc. Bot. France 103: 493.
1956); Gnetopsida Prantl (Lehrb. Bot., ed. 5: 194. 1883) and Gnetidae Pax (in Prantl, Lehrb. Bot., ed. 9: 210. 1894); Liliales Perleb (Lehrb.
Naturgesch. Pflanzenr.: 129. 1826) and Liliineae Rchb. (Deut. Bot. Herb.-Buch: xxxvii. 1841).
16.3. Automatically typified names end as follows: the name of a division or phylum ends in -phyta, unless it is referable
to the fungi in which case it ends in -mycota; the name of a subdivision or subphylum ends in -phytina, unless it is
referable to the fungi in which case it ends in -mycotina; the name of a class in the algae ends in -phyceae, and of a
subclass in -phycidae; the name of a class in the fungi ends in -mycetes, and of a subclass in -mycetidae; the name of
a class in the plants ends in -opsida, and of a subclass in -idea (but not -viridae). Automatically typified names with a
termination not in accordance with this rule or Art. 17.1 are to be corrected, without change of authorship or date of
publication (see Art. 32.2). However, if such names are published with a non-Latin termination they are not validly
published.
Ex. 4. ‘Cacteae’ Juss. ex Bercht. & J. Presl (Přir. Rostlin: 238. 1820, formed from Cactus L.) and ‘Coriales’ Lindl. (Nix. Pl.: 11. 1833, formed from
Coriaria L.), both published for taxa at the rank of order, are to be corrected to Cactales Juss. ex Bercht. & J. Presl (1820) and Coriariales Lindl.
(1833), respectively.
Ex. 5. Ptéridées (Kirschleger, Fl. Alsace 2: 379. 1853–Jul 1857), published for a taxon at the rank of order, is not to be accepted as “Pteridales
Kirschl.” because it has a French rather than a Latin termination. The name Pteridales was later validly published by Doweld (Prosyll.
Tracheophyt., Tent. Syst. Pl. Vasc.: xi. 2001).
Note 1. The terms “divisio” and “phylum”, and their equivalents in modern languages, are treated as referring to one and the
same rank (Art. 3.1). When “divisio” and “phylum” are used simultaneously to denote different non-consecutive ranks, this is to
be treated as informal usage of rank-denoting terms (see Art. 37.8; see also Art. 37 Note 1).
16.4. At ranks higher than order, the word elements -clad-, -cocc-, -cyst-, -monad-, -mycet-, -nemat-, or -phyt-, which
are genitive singular stems of the second part of a name of an included genus, may be omitted before the rank-
denoting termination. Such names are automatically typified when their derivation is obvious or is indicated in the
protologue.
Ex. 6. The name Raphidophyceae Chadef. ex P. C. Silva (in Regnum Veg. 103: 78. 1980) was indicated by its author to be formed from
Raphidomonas F. Stein (Organismus Infus. 3(1): x, 69, 152, 153. 1878). The name Saccharomycetes G. Winter (Rabenh. Krypt.-Fl., ed. 2, 1(1):
49
32. 1880) is regarded as being formed from Saccharomyces Meyen (in Arch. Naturgesch. 4: 100. 1838). The name Trimerophytina H. P. Banks
(in Taxon 24: 409. 1975) was indicated by its author to be formed from Trimerophyton Hopping (in Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, B, Biol. 66: 25.
1956).
Note 2. The principle of priority does not apply above the rank of family (Art. 11.10; but see Rec. 16A).
Recommendation 16A
16A.1. In choosing among typified names for a taxon above the rank of family, authors should generally follow the principle of
priority.
ARTICLE 17
17.1. Automatically typified names of orders or suborders are to end in -ales (but not -virales) and -ineae, respectively
(see Art. 16.3 and 32.2).
17.2. Names intended as names of orders, but published with their rank denoted by a term such as “cohors”, “nixus”,
“alliance”, or “Reihe” instead of “order”, are treated as having been published as names of orders.
Recommendation 17A
17A.1. A new name should not be published for an order for which a name already exists that is based on the same type as the
name of an included family.
SECTION 2
NAMES OF FAMILIES AND SUBFAMILIES, TRIBES AND SUBTRIBES
ARTICLE 18
18.1. The name of a family is a plural adjective used as a noun; it is formed from the genitive singular of a name of an
included genus by replacing the genitive singular inflection (Latin -ae, -i, -us, -is; transcribed Greek -ou, -os, -es, -as,
or -ous, and its equivalent -eos) with the termination -aceae (but see Art. 18.5). For generic names of non-classical
origin, when analogy with classical names is insufficient to determine the genitive singular, -aceae is added to the full
word. Likewise, when formation from the genitive singular of a generic name results in a homonym, -aceae may be
added to the nominative singular. For generic names with alternative genitives the one implicitly used by the original
author must be maintained, except that the genitive of names ending in -opsis is always -opsidis.
Note 1. The generic name from which the name of a family is formed provides the type of the family name (Art. 10.6) but is not a
basionym of that name (Art. 6.10; see Art. 41.2(a)).
Ex. 1. Family names formed from a generic name of classical origin: Rosaceae (from Rosa, genitive singular: Rosae), Salicaceae (from Salix,
Salicis), Plumbaginaceae (from Plumbago, Plumbaginis), Rhodophyllaceae (from Rhodophyllus, Rhodophylli), Rhodophyllidaceae (from
Rhodophyllis, Rhodophyllidos), Sclerodermataceae (from Scleroderma Sclerodermatos), Aextoxicaceae (from Aextoxicon, Aextoxicou),
Potamogetonaceae (from Potamogeton, Potamogetonos).
Ex. 2. Family names formed from a generic name of non-classical origin: Nelumbonaceae (from Nelumbo, Nelumbonis, declined by analogy
with umbo, umbonis), Ginkgoaceae (from Ginkgo, indeclinable).
Note 2. The name of a family may be formed from any validly published name of an included genus, even one that is unavailable
for use, although the provisions of Art. 18.3 apply if the generic name is illegitimate.
Ex. 3. Cactaceae Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 310. 1789) formed from Cactus L. (Sp. Pl.: 466. 1753), a generic name now rejected in favour of Mammillaria
Haw. (Syn. Pl. Succ.: 177. 1812).
18.2. Names intended as names of families, but published with their rank denoted by one of the terms “order” (ordo)
or “natural order” (ordo naturalis) instead of “family”, are treated as having been published as names of families (see
also Art. 19.2), unless this treatment would result in a taxonomic sequence with a misplaced rank-denoting term.
50
Ex. 4. Cyperaceae Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 26. 1789), Lobeliaceae Juss. (in Bonpland, Descr. Pl. Malmaison: [19]. 1813), and Xylomataceae Fr.
(Scleromyceti Sveciae 2: p. post titulum. 1820) were published as “ordo Cyperoideae”, “ordo naturalis Lobeliaceae”, and “ordo Xylomaceae”,
respectively.
Note 3. If the term “family” is simultaneously used to denote a rank different from “order” or “natural order”, a name published
for a taxon at the latter rank cannot be considered to have been published as the name of a family.
*Ex. 5. Names published at the rank of order (“řad”) by Berchtold & Presl (O přirozenosti rostlin … 1820) are not to be treated as having been
published at the rank of family, because the term family (“čeleď”) was sometimes used to denote a rank below order.
18.3. A name of a family formed from an illegitimate generic name is illegitimate unless and until it or the generic
name from which it is formed is conserved or protected.
Ex. 6. Caryophyllaceae Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 299. 1789), nom. cons., formed from Caryophyllus Mill. non L.; Winteraceae R. Br. ex Lindl. (Intr. Nat.
Syst. Bot.: 26. 1830), nom. cons., formed from Wintera Murray, an illegitimate replacement name for Drimys J. R. Forst. & G. Forst.
Ex. 7. Nartheciaceae Fr. ex Bjurzon (Skand. Vaxtfam.: 64. 1846), formed from Narthecium Huds., nom. cons. (Fl. Angl.: 127. 1762), became
legitimate when the generic name was conserved against its earlier homonym Narthecium Gérard (Fl. Gallo-Prov.: 142. 1761) (see App. III).
18.4. When a name of a family has been published with an improper Latin termination, the termination must be
changed to conform with Art. 18.1, without change of authorship or date (see Art. 32.2). However, if such a name is
published with a non-Latin termination, it is not validly published.
Ex. 8. ‘Coscinodisceae’ Kütz. (Kieselschal. Bacill.: 130. 1844), published to designate a family, is to be accepted as Coscinodiscaceae Kütz.
(1844) and not attributed to De Toni, who first used the correct termination (in Notarisia 5: 915. 1890).
Ex. 9. ‘Atherospermeae’ R. Br. (in Flinders, Voy. Terr. Austral. 2: 553. 1814), published to designate a family, is to be accepted as
Atherospermataceae R. Br. (1814) and not attributed to Airy Shaw (in Willis, Dict. Fl. Pl., ed. 7: 104. 1966), who first used the correct spelling,
nor to Lindley (Veg. Kingd.: 300. 1846), who used the spelling ‘Atherospermaceae’.
Ex. 10. Tricholomées (Roze in Bull. Soc. Bot. France 23: 49. 1876), published to designate a family, is not to be accepted as “Tricholomataceae
Roze” because it has a French rather than a Latin termination. The name Tricholomataceae was validly published by Pouzar (in Česká Mykol.
37: 175. 1983; see App. IIA).
18.5. The following names, of long usage, are treated as validly published: Compositae (nom. alt.: Asteraceae; type:
Aster L.); Cruciferae (nom. alt.: Brassicaceae; type: Brassica L.); Gramineae (nom. alt.: Poaceae; type: Poa L.); Guttiferae
(nom. alt.: Clusiaceae; type: Clusia L.); Labiatae (nom. alt.: Lamiaceae; type: Lamium L.); Leguminosae (nom. alt.:
Fabaceae; type: Faba Mill. [= Vicia L.]); Palmae (nom. alt.: Arecaceae; type: Areca L.); Papilionaceae (nom. alt.:
Fabaceae; type: Faba Mill.); Umbelliferae (nom. alt.: Apiaceae; type: Apium L.). When the Papilionaceae are regarded
as a family distinct from the remainder of the Leguminosae, the name Papilionaceae is conserved against
Leguminosae.
18.6. The use, as alternatives, of the eight family names indicated as “nom. alt.” (nomen alternativum) in Art. 18.5 is
authorized.
ARTICLE 19
19.1. The name of a subfamily is a plural adjective used as a noun; it is formed in the same manner as the name of a
family (Art. 18.1) but by adding the termination -oideae instead of -aceae.
19.2. Names intended as names of subfamilies, but published with their rank denoted by the term “suborder”
(subordo) instead of subfamily, are treated as having been published as names of subfamilies (see also Art. 18.2),
unless this would result in a taxonomic sequence with a misplaced rank-denoting term.
Ex. 1. Cyrilloideae Torr. & A. Gray (Fl. N. Amer. 1: 256. 1838) and Sphenocleoideae Lindl. (Intr. Nat. Syst. Bot., ed. 2: 238. 1836) were published
as “suborder Cyrilleae” and “Sub-Order ? Sphenocleaceae”, respectively.
Note 1. If the term “subfamily” is simultaneously used to denote a rank different from “suborder”, a name published for a taxon
at the latter rank cannot be considered to have been published as the name of a subfamily.
51
19.3. The name of a tribe or subtribe is formed in the same manner as the name of a subfamily (Art. 19.1), except that
the termination is -eae for a tribe and -inae (but not -virinae) for a subtribe.
19.4. The name of any subdivision of a family that includes the type of the adopted, legitimate name of the family to
which it is assigned is to be formed from the generic name equivalent to that type (Art. 10.9; but see Art. 19.8).
Ex. 2. The type of the family name Rosaceae Juss. is Rosa L. and hence the subfamily and tribe assigned to Rosaceae that include Rosa are to
be called Rosoideae Endl. and Roseae DC., respectively.
Ex. 3. The type of the family name Gramineae Juss. (nom. alt.: Poaceae Barnhart, see Art. 18.5) is Poa L. and hence the subfamily, tribe, and
subtribe assigned to Gramineae that include Poa are to be called Pooideae Asch., Poeae R. Br., and Poinae Dumort., respectively.
Note 2. Art. 19.4 applies only to the names of those subordinate taxa that include the type of the adopted name of the family (but
see Rec. 19A.2).
Ex. 4. The type of the family name Ericaceae Juss. is Erica L. and hence the subfamily and tribe assigned to Ericaceae that include Erica are to
be called Ericoideae Endl. and EriceaeD. Don, respectively, the priority of any competing names notwithstanding. The subfamily that
includes Rhododendron L. is called Rhododendroideae Endl. However, the correct name of the tribe of Ericaceae that includes
both Rhododendron and Rhodora L. is Rhodoreae D. Don (in Edinburgh New Philos. J. 17: 152. 1834), not Rhododendreae Brongn. (Énum. Pl.
Mus. Paris: 127. 1843).
Note 3. A name of a subdivision of a family that includes the type of the adopted, legitimate name of the family to which it is
assigned, but is not formed from the generic name equivalent to that type, is incorrect but may nevertheless be validly published
and may become correct in a different context.
Ex. 5. When published, the name Lippieae Endl. (Gen. Pl.: 633. 1838) was applied to a tribe of Verbenaceae J. St.-Hil. that included Verbena L.,
the type of the family name, as well as Lippia L. Although originally incorrect, Lippieae may become correct if used for a tribe
of Verbenaceae that includes Lippia but excludes Verbena.
19.5. The name of any subdivision of a family that includes the type of a name listed in App. IIB (i.e. a name of a family
conserved against all unlisted names, see Art. 14.5) is to be formed from the generic name equivalent to that type
(Art. 10.9), unless this is contrary to Art. 19.4 (see also Art. 19.8). If more than one such type is included, the correct
name is determined by precedence in App. IIB of the corresponding family names.
Ex. 6. A subfamily assigned to Rosaceae Juss. that includes Malus Mill., the type of Malaceae Small (Fl. S.E. U.S.: 495, 529. 1903) listed in App.
IIB, is to be called Maloideae C. Weber (in J. Arnold Arbor. 45: 164. 1964) unless it also includes Rosa L., i.e. the type of Rosaceae, or the type
of another name listed in App. IIB that takes precedence over Malaceae. This is so even if the subfamily also
includes Spiraea L. and/or Pyrus L. because, although Spiraeoideae Arn. (in Hooker & Arnott, Bot. Beechey Voy.: 107. 1832)
and Pyroideae Burnett (Outlines Bot.: 695, 1137. 1835) were published earlier than Maloideae, neither Spiraeaceae nor Pyraceae is listed
in App. IIB. However, if Amygdalus L. is included in the same subfamily as Malus, the name Amygdaloideae Arn. (in Hooker & Arnott, Bot.
Beechey Voy.: 107. 1832) takes precedence because Amygdalaceae Marquis (Esq. Règne Vég.: 49. 1820) is listed in App. IIB with priority
over Malaceae.
Ex. 7. Monotropaceae Nutt. (Gen. N. Amer. Pl. 1: 272. 1818) and Pyrolaceae Lindl. (Syn. Brit. Fl.: 175. 1829) are both listed in App. IIB,
but Pyrolaceae is conserved against Monotropaceae. Therefore, a subfamily including both Monotropa L. and Pyrola L. is
called Pyroloideae Beilschm. (in Flora 16(Beibl. 1): 72, 109. 1833).
19.6. A name of a subdivision of a family formed from an illegitimate generic name is illegitimate unless and until that
generic name or the corresponding family name is conserved or protected.
Ex. 8. The name Caryophylloideae Arn. (in Hooker & Arnott, Bot. Beechey Voy.: 99. 1832), formed from the illegitimate Caryophyllus Mill. non
L., is legitimate because the corresponding family name, Caryophyllaceae Juss., is conserved.
Ex. 9. Thunbergioideae T. Anderson (in Thwaites, Enum. Pl. Zeyl.: 223. 1860), formed from Thunbergia Retz., nom. cons. (in Physiogr. Sälsk.
Handl. 1(3): 163. 1780), became legitimate when the generic name was conserved against its earlier homonym Thunbergia Montin (in Kongl.
Vetensk. Acad. Handl. 34: 288. 1773) (see App. III).
19.7. When a name of a subdivision of a family has been published with an improper Latin termination, such as -eae for
a subfamily or -oideae for a tribe, the termination must be changed to accord with Art. 19.1 and 19.3, without change
of authorship or date (see Art. 32.2). However, if such a name is published with a non-Latin termination, it is not validly
published.
Ex. 10. ‘Climacieae’ Grout (Moss Fl. N. Amer. 3: 4. 1928), published to designate a subfamily, is to be accepted as Climacioideae Grout (1928).
52
Ex. 11. Melantheen (Kittel in Richard, Nouv. Elém. Bot., ed. 3, Germ. Transl.: 727. 1840), published to designate a tribe, is not to be accepted
as “Melanthieae Kitt.” because it has a German rather than a Latin termination. The name Melanthieae was validly published by Grisebach
(Spic. Fl. Rumel. 2: 377. 1846).
19.8. When the Papilionaceae are included in the family Leguminosae (nom. alt.: Fabaceae; see Art. 18.5) as a
subfamily, the name Papilionoideae may be used as an alternative to Faboideae.
Recommendation 19A
19A.1. When a family is changed to the rank of a subdivision of a family, or the inverse change occurs, and no legitimate name is
available at the new rank, the name should be retained, with only the termination (-aceae, -oideae, -eae, -inae) altered.
19A.2. When a subdivision of a family is changed to another such rank, and no legitimate name is available at the new rank, its
name, Art. 19.5 permitting, should be formed from the same generic name as the name at the former rank.
Ex. 1. The subtribe Drypetinae Griseb. (Fl. Brit. W. I.: 31. 1859) when raised to the rank of tribe was named Drypeteae Small (Man. S.E. Fl.:
775. 1933); the subtribe Antidesmatinae Müll. Arg. (in Linnaea 34: 64. 1865) when raised to the rank of subfamily was
named Antidesmatoideae Hurus. (in J. Fac. Sci. Univ. Tokyo, Sect. 3, Bot. 6: 322, 340. 1954).
SECTION 3
NAMES OF GENERA AND SUBDIVISIONS OF GENERA
ARTICLE 20
20.1. The name of a genus is a noun in the nominative singular, or a word treated as such, and is written with an initial
capital letter (see Art. 60.2). It may be taken from any source whatever, and may even be composed in an absolutely
arbitrary manner, but it must not end in -virus.
Ex. 1. Bartramia, Convolvulus, Gloriosa, Hedysarum, Ifloga (an anagram of Filago), Impatiens, Liquidambar, Manihot, Rhododendron, Rosa.
20.2. The name of a genus may not coincide with a Latin technical term in use in morphology at the time of publication
unless it was published before 1 January 1912 and was accompanied by a species name published in accordance with
the binary system of Linnaeus.
Ex. 2. “Radicula” (Hill, Brit. Herb.: 264. 1756) coincides with the Latin technical term “radicula” (radicle) and was not accompanied by a species
name in accordance with the binary system of Linnaeus. The name Radicula is correctly attributed to Moench (Methodus: 262. 1794), who
first combined it with specific epithets.
Ex. 3. Tuber F. H. Wigg. : Fr., when published in 1780, was accompanied by a binary species name (Tuber gulosorum F. H. Wigg., Prim. Fl.
Holsat.: 109. 1780) and is therefore validly published even though it coincides with a Latin technical term.
Ex. 4. The intended generic names “Lanceolatus” (Plumstead in Trans. Geol. Soc. South Africa 55: 299. 1952) and “Lobata” (Chapman in Trans.
Roy. Soc. New Zealand 80: 48. 1952) coincide with Latin technical terms and are not therefore validly published.
Ex. 5. Cleistogenes Keng (in Sinensia 5: 147. 1934) coincides with “cleistogenes”, the English plural of a technical term in use at the time of
publication. Keng’s name is validly published because the technical term is not Latin. Kengia Packer (in Bot. Not. 113: 291. 1960), published
as a replacement name for Cleistogenes, is illegitimate under Art. 52.1.
Ex. 6. Words such as “caulis”, “folium”, “radix”, “spina”, etc., cannot now be validly published as generic names.
20.3. The name of a genus may not consist of two words, unless these words are joined by a hyphen (but see Art.
60.12 for names of fossil-genera).
Ex. 7. “Uva ursi”, as originally published by Miller (Gard. Dict. Abr., ed. 4: Uva ursi. 1754), consisted of two separate words unconnected by a
hyphen, and is not therefore validly published (Art. 32.1(c)); the name is correctly attributed to Duhamel (Traité Arbr. Arbust. 2: 371. 1755)
as Uva-ursi (hyphenated when published).
Ex. 8. Names such as Quisqualis L. (formed by combining two words into one when originally published), Neves-
armondia K. Schum., Sebastiano-schaueria Nees, and Solms-laubachiaMuschl. ex Diels (all hyphenated when originally published) are validly
published.
Note 1. The names of intergeneric hybrids are formed according to the provisions of Art. H.6.
53
20.4. The following are not to be regarded as generic names:

(a) Words not intended as names.
Ex. 9. The designation “Anonymos” was applied by Walter (Fl. Carol.: 2, 4, 9, etc. 1788) to 28 different genera to indicate that they were
without names (see Sprague in Bull. Misc. Inform. Kew 7: 318–319, 331–334. 1939).
Ex. 10. “Schaenoides” and “Scirpoides”, as used by Rottbøll (Descr. Pl. Rar.: 14, 27. 1772) to indicate unnamed genera
resembling Schoenus and Scirpus that, as stated on p. 7, he intended to name later, are token words and not generic names. These unnamed
genera were subsequently named Kyllinga Rottb. (Descr. Icon. Rar. Pl.: 12. 1773), nom. cons., and FuirenaRottb. (l.c.: 70. 1773), respectively.
(b) Unitary designations of species.

Note 2. Examples such as “Leptostachys” and “Anthopogon”, listed in editions of the Code prior to the Tokyo Code of 1994 were
from publications that are now suppressed (see App. I).
Recommendation 20A
20A.1. Authors forming generic names should comply with the following:
(a) Use Latin terminations insofar as possible.
(b) Avoid names not readily adaptable to the Latin language.
(c) Not make names that are very long or difficult to pronounce in Latin.
(d) Not make names by combining words from different languages.
(e) Indicate, if possible, by the formation or ending of the name the affinities or analogies of the genus.
(f) Avoid adjectives used as nouns.
(g) Not use a name similar to or derived from the epithet in the name of one of the species of the genus.
(h) Not dedicate genera to persons quite unconnected with botany, mycology, phycology, or natural science in general.
(i) Give a feminine form to all personal generic names, whether they commemorate a man or a woman (see Rec. 60B; see also Rec.
62A.1).
(j) Not form generic names by combining parts of two existing generic names, because such names are likely to be confused with
nothogeneric names (see Art. H.6).
ARTICLE 21
21.1. The name of a subdivision of a genus is a combination of a generic name and a subdivisional epithet. A connecting
term (subgenus, sectio, series, etc.) is used to denote the rank.
Note 1. Names of subdivisions of the same genus, even if they differ in rank, are homonyms if they have the same epithet but are
based on different types (Art. 53.3), because the rank-denoting term is not part of the name.
21.2. The epithet in the name of a subdivision of a genus is either of the same form as a generic name, or a noun in
the genitive plural, or a plural adjective agreeing in gender with the generic name (see Art. 32.2), but not a noun in the
genitive singular. It is written with an initial capital letter (see Art. 60.2).
Ex. 1. Euphorbia sect. Tithymalus, Ricinocarpos sect. Anomodiscus; Pleione subg. Scopulorum; Arenaria ser. Anomalae,
Euphorbia subsect. Tenellae, Sapium subsect. Patentinervia.
Ex. 2. In “Vaccinium sect. Vitis idaea” (Koch, Syn. Fl. Germ. Helv.: 474. 1837), the intended epithet consisted of two separate words
unconnected by a hyphen; this is not therefore a validly published name (Art. 20.3 and 32.1(c); “Vitis idæa” is a pre-Linnaean, binary generic
name). The name is correctly attributed to Gray (in Mem. Acad. Arts Sci., n.s., 3: 53. 1846) as Vaccinium sect. Vitis-idaea (hyphenated when
published).
21.3. The epithet in the name of a subdivision of a genus is not to be formed from the name of the genus to which it
belongs by adding the prefix Eu- (see also Art. 22.2).
Ex. 3. Costus subg. Metacostus; Valeriana sect. Valerianopsis; but not “Carex sect. Eucarex”.
54
21.4. A name with a binary combination instead of a subdivisional epithet, but otherwise in accordance with
this Code, is treated as validly published in the form determined by Art. 21.1 without change of authorship or date.
Ex. 4. Sphagnum “b. Sph. rigida” (Lindberg in Öfvers. Förh. Kongl. Svenska Vetensk.-Akad. 19: 135. 1862) and S. sect. “Sphagna
rigida” (Limpricht, Laubm. Deutschl. 1: 116. 1885) are to be cited as Sphagnum [unranked] Rigida Lindb. and S. sect. Rigida (Lindb.) Limpr.,
respectively.
Note 2. Names of hybrids at the rank of a subdivision of a genus are formed according to the provisions of Art. H.7.
Recommendation 21A
21A.1. When it is desired to indicate the name of a subdivision of the genus to which a particular species belongs in connection
with the generic name and specific epithet, the subdivisional epithet should be placed in parentheses between the two; when
desirable, the subdivisional rank may also be indicated.
Ex. 1. Astragalus (Cycloglottis) contortuplicatus; A. (Phaca) umbellatus; Loranthus (sect. Ischnanthus) gabonensis.
Recommendation 21B
21B.1. Recommendations made for forming the name of a genus (Rec. 20A) apply equally to an epithet of a subdivision of a genus,
unless Rec. 21B.2–4 recommend otherwise.
21B.2. The epithet in the name of a subgenus or section is preferably a noun; that in the name of a subsection or lower-ranked
subdivision of a genus is preferably a plural adjective.
21B.3. Authors, when proposing new epithets for names of subdivisions of genera, should avoid those in the form of a noun when
other co-ordinate subdivisions of the same genus have them in the form of a plural adjective, and vice-versa. They should also
avoid, when proposing an epithet for a name of a subdivision of a genus, one already used for a subdivision of a closely related
genus, or one that is identical with the name of such a genus.
21B.4. When a section or a subgenus is raised to the rank of genus, or the inverse change occurs, the original name or epithet
should be retained unless the resulting name would be contrary to the Code.
ARTICLE 22
22.1. The name of any subdivision of a genus that includes the type of the adopted, legitimate name of the genus to
which it is assigned is to repeat that generic name unaltered as its epithet, not followed by an author citation (see Art.
46). Such names are autonyms (Art. 6.8; see also Art. 7.7).
Ex. 1. The subgenus that includes the type of the name Rhododendron L. is to be named Rhododendron L. subg. Rhododendron.
Ex. 2. The subgenus that includes the type of Malpighia L. (M. glabra L.) is to be called M. subg. Malpighia, not M. subg. Homoiostylis Nied.;
and the section that includes the type of Malpighia is to be called M. sect. Malpighia, not M. sect. Apyrae DC.
Note 1. Art. 22.1 applies only to the names of those subordinate taxa that include the type of the adopted name of the genus (but
see Rec. 22A).
Ex. 3. The correct name of the subgenus of the genus Solanum L. that includes S. pseudocapsicum L., the type
of S. sect. Pseudocapsicum (Medik.) Roem. & Schult. (Syst. Veg. 4: 569 (‘Pseudocapsica’), 584 (‘Pseudo-Capsica’). 1819), if considered distinct
from S. subg. Solanum, is S. subg. Minon Raf. (Autikon Bot.: 108. 1840), the earliest legitimate name at that rank, and
not “S. subg. Pseudocapsicum”.
22.2. A name of a subdivision of a genus that includes the type (i.e. the original type or all elements eligible as type or
the previously designated type) of the adopted, legitimate name of the genus is not validly published unless its epithet
repeats the generic name unaltered. For the purposes of this provision, explicit indication that the nomenclaturally
typical element is included is considered as equivalent to inclusion of the type, whether or not it has been previously
designated (see also Art. 21.3).
Ex. 4. “Dodecatheon sect. Etubulosa” (Knuth in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV. 237 (Heft 22): 234. 1905) was not validly published because it was
proposed for a section that included D. meadiaL., the original type of the generic name Dodecatheon L.
Ex. 5. Cactus [unranked] Melocactus L. (Gen. Pl., ed. 5: 210. 1754) was proposed for one of four unranked (Art. 37.3), named subdivisions of
the genus Cactus, comprising C. melocactusL. (its type under Art. 10.8) and C. mammillaris L. It is validly published even
though C. mammillaris was subsequently designated as the type of Cactus L. (by Coulter in Contr. U. S. Natl. Herb. 3: 95. 1894).
55
22.3. The first instance of valid publication of a name of a subdivision of a genus under a legitimate generic name
automatically establishes the corresponding autonym (see also Art. 11.6 and 32.3).
Ex. 6. Publication of Tibetoseris sect. Simulatrices Sennikov (in Komarovia 5: 91. 2008) automatically established the
autonym Tibetoseris Sennikov sect. Tibetoseris. Publication of Pseudoyoungia sect. Simulatrices (Sennikov) D. Maity & Maiti (in Compositae
Newslett. 48: 31. 2010) automatically established the autonym Pseudoyoungia D. Maity & Maiti sect. Pseudoyoungia.
22.4. The epithet in the name of a subdivision of a genus may not repeat unchanged the correct name of the genus
unless the two names have the same type.
22.5. The epithet in the name of a subdivision of a genus may not repeat unchanged the generic name if the latter is
illegitimate.
Ex. 7. When Kuntze (in Post & Kuntze, Lex. Gen. Phan.: 106. 1903) published Caulinia sect. Hardenbergia (Benth.) Kuntze
under Caulinia Moench (Suppl. Meth.: 47. 1802), a later homonym of Caulinia Willd. (in Mém. Acad. Roy. Sci. Hist. (Berlin) 1798: 87. 1801),
he did not establish the autonym “Caulinia sect. Caulinia”.
Recommendation 22A
22A.1. A section including the type of the correct name of a subgenus, but not including the type of the correct name of the genus,
should, where there is no obstacle under the rules, be given a name with the same epithet and type as the subgeneric name.
22A.2. A subgenus not including the type of the correct name of the genus should, where there is no obstacle under the rules, be
given a name with the same epithet and type as the correct name of one of its subordinate sections.
Ex. 1. When Brizicky raised Rhamnus sect. Pseudofrangula Grubov to the rank of subgenus, instead of using a new epithet he named the
taxon R. subg. Pseudofrangula (Grubov) Brizicky so that the type of both names is the same.
Recommendation 22B
22B.1. When publishing a name of a subdivision of a genus that will also establish an autonym, the author should mention that
autonym in the publication.
SECTION 4
NAMES OF SPECIES
ARTICLE 23
23.1. The name of a species is a binary combination consisting of the name of the genus followed by a single specific
epithet in the form of an adjective, a noun in the genitive, or a word in apposition (see also Art. 23.6). If an epithet
consisted originally of two or more words, these are to be united or hyphenated. An epithet not so joined when
originally published is not to be rejected but, when used, is to be united or hyphenated, as specified in Art. 60.11.
23.2. The epithet in the name of a species may be taken from any source whatever, and may even be composed
arbitrarily (but see Art. 60.1).
Ex. 1. Adiantum capillus-veneris, Atropa bella-donna, Cornus sanguinea, Dianthus monspessulanus, Embelia sarasiniorum, Fumaria
gussonei, Geranium robertianum, Impatiens noli-tangere, Papaver rhoeas, Spondias mombin (an indeclinable epithet), Uromyces fabae.
23.3. Symbols forming part of specific epithets proposed by Linnaeus do not prevent valid publication of the relevant
names but must be transcribed.
Ex. 2. Scandix ‘pecten ♀’ L. is to be transcribed as Scandix pecten-veneris; Veronica ‘anagallis ’ L. is to be transcribed as Veronica anagallis-
aquatica.
56
23.4. The specific epithet, with or without the addition of a transcribed symbol, may not exactly repeat the generic
name (a designation formed by such repetition is a tautonym).
Ex. 3. “Linaria linaria” and “Nasturtium nasturtium-aquaticum” are tautonyms and cannot be validly published.
Ex. 4. Linum radiola L. (Sp. Pl.: 281. 1753) when transferred to Radiola Hill may not be named “Radiola radiola”, as was done by Karsten (Deut.
Fl.: 606. 1882), because that combination is a tautonym and cannot be validly published. The next earliest name, L. multiflorum Lam. (Fl.
Franç. 3: 70. 1779), is an illegitimate superfluous name for L. radiola. Under Radiola, the species has been given the legitimate
name R. linoides Roth (Tent. Fl. Germ. 1: 71. 1788).
23.5. The specific epithet, when adjectival in form and not used as a noun, agrees with the gender of the generic name;
when the epithet is a noun in apposition or a genitive noun, it retains its own gender and termination irrespective of
the gender of the generic name. Epithets not conforming to this rule are to be corrected (see Art. 32.2) to the proper
form of the termination (Latin or transcribed Greek) of the original author(s). In particular, the usage of the word
element -cola as an adjective is a correctable error.
Ex. 5. Names with Latin adjectival epithets: Helleborus niger L., Brassica nigra (L.) W. D. J. Koch, Verbascum nigrum L.; Rumex
cantabricus Rech. f., Daboecia cantabrica (Huds.) K. Koch (Vaccinium cantabricum Huds.); Vinca major L., Tropaeolum majus L.; Bromus
mollis L., Geranium molle L.; Peridermium balsameum Peck, derived from the epithet of Abies balsamea (L.) Mill. treated as an adjective.
Ex. 6. Names with transcribed Greek adjectival epithets: Brachypodium distachyon (L.) P. Beauv. (Bromus distachyos L.); Oxycoccus
macrocarpos (Aiton) Pursh (Vaccinium macrocarpon Aiton).
Ex. 7. Names with a noun for an epithet: Convolvulus cantabrica L., Gentiana pneumonanthe L., Liriodendron tulipifera L., Lythrum
salicaria L., Schinus molle L., all with epithets featuring pre-Linnaean generic names. Gloeosporium balsameae Davis, derived from the epithet
of Abies balsamea (L.) Mill. treated as a noun.
Ex. 8. Correctable errors in Latin adjectival epithets: Zanthoxylum trifoliatum L. (Sp. Pl.: 270. 1753) upon transfer to Acanthopanax (Decne. &
Planch.) Miq. (m, see Art. 62.2(a)) is correctly A. trifoliatus (L.) Voss (Vilm. Blumengärtn., ed. 3: 1: 406. 1894, ‘trifoliatum’); Mimosa
latisiliqua L. (Sp. Pl.: 519. 1753) upon transfer to Lysiloma Benth. (n) is correctly L. latisiliquum (L.) Benth. (in Trans. Linn. Soc. London 30: 534.
1875, ‘latisiliqua’); Corydalis chaerophylla DC. (Prodr. 1: 128. 1824) upon transfer to Capnoides Mill. (f, see Art. 62.4) is correctly Capnoides
chaerophylla (DC.) Kuntze (Revis. Gen. Pl. 1: 14. 1891, ‘chaerophyllum’).
Ex. 9. Correctable errors in transcribed Greek adjectival epithets: Andropogon distachyos L. (Sp. Pl.: 1046. 1753, ‘distachyon’), nom.
cons.; Bromus distachyos L. (Fl. Palaest.: 13. 1756) upon transfer to Brachypodium P. Beauv. (n) is correctly B. distachyon (L.) P. Beauv. (Ess.
Agrostogr.: 155. 1812, ‘distachyum’) or to Trachynia Link (f) is correctly T. distachyos (L.) Link (Hort. Berol. 1: 43. 1827, ‘distachya’); Vaccinium
macrocarpon Aiton (Hort. Kew. 2: 13. 1789) upon transfer to Oxycoccus Hill (m) is correctly O. macrocarpos (Aiton) Pursh (Fl. Amer. Sept. 1:
263. 1813, ‘macrocarpus’) or to Schollera Roth (f) is correctly S. macrocarpos (Aiton) Steud. (Nomencl. Bot. 746. 1821, ‘macrocarpa’).
Ex. 10. Correctable errors in epithets that are nouns: the epithet of Polygonum segetum Kunth (in Humboldt & al., Nov. Gen. Sp. 2, ed. qu.:
177. 1817) is a genitive plural noun (of the corn fields); when Small (Fl. S.E. U.S.: 378. 1903) proposed the new combination Persicaria
‘segeta’, it was a correctable error for Persicaria segetum (Kunth) Small. In Masdevallia echidnaRchb. f. (in Bonplandia 3: 69. 1855), the
epithet corresponds to the generic name of an animal; when Garay (in Svensk Bot. Tidskr. 47: 201. 1953) proposed the new
combination Porroglossum ‘echidnum’, it was a correctable error for P. echidna (Rchb. f.) Garay.
Ex. 11. Correctable error in the usage of -cola as an adjective: when Blanchard (in Rhodora 8: 170. 1906) proposed Rubus ‘amnicolus’, it was
a correctable error for R. amnicola Blanch.
23.6. The following designations are not to be regarded as species names:

(a) Designations consisting of a generic name followed by a phrase name (Linnaean “nomen specificum legitimum”)
commonly of one or more nouns and associated adjectives in the ablative case, but also including any single-word
phrase names in works in which phrase names of two or more words predominate.
Ex. 12. Smilax “caule inermi” (Aublet, Hist. Pl. Guiane 2, Tabl.: 27. 1775) is an abbreviated descriptive reference to an imperfectly known
species, which is not given a binomial in the text but referred to merely by a phrase name cited from Burman.
Ex. 13. In Miller, The gardeners dictionary … abridged, ed. 4 (1754), phrase names of two or more words largely predominate over those that
consist of a single word and that are thereby similar to Linnaean nomina trivialia (specific epithets) but are not distinguished typographically
or in any other way from other phrase names. Therefore, designations in that work such as “Alkekengi officinarum”, “Leucanthemum
vulgare”, “Oenanthe aquatica”, and “Sanguisorba minor” are not validly published names.
(b) Other designations of species consisting of a generic name followed by one or more words not intended as a specific
epithet.
Ex. 14. Viola “qualis” [of what sort] (Krocker, Fl. Siles. 2: 512, 517. 1790). Urtica “dubia?” [doubtful] (Forsskål, Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.: cxxi. 1775);
the word “dubia?” was repeatedly used in Forsskål’s work for species that could not be reliably identified.
57
Ex. 15. Atriplex “nova” (Winterl, Index Hort. Bot. Univ. Hung.: fol. A [8] recto et verso. 1788); the word “nova” (new) was here used in
connection with four different species of Atriplex.However, in Artemisia nova A. Nelson (in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 27: 274. 1900), the species
was newly distinguished from others and nova was intended as a specific epithet.
Ex. 16. Cornus “gharaf” (Forsskål, Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.: xci, xcvi. 1775) is an interim designation not intended as a species name. An interim
designation in Forsskål’s work is an original designation (for an accepted taxon and not therefore a “provisional name” as defined in Art.
36.1(a)) with an epithet-like vernacular that is not used as an epithet in the “Centuriae” part of the work. Elcaja “roka” (Forsskål, Fl. Aegypt.-
Arab.: xcv. 1775) is another example of such an interim designation; in other parts of the work (pp. c, cxvi, 127) this species is not named.
Ex. 17. In Agaricus “octogesimus nonus” and Boletus “vicesimus sextus” (Schaeffer, Fung. Bavar. Palat. Nasc. 1: t. 100. 1762; 2: t. 137. 1763),
the generic names are followed by ordinal adjectives used for enumeration. The corresponding species were given validly published
names, A. cinereus Schaeff. : Fr. and B. ungulatus Schaeff., in the final volume of the same work (l.c. 4: 100, 88. 1774).
Ex. 18. Honckeny (1782; see Art. 46 Ex. 47) used species designations such as, in Agrostis, “A. Reygeri I.”, “A. Reyg. II.”, “A. Reyg. III.” (all
referring to species described but not named in Reyger, Tent. Fl. Gedan.: 36–37. 1763), and also “A. alpina. II” for a newly described species
following after A. alpina Scop. These are informal designations used for enumeration, not validly published binomials; they may not be
expanded into, e.g., “Agrostis reygeri-prima”.
(c) Designations of species consisting of a generic name followed by two or more adjectival words in the nominative
case.
Ex. 19. “Salvia africana caerulea” (Linnaeus, Sp. Pl.: 26. 1753) and “Gnaphalium fruticosum flavum” (Forsskål, Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.: cxix. 1775)
are generic names followed by two adjectival words in the nominative case. They are not to be regarded as species names.
Ex. 20. Rhamnus ‘vitis idaea’ Burm. f. (Fl. Ind.: 61. 1768) is to be regarded as a species name because the generic name is followed by a noun
and an adjective, both in the nominative case; these words are to be hyphenated (R. vitis-idaea) under the provisions of Art. 23.1 and 60.11.
In Anthyllis ‘Barba jovis’ L. (Sp. Pl.: 720. 1753) the generic name is followed by a noun in the nominative case and a noun in the genitive case,
and they are to be hyphenated (A. barba-jovis). Likewise, Hyacinthus ‘non scriptus’ L. (Sp. Pl.: 316. 1753), where the generic name is followed
by a negative particle and a past participle used as an adjective, is corrected to H. non-scriptus, and Impatiens ‘noli tangere’ L. (Sp. Pl.: 938.
1753), where the generic name is followed by two verbs, is corrected to I. noli-tangere.
Ex. 21. In Narcissus ‘Pseudo Narcissus’ L. (Sp. Pl.: 289. 1753) the generic name is followed by a prefix (a word that cannot stand independently)
and a noun in the nominative case, and the name is to be corrected to N. pseudonarcissus under the provisions of Art. 23.1 and 60.11.
(d) Formulae designating hybrids (see Art. H.10.2).
23.7. Phrase names used by Linnaeus as specific epithets (“nomina trivialia”) are to be corrected in accordance with
later usage by Linnaeus himself (but see Art. 23.6(c)).
Ex. 22. Apocynum ‘fol. [foliis] androsaemi’ L. is cited as A. androsaemifolium L. (Sp. Pl.: 213. 1753 [corr. L., Syst. Nat., ed. 10: 946. 1759]);
and Mussaenda ‘fr. [fructu] frondoso’ L., as M. frondosa L. (Sp. Pl.: 177. 1753 [corr. L., Syst. Nat., ed. 10: 931. 1759]).
23.8. Where the status of a designation of a species is uncertain under Art. 23.6, established custom is to be followed
(Pre. 13).
*Ex. 23. Polypodium ‘F. mas’, P. ‘F. femina’, and P. ‘F. fragile’ (Linnaeus, Sp. Pl.: 1090–1091. 1753) are, in accordance with established custom,
to be treated as P. filix-mas L., P. filix-femina L., and P. fragile L., respectively. Likewise, Cambogia ‘G. gutta’ is to be treated as C. gummi-
gutta L. (Gen. Pl.: [522]. 1754). The intercalations “Trich.” [Trichomanes] and “M.”[Melilotus] in the names of Linnaean species
of Asplenium and Trifolium, respectively, are to be deleted, so that names in the form Asplenium ‘Trich. dentatum’ and Trifolium ‘M.
indica’,for example, are treated as A. dentatum L. and T. indicum L. (Sp. Pl.: 765, 1080. 1753).
Recommendation 23A
23A.1. Names of persons and also of countries and localities used in specific epithets should take the form of nouns in the
genitive (clusii, porsildiorum, saharae) or of adjectives (clusianus, dahuricus) (see also Art. 60, Rec. 60C, and 60D).
23A.2. The use of the genitive and the adjectival form of the same word to designate two different species of the same genus
should be avoided (e.g. Lysimachia hemsleyanaOliv. and L. hemsleyi Franch.).
23A.3. In forming specific epithets, authors should comply also with the following:
(a) Use Latin terminations insofar as possible.
(b) Avoid epithets that are very long or difficult to pronounce in Latin.
(c) Not make epithets by combining words from different languages.
(d) Avoid those formed of two or more hyphenated words.
(e) Avoid those that have the same meaning as the generic name (pleonasm).
58
(f) Avoid those that express a character common to all or nearly all the species of a genus.
(g) Avoid in the same genus those that are very much alike, especially those that differ only in their last letters or in the
arrangement of two letters.
(h) Avoid those that have been used before in any closely allied genus.
(i) Not adopt epithets from unpublished names found in correspondence, travellers’ notes, herbarium labels, or similar sources,
attributing them to their authors, unless these authors have approved publication (see Rec. 50G).
(j) Avoid using the names of little-known or very restricted localities unless the species is quite local.
SECTION 5
NAMES OF TAXA BELOW THE RANK OF SPECIES
(INFRASPECIFIC TAXA)
ARTICLE 24
24.1. The name of an infraspecific taxon is a combination of the name of a species and an infraspecific epithet. A
connecting term is used to denote the rank.
Ex. 1. Saxifraga aizoon subf. surculosa Engl. & Irmsch. This taxon may also be referred to as Saxifraga
aizoon var. aizoon subvar. brevifolia f. multicaulis subf. surculosa Engl. & Irmsch.; in this way a full classification of the subforma within the
species is given, not only its name.
24.2. Infraspecific epithets are formed like specific epithets and, when adjectival in form and not used as nouns, they
agree grammatically with the generic name (see Art. 23.5 and 32.2).
Ex. 2. Solanum melongena var. insanum (L.) Prain (Bengal Pl.: 746. 1903, ‘insana’).
24.3. Infraspecific names with final epithets such as genuinus, originalis, originarius, typicus, verus, and veridicus, or
with the prefix eu-, when purporting to indicate the taxon containing the type of the name of the next higher-ranked
taxon, are not validly published unless they have the same final epithet as the name of the corresponding higher-
ranked taxon (see Art. 26.2, Rec. 26A.1, and 26A.3).
Ex. 3. “Hieracium piliferum var. genuinum” (Rouy, Fl. France 9: 270. 1905) was based on “H. armerioides var. genuinum” of Arvet-Touvet
(Hieracium Alpes Franç.: 37. 1888), a designation not validly published under Art. 26.2. As circumscribed by Rouy, the taxon does not include
the type of H. piliferum Hoppe, but it does include the type of the name of the next higher-ranked taxon, H. piliferum subsp. armerioides (Arv.-
Touv.) Rouy. Therefore, “H. piliferum var. genuinum” is not a validly published name of a new variety.
Ex. 4. “Narcissus bulbocodium var. eu-praecox” and “N. bulbocodium var. eu-albidus” were not validly published by Emberger & Maire (in
Jahandiez & Maire, Cat. Pl. Maroc: 961. 1941) because they were placed, respectively, in N. bulbocodium subsp. praecox Gattef. & Maire (in
Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Afrique N. 28: 540. 1937) and N. bulbocodium subsp. albidus (Emb. & Maire) Maire (in Jahandiez & Maire, Cat. Pl. Maroc:
138. 1931) and their epithet purports inclusion of the type of the higher-ranked name in the subordinate variety.
Ex. 5. “Lobelia spicata var. originalis” (McVaugh in Rhodora 38: 308. 1936) was not validly published (see Art. 26 Ex. 1), whereas the
autonyms Galium verum L. subsp. verum and G. verum var. verum are validly published.
Ex. 6. Aloe perfoliata var. vera L. (Sp. Pl.: 320. 1753) is validly published because it does not purport to contain the type of A. perfoliata L. (l.c.
1753).
59
24.4. A name with a binary combination instead of an infraspecific epithet, but otherwise in accordance with
this Code, is treated as validly published in the form determined by Art. 24.1 without change of authorship or date.
Ex. 7. Salvia grandiflora subsp. “S. willeana” (Holmboe in Bergens Mus. Skr., ser. 2, 1(2): 157. 1914) is to be altered
to S. grandiflora subsp. willeana Holmboe.
Ex. 8. Phyllerpa prolifera var. “Ph. firma” (Kützing, Sp. Alg.: 495. 1849) is to be altered to P. prolifera var. firma Kütz.
Ex. 9. Cynoglossum cheirifolium “β. Anchusa (lanata)” (Lehmann, Pl. Asperif. Nucif.: 141. 1818), a new combination based on Anchusa
lanata L. (Syst. Nat., ed. 10, 2: 914. 1759), is to be altered to C. cheirifolium var. lanatum (L.) Lehm.
Note 1. Infraspecific taxa within different species may bear names with the same final epithet; those within one species may bear
names with the same final epithet as the names of other species (but see Rec. 24B.1).
Ex. 10. Rosa glutinosa var. leioclada H. Christ (in Boissier, Fl. Orient. Suppl.: 222. 1888) and Rosa jundzillii f. leioclada Borbás (in Math. Term.
Közlem. 16: 376, 383. 1880) are both permissible, as is Viola tricolor var. hirta Ging. (in Candolle, Prodr. 1: 304. 1824), in spite of the previous
existence of Viola hirta L. (Sp. Pl.: 934. 1753).
Note 2. Names of infraspecific taxa within the same species, even if they differ in rank, are homonyms if they have the same final
epithet but are based on different types (Art. 53.3), because the rank-denoting term is not part of the name.
Recommendation 24A
24A.1. Recommendations made for forming specific epithets (Rec. 23A) apply equally for infraspecific epithets.
Recommendation 24B
24B.1. Authors proposing new infraspecific names should avoid final epithets previously used as specific epithets in the same
genus.
24B.2. When an infraspecific taxon is raised to the rank of species, or the inverse change occurs, the final epithet of its name
should be retained unless the resulting combination would be contrary to the Code.
ARTICLE 25
25.1. For nomenclatural purposes, a species or any taxon below the rank of species is regarded as the sum of its
subordinate taxa, if any.
Ex. 1. When Montia parvifolia (DC.) Greene is treated as comprising two subspecies, the name M. parvifolia applies to the species in its
entirety, i.e. including both M. parvifolia subsp. parvifolia and M. parvifolia subsp. flagellaris (Bong.) Ferris, and its use
for M. parvifolia subsp. parvifolia alone may lead to confusion.
ARTICLE 26
26.1. The name of any infraspecific taxon that includes the type of the adopted, legitimate name of the species to
which it is assigned is to repeat the specific epithet unaltered as its final epithet, not followed by an author citation
(see Art. 46). Such names are autonyms (Art. 6.8; see also Art. 7.7).
Ex. 1. The variety that includes the type of the name Lobelia spicata Lam. is to be named Lobelia spicata Lam. var. spicata (see also Art. 24
Ex. 5).
Note 1. Art. 26.1 applies only to the names of those subordinate taxa that include the type of the adopted name of the species
(but see Rec. 26A).
26.2. A name of an infraspecific taxon that includes the type (i.e. the holotype or all syntypes or the previously
designated type) of the adopted, legitimate name of the species to which it is assigned is not validly published unless
its final epithet repeats the specific epithet unaltered. For the purpose of this provision, explicit indication that the
nomenclaturally typical element of the species is included is considered as equivalent to inclusion of the type, whether
or not it has been previously designated (see also Art. 24.3).
60
Ex. 2. The intended combination “Vulpia myuros subsp. pseudomyuros (Soy.-Will.) Maire & Weiller” was not validly published in Maire (Fl.
Afrique N. 3: 177. 1955) because it included in synonymy “F. myuros L., Sp. 1, p. 74 (1753) sensu stricto”, i.e. Festuca myuros L., the basionym
of Vulpia myuros (L.) C. C. Gmel.
Ex. 3. Linnaeus (Sp. Pl.: 3. 1753) recognized two named varieties under Salicornia europaea. Because S. europaea has neither a holotype nor
syntypes, both varietal names are validly published even though the lectotype of S. europaea (designated by Jafri & Rateeb in Jafri & El-Gadi,
Fl. Libya 58: 57. 1979) can be attributed to S. europaea var. herbacea L. (l.c. 1753) and the varietal name was subsequently lectotypified (by
Piirainen in Ann. Bot. Fenn. 28: 82. 1991) with the same specimen as the species name.
Ex. 4. Linnaeus (Sp. Pl.: 779–781. 1753) recognized 13 named varieties under Medicago polymorpha. Because M. polymorpha L. has neither
a holotype nor syntypes, all varietal names are validly published, and the lectotype subsequently designated for the species name (by Heyn
in Bull. Res. Council Israel, Sect. D, Bot., 7: 163. 1959) is not part of the original material for any of the varietal names of 1753.
26.3. The first instance of valid publication of a name of an infraspecific taxon under a legitimate species name
automatically establishes the corresponding autonym (see also Art. 11.6 and 32.3).
Ex. 5. The publication of the name Lycopodium inundatum var. bigelovii Tuck. (in Amer. J. Sci. Arts 45: 47. 1843) automatically established the
name of another variety, L. inundatumL. var. inundatum, the autonym, the type of which is that of the name L. inundatum L. (Art. 7.7).
Ex. 6. Pangalo (in Trudy Prikl. Bot. 23: 258. 1930), when describing Cucurbita mixta Pangalo, distinguished two varieties, C. mixta var.
cyanoperizona Pangalo and var. stenospermaPangalo, together encompassing the entire circumscription of the species. Although Pangalo did
not mention the autonym (see Rec. 26B.1), C. mixta var. mixta was automatically established at the same time. Because neither a holotype
nor any syntypes were indicated for C. mixta, both varietal names were validly published (see Art. 26.2). Merrick & Bates (in Baileya 23: 96,
101. 1989), in the absence of known type material, neotypified C. mixta by an element that can be attributed to C. mixta var. stenosperma.
As long as their choice of neotype is followed, under Art. 11.6 the correct name for that variety recognized
under C. mixta is C. mixta var. mixta, dating from 1930, not C. mixta var. stenosperma. When that variety is recognized
under C. argyrosperma C. Huber (Cat. Graines: 8. 1867), as was done by Merrick & Bates, its correct name is not C. argyrosperma var.
stenosperma (Pangalo) Merrick & D. M. Bates; a combination based on C. mixta is required.
Recommendation 26A
26A.1. A variety including the type of the correct name of a subspecies, but not including the type of the correct name of the
species, should, where there is no obstacle under the rules, be given a name with the same final epithet and type as the subspecific
name.
26A.2. A subspecies not including the type of the correct name of the species should, where there is no obstacle under the rules,
be given a name with the same final epithet and type as a name of one of its subordinate varieties.
26A.3. A taxon at a rank lower than variety that includes the type of the correct name of a subspecies or variety, but not the type
of the correct name of the species, should, where there is no obstacle under the rules, be given a name with the same final epithet
and type as the name of the subspecies or variety. On the other hand, a subspecies or variety that does not include the type of
the correct name of the species should not be given a name with the same final epithet as a name of one of its subordinate taxa
below the rank of variety.
Ex. 1. Fernald treated Stachys palustris subsp. pilosa (Nutt.) Epling (in Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni Veg. Beih. 8: 63. 1934) as composed of five
varieties, for one of which (that including the type of S. palustris subsp. pilosa) he made the combination S. palustris var. pilosa (Nutt.) Fernald
(in Rhodora 45: 474. 1943) because there was no legitimate varietal name available.
Ex. 2. Because there was no legitimate name available at the rank of subspecies, Bonaparte made the combination Pteridium
aquilinum subsp. caudatum (L.) Bonap. (Notes Ptérid. 1: 62. 1915), using the same final epithet that Sadebeck had used earlier in the
combination P. aquilinum var. caudatum (L.) Sadeb. (in Jahrb. Hamburg. Wiss. Anst. Beih. 14(3): 5. 1897), with both combinations based
on Pteris caudata L. Each name is legitimate, and both can be used, as was done by Tryon (in Rhodora 43: 52–54. 1941), who
treated P. aquilinum var. caudatumas one of four varieties under subsp. caudatum (see also Art. 36.3).
Recommendation 26B
26B.1. When publishing a name of an infraspecific taxon that will also establish an autonym, the author should mention that
autonym in the publication.
ARTICLE 27
27.1. The final epithet in the name of an infraspecific taxon may not repeat unchanged the epithet of the correct name
of the species to which the taxon is assigned unless the two names have the same type.
61
27.2. The final epithet in the name of an infraspecific taxon may not repeat unchanged the epithet of the species name
if that species name is illegitimate.
Ex. 1. When Honda (in Bot. Mag. (Tokyo) 41: 385. 1927) published Agropyron japonicum var. hackelianum Honda under the
illegitimate A. japonicum Honda (l.c.: 384. 1927), which is a later homonym of A. japonicum (Miq.) P. Candargy (in Arch. Biol. Vég. Pure Appl.
1: 42. 1901), he did not validly publish an autonym "A. japonicum var. japonicum" (see also Art. 55 Ex. 3).
SECTION 6
NAMES OF ORGANISMS IN CULTIVATION
ARTICLE 28
28.1. Organisms brought from the wild into cultivation retain the names that are applied to them when growing in
nature.
Note 1. Hybrids, including those arising in cultivation, may receive names as provided in Chapter H (see also Art. 11.9, 32.4,
and 50).
Note 2. Additional, independent designations for special categories of organisms used in agriculture, forestry, and horticulture
(and arising either in nature or cultivation) are dealt with in the International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants
(ICNCP), which defines the cultivar as its basic category (see Pre. 11).
Note 3. Nothing precludes the use, for cultivated organisms, of names published in accordance with the requirements of this Code.
Note 4. Epithets in names published in conformity with this Code are retained as cultivar epithets, included in single quotation
marks, under the rules of the ICNCP when it is considered appropriate to treat the taxon concerned under that Code.
Ex. 1. Mahonia japonica DC. (Syst. Nat. 2: 22. 1821) may be treated as a cultivar, which is then designated as Mahonia ‘Japonica’; Taxus
baccata var. variegata Weston (Bot. Univ. 1: 292, 347. 1770), when treated as a cultivar, is designated as Taxus baccata ‘Variegata’.
Note 5. The ICNCP also provides for the establishment of epithets differing markedly from epithets provided for under this Code.
Ex. 2. ×Disophyllum ‘Frühlingsreigen’; Eriobotrya japonica ‘Golden Ziad’ and E. japonica ‘Maamora Golden Yellow’; Phlox
drummondii ‘Sternenzauber’; Quercus frainetto ‘Hungarian Crown’.
Ex. 3. Juniperus ×pfitzeriana ‘Wilhelm Pfitzer’ (P. A. Schmidt in Folia Dendrol. 10: 292. 1998) was established for a tetraploid cultivar presumed
to result from the original cross between J. chinensis L. and J. sabina L.
CHAPTER IV
EFFECTIVE PUBLICATION
SECTION 1
CONDITIONS OF EFFECTIVE PUBLICATION
ARTICLE 29
29.1. Publication is effected, under this Code, by distribution of printed matter (through sale, exchange, or gift) to the
general public or at least to scientific institutions with generally accessible libraries. Publication is also effected by
distribution on or after 1 January 2012 of electronic material in Portable Document Format (PDF; see also Art.
62
29.3 and Rec. 29A.1) in an online publication with an International Standard Serial Number (ISSN) or an International
Standard Book Number (ISBN).
Ex. 1. The paper containing the new combination Anaeromyces polycephalus (Y. C. Chen & al.) Fliegerová & al. (Kirk in Index Fungorum 1: 1.
2012), based on Piromyces polycephalusY. C. Chen & al. (in Nova Hedwigia 75: 411. 2002), was effectively published when it was issued online
in Portable Document Format with an ISSN on 1 January 2012.
Ex. 2. Intended nomenclatural novelties by Ruck & al. (in Molec. Phylogen. Evol. 103: 155–171. 22 Jul 2016) appeared only in supplementary
material published online in Microsoft Word document format and were not therefore effectively published. These novelties were effectively
published when they appeared in Portable Document Format (Ruck & al. in Notul. Alg. 10: 1–4. 17 Aug 2016), meeting the requirements
of Art. 29.1.
Note 1. The distribution before 1 January 2012 of electronic material does not constitute effective publication.
Ex. 3. Floristic accounts of the Asteraceae in Flora of China 20–21, containing numerous nomenclatural novelties, were published online in
Portable Document Format on 25 October 2011. Because they were distributed before 1 January 2012 they were not effectively published.
Effective publication occurred when the printed version of the same volume became available on 11 November 2011.
Ex. 4. The paper in which the diatom “Tursiocola podocnemicola” was first described was distributed online on 14 December 2011 as an
“iFirst” PDF document (DOI: https://doi.org/10.1080/0269249X.2011.642498) available through the Diatom Research website (ISSN 0269-
249X, print; ISSN 2159-8347, online). Although the paper appeared online in an ISSN-bearing electronic publication in Portable Document
Format, it was distributed before 1 January 2012 and was not therefore effectively published. It did not become effectively published on 1
January 2012 merely by remaining available online. Effective publication occurred on 28 February 2012 upon distribution of the printed
version of the journal in which the name T. podocnemicola C. E. Wetzel (in Diatom Res. 27: 2. 2012) was validly published.
29.2. For the purpose of Art. 29.1, “online” is defined as accessible electronically via the World Wide Web.
29.3. Should Portable Document Format (PDF) be succeeded, a successor international standard format
communicated by the General Committee (see Div. III Prov. 7.9) is acceptable.
Note 2. Citation, for electronic material, of an inappropriate ISSN or ISBN (e.g. one that does not exist or that refers to a serial
publication or book in which that electronic material is not included, not even as a declared supplement to an included item) does
not result in effective publication under Art. 29.1.
Ex. 5. The paper by Meyer, Baquero, and Cameron in which “Dracula trigonopetala” was described as an intended new species was placed
online as a PDF/A document on 1 March 2012. There was no mention of a journal or ISSN in the document itself, but, because it was made
accessible through the homepage of OrchideenJournal (ISSN 1864-9459), it could be argued that it qualified as an “online publication with an
International Standard Serial Number” (Art. 29.1). However, the content of the paper was not presented in a format suited for publication in
the OrchideenJournal and was evidently not intended for inclusion in that journal. A new version of the paper, translated into German,
appeared in print (OrchideenJ. 19: 107–112) on 15 August 2012. Although this was effectively published, “D. trigonopetala” was not validly
published there because no Latin or English description or diagnosis was provided. (The name was later validated as D. trigonopetala Gary
Mey. & Baquero ex A. Doucette in Phytotaxa 74: 59. 9 December 2012.)
Recommendation 29A
29A.1. Publication electronically in Portable Document Format (PDF) should comply with the PDF/A archival standard (ISO 19005).
29A.2. Authors of electronic material should give preference to publications that are archived and curated, satisfying the following
criteria as far as is practical (see also Rec. 29A.1):
(a) The material should be placed in multiple trusted online digital repositories, e.g. an ISO-certified repository.
(b) Digital repositories should be in more than one area of the world and preferably on different continents.
ARTICLE 30
30.1. Publication is not effected by communication of nomenclatural novelties at a public meeting, by the placing of
names in collections or gardens open to the public, by the issue of microfilm made from manuscripts or typescripts or
other unpublished material, or by distribution of electronic material other than as described in Art. 29.
Ex. 1. Cusson announced his establishment of the genus Physospermum in a memoir read at the Société des Sciences de Montpellier in 1770,
and later in 1782 or 1783 at the Société de Médecine de Paris, but its effective publication dates from 1787 (in Hist. Soc. Roy. Méd. 5(1): 279).
63
30.2. An electronic publication is not effectively published if there is evidence within or associated with the publication
that its content is merely preliminary and was, or is to be, replaced by content that the publisher considers final, in
which case only the version with that final content is effectively published.
Ex. 2. “Rodaucea” was published in a paper first placed online on 12 January 2012 as a PDF document accessible through the website of the
journal Mycologia (ISSN 0027-5514, print; ISSN 1557-2436, online). That document had a header stating “In Press”, and on the journal website
it was qualified as “Preliminary version”, which is clear evidence that it was not considered by the publisher as final. Because the final version
of the document appeared simultaneously online and in print, a correct citation of the name is: Rodaucea W. Rossi & Santam. in Mycologia
104 (print and online): 785. 11 Jun 2012.
Ex. 3. “Lycopinae” appeared in a paper first placed online on 26 April 2012 as an “Advance Access” PDF document accessible through the
website of the American Journal of Botany(ISSN 0002-9122, print; ISSN 1537-2197, online). Because the journal website stated (May 2012)
“AJB Advance Access articles … have not yet been printed or posted online by issue” and “minor corrections may be made before the issue is
released”, this was evidently not considered the final version by the publisher. The name Lycopinae B. T. Drew & Sytsma was validly published
in Amer. J. Bot. 99: 945. 1 May 2012, when the printed volume containing it was effectively published.
Ex. 4. The paper (in S. African J. Bot. 80: 63–66; ISSN 0254-6299) in which the name Nanobubon hypogaeum J. Magee appeared was
effectively published online as a PDF document on 30 March 2012 in its “final and fully citable” form, prior to publication of the printed
version (May 2012). Papers that appeared online in the same journal under the heading “In Press Corrected Proof” are not effectively
published because the journal website clearly stated “Corrected proofs: articles that contain the authors’ corrections. Final citation details,
e.g. volume/issue number, publication year and page numbers, still need to be added and the text might change before final publication.”
Note 1. An electronic publication may be a final version even if details, e.g. volume, issue, article, or page numbers, are to be
added or changed, provided that those details are not part of the content (see Art. 30.3).
30.3. Content of an electronic publication includes that which is visible on the page, e.g. text, tables, illustrations, etc.,
but it excludes volume, issue, article, and page numbers; it also excludes external sources accessed via a hyperlink or
URL (Uniform Resource Locator).
Ex. 5. A paper describing the new genus Partitatheca and its four constituent species, accepted for the Botanical Journal of the Linnean
Society (ISSN 0024-4074, print; ISSN 1095-8339, online), was placed online on 1 February 2012 as an “Early View” PDF document with
preliminary pagination (1–29). This was evidently the version considered final by the journal’s publisher because, in the document itself, it
was declared the “Version of Record” (an expression defined by the standard NISO-RP-8-2008). Later, in the otherwise identical electronic
version published together with the printed version on 27 February 2012, the volume pagination (229–257) was added. A correct citation of
the generic name is: Partitatheca D. Edwards & al. in Bot. J. Linn. Soc. 168 (online): [2 of 29], 230. 1 Feb 2012, or just “… 168 (online): 230. 1
Feb 2012”.
Ex. 6. The new combination Rhododendron aureodorsale was made in a paper in Nordic Journal of Botany (ISSN 1756-1051, online; ISSN 0107-
055X, print), first effectively published online on 13 March 2012 in “Early View”, the “Online Version of Record published before inclusion in
an issue”, with a permanent Digital Object Identifier (DOI) but with preliminary pagination (1-EV to 3-EV). When the printed version was
published on 20 April 2012, the pagination of the electronic version was changed to 184–186 and the date of the printed version was added.
The combination can be cited as Rhododendron aureodorsale (W. P. Fang ex J. Q. Fu) Y. P. Ma & J. Nielsen in Nordic J. Bot. 30 (online): 184.
13 Mar 2012 (DOI: https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1756-1051.2011.01438.x).
Ex. 7. Two new Echinops species, including E. antalyensis, were described in Annales Botanici Fennici (ISSN 1797-2442, online; ISSN 0003-
3847, print) in a paper effectively published in its definitive form on 13 March 2012 as an online PDF document, still with preliminary
pagination ([1]–4) and the watermark “preprint”. When the printed version was published on 26 April 2012, the online document was
repaginated ([95]–98) and the watermark removed. A correct citation of the name is: E. antalyensis C. Vural in Ann. Bot. Fenn. 49 (online):
95. 13 Mar 2012.
30.4. The content of a particular electronic publication must not be altered after it is effectively published. Any such
alterations are not themselves effectively published. Corrections or revisions must be issued separately to be
effectively published.
30.5. Publication by indelible autograph before 1 January 1953 is effective. Indelible autograph produced on or after
that date is not effectively published.
30.6. For the purpose of Art. 30.5, indelible autograph is handwritten material reproduced by some mechanical or
graphic process (such as lithography, offset, or metallic etching).
Ex. 8. Léveillé, Flore du Kouy Tchéou (1914–1915), is a work lithographed from a handwritten text.
64
Ex. 9. Catalogus plantarum hispanicarum … ab A. Blanco lectarum (Webb & Heldreich, Paris, Jul 1850, folio) was effectively published as an
indelible autograph catalogue.
Ex. 10. The Journal of the International Conifer Preservation Society, vol. 5[1]. 1997 (“1998”), consists of duplicated sheets of typewritten text
with handwritten additions and corrections in several places. The handwritten portions are not effectively published because they are
indelible autograph published after 1 January 1953. Intended new combinations (e.g. “Abies koreana var. yuanbaoshanensis”, p. 53) for which
the basionym reference is handwritten are not validly published. The entirely handwritten account of a new taxon (p. 61: name, Latin
description, statement of type) is treated as not effectively published.
Ex. 11. The generic designation “Lindenia” was handwritten in ink by Bentham in the margin of copies of a published but not yet distributed
fascicle of the Plantae hartwegianae (p. 84. 1841) to replace the struck-out name Siphonia Benth., which he had discovered was a later
homonym of Siphonia Rich. ex Schreb. (Gen. Pl.: 656. 1791). Although the fascicle was then distributed, the handwritten portion was not itself
reproduced by mechanical or graphic process and is not therefore effectively published.
30.7. Publication on or after 1 January 1953 in trade catalogues or non-scientific newspapers, and on or after 1 January
1973 in seed-exchange lists, does not constitute effective publication.
30.8. The distribution on or after 1 January 1953 of printed matter accompanying specimens does not constitute
effective publication.
Note 2. If the printed matter is also distributed independently of the specimens, it is effectively published.
Ex. 12. The printed labels of Fuckel’s Fungi rhenani exsiccati (1863–1874) are effectively published even though not independently issued.
The labels antedate Fuckel’s subsequent accounts (e.g. in Jahrb. Nassauischen Vereins Naturk. 23–24. 1870).
Ex. 13. Vězda’s Lichenes selecti exsiccati (1960–1995) were issued with printed labels that were also distributed as printed fascicles; the latter
are effectively published, and nomenclatural novelties appearing in Vězda’s labels are to be cited from the fascicles.
30.9. Publication on or after 1 January 1953 of an independent non-serial work stated to be a thesis submitted to a
university or other institute of education for the purpose of obtaining a degree does not constitute effective
publication unless the work includes an explicit statement (referring to the requirements of the Code for effective
publication) or other internal evidence that it is regarded as an effective publication by its author or publisher.
Note 3. The presence of an International Standard Book Number (ISBN) or a statement of the name of the printer, publisher, or
distributor in the original printed version is regarded as internal evidence that the work was intended to be effectively published.
Ex. 14. “Meclatis in Clematis; yellow flowering Clematis species – Systematic studies in Clematis L. (Ranunculaceae), inclusive of cultonomic
aspects”, a “Proefschrift ter verkrijging van de graad van doctor … van Wageningen Universiteit” by Brandenburg, was effectively published
on 8 June 2000 because it bears the ISBN 90-5808-237-7.
Ex. 15. The thesis “Comparative investigations on the life-histories and reproduction of some species in the siphoneous green algal
genera Bryopsis and Derbesia” by Rietema, submitted to Rijksuniversiteit te Groningen in 1975, is stated to have been printed (“Druk”) by
Verenigde Reproduktie Bedrijven, Groningen and was therefore effectively published.
Ex. 16. The dissertation “Die Gattung Mycena s.l.” by Rexer, submitted to the Eberhard-Karls-Universität Tübingen, was effectively published
in 1994 because it bears the statement “Druck: Zeeb-Druck, Tübingen 7 (Hagelloch)”, referring to a commercial printer. The generic
name Roridomyces Rexer and the names of new species in Mycena, such as M. taiwanensisRexer, are therefore validly published.
Ex. 17. The thesis by Demoulin, “Le genre Lycoperdon en Europe et en Amérique du Nord”, defended in 1971, was not effectively published
because it does not contain internal evidence that it is regarded as such. Even if photocopies of it can be found in some libraries, names of
new species of Lycoperdon, e.g. “L. americanum”, “L. cokeri”, and “L. estonicum”,introduced there, were validly published in the effectively
published paper “Espèces nouvelles ou méconnues du genre Lycoperdon (Gastéromycètes)” (Demoulin in Lejeunia, ser. 2, 62: 1–28. 1972).
Ex. 18. The dissertation by Funk, “The Systematics of Montanoa Cerv. (Asteraceae)”, submitted to the Ohio State University in 1980, was not
effectively published because it does not contain internal evidence that it is regarded as such. The same applies to facsimile copies of the
dissertation printed from microfiche and distributed, on demand, from 1980 onward, by University Microfilms, Ann Arbor. The
name Montanoa imbricata V. A. Funk, introduced in the dissertation, was validly published in the effectively published paper “The
systematics of Montanoa (Asteraceae, Heliantheae)” (Funk in Mem. New York Bot. Gard. 36: 1–133. 1982).
Ex. 19. The dissertation “Revision der südafrikanischen Astereengattungen Mairia und Zyrphelis” submitted in 1990 by Ursula Zinnecker-
Wiegand to the Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität München (University of Munich) is not effectively published because it does not include an
ISBN, the name of any printer or publisher or distributor, or any statement that it was intended to be effectively published under
the Code, even though about 50 copies were distributed to other public libraries and all the other formalities for the publication of new taxa
were met. The designations in the thesis became validly published names in the effectively published paper by Ortiz & Zinnecker-Wiegand
(in Taxon 60: 1194–1198. 2011).
Recommendation 30A
30A.1. Preliminary and final versions of the same electronic publication should be clearly indicated as such when they are first
issued. The phrase “Version of Record” should only be used to indicate a final version in which the content will not change.
30A.2. To facilitate citation, final versions of electronic publications should contain final pagination.
65
30A.3. Authors and editors are strongly recommended to include page numbers on the actual pages of publications, such that if
electronic publications are printed, these page numbers are visible.
30A.4. It is strongly recommended that authors avoid publishing nomenclatural novelties in ephemeral printed matter of any kind,
in particular printed matter that is multiplied in restricted and uncertain numbers, in which the permanence of the text may be
limited, for which effective publication in terms of number of copies is not obvious, or that is unlikely to reach the general public.
Authors should also avoid publishing nomenclatural novelties in popular periodicals, in abstracting journals, or on correction slips.
Ex. 1. Kartesz provided an unpaginated printed insert titled “Nomenclatural innovations” to accompany the electronic version (1.0) of
the Synthesis of the North American flora produced on compact disk (CD-ROM, which is not effectively published under Art. 30.1). This insert,
which is effectively published under Art. 29–31, is the place of valid publication of 41 new combinations, which also appear on the disk, in an
item authored by Kartesz: “A synonymized checklist and atlas with biological attributes for the vascular flora of the United States, Canada,
and Greenland” (e.g. Dichanthelium hirstii (Swallen) Kartesz in Kartesz & Meacham, Synth. N. Amer. Fl., Nomencl. Innov.: [1]. Aug 1999).
Kartesz’s procedure is not to be recommended, as the insert is unlikely to be permanently stored and catalogued in libraries and so reach the
general public.
30A.5. To aid availability through time and place, authors publishing nomenclatural novelties should give preference to periodicals
that regularly publish taxonomic work, or else they should send a copy of a publication (printed or electronic) to an indexing centre
appropriate to the taxonomic group. When such publications exist only as printed matter, they should be deposited in at least
ten, but preferably more, generally accessible libraries throughout the world.
30A.6. Authors and editors are encouraged to mention nomenclatural novelties in the summary or abstract, or list them in an
index in the publication.
SECTION 2
DATES OF EFFECTIVE PUBLICATION
ARTICLE 31
31.1. The date of effective publication is the date on which the printed matter or electronic material became available
as defined in Art. 29 and 30. In the absence of proof establishing some other date, the one appearing in the printed
matter or electronic material must be accepted as correct.
Ex. 1. Individual parts of Willdenow’s Species plantarum were published as follows: 1(1), Jun 1797; 1(2), Jul 1798; 2(1), Mar 1799; 2(2), Dec
1799; 3(1), 1800; 3(2), Nov 1802; 3(3), Apr-Dec 1803; 4(1), 1805; 4(2), 1806; these dates are presently accepted as the dates of effective
publication (see Stafleu & Cowan in Regnum Veg. 116: 303. 1988).
Ex. 2. Fries first published Lichenes arctoi in 1860 as an independently paginated preprint, which antedates the identical content published in
a journal (Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sci. Upsal., ser. 3, 3: 103–398. 1861).
Ex. 3. Diatom Research 2(2) bears the date December 1987. Nevertheless, Williams & Round, the authors of a paper in that issue, stated in a
subsequent paper (in Diatom Res. 3: 265. 1988) that the actual date of publication had been 18 February 1988. Under Art. 31.1 their
statement is acceptable as proof establishing another date of publication for issue 2(2) of the journal.
Ex. 4. The paper in which Ceratocystis omanensis Al-Subhi & al. is described was available online in final form on Science Direct on 7 November
2005, but was not effectively published (Art. 29 Note 1). It was distributed in print (in Mycol. Res. 110(2): 237–245) on 7 March 2006, which
is the date of effective publication.
31.2. When a publication is issued in parallel as electronic material and printed matter, both must be treated as
effectively published on the same date unless the dates of the versions are different as determined by Art. 31.1.
Ex. 5. The paper in which Solanum baretiae was validly published was placed online in final form, as a PDF document, on 3 January 2012 in
the journal PhytoKeys (ISSN 1314-2003). The printed version (ISSN 1314-2011) of the corresponding issue of PhytoKeys, with identical
pagination and content, is undated but demonstrably later because it includes a paper dated 6 January 2012. A correct citation of the name
is: S. baretiae Tepe in PhytoKeys 8 (online): 39. 3 Jan 2012.
31.3. When separates from periodicals or other works placed on sale are issued in advance, the date on the separate
is accepted as the date of effective publication unless there is evidence that it is erroneous.
Ex. 6. The names of the Selaginella species published by Hieronymus (in Hedwigia 51: 241–272. 1911) were effectively published on 15
October 1911 because the volume in which the paper appeared, though dated 1912, states (p. ii) that the separate appeared on that date.
66
Recommendation 31A
31A.1. The date on which the publisher or publisher’s agent delivers printed matter to one of the usual carriers for distribution to
the public should be accepted as its date of effective publication.
Recommendation 31B
31B.1. The date of effective publication should be clearly indicated as precisely as possible within a publication. When a publication
is issued in parts, this date should be indicated in each part.
31B.2. In electronic material, the precise dates (year, month, and day) of effective publication should be included.
Recommendation 31C
31C.1. On reprints of papers published in a periodical, the name of the periodical, volume and part number, original pagination,
and date (year, month, and day) of publication should be indicated.
CHAPTER V
VALID PUBLICATION OF NAMES
67
SECTION 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
ARTICLE 32
32.1. In order to be validly published, a name of a taxon (autonyms excepted) must: (a) be effectively published (Art.
29–31) on or after the starting-point date of the respective group (Art. 13.1 and F.1.1); (b) be composed only of letters
of the Latin alphabet, except as provided in Art. 23.3, 60.4, 60.7, and 60.11–14; and (c) have a form that complies with
the provisions of Art. 16–27 (but see Art. 21.4 and 24.4) and Art. H.6 and H.7 (see also Art. 61).
Note 1. The use of typographical signs, numerals, or letters of a non-Latin alphabet in the arrangement of taxa (such as Greek
letters α, β, γ, etc. in the arrangement of varieties under a species) does not prevent valid publication because rank-denoting
terms and devices are not part of the name.
32.2. Names above the rank of species are validly published even when they or their epithets were published with an
improper Latin termination but otherwise in accordance with this Code; they are to be changed to accord with Art.
16–19 and 21, without change of authorship or date. Names of species or infraspecific taxa are validly published even
when their epithets were published with an improper Latin or transcribed Greek termination but otherwise in
accordance with this Code; they are to be changed to accord with Art. 23 and 24, without change of authorship or date
(see also Art. 60.8).
Ex. 1. The epithet in Cassia “*” ‘Chamaecristae’ L. (Sp. Pl.: 379. 1753), the name of a subdivision of a genus, is a noun in the nominative plural,
derived from “Chamaecrista”, a pre-Linnaean generic designation. Under Art. 21.2, however, this epithet must have the same form as a
generic name, i.e. a noun in the nominative singular (Art. 20.1). The name is to be changed accordingly and is cited
as Cassia [unranked] Chamaecrista L.
Note 2. Improper terminations of otherwise correctly formed names or epithets may result from the use of an inflectional form
other than that required by Art. 32.2.
Ex. 2. Senecio sect. Synotii Benth. (in Bentham & Hooker, Gen. Pl. 2: 448. 1873) was validly published with reference to certain species that
constituted a section (“in speciebus … sectionem subdistinctam (Synotios) constituentibus”). Although the sectional epithet was written as
an adjective in the accusative plural (because it was a direct object), it is to be cited in the nominative plural, S. sect. Synotii, as required
by Art. 21.2.
32.3. Autonyms (Art. 6.8) are accepted as validly published names, dating from the publication in which they were
established (see Art. 22.3 and 26.3), whether or not they actually appear in that publication.
32.4. In order to be validly published, names of hybrids at specific or lower rank with Latin epithets must comply with
the same rules as names of non-hybrid taxa at the same rank.
Ex. 3. “Nepeta ×faassenii” (Bergmans, Vaste Pl. Rotsheesters, ed. 2: 544. 1939, with a description in Dutch; Lawrence in Gentes Herb. 8: 64.
1949, with a diagnosis in English) is not validly published because it is not accompanied by or associated with a Latin description or diagnosis
(Art. 39.1). The name Nepeta ×faassenii Bergmans ex Stearn (in J. Roy. Hort. Soc. 75: 405. 1950) is validly published because it is accompanied
by a Latin description.
Ex. 4. “Rheum ×cultorum” (Thorsrud & Reisaeter, Norske Plantenavn: 95. 1948) is a nomen nudum and is not therefore validly published (Art.
38.1(a)).
Ex. 5. “Fumaria ×salmonii” (Druce, List Brit. Pl.: 4. 1908) is not validly published (Art. 38.1(a)) because only the presumed
parentage (F. densiflora × F. officinalis) was stated.
Note 3. For names of hybrids at the rank of genus or of a subdivision of a genus, see Art. H.9.
Note 4. For valid publication of names of organisms originally assigned to a group not covered by this Code, see Art. 45.
Recommendation 32A
68
32A.1. When publishing nomenclatural novelties, authors should indicate this by a phrase including the word “novus” or its
abbreviation, e.g. genus novum (gen. nov., new genus), species nova (sp. nov., new species), combinatio nova (comb. nov., new
combination), nomen novum (nom. nov., replacement name), or status novus (stat. nov., name at new rank).
ARTICLE 33
33.1. The date of a name is that of its valid publication. When the various conditions for valid publication are not
simultaneously fulfilled, the date is that on which the last is fulfilled. However, the name must always be explicitly
accepted in the place of its valid publication. A name published on or after 1 January 1973 for which the various
conditions for valid publication are not simultaneously fulfilled is not validly published unless full and direct reference
(Art. 41.5) is given to the place(s) where these requirements were previously fulfilled (but see Art. 41.7).
Ex. 1. “Clypeola minor” first appeared in the Linnaean thesis Flora monspeliensis (p. 21, 1756), in a list of names preceded by numerals but
without an explanation of the meaning of these numerals and without any other descriptive matter; when the thesis was reprinted in vol. 4
of the Amoenitates academicae (1759), a statement was added (p. 475) explaining that the numbers referred to earlier descriptions published
in Magnol’s Botanicum monspeliense (1676). However, “Clypeola minor” was absent from the reprint and was not therefore validly published.
Ex. 2. When proposing “Graphis meridionalis” as a new species, Nakanishi (in J. Sci. Hiroshima Univ., Ser. B(2), 11: 75. 1966) provided a Latin
description but failed to designate a type. Graphis meridionalis M. Nakan. was validly published only when Nakanishi (in J. Sci. Hiroshima
Univ., Ser. B(2), 11: 265. 1967) designated the holotype of the name and provided a full and direct reference to his previous publication.
Ex. 3. “Passiflora salpoense” (Leiva & Tantalean in Arnaldoa 22: 39. 2015) was not validly published because, although a single gathering, S.
Leiva & M. Leiva 5806, was designated as “tipo”, it was specified as being conserved in five herbaria, contrary to Art. 40.7. The name P.
salpoensis S. Leiva & Tantalean (again as ‘salpoense’, but correctable to salpoensis under Art. 23.5 and 32.2) was validly published only when
the same authors (in Arnaldoa 23: 628. 2016) designated the same gathering as “lectotipo” in a single herbarium, HAO, with “isolectotipos”
in CORD, F, MO, and HUT (correctable, respectively, to holotype and isotypes under Art. 9.10), while providing a full and direct reference to
their previously published (l.c. 2015) validating English diagnosis of the species.
33.2. A correction of the original spelling of a name (see Art. 32.2 and 60) does not affect its date.
Ex. 4. The correction of the erroneous spelling of Gluta ‘benghas’ L. (Mant. Pl.: 293. 1771) to G. renghas L. does not affect the date of the
name even though the correction dates from 1883 (Engler in Candolle & Candolle, Monogr. Phan. 4: 225).
ARTICLE 34
34.1. New names at specified ranks included in publications listed as suppressed works (opera utique oppressa; App.
I) are not validly published and no nomenclatural act within the work associated with any name at the specified ranks
1
is effective. Proposals for the addition of publications to App. I must be submitted to the General Committee, which
will refer them for examination to the specialist committees for the various taxonomic groups (see Rec. 34A, Div. III
Prov. 2.2, 7.9, and 7.10; see also Art. 14.12 and 56.2).
[footnote] A nomenclatural act is an act requiring effective publication that results in a nomenclatural novelty (Art. 6 Note 4) or affects aspects
1
of names such as typification (Art. 7.10, 7.11, and F.5.4), priority (Art. 11.5 and 53.5), orthography (Art. 61.3), or gender (Art. 62.3).
Ex. 1. In the suppressed work (see App. I) of Motyka, Porosty, Lecanoraceae (3: 97. 1996), one of three specimens of Lecanora dissipata Nyl.
(in Bull. Soc. Bot. France 13: 368. 1866) in Nylander’s herbarium in H was designated as the lectotype for that name. This designation is not
effective and therefore has no nomenclatural status.
34.2. When a proposal for the suppression of a publication has been approved by the General Committee after study
by the specialist committees for the taxonomic groups concerned, suppression of that publication is authorized subject
to the decision of a later International Botanical Congress (see also Art. 14.15 and 56.3) and takes retroactive effect.
Recommendation 34A
34A.1. When a proposal for the suppression of a publication under Art. 34.1 has been referred to the appropriate specialist
committees for study, authors should follow existing usage of names as far as possible pending the General Committee’s
recommendation on the proposal (see also Rec. 14A and 56A).
69
ARTICLE 35
35.1. A name of a taxon below the rank of genus is not validly published unless the name of the genus or species to
which it is assigned is validly published at the same time or was validly published previously (but see Art. 13.4).
Ex. 1. Binary designations for six species of “Suaeda”, including “S. baccata” and “S. vera”, were published with descriptions and diagnoses
by Forsskål (Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.: 69–71. 1775), but he provided no description or diagnosis for the genus: these were not therefore validly
published names.
Ex. 2. Müller (in Flora 63: 286. 1880) published the new genus “Phlyctidia” with the species “P. hampeana n. sp.”, “P. boliviensis” (Phlyctis
boliviensis Nyl.), “P. sorediiformis” (Phlyctis sorediiformis Kremp.), “P. brasiliensis” (Phlyctis brasiliensis Nyl.), and “P. andensis” (Phlyctis
andensis Nyl.). However, the intended new binomials were not validly published in this place because the intended generic
name “Phlyctidia” was not validly published; Müller gave no generic description or diagnosis but only a description and a diagnosis for one
additional species, “P. hampeana”, and so failed to validly publish “Phlyctidia” under Art. 38.5 because the genus was not monotypic (see Art.
38.6). Valid publication of the name Phlyctidia was by Müller (in Hedwigia 34: 141. 1895), who provided a short generic diagnosis and explicitly
included only two species, the names of which, P. ludoviciensis Müll. Arg. and P. boliviensis(Nyl.) Müll. Arg., were also validly published in
1895.
Note 1. Art. 35.1 applies also when specific and other epithets are published under words not to be regarded as names of genera
or species (see Art. 20.4 and 23.6).
Ex. 3. The binary designation “Anonymos aquatica” (Walter, Fl. Carol.: 230. 1788) is not a validly published name. The first validly published
name for the species concerned is Planera aquatica J. F. Gmel. (Syst. Nat. 2: 150. 1791). This name is not to be cited as P. aquatica “(Walter)
J. F. Gmel.”
Ex. 4. Despite the existence of the generic name Scirpoides Ség. (Pl. Veron. Suppl.: 73. 1754), the binary designation “S. paradoxus” (Rottbøll,
Descr. Pl. Rar.: 27. 1772) is not validly published because “Scirpoides” in Rottbøll’s context was a word not intended as a generic name
(see Art. 20 Ex. 10). The first validly published name for this species is Fuirena umbellataRottb. (Descr. Icon. Rar. Pl. 70. 1773).
35.2. A combination (autonyms excepted) is not validly published unless the author definitely associates the final
epithet with the name of the genus or species, or with its abbreviation (see Art. 60.14).
Ex. 5. Combinations validly published. In Linnaeus’s Species plantarum, the placing of the epithet in the margin opposite the name of the
genus clearly associates the epithet with the name of the genus. The same result is attained in Miller’s The gardeners dictionary, ed. 8, by the
inclusion of the epithet in parentheses immediately after the name of the genus, in Steudel’s Nomenclator botanicus by the arrangement of
the epithets in a list headed by the name of the genus, and in general by any typographical device that associates an epithet with a particular
name of a genus or species.
Ex. 6. Combinations not validly published. Rafinesque’s statement under Blephilia that “Le type de ce genre est la Monarda ciliata Linn.” (in
J. Phys. Chim. Hist. Nat. Arts 89: 98. 1819) does not constitute valid publication of the combination B. ciliata because Rafinesque did not
definitely associate the epithet ciliata with the generic name Blephilia. Similarly, the combination Eulophus peucedanoides is not to be
attributed to Bentham & Hooker (Gen. Pl. 1: 885. 1867) on the basis of their listing of “Cnidium peucedanoides, H. B. et K.” under Eulophus.
Ex. 7. Erioderma polycarpum subsp. verruculosum Vain. (in Acta Soc. Fauna Fl. Fenn. 7(1): 202. 1890) is validly published because Vainio
clearly linked the subspecific epithet to the specific epithet by an asterisk.
Ex. 8. When Tuckerman (in Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts 12: 168. 1877) described “Erioderma velligerum, sub-sp. nov.”, he stated that his new
subspecies was very near to E. chilense, from which he provided distinguishing features. However, because he did not definitely associate the
subspecific epithet with that species name, he did not validly publish “E. chilense subsp. velligerum”.
ARTICLE 36
36.1. A name is not validly published when it is not accepted by its author in the original publication, for
example (a) when it is merely proposed in anticipation of the future acceptance of the taxon concerned, or of a
particular circumscription, position, or rank of the taxon (so-called provisional name) or (b) when it is merely cited as
a synonym. These provisions do not apply to names published with a question mark or other indication of taxonomic
doubt, yet accepted by their author.
Ex. 1. “Sebertia”, proposed by Pierre (ms.) for a unispecific genus, was not validly published by Baillon (in Bull. Mens. Soc. Linn. Paris 2: 945.
1891) because he did not accept the genus. Although he gave a description of it, he referred its only species “Sebertia acuminata Pierre (ms.)”
to the genus Sersalisia R. Br., as “Sersalisia ? acuminata”, which he thereby validly published under the provision of Art. 36.1 last sentence.
The name Sebertia was validly published by Engler (in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam., Nachtr. 1: 280. 1897).
Ex. 2. The designations listed in the left-hand column of the Linnaean thesis Herbarium amboinense defended by Stickman (1754) were not
names accepted by Linnaeus upon publication and are not validly published.
70
Ex. 3. Coralloides gorgonina Bory was validly published in a paper by Flörke (in Mag. Neuesten Entdeck. Gesammten Naturk. Ges. Naturf.
Freunde Berlin 3: 125. 1809) even though Flörke did not accept it as a new species. At Bory’s request, Flörke included Bory’s diagnosis (and
name) making Bory the publishing author as defined in Art. 46.6. The acceptance or otherwise of the name by Flörke is not therefore relevant
for valid publication.
Ex. 4. (a) The designation “Conophyton”, suggested by Haworth (Rev. Pl. Succ.: 82. 1821) for Mesembryanthemum sect. Minima Haw. (Rev.
Pl. Succ.: 81. 1821) in the words “If this section proves to be a genus, the name of Conophyton would be apt”, was not a validly published
generic name because Haworth did not adopt it or accept the genus. The name was validly published as Conophytum N. E. Br. (in Gard. Chron.,
ser. 3, 71: 198. 1922).
Ex. 5. (a) “Pteridospermaexylon” and “P. theresiae” were published by Greguss (in Földt. Közl. 82: 171. 1952) for a genus and species of fossil
wood. Because Greguss explicitly stated “Vorläufig benenne ich es mit den Namen … [provisionally I designate it by the names …]”, these are
provisional names and as such are not validly published.
Ex. 6. (a) The designation “Stereocaulon subdenudatum” proposed by Havaas (in Bergens Mus. Årbok. 12: 13, 20. 1954) is not validly
published, even though it was presented as a new species with a Latin diagnosis, because on both pages it was indicated to be “ad int.” [ad
interim, for the time being].
Ex. 7. (b) “Ornithogalum undulatum hort. Bouch.” was not validly published by Kunth (Enum. Pl. 4: 348. 1843) when he cited it as a synonym
under Myogalum boucheanum Kunth; the correct combination under Ornithogalum L. was validly published later: O. boucheanum (Kunth)
Asch. (in Verh. Bot. Vereins Prov. Brandenburg 8: 165. 1866).
Ex. 8. Besenna A. Rich. and B. anthelmintica A. Rich. (Tent. Fl. Abyss. 1: 253. 1847) were simultaneously published by Richard, both with a
question mark (“Besenna ?” and “Besenna anthelmintica ? Nob.”). Richard’s uncertainty was due to the absence of flowers or fruits for
examination, but the names were nonetheless accepted by him, with Besenna listed as such (i.e. not italicized) in the index (p. [469]).
36.2. A name is not validly published by the mere mention of the subordinate taxa included in the taxon concerned.
Ex. 9. The family designation “Rhaptopetalaceae” was not validly published by Pierre (in Bull. Mens. Soc. Linn. Paris 2: 1296. May 1897), who
merely mentioned the constituent genera, Brazzeia Baill., Rhaptopetalum Oliv., and “Scytopetalum”, but gave no description or diagnosis; a
description of the family was published under the name Scytopetalaceae Engl. (in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam., Nachtr. 1: 242. Oct
1897).
Ex. 10. The generic designation “Ganymedes” was not validly published by Salisbury (in Trans. Hort. Soc. London 1: 353–355. 1812), who
merely mentioned three included species but supplied no generic description or diagnosis.
36.3. When, on or after 1 January 1953, two or more different names based on the same type are accepted
simultaneously for the same taxon by the same author and accepted as alternatives by that author in the same
publication (so-called alternative names), none of them, if new, is validly published. This rule does not apply in those
cases where the same combination is simultaneously used at different ranks, either for infraspecific taxa or for
subdivisions of a genus (see Rec. 22A.1, 22A.2, and 26A.1–3), nor to names provided for in Art. F.8.1.
Ex. 11. The species of Brosimum Sw. described by Ducke (in Arch. Jard. Bot. Rio de Janeiro 3: 23–29. 1922) were published with alternative
names under Piratinera Aubl. added in a footnote (pp. 23–24), in which Ducke indicated acceptability of these names under the competing
(alternative) American Code. The publication of both sets of names is valid because it was effected before 1 January 1953.
Ex. 12. “Euphorbia jaroslavii” (Poljakov in Bot. Mater. Gerb. Bot. Inst. Komarova Akad. Nauk SSSR 15: 155. 1953) was published with an
alternative designation, “Tithymalus jaroslavii”. Neither was validly published. However, one name, Euphorbia yaroslavii (with a differently
transcribed initial letter), was validly published by Poljakov (in Bot. Mater. Gerb. Bot. Inst. Komarova Akad. Nauk SSSR 21: 484. 1961), who
provided a full and direct reference to the earlier publication and rejected the assignment to Tithymalus.
Ex. 13. Freytag (in Sida Bot. Misc. 23: 211. 2002) published Phaseolus leptostachyus “var. pinnatifolius Freytag forma purpureus Freytag, var.
et forma nov.”, using a single diagnosis and designating a single intended holotype. The diagnosis refers to P. leptostachyus f. purpureus, not
to “P. leptostachyus var. pinnatifolius” under which Freytag recognized a second forma in the same paper. The varietal
designation “pinnatifolius” is therefore a nomen nudum, not validly published.
Ex. 14. Hitchcock (in Univ. Washington Publ. Biol. 17(1): 507–508. 1969) used the name Bromus inermis subsp. pumpellianus (Scribn.)
Wagnon and provided a full and direct reference to its basionym, B. pumpellianus Scribn. (in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 15: 9. 1888). Within that
subspecies, he recognized varieties, one of which he named B. inermis var. pumpellianus (without an author citation but clearly based on the
same basionym and type). In so doing, he met the requirements for valid publication of B. inermis var. pumpellianus (Scribn.) C. L. Hitchc.
ARTICLE 37
37.1. A name published on or after 1 January 1953 without a clear indication of the rank of the taxon concerned is not
validly published.
71
37.2. For suprageneric names published on or after 1 January 1887, the use of one of the terminations specified in Art. 1
16.3, 17.1, 18.1, 19.1, and 19.3 is accepted as an indication of the corresponding rank, unless this (a) would conflict
with the explicitly designated rank of the taxon (which takes precedence), (b) would result in a rank sequence contrary
to Art. 5 (in which case Art. 37.6 applies), or (c) would result in a rank sequence in which the same rank-denoting term
occurs at more than one hierarchical position.
[footnote] The terminations specified in Art. 16.3, 17.1, 18.1, 19.1, and 19.3 are: -phyta (division or phylum in algae and
1
plants), -mycota (division or phylum in fungi), -phytina (subdivision or subphylum in algae and plants), -mycotina (subdivision or subphylum
in fungi), -phyceae (class in algae), -mycetes (class in fungi), -opsida (class in plants), -phycidae (subclass in algae), -mycetidae (subclass in
fungi), -idae (subclass in plants), -ales (order), -ineae (suborder), -aceae (family), -oideae (subfamily), -eae (tribe), and -inae (subtribe).
Ex. 1. Jussieu (in Mém. Mus. Hist. Nat. 12: 497. 1827) proposed Zanthoxyleae without specifying the rank. Although he used the present
termination for tribe (-eae), that name is unranked because it was published prior to 1887. Zanthoxyleae Dumort. (Anal. Fam. Pl.: 45. 1829),
however, is the name of a tribe because Dumortier specified its rank.
Ex. 2. Nakai (Chosakuronbun Mokuroku [Ord. Fam. Trib. Nov.]. 1943) validly published the
names Parnassiales, Lophiolaceae, Ranzanioideae, and Urospatheae. He indicated the respective ranks of order, family, subfamily, and tribe,
by use of their terminations even though he did not mention these ranks explicitly.
37.3. A name published before 1 January 1953 without a clear indication of its rank is validly published provided that
all other requirements for valid publication are fulfilled; it is, however, inoperative in questions of priority except for
homonymy (see Art. 53.3). If it is the name of a new taxon, it may serve as a basionym or replaced synonym for
subsequent new combinations, names at new ranks, or replacement names at definite ranks.
Ex. 3. The unranked groups “Soldanellae”, “Sepincoli”, “Occidentales”, etc., were published under Convolvulus L. by House (in Muhlenbergia
4: 50. 1908). The names C. [unranked] Soldanellae House, etc., are validly published names but have no status in questions of priority except
for purposes of homonymy under Art. 53.3.
Ex. 4. In Carex L., the epithet Scirpinae was used in the name of an unranked subdivision of a genus by Tuckerman (Enum. Meth. Caric.: 8.
1843); this taxon was assigned sectional rank by Kükenthal (in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV. 20 (Heft 38): 81. 1909) and its name is then cited
as Carex sect. Scirpinae (Tuck.) Kük. (C. [unranked] Scirpinae Tuck.).
Ex. 5. Loesener published “Geranium andicola var. vel forma longipedicellatum” (Bull. Herb. Boissier, ser. 2, 3(2): 93. 1903) with an ambiguous
indication of infraspecific rank. The name is correctly cited as G. andicola [unranked] longipedicellatum Loes. The epithet was used in a
subsequent combination, G. longipedicellatum (Loes.) R. Knuth (in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV. 129 (Heft 53): 171. 1912).
37.4. If in one whole publication (Art. 37.5), prior to 1 January 1890, only one infraspecific rank is admitted, it is
considered to be that of variety unless this would be contrary to the author’s statements in the same publication.
37.5. In questions of indication of rank, all publications appearing under the same title and by the same author, such
as different parts of a flora issued at different times (but not different editions of the same work), must be considered
as a whole, and any statement made therein designating the rank of taxa included in the work must be considered as
if it had been published together with the first instalment.
Ex. 6. In Link’s Handbuch (1829–1833) the rank-denoting term “O.” (ordo) was used in all three volumes. These names of orders cannot be
considered as having been published as names of families (Art. 18.2) because the term family was used
for Agaricaceae and Tremellaceae under the order Fungi in vol. 3 (pp. 272, 337; see Art. 18 Note 3). This applies to all three volumes of
the Handbuch even though vol. 3 was published later (Jul–29 Sep 1833) than vols. 1 and 2 (4–11 Jul 1829).
37.6. A name is not validly published if it is given to a taxon of which the rank is at the same time denoted by a
misplaced term, contrary to Art. 5. Such misplacements include, e.g., forms divided into varieties, species containing
genera, and genera containing families or tribes (but see Art. F.4.1).
37.7. Only those names published with rank-denoting terms that must be removed so as to achieve a proper sequence
are to be regarded as not validly published. In cases where terms are switched, e.g. family-order, and a proper
sequence can be achieved by removing either or both of the rank-denoting terms, names at neither rank are validly
published unless one is a secondary rank (Art. 4.1) and one is a principal rank (Art. 3.1), e.g. family-genus-tribe, in
which case only names published at the secondary rank are not validly published.
72
Ex. 7. “Sectio Orontiaceae” (Brown, Prodr.: 337. 1810) is not a validly published name because Brown misapplied the term “sectio” to a rank
higher than genus.
Ex. 8. “Tribus Involuta” and “tribus Brevipedunculata” (Huth in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 20: 365, 368. 1895) are not validly published names because
Huth misapplied the term “tribus” to a rank lower than section within the genus Delphinium.
Note 1. Consecutive use of the same rank-denoting term in a taxonomic sequence does not represent misplaced rank-denoting
terms.
Ex. 9. Danser (in Recueil Trav. Bot. Néerl. 18: 125–210. 1921) published ten names of new subspecies in a treatment of Polygonum in which
he recognized subspecies (indicated by Roman numerals) within subspecies (indicated by Arabic numerals). These do not represent misplaced
rank-denoting terms, Art. 37.6 does not apply, and the names are validly published.
37.8. Situations where the same or equivalent rank-denoting term is used at more than one non-consecutive position
in the taxonomic sequence represent informal usage of rank-denoting terms. Names published with such rank-
denoting terms are treated as unranked (see Art. 37.1 and 37.3; see also Art. 16 Note 1).
Ex. 10. Names published with the term “series” by Bentham & Hooker (Gen. Pl. 1–3. 1862–1883) are treated as unranked because this term
was used at seven different hierarchical positions in the taxonomic sequence. Therefore, the sequence in Rhynchospora (3: 1058–1060. 1883)
of genus-“series”-section does not contain a misplaced rank-denoting term.
SECTION 2
NAMES OF NEW TAXA
ARTICLE 38
38.1. In order to be validly published, a name of a new taxon (see Art. 6.9) must (a) be accompanied by a description
or diagnosis of the taxon (see also Art. 38.7 and 38.8) or, if none is provided in the protologue, by a reference (see Art.
38.13) to a previously and effectively published description or diagnosis (except as provided in Art. 13.4 and H.9; see
also Art. 14.9 and 14.14); and (b) comply with the relevant provisions of Art. 32–45and F.4–F.5.
Note 1. An exception to Art. 38.1 is made for the generic names first published by Linnaeus in Species plantarum, ed. 1 (1753) and
ed. 2 (1762–1763), which are treated as having been validly published in those works even though the validating descriptions were
published later in Genera plantarum, ed. 5 (1754) and ed. 6 (1764), respectively (see Art. 13.4).
38.2. A diagnosis of a taxon is a statement of that which in the opinion of its author distinguishes the taxon from other
taxa.
Ex. 1. “Egeria” (Néraud in Gaudichaud, Voy. Uranie, Bot.: 25, 28. 1826) was published without a description or a diagnosis or a reference to a
former one (and thus is a nomen nudum); it was not validly published.
Ex. 2. “Loranthus macrosolen” originally appeared without a description or diagnosis on the printed labels issued about the year 1843 with
Sect. II, No. 529, 1288, of the herbarium specimens from Schimper’s “Abyssinische Reise”. The name L. macrosolen Steud. ex A. Rich. (Tent.
Fl. Abyss. 1: 340. 1848) was validly published when Richard supplied a description.
*Ex. 3. In Don, Sweet’s Hortus britannicus, ed. 3 (1839), for each listed species the flower colour, the duration of the plant, and a translation
into English of the specific epithet are given in tabular form. In many genera the flower colour and duration may be identical for all species
and clearly their mention is not intended as a validating description or diagnosis. Names of new taxa appearing in that work are not therefore
validly published, except in some cases where reference is made to earlier descriptions or diagnoses.
Ex. 4. “Crepis praemorsa subsp. tatrensis” (Dvořák & Dadáková in Biológia (Bratislava) 32: 755. 1977) appeared with “a
subsp. praemorsa karyotypo achaeniorumque longitudine praecipue differt”. This statement specifies the features in which the two taxa
differ but not how these features differ and so it does not satisfy the requirement of Art. 38.1(a) for a “description or diagnosis”.
Ex. 5. The generic name Epilichen Clem. (Gen. Fungi: 69, 174. 1909) is validly published by means of the key character “parasitic on lichens”
(contrasting with “saprophytic” for Karschia) and the Latin diagnosis “Karschia lichenicola”, referring to the ability of the included species
formerly included in Karschia to grow on lichens. These statements, in the opinion of Clements, distinguished the genus from others, although
provision of such a meagre diagnosis is not good practice.
Ex. 6. The protologue of Iresine borschii Zumaya & Flores Olv. (in Willdenowia 46: 166. 2016) includes both a morphological and a molecular
diagnosis. Both are diagnoses because they indicate how the features of the new species, in the opinion of the authors, differ from those of
other taxa.
73
Note 2. Whereas a diagnosis must comprise one or more descriptive statements (Art. 38.2 and 38.3), a validating description (Art.
38.1) need not be diagnostic.
38.3. The requirements of Art. 38.1(a) are not met by statements describing properties such as purely aesthetic
features, economic, medicinal or culinary use, cultural significance, cultivation techniques, geographical origin, or
geological age.
Ex. 7. “Musa basjoo” (Siebold in Verh. Bat. Genootsch. Kunsten 12: 18. 1830) appeared with “Ex insulis Luikiu introducta, vix asperitati hiemis
resistens. Ex foliis linteum, praesertim in insulis Luikiu ac quibusdam insulis provinciae Satzuma conficitur. Est haud dubie linteum, quod
Philippinis incolis audit Nippis.” This statement gives information about the economic use (linen is made from the leaves), hardiness in
cultivation (scarcely survives the winter), and geographical origin (introduced from the Ryukyu Islands), but because there is no descriptive
information on the “leaves”, the only character mentioned, it does not satisfy the requirement of Art. 38.1(a) for a “description or
diagnosis”. Musa basjoo Siebold & Zucc. ex Iinuma was later validly published by Iinuma (Sintei Somoku Dzusetsu [Illustrated Flora of Japan],
ed. 2, 3: ad t. 1. 1874) with floral details and a description in Japanese.
38.4. When it is doubtful whether a descriptive statement satisfies the requirement of Art. 38.1(a) for a “description
or diagnosis”, a request for a decision may be submitted to the General Committee, which will refer it for examination
to the specialist committee for the appropriate taxonomic group (see Div. III Prov. 2.2, 7.9, and 7.10). A Committee
recommendation as to whether or not the name concerned is validly published may then be put forward to an
International Botanical Congress and, if ratified, will become a binding decision with retroactive effect. These binding
decisions are listed in App. VI.
Ex. 8. Ascomycota Caval.-Sm. (in Biol. Rev. 73: 247. 1998, as “Ascomycota Berkeley 1857 stat. nov.”) was published as the name of a phylum
with the diagnosis “sporae intracellulares”. Because Cavalier-Smith (l.c.) did not provide a full and direct reference to Berkeley’s publication
(Intr. Crypt. Bot.: 270. 1857) of the name Ascomycetes [not Ascomycota], valid publication of Ascomycota is dependent on its meeting the
requirements of Art. 38.1(a), and a request was made for a binding decision under Art. 38.4. The Nomenclature Committee for Fungi
concluded (in Taxon 59: 292. 2010) that the requirements of Art. 38.1(a) were minimally fulfilled and recommended a binding decision
that Ascomycota is validly published. This was endorsed by the General Committee (in Taxon 60: 1212. 2011) and ratified by the XVIII
International Botanical Congress in Melbourne in 2011 (see App. VI).
Ex. 9. Brugmansia aurea Harrison (Floric. Cab. & Florist’s Mag. 5: 144. 1837) was described in an account of a garden visit as comprising
“plants about two feet high” with flowers “about the size of the B. sanguinea, but of fine rich golden yellow colour”, and was compared with
“an inferior kind … the flowers of which are of a dull buff colour”. A binding decision has been made that the name is validly published
(see App. VI).
38.5. The names of a genus and a species may be validly published simultaneously by provision of a single description
(descriptio generico-specifica) or diagnosis, even though this may have been intended as only generic or specific, if all
of the following conditions are satisfied: (a) the genus is at that time monotypic (see Art. 38.6); (b) no other names (at
any rank) have previously been validly published based on the same type; and (c) the names of the genus and species
otherwise fulfil the requirements for valid publication. A descriptio generico-specifica must accompany the names of
the taxa described; reference instead to an earlier description or diagnosis is not acceptable.
38.6. For the purpose of Art. 38.5, a monotypic genus is one for which a single binomial is validly published even
though the author may indicate that other species are attributable to the genus.
Ex. 10. Nylander (in Flora 62: 353. 1879) described the new species “Anema nummulariellum” in a new genus “Anema” without providing a
generic description or diagnosis. Because in the same publication (l.c.: 354. 1879) he wrote “Affine Anemati nummulario (DR.) Nyl., …”, which
was an attempted new combination in “Anema” based on Collema nummulariumDufour ex Durieu & Mont. (Expl. Sci. Algérie 1: 200. 1846–
1847), none of his designations was validly published. The names were later validly published by Forssell (Beitr. Gloeolich.: 40, 91, 93. 1885).
Ex. 11. The names Kedarnatha P. K. Mukh. & Constance (in Brittonia 38: 147. 1986) and K. sanctuarii P. K. Mukh. & Constance, the latter
designating the single, new species of the new genus, are both validly published although a Latin description was provided only under the
generic name.
Ex. 12. Piptolepis phillyreoides Benth. (Pl. Hartw.: 29. 1840) was a new species assigned to the monotypic new genus Piptolepis. Both names
were validly published with a combined generic and specific description.
Ex. 13. In publishing “Phaelypea” without a generic description or diagnosis, Browne (Civ. Nat. Hist. Jamaica: 269. 1756) included and
described a single species, but he gave the species a phrase name not a validly published binomial. Art. 38.5 does not therefore apply
and “Phaelypea” is not a validly published name.
74
38.7. For the purpose of Art. 38.5, prior to 1 January 1908, an illustration with analysis (see Art. 38.9 and 38.10) is
acceptable in place of a written description or diagnosis.
Ex. 14. The generic name Philgamia Baill. (in Grandidier, Hist. Phys. Madagascar 35: t. 265. 1894) was validly published because it appeared
on a plate with analysis of the only included species, P. hibbertioides Baill.
38.8. The name of a new species or infraspecific taxon published before 1 January 1908 may be validly published even
if only accompanied by an illustration with analysis (see Art. 38.9 and 38.10).
Ex. 15. When “Polypodium subulatum” (Vellozo, Fl. Flumin. Icon. 11: ad t. 67. 1831) was published, only an illustration of part of a frond was
presented, without analysis, hence this drawing does not fulfil the provisions of Art. 38.8 and the designation was not validly published there.
The name P. subulatum Vell. was validly published when Vellozo’s fern species descriptions appeared (in Arch. Mus. Nac. Rio de Janeiro 5:
447. 1881).
38.9. For the purpose of this Code, an analysis is a figure or group of figures, commonly separate from the main
illustration of the organism (though usually on the same page or plate), showing details aiding identification, with or
without a separate caption (see also Art. 38.10).
Ex. 16. Panax nossibiensis Drake (in Grandidier, Hist. Phys. Madagascar 35: t. 406. 1897) was validly published on a plate with analysis that
includes details of flower structure.
38.10. For organisms other than vascular plants, single figures showing details aiding identification are considered as
illustrations with analysis (see also Art. 38.9).
Ex. 17. Eunotia gibbosa Grunow (in Van Heurck, Syn. Diatom Belgique: t. 35, fig. 13. 1881), a name of a diatom, was validly published by
provision of a figure of a single valve.
38.11. For the purpose of valid publication of a name of a new taxon, reference to a previously and effectively
published description or diagnosis is restricted as follows: (a) for a name of a family or subdivision of a family, the
earlier description or diagnosis must be that of a family or subdivision of a family; (b)for a name of a genus or
subdivision of a genus, the earlier description or diagnosis must be that of a genus or subdivision of a genus; and (c) for
a name of a species or infraspecific taxon, the earlier description or diagnosis must be that of a species or infraspecific
taxon (but see Art. 38.12).
Ex. 18. “Pseudoditrichaceae fam. nov.” (Steere & Iwatsuki in Canad. J. Bot. 52: 701. 1974) was not a validly published name of a family as
there was no Latin description or diagnosis nor reference to either, but only mention of the single included genus and species (see Art. 36.2),
as “Pseudoditrichum mirabile gen. et sp. nov.”, the names of which were both validly published under Art. 38.5 by a single Latin diagnosis.
Ex. 19. Scirpoides Ség. (Pl. Veron. Suppl.: 73. 1754) was published without a generic description or diagnosis. It was validly published by
indirect reference (through the title of the book and a general statement in the preface) to the generic diagnosis and further direct references
in Séguier (Pl. Veron. 1: 117. 1745).
Ex. 20. Because Art. 38.11 places no restriction on names at ranks higher than family, Eucommiales Němejc ex Cronquist (Integr. Syst. Class.
Fl. Pl.: 182. 1981) was validly published by Cronquist, who provided a full and direct reference to the Latin description associated with the
genus Eucommia Oliv. (in Hooker’s Icon. Pl. 20: ad t. 1950. 1890).
38.12. A name of a new species may be validly published by reference (direct or indirect; see Art. 38.13 and 38.14) to
a description or diagnosis of a genus, if the following conditions are satisfied: (a) the name of the genus was previously
and validly published simultaneously with its description or diagnosis and (b) neither the author of the name of the
genus nor the author of the name of the species indicates that more than one species belongs to the genus in question.
Ex. 21. Trilepisium Thouars (Gen. Nov. Madagasc.: 22. 1806) was validated by a generic description but without mention of a name of a
species. Trilepisium madagascariense DC. (Prodr. 2: 639. 1825) was subsequently proposed without a description or diagnosis of the species
and with the generic name followed by a reference to Thouars. Neither author gave any indication that there was more than one species in
the genus. Candolle’s species name is therefore validly published.
38.13. For the purpose of valid publication of a name of a new taxon, reference to a previously and effectively
published description or diagnosis may be direct or indirect (Art. 38.14). For names published on or after 1 January
1953 it must, however, be full and direct as specified in Art. 41.5.
75
38.14. An indirect reference is a clear (if cryptic) indication, by an author citation or in some other way, that a
previously and effectively published description or diagnosis applies.
Ex. 22. “Kratzmannia” (Opiz in Berchtold & Opiz, Oekon.-Techn. Fl. Böhm. 1: 398. 1836) was published with a diagnosis but was not definitely
accepted by the author and was not therefore validly published under Art. 36.1. Kratzmannia Opiz (Seznam: 56. 1852), lacking description or
diagnosis, is however definitely accepted, and its citation as “Kratzmannia O.” constitutes an indirect reference to Opiz’s diagnosis published
in 1836.
Recommendation 38A
38A.1. A name of a new taxon should not be validated solely by a reference to a description or diagnosis published before 1753.
Recommendation 38B
38B.1. When a description is provided for valid publication of the name of a new taxon, a separate diagnosis should also be
presented.
38B.2. Where no separate diagnosis is provided, the description of any new taxon should mention the points that distinguish the
taxon from others.
Recommendation 38C
38C.1. When naming a new taxon, authors should not adopt a name that has been previously but not validly published for a
different taxon.
Recommendation 38D
38D.1. In describing or diagnosing new taxa, authors should, when possible, supply figures with details of structure as an aid to
identification.
38D.2. In the explanation of figures, authors should indicate the specimen(s) on which they are based (see also Rec. 8A.2).
38D.3. Authors should indicate clearly and precisely the scale of the figures that they publish.
Recommendation 38E
38E.1. Descriptions or diagnoses of new taxa of parasitic organisms, especially fungi, should always be followed by indication of
the hosts. The hosts should be designated by their scientific names and not solely by names in modern languages, the application
of which is often doubtful.
ARTICLE 39
39.1. In order to be validly published, a name of a new taxon (algae and fossils excepted) published between 1 January
1935 and 31 December 2011, inclusive, must be accompanied by a Latin description or diagnosis or by a reference
(see Art. 38.13) to a previously and effectively published Latin description or diagnosis (but see Art. H.9; for fossils
see Art. 43.1; for algae see Art. 44.1).
Ex. 1. Arabis “Sekt. Brassicoturritis O. E. Schulz” and A. “Sekt. Brassicarabis O. E. Schulz” (in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam., ed. 2, 17b:
543–544. 1936), published with German but no Latin descriptions or diagnoses, are not validly published names.
Ex. 2. “Schiedea gregoriana” (Degener, Fl. Hawaiiensis, fam. 119. 9 Apr 1936) was accompanied by an English but no Latin description and is
not therefore a validly published name. Schiedea kealiae Caum & Hosaka (in Occas. Pap. Bernice Pauahi Bishop Mus. 11(23): 3. 10 Apr 1936),
the type of which is part of the material used by Degener, is provided with a Latin description and is validly published.
Ex. 3. Alyssum flahaultianum Emb., first published without a Latin description or diagnosis (in Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Maroc 15: 199. 1936), was
validly published posthumously when a Latin translation of Emberger’s original French description was provided (in Willdenowia 15: 62–63.
1985).
39.2. In order to be validly published, a name of a new taxon published on or after 1 January 2012 must be
accompanied by a Latin or English description or diagnosis or by a reference (see Art. 38.13) to a previously and
effectively published Latin or English description or diagnosis (for fossils see also Art. 43.1).
Recommendation 39A
39A.1. Authors publishing names of new taxa should give or cite a full description in Latin or English in addition to the diagnosis.
76
ARTICLE 40
40.1. Publication on or after 1 January 1958 of the name of a new taxon at the rank of genus or below is valid only
when the type of the name is indicated (see Art. 7–10; but see Art. H.9 Note 1 for the names of certain hybrids).
40.2. For the name of a new species or infraspecific taxon, indication of the type as required by Art. 40.1 can be
achieved by reference to an entire gathering, or a part thereof, even if it consists of two or more specimens as defined
in Art. 8 (see also Art. 40.7).
Ex. 1. When Cheng described “Gnetum cleistostachyum” (in Acta Phytotax. Sin. 13(4): 89. 1975) the name was not validly published because
two gatherings were designated as types: K. H. Tsai 142 (as “♀ Typus”) and X. Jiang 127 (as “♂ Typus”).
Note 1. When the type is indicated by reference to an entire gathering, or a part thereof, that consists of more than one specimen,
those specimens are syntypes (see Art. 9.6).
Ex. 2. The protologue of Laurentia frontidentata E. Wimm. (in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV. 276 (Heft 108): 855. 1968) includes the type statement
“E. Esterhuysen No. 17070! Typus – Pret., Bol.” The name is validly published because a single gathering is cited, despite the mention of
duplicate specimens (syntypes) in two different herbaria, and Art. 40.7 does not apply.
Ex. 3. Radcliffe-Smith (in Gen. Croton. Madag. Comoro: 169. 2016) indicated the type of Croton nitidulus var. acuminatus Radcl.-Sm. as “Cours
4871 (holotypus P)”. In the herbarium P there are four duplicates of Cours 4871. The name is validly published because a single gathering in
a single herbarium was indicated as type. These specimens are syntypes, and one of them was subsequently designated as the lectotype by
Berry & al. (in Phytokeys 90: 69. 2017).
40.3. For the name of a new genus or subdivision of a genus, reference (direct or indirect) to a single species name, or
citation of the holotype or lectotype of a single previously or simultaneously published species name, even if that
element is not explicitly designated as type, is acceptable as indication of the type (see also Art. 10.8; but see Art.
40.6). For the purpose of Art. 40.1, mention of a single specimen or gathering (Art. 40.2) or illustration, even if that
element is not explicitly designated as type, is acceptable as indication of the type of the name of a new species or
infraspecific taxon (but see Art. 40.6).
Ex. 4. “Baloghia pininsularis” was published by Guillaumin (in Mém. Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat., B, Bot. 8: 260. 1962) with two cited
gatherings: Baumann 13813 and Baumann 13823. Because the author failed to designate one of them as the type, the designation was not
validly published. Valid publication of the name B. pininsularis Guillaumin was effected when McPherson & Tirel (Fl. Nouv.-Calédonie &
Dépend. 14: 58. 1987) wrote “Lectotype (désigné ici): Baumann-Bodenheim 13823 (P!; iso-, Z)” while providing a full and direct reference to
Guillaumin’s Latin description (Art. 33.1; see Art. 46 Ex. 22); McPherson & Tirel’s use of “lectotype” is correctable to “holotype” under Art.
9.10.
Note 2. Mere citation of a locality does not constitute mention of a single specimen or gathering. Concrete reference to some
detail relating to the actual type is required, such as the collector’s name, collecting number or date, or unique specimen identifier.
Note 3. Cultures of algae and fungi preserved in a metabolically inactive state are acceptable as types (Art. 8.4; see also Rec.
8B and Art. 40.8).
40.4. For the purpose of Art. 40.1, the type of a name of a new species or infraspecific taxon (fossils excepted: see Art.
8.5) may be an illustration prior to 1 January 2007; on or after that date, the type must be a specimen (except as
provided in Art. 40.5).
Ex. 5. “Dendrobium sibuyanense” (see Art. 8 Ex. 11) was described with a living collection indicated as holotype and was not therefore validly
published. It was not validly published later, when Lubag-Arquiza & Christenson (in Orchid Digest 70: 174. 2006) designated a published
drawing as “lectotype”, contrary to Art. 40.6, which does not permit use of the term “lectotype” in naming a new species starting from 1
January 1990. Nor was valid publication effected when Clements & Cootes (in OrchideenJ. 16: 27–28. 2009) published “Euphlebium
sibuyanense” for this taxon because after 1 January 2007 their indication of this drawing as holotype was precluded by Art. 40.4.
40.5. For the purpose of Art. 40.1, the type of a name of a new species or infraspecific taxon of microscopic algae or
microfungi (fossils excepted: see Art. 8.5) may be an effectively published illustration if there are technical difficulties
77
of specimen preservation or if it is impossible to preserve a specimen that would show the features attributed to the
taxon by the author of the name.
Ex. 6. Lücking & Moncada (in Fungal Diversity 84: 119–138. 2017) introduced “Lawreymyces” and seven intended microfungal species names
using representations of diagnostic sequences of bases of DNA from the Internal Transcribed Spacer (ITS) region as intended types. These
representations are not illustrations under Art. 6.1 footnote because they are not depictions of features of the organisms, and consequently
the intended names were not validly published.
40.6. For the name of a new taxon at the rank of genus or below published on or after 1 January 1990, indication of
the type must include one of the words “typus” or “holotypus”, or its abbreviation, or its equivalent in a modern
language (see also Rec. 40A.1 and 40A.4). But in the case of the name of a monotypic (as defined in Art. 38.6) new
genus or subdivision of a genus with the simultaneously published name of a new species, indication of the type of
the species name is sufficient.
Ex. 7. When Stephenson described “Sedum mucizonia (Ortega) Raym.-Hamet subsp. urceolatum” (in Cact. Succ. J. (Los Angeles) 64: 234.
1992) the name was not validly published because the protologue lacked the indication “typus” or “holotypus”, or its abbreviation, or its
equivalent in a modern language, a requirement for names published on or after 1 January 1990.
40.7. For the name of a new species or infraspecific taxon published on or after 1 January 1990 of which the type is a
specimen or unpublished illustration, the single herbarium, collection, or institution in which the type is conserved
must be specified (see also Rec. 40A.5 and 40A.6).
Ex. 8. In the protologue of Setaria excurrens var. leviflora Keng ex S. L. Chen (in Bull. Nanjing Bot. Gard. 1988–1989: 3. 1990) the
gathering Guangxi Team 4088 was indicated as “模式” [type] and the herbarium where the type is conserved was specified as “中国科学院
植物研究所标本室” [Herbarium, Institute of Botany, The Chinese Academy of Sciences], i.e. PE.
Note 4. Specification of the herbarium, collection, or institution may be made in an abbreviated form, e.g. as given in Index
Herbariorum (http://sweetgum.nybg.org/science/ih/) or in the World directory of collections of cultures of microorganisms.
Ex. 9. When ’t Hart described “Sedum eriocarpum subsp. spathulifolium” (in Ot Sist. Bot. Dergisi 2(2): 7. 1995) the name was not validly
published because no herbarium, collection, or institution in which the holotype specimen was conserved was specified. Valid publication
was effected when ’t Hart (in Strid & Tan, Fl. Hellen. 2: 325. 2002) wrote “Type … ’t Hart HRT-27104 … (U)” while providing a full and direct
reference to his previously published Latin diagnosis (Art. 33.1).
40.8. For the name of a new species or infraspecific taxon published on or after 1 January 2019 of which the type is a
culture, the protologue must include a statement that the culture is preserved in a metabolically inactive state.
Recommendation 40A
40A.1. The indication of the nomenclatural type should immediately follow the description or diagnosis and should include the
Latin word “typus” or “holotypus”.
40A.2. Authors proposing names of new families or subdivisions of families are urged to ensure that the generic name from which
the new name is formed is itself effectively typified (see Art. 7 and 10), if necessary by designating a type for that generic name
under the relevant provisions of Art. 7 and 10 (see also Rec. 40A.3).
40A.3. For the name of a new genus or subdivision of a genus, authors should cite the type of the species name (see Art. 7–9) that
provides the type (Art. 10.1) of the new name and, if necessary, designate the type for that species name under the relevant
provisions of Art. 7 and 9.
40A.4. Details of the type specimen of the name of a new species or infraspecific taxon should be published in the Latin alphabet.
40A.5. Specification of the herbarium, collection, or institution of deposition should be followed by any available number
permanently and unambiguously identifying the holotype specimen.
Ex. 1. The type of Sladenia integrifolia Y. M. Shui & W. H. Chen (in Novon 12: 539. 2002) was designated as “Mo Ming-Zhong, Mao Rong-Hua
& Yu Zhi-Yong 05 (holotype, KUN 0735701; isotypes, MO, PE)”, where KUN No. 0735701 is the unique identifier of the holotype sheet in the
herbarium of the Kunming Institute of Botany (KUN).
40A.6. Citation of the herbarium, collection, or institution of deposition should use one of the standards mentioned in Art. 40
Note 4 or, when those standards give no abbreviated form, should be given in full with the location.
78
SECTION 3
NEW COMBINATIONS, NAMES AT NEW RANKS,
REPLACEMENT NAMES
ARTICLE 41
41.1. In order to be validly published, a new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name must be
accompanied by a reference to the basionym or replaced synonym. (See Art. 6.10 and 6.11).
41.2. For the purpose of valid publication of a new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name, the
following restrictions apply: (a) for a name of a family or subdivision of a family, the basionym or replaced synonym
must be a name of a family or subdivision of a family; (b) for a name of a genus or subdivision of a genus, the basionym
or replaced synonym must be a name of a genus or subdivision of a genus; and (c) for a name of a species or
infraspecific taxon, the basionym or replaced synonym must be a name of a species or infraspecific taxon.
Ex. 1. Thuspeinanta T. Durand (Index Gen. Phan.: 703. 1888) is a replacement name for Tapeinanthus Boiss. ex Benth. (in Candolle, Prodr. 12:
436. 1848) non Herb. (Amaryllidaceae: 190. 1837); Aspalathoides (DC.) K. Koch (Hort. Dendrol.: 242. 1853) is based
on Anthyllis sect. Aspalathoides DC. (Prodr. 2: 169. 1825).
Ex. 2. Presl did not validly publish “Cuscuteae” (in Presl & Presl, Delic. Prag.: 87. 1822) as the name of a family (see “Praemonenda”, pp. [3–
4]) based on Cuscutales Bercht. & J. Presl (Přir. Rostlin: 247. 1820, ‘Cuscuteae’) because the latter is the name of an order (see Art. 18 *Ex. 5).
41.3. Before 1 January 1953 an indirect reference (see Art. 38.14) to a basionym or replaced synonym is sufficient for
valid publication of a new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name. Therefore, errors in the citation of
the basionym or replaced synonym, or in author citation (Art. 46), do not affect valid publication of such names.
Ex. 3. In a list of names by Masamune (in Bot. Mag. (Tokyo) 51: 234. 1937), Persicaria runcinata was attributed to “(Hamilt.)” but no further
information was given. Earlier, the name Polygonum runcinatum had been validly published by Don (Prodr. Fl. Nepal.: 73. 1825) and ascribed
there to “Hamilton MSS.” The mention by Masamune of “Hamilt.” is regarded as an indirect reference to the basionym published by Don,
and thus the new combination Persicaria runcinata (Buch.-Ham. ex D. Don) Masam. was validly published.
Ex. 4. Opiz validly published the name at new rank Hemisphace (Benth.) Opiz (Seznam: 50. 1852) by writing “Hemisphace Benth.”, which is
regarded as an indirect reference to the basionym Salvia sect. Hemisphace Benth. (Labiat. Gen. Spec.: 193. 1833).
Ex. 5. The new combination Cymbopogon martini (Roxb.) Will. Watson (in Gaz. N.-W. Prov. India 10: 392. 1882) is validly published through
the cryptic notation “309”, which, as explained at the top of the same page, is the running-number of the species (Andropogon martini Roxb.)
in Steudel (Syn. Pl. Glumac. 1: 388. 1854). Although the reference to the basionym A. martini is indirect, it is unambiguous (but see Art. 33 Ex.
1; see also Rec. 60C.1).
Ex. 6. Miller (1768), in the preface to The gardeners dictionary, ed. 8, stated that he had “now applied Linnaeus’s method entirely except in
such particulars …”, of which he gave examples. In the main text, he often referred to Linnaean genera under his own generic headings, e.g.
to Cactus L. [pro parte] under Opuntia Mill. Therefore, an implicit reference to a Linnaean binomial may be assumed when this is appropriate,
and Miller’s binomials are accepted as new combinations (e.g. O. ficus-indica (L.) Mill., based on C. ficus-indica L.) or replacement names
(e.g. O. vulgaris Mill., based on C. opuntia L.: both names have the reference to “Opuntia vulgo herbariorum” of Bauhin & Cherler in
common).
Ex. 7. When Haines (Forest Fl. Chota Nagpur: 530. 1910) published the name Dioscorea belophylla, he attributed the name to “Voight”.
Previously, Prain (Bengal Pl. 2: 1065, 1067. 1903) had validly published D. nummularia var. belophylla Prain, citing “Voigt (sp.)”, an apparent
reference to the nomen nudum “Dioscorea belophylla” (Voigt, Hort. Suburb. Calcutt.: 653. 1845). The mention by Haines of “Voight” is
regarded as an indirect reference to Prain’s varietal name, and thus D. belophylla (Prain) Haines was validly published as a new combination
and name at new rank.
Ex. 8. Cortinarius collinitus var. trivialis (J. E. Lange) A. H. Sm. (in Lloydia 7: 175. 1944) was validly published as a new combination based on C.
trivialis J. E. Lange (Fl. Agaric. Danic. 5(Taxon. Consp.): iii 1940), even though Smith referred to the basionym as “C. trivialis Lange ‘Studies,’
pt. 10: 24. 1935”, where that name was not validly published because Lange failed to provide a Latin description or diagnosis.
41.4. If, for a name of a genus or lower-ranked taxon published before 1 January 1953, no reference to a basionym is
given but the conditions for its valid publication as the name of a new taxon or replacement name are fulfilled, that
name is nevertheless treated as a new combination or name at new rank when this was the author’s presumed intent
and a potential basionym (Art. 6.10) applying to the same taxon exists.
79
Ex. 9. In Kummer’s Der Führer in die Pilzkunde (1871) the note (p. 12) explaining that the author intended to adopt at generic rank the
subdivisions of Agaricus then in use, which at the time were those of Fries, and the general arrangement of the work, which faithfully follows
that of Fries, have been considered to provide indirect reference to Fries’s earlier names of “tribes” as basionyms (see Art. F.4.1). Even though
this was Kummer’s presumed intent, he did not actually mention Fries, and it is questionable whether he gave any reference, even indirect,
to a basionym. Nevertheless, even when Art. 41.3 is not considered to apply, because Kummer provided diagnoses in a key and thus fulfilled
the conditions for valid publication of names of new taxa, Art. 41.4 rules that names such as Hypholoma (Fr. : Fr.) P. Kumm.
and H. fasciculare (Huds. : Fr.) P. Kumm. are to be accepted as new combinations or names at new rank based on the corresponding Friesian
names (here: A. “tribus” [unranked] Hypholoma Fr. : Fr. and A. fascicularis Huds. : Fr.).
Ex. 10. Scaevola taccada was validly published by Roxburgh (Hort. Bengal.: 15. 1814) solely by reference to an illustration in Rheede (Hort.
Malab. 4: t. 59. 1683) that is associated with a description of a species. Because the same illustration was cited in the protologue of the earlier
name Lobelia taccada Gaertn. (Fruct. Sem. Pl. 1: 119. 1788) and the two names apply to the same species, S. taccada is treated as a new
combination, S. taccada (Gaertn.) Roxb., not as the name of a new species, even though in Roxburgh’s protologue there is no reference,
either direct or indirect, to L. taccada.
Ex. 11. When Moench (Methodus: 272. 1794) described Chamaecrista, he did not refer to Cassia [unranked] Chamaecrista L. (Sp. Pl.: 379.
1753; see Art. 32 Ex. 1) but used its epithet as the generic name and included its type, Cassia chamaecrista L. (cited in synonymy). Therefore,
he published a name at new rank, Chamaecrista (L.) Moench, and not a name of a new genus.
Ex. 12. Cololejeunea was published by Stephani (in Hedwigia 30: 208. 1891) for a taxon that had previously been described
as Lejeunea subg. Cololejeunea Spruce (in Trans. & Proc. Bot. Soc. Edinburgh 15: 79, 291. 1884) but without even an indirect reference to
Spruce’s earlier publication. Because Stephani provided a description of C. elegans Steph. that under Art. 38.5is acceptable as a descriptio
generico-specifica, he fulfilled the requirements for valid publication of Cololejeunea as the name of a new monotypic genus. Under Art.
41.4, Cololejeunea is therefore to be treated as a name at new rank, Cololejeunea (Spruce) Steph., based on Spruce’s subgeneric name.
Ex. 13. When Sampaio published “Psoroma murale Samp.” (in Bol. Real Soc. Esp. Hist. Nat. 27: 142. 1927), he adopted the epithet of Lichen
muralis Schreb. (Spic. Fl. Lips.: 130. 1771), a name applied to the same taxon, without referring to that name either directly or indirectly. He
cited in synonymy Lecanora saxicola (Pollich) Ach. (Lichenogr. Universalis: 431. 1810), which is based on Lichen saxicola Pollich (Hist. Pl. Palat.
3: 225. 1777). Under Art. 41.4, Psoroma murale (Schreb.) Samp. is treated as a new combination based on Lichen muralis;otherwise it would
be a validly published but illegitimate replacement name for Lichen saxicola.
41.5. On or after 1 January 1953, a new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name is not validly published
unless its basionym or replaced synonym is clearly indicated and a full and direct reference given to its author and
place of valid publication, with page or plate reference and date (but see Art. 41.6 and 41.8). On or after 1 January
2007, a new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name is not validly published unless its basionym or
replaced synonym is cited.
Ex. 14. In transferring Ectocarpus mucronatus D. A. Saunders to Giffordia, Kjeldsen & Phinney (in Madroño 22: 90. 27 Apr 1973) cited the
basionym and its author but without reference to its place of valid publication. They later (in Madroño 22: 154. 2 Jul 1973) validly published
the new combination G. mucronata (D. A. Saunders) Kjeldsen & H. K. Phinney by giving a full and direct reference to the place of valid
publication of the basionym.
Note 1. For the purpose of Art. 41.5, a page reference (for publications with a consecutive pagination) is a reference to the page
or pages on which the basionym or replaced synonym was validly published or on which the protologue appears, but not to the
pagination of the whole publication unless it is coextensive with that of the protologue.
Ex. 15. When proposing “Cylindrocladium infestans”, Peerally (in Mycotaxon 40: 337. 1991) cited the basionym as “Cylindrocladiella
infestans Boesew., Can. J. Bot. 60: 2288–2294. 1982”. Because this refers to the pagination of Boesewinkel’s entire paper, not of the
protologue of the intended basionym alone, the combination was not validly published by Peerally.
Ex. 16. The new combination Conophytum marginatum subsp. littlewoodii (L. Bolus) S. A. Hammer (Dumpling & His Wife: New Views Gen.
Conophytum: 181. 2002), because it was made prior to 1 January 2007, was validly published even though Hammer did not cite the basionym
(C. littlewoodii L. Bolus) but only indicated it by giving a full and direct reference to its place of valid publication.
41.6. For names published on or after 1 January 1953, errors in the citation of the basionym or replaced synonym,
including incorrect author citation (Art. 46), but not omissions (Art. 41.5), do not preclude valid publication of a new
combination, name at new rank, or replacement name.
Ex. 17. Aronia arbutifolia var. nigra (Willd.) F. Seym. (Fl. New England: 308. 1969) was published as a new combination “Based on Mespilus
arbutifolia L. var. nigra Willd., in Sp. Pl. 2: 1013. 1800.” Willdenow treated these plants in the genus Pyrus, not Mespilus, and publication was
in 1799, not 1800; these errors of citation do not prevent valid publication of the new combination.
Ex. 18. The name at new rank Agropyron desertorum var. pilosiusculum (Melderis) H. L. Yang (in Kuo, Fl. Reipubl. Popularis Sin. 9(3): 113.
1987) was inadvertently but validly published by Yang, who wrote “Agropyron desertorum … var. pilosiusculum Meld. in Norlindh, Fl. Mong.
Steppe. 1: 121. 1949”, which constitutes a full and direct reference to the basionym, A. desertorum f. pilosiusculum Melderis, despite the
error in citing the rank-denoting term.
80
Ex. 19. Nekemias grossedentata (Hand.-Mazz.) J. Wen & Z. L. Nie (in PhytoKeys 42: 16. 2014) was published as a new combination, with the
basionym cited as “Ampelopsis cantoniensisvar. grossedentata Hand.-Mazz., Sitzungsber. Kaiserl. Akad. Wiss., Math.-Naturwiss. Cl., Abt. 1,
59: 105. 1877”. The actual place of publication of the cited basionym was in Anz. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-Naturwiss. Kl. 59: 105. 1922. These
errors of citation (name of the journal and date) do not prevent valid publication of the new combination.
41.7. Mere reference to the Index kewensis, the Index of fungi, or any work other than that in which the name was
validly published does not constitute a full and direct reference to the place of publication of a name (but see Art.
41.8).
Ex. 20. “Leptosiphon croceus (Eastw.) J. M. Porter & L. A. Johnson, comb. nov.” (in Aliso 19: 80. 2000) was published with the basionym citation
“Linanthus croceus Eastw., Pl. hartw. p. 325. 1849.” Because the actual place of publication of Linanthus croceus was in Bot. Gaz. 37: 442–
443. 1904, Porter & Johnson’s combination was not validly published.
Ex. 21. Ciferri (in Mycopathol. Mycol. Appl. 7: 86–89. 1954), in proposing 142 intended new combinations in Meliola, omitted references to
places of publication of basionyms, stating that they could be found in Petrak’s lists or in the Index of fungi; none of these combinations was
validly published. Similarly, Grummann (Cat. Lich. Germ.: 18. 1963) introduced a new combination in the form Lecanora campestris f.
“pseudistera (Nyl.) Grumm. c.n. – L. p. Nyl., Z 5: 521”, in which “Z 5” referred to Zahlbruckner (Cat. Lich. Univ. 5: 521. 1928), who gave the full
citation of the basionym, Lecanora pseudistera Nyl.; Grummann’s combination was not validly published.
Note 2. For the purposes of Art. 41.7 an unpaginated or independently paginated electronic publication and a later version with
definitive pagination are not considered to be different publications (see Art. 30 Note 1).
Note 3. A new name published for a taxon previously known under a misapplied name is always the name of a new taxon and
must therefore meet all relevant requirements of Art. 32–45and F.4–F.5 for valid publication of such a name. This procedure is
not the same as publishing a replacement name for a validly published but illegitimate name (Art. 58.1), the type of which is
necessarily that of the replaced synonym (Art. 7.4).
Ex. 22. Sadleria hillebrandii Rob. (in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 40: 226. 1913) was introduced as a “nom. nov.” for “Sadleria pallida Hilleb. Fl. Haw.
Is. 582. 1888. Not Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 75. 1832.” Because the requirements for valid publication were satisfied (prior to 1935, simple
reference to a previous description or diagnosis in any language was sufficient), S. hillebrandii is the name of a new species validated by
Hillebrand’s description of the taxon to which he misapplied the name S. pallida Hook. & Arn., not a replacement name as stated by Robinson
(see Art. 6.14).
Ex. 23. “Juncus bufonius var. occidentalis” (Hermann in U.S. Forest Serv., Techn. Rep. RM-18: 14. 1975) was published as a “nom. et stat. nov.”
for J. sphaerocarpus “auct. Am., non Nees”. Because there is no Latin description or diagnosis, indication of type, or reference to any previous
publication providing these requirements, this is not a validly published name.
41.8. On or after 1 January 1953, in any of the following cases, a full and direct reference to a work other than that in
which the basionym or replaced synonym was validly published is treated as an error to be corrected, not affecting
the valid publication of a new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name:
(a) when the actual basionym or replaced synonym was validly published earlier than the name or later isonym cited
as such, but in the cited publication, in which all conditions for valid publication of the name as cited are fulfilled,
there is no reference, in association with that name, to the place of valid publication of the actual basionym or
replaced synonym;
(b) when the failure to cite the place of valid publication of the basionym or replaced synonym is explained by the later
nomenclatural starting-point for the group concerned (Art. 13.1), or by the backward shift of the starting date for
some fungi;
(c) when the resulting new combination or name at new rank would otherwise be validly published as a (legitimate or
illegitimate) replacement name; or
(d) when the resulting new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name would otherwise be the validly
published name of a new taxon.
Ex. 24. (a) The new combination Trichipteris kalbreyeri was proposed by Tryon (in Contr. Gray Herb. 200: 45. 1970) with a full and direct
reference to “Alsophila Kalbreyeri C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 44. 1905”. This, however, is not the place of valid publication of the intended basionym,
which had previously been published, with the same type, by Baker (1892; see Art. 6 Ex. 1). Because Christensen provided no reference to
Baker’s earlier publication, Tryon’s error of citation does not affect the valid publication of his new combination, which is cited
as T. kalbreyeri (Baker) R. M. Tryon.
Ex. 25. (a) The intended new combination “Machaerina iridifolia” was proposed by Koyama (in Bot. Mag. (Tokyo) 69: 64. 1956) with a full and
direct reference to “Cladium iridifoliumBaker, Flor. Maurit. 424 (1877)”. However, C. iridifolium had been proposed by Baker as a new
combination based on Scirpus iridifolius Bory (Voy. Îles Afrique 2: 94. 1804). Because Baker provided an explicit reference to Bory, Art.
41.8(a) does not apply and the combination under Machaerina was not validly published by Koyama.
81
Ex. 26. (b) The combination Lasiobelonium corticale was proposed by Raitviir (in Scripta Mycol. 9: 106. 1980) with a full and direct reference
to Peziza corticalis in Fries (Syst. Mycol. 2: 96. 1822). This, however, is not the place of valid publication of the basionym, which, under
the Code operating in 1980, was in Mérat (Nouv. Fl. Env. Paris, ed. 2, 1: 22. 1821), and under the current Code is in Persoon (Observ. Mycol.
1: 28. 1796). Raitviir’s error of citation is partly explained by the backward shift of the starting date for some fungi and partly by the absence
of a reference to Mérat in Fries’s work, and does not therefore prevent valid publication of the new combination, which is cited
as L. corticale (Pers. : Fr.) Raitv.
Ex. 27. (b). Malvidae C. Y. Wu (in Acta Phytotax. Sin. 40: 306. 2002) was validly published as a name at new rank based on Malvaceae Juss.
(Gen. Pl.: 271. 1789), even though Wu cited as the basionym “Malvaceae” (Adanson, Fam. Pl. 2: 390. 1763). Wu’s error of citation, explained
by the later nomenclatural starting-point for suprageneric names of Spermatophyta and Pteridophyta (Art. 13.1(a)), does not prevent valid
publication of the name at new rank.
Ex. 28. (c) The new combination Mirabilis laevis subsp. glutinosa was proposed by Murray (in Kalmia 13: 32. 1983) with a full and direct
reference to “Mirabilis glutinosa A. Nels., Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash. 17: 92 (1904)” as the intended basionym. This, however, cannot be a basionym
because it is an illegitimate later homonym of M. glutinosa Kuntze (Revis. Gen. Pl. 3: 265. 1898); it is also the replaced synonym of Hesperonia
glutinosa Standl. (in Contr. U. S. Natl. Herb. 12: 365. 1909). Under Art. 41.8(c), Murray validly published a new combination based
on H. glutinosa, because otherwise he would have published a replacement name for M. glutinosa. The name is therefore to be cited
as M. laevis subsp. glutinosa (Standl.) A. E. Murray.
Ex. 29. (c) The new combination Tillandsia barclayana var. minor was proposed by Butcher (in Bromeliaceae 43(6): 5. 2009) with a reference,
but not a full and direct one, to Vriesea barclayana var. minor Gilmartin (in Phytologia 16: 164. 1968). Butcher also provided a full and direct
reference to T. lateritia André (“BASIONYM: Tillandsia lateritia Andre, Enum. Bromel. 6. 13 Dec 1888; Revue Hort. 60: 566. 16 Dec 1888”),
which is the replaced synonym of V. barclayana var. minor. Under Art. 41.8(c), T. barclayana var. minor (Gilmartin) Butcher was validly
published as a new combination based on V. barclayana var. minor because it would otherwise have been published as a replacement name
for T. lateritia.
Ex. 30. (d) When Koyama published the new combination Carex henryi (C. B. Clarke) T. Koyama (in Jap. J. Bot. 15: 175. 1956), he cited the
basionym, C. longicruris var. henryi C. B. Clarke (in J. Linn. Soc., Bot. 36: 295. 1903), with a full and direct reference not to the work in which
that name was validly published, but to a later work (Kükenthal in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV. 20 (Heft 38): 603. 1909), in which the name was
accompanied by a Latin diagnosis. Koyama’s reference to Kükenthal is treated as an error to be corrected, not affecting the valid publication
of the new combination C. henryi, because otherwise that name would be validly published as the name of a new species by direct reference
to Kükenthal’s Latin diagnosis (Art. 38.1(a)).
Recommendation 41A
41A.1. The full and direct reference to the place of publication of the basionym or replaced synonym should immediately follow
a proposed new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name. It should not be provided by mere cross-reference to a
bibliography at the end of the publication or to other parts of the same publication, e.g. by use of the abbreviations “loc. cit.” or
“op. cit.”
41A.2. In the absence of established tradition, if publications are not paginated, page numbers should be referenced with square
brackets.
Ex. 1. The name Crocus antalyensioides Rukšāns was published electronically in International Rock Gardener (ISSN 2053-7557), Volume 64,
April 2015, in Portable Document Format (PDF), without page numbers included on the actual pages of the publication. The reference should
be cited as Int. Rock Gard. 64: [6]. 2015.
SECTION 4
NAMES IN PARTICULAR GROUPS
ARTICLE 42
42.1. Interested institutions, in particular those with expertise in nomenclatural indexing, may apply for recognition
as nomenclatural repositories under this Code. A nomenclatural repository takes charge, for specified categories of
organisms, of registering nomenclatural novelties (Art. 6 Note 4) and/or any nomenclatural act (Art. 34.1 footnote).
42.2. Applications for recognition as nomenclatural repositories for organisms other than fungi (for fungi see Art. F.5.3)
are to be addressed to the General Committee, which will refer the applications to the Registration Committee
(see Div. III Prov. 7.13) and act upon its recommendation. Prior to such a recommendation, mechanisms and modalities
of registration, and definition of coverage, will be developed in consultations among the applicant(s), the Registration
Committee, and the Permanent Nomenclature Committee(s) for the group(s) concerned, and be widely publicized in
82
the taxonomic community; a public trial run of at least one year must have shown that the procedure works efficiently
and sustainably. The General Committee has the power to suspend or revoke a granted recognition.
42.3. Registration may be proactive and/or synchronous and/or retrospective; that is, it may occur before and/or
simultaneously with and/or after the valid publication of a nomenclatural novelty (Art. 6 Note 4) or the effective
publication of any nomenclatural act (Art. 34.1 footnote).
Note 1. For ways in which proactive registration of nomenclatural novelties functions, see Art. F.5.1 and F.5.2, relevant for names
of organisms treated as fungi, including fossil fungi and lichen-forming fungi.
ARTICLE 43
43.1. In order to be validly published, a name of a new fossil-taxon published on or after 1 January 1996 must be
accompanied by a Latin or English description or diagnosis or by a reference (see Art. 38.13) to a previously and
effectively published Latin or English description or diagnosis.
Note 1. Because Art. 39.1 does not apply to names of fossil-taxa, a validating description or diagnosis (see Art. 38) in any language
is acceptable for them prior to 1996.
43.2. A name of a new fossil-genus or lower-ranked fossil-taxon published on or after 1 January 1912 is not validly
published unless it is accompanied by an illustration or figure showing the essential characters or by a reference to a
previously and effectively published such illustration or figure. For this purpose, in the case of a name of a fossil-genus
or subdivision of a fossil-genus, citation of, or reference (direct or indirect) to, a name of a fossil-species validly
published on or after 1 January 1912 will suffice.
Ex. 1. “Laconiella” when published by Krasser (in Akad. Wiss. Wien Sitzungsber., Math.-Naturwiss. Kl. Abt. 1, 129: 16. 1920) included only one
species, the intended name of which, “Laconiella sardinica”, was not validly published as no illustration or figure or reference to a previously
and effectively published illustration or figure was provided. “Laconiella” is not therefore a validly published generic name.
Ex. 2. Batodendron Chachlov (in Izv. Sibirsk. Otd. Geol. Komiteta 2(5): 9, fig. 23–25. 1921) was published with a description and illustrations.
Even though the new fossil-genus did not include any named species, its name is validly published (albeit as an illegitimate later homonym of
the non-fossil generic name Batodendron Nutt. in Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc., ser. 2, 8: 261. 1842).
43.3. A name of a new fossil-species or infraspecific fossil-taxon published on or after 1 January 2001 is not validly
published unless at least one of the validating illustrations is identified as representing the type specimen (see also Art.
9.15).
Note 2. A nomenclatural novelty applied to a fungal fossil-taxon and published on or after 1 January 2013 must comply with Art.
F.5.1 and F.5.2 in order to be validly published.
ARTICLE 44
44.1. In order to be validly published, a name of a new taxon of non-fossil algae published between 1 January 1958
and 31 December 2011, inclusive, must be accompanied by a Latin description or diagnosis or by a reference (see Art.
38.13) to a previously and effectively published Latin description or diagnosis.
Note 1. Because Art. 39.1 does not apply to names of algal taxa, a validating description or diagnosis (see Art. 38) in any language
is acceptable for them prior to 1958.
Ex. 1. Although Neoptilota Kylin (Gatt. Rhodophyc.: 392. 1956) was accompanied only by a description in German, it is a validly published
name because it applies to an alga and was published before 1958.
44.2. A name of a new species or infraspecific taxon of non-fossil algae published on or after 1 January 1958 is not
validly published unless it is accompanied by an illustration or figure showing the distinctive morphological features,
or by a reference to a previously and effectively published such illustration or figure.
83
Recommendation 44A
44A.1. The illustration or figure required by Art. 44.2 should be prepared from actual specimens, preferably including the
holotype.
ARTICLE 45
45.1. If a taxon originally assigned to a group not covered by this Code is treated as belonging to the algae or fungi,
any of its names need satisfy only the requirements of the relevant other Code that the author was using for status
equivalent to valid publication under this Code (but see Art. 54 and F.6.1, regarding homonymy). The Code used by the
author is determined through internal evidence, irrespective of any claim by the author as to the group of organisms
to which the taxon is assigned. However, a name generated in zoological nomenclature in accordance with the
Principle of Coordination is not validly published under this Code unless and until it actually appears in a publication
as the accepted name of a taxon.
Ex. 1. Amphiprora Ehrenb. (in Abh. Königl. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1841: 401, t. II(VI), fig. 28. 1843), available under the International Code of
1
Zoological Nomenclature as the name of a genus of animals, was first treated as belonging to the algae by Kützing (Kieselschal. Bacill.: 107.
1844). Under the International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants,Amphiprora is validly published and dates from 1843, not
1844.
[footnote] The word “available” (when applied to a name) in the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature is equivalent to “validly
1
published” in this Code.

Ex. 2. Petalodinium Cachon & Cachon-Enj. (in Protistologia 5: 16. 1969) is available under the International Code of Zoological
Nomenclature as the name of a genus of dinoflagellates. When the taxon is treated as belonging to the algae, its name is validly published
and retains its original authorship and date even though the original publication lacked a Latin description or diagnosis (Art. 44.1).
Ex. 3. Prochlorothrix hollandica Burger-Wiersma & al. (in Int. J. Syst. Bacteriol. 39: 256. 1989) was published according to the International
Code of Nomenclature of Prokaryotes. When the taxon is treated as an alga, its name is validly published and retains its original authorship
and date even though it was based on a living culture (Art. 8.4) and the original publication lacked a Latin description or diagnosis (Art. 44.1).
Ex. 4. Labyrinthodictyon Valkanov (in Progr. Protozool. 3: 373. 1969, ‘Labyrinthodyction’) is available under the International Code of
Zoological Nomenclature as the name of a genus of rhizopods. When the taxon is treated as belonging to the fungi, its name is validly
published and retains its original authorship and date even though the original publication lacked a Latin description or diagnosis (Art. 39.1).
Ex. 5. Protodiniferaceae Kof. & Swezy (in Mem. Univ. Calif. 5: 111. 1921, ‘Protodiniferidae’), available under the International Code of
Zoological Nomenclature, is validly published as a name of a family of algae and retains its original authorship and date but with the original
termination changed in accordance with Art. 18.4 and 32.2.
Ex. 6. Pneumocystis P. Delanoë & Delanoë (in Compt. Rend. Hebd. Séances Acad. Sci. 155: 660. 1912) was published for a “protozoan” genus
with a description expressing doubt as to its generic status, “Si celui-ci doit constituer un genre nouveau, nous proposons de lui donner le
nom de Pneumocystis Carinii.” Under Art. 36.1(a) Pneumocystis would not be validly published, but Art. 11.5.1 of the International Code of
Zoological Nomenclature allows for such qualified publication before 1961. Therefore, Pneumocystis, because it is an available name under
the ICZN, is validly published under Art. 45.1.
Ex. 7. Pneumocystis jirovecii Frenkel (in Natl. Cancer Inst. Monogr. 43: 16. 1976, ‘jiroveci’), treated as a protozoan, was published with only
an English description and without designation of a type, but the former condition is no obstacle to availability under the International Code
of Zoological Nomenclature (see Rec. 13B) and the latter was no obstacle under that Code until after 1999 (Art. 72.3). Therefore, when
considered the name of a fungus, P. jirovecii, with corrected termination (Art. 60.8), is validly published under Art. 45.1. Subsequent
publication of a Latin diagnosis and indication of type by Frenkel (in J. Eukaryot. Microbiol. 46: 91S. 1999), who treated the species as a fungus,
was necessary for valid publication under the edition of the International Code of Botanical Nomenclature in operation at that time, but is no
longer so; P. jirovecii dates from 1976, not 1999.
Note 1. Names of Microsporidia are not covered by this Code (see Pre. 8 and Art. F.1.1) even when Microsporidia are considered
as fungi.
Note 2. If a taxon originally assigned to a group not covered by this Code is treated as belonging to the plants (i.e. not the algae or
fungi), the authorship and date of any of its names are determined by the first publication that satisfies the relevant requirements
of Art. 32–45 for valid publication.
84
CHAPTER VI
CITATION
SECTION 1
AUTHOR CITATIONS
ARTICLE 46
46.1. In publications, particularly those dealing with taxonomy and nomenclature, it may be desirable, even when no
bibliographic reference to the protologue is made, to cite the author(s) of the name concerned (see also Art.
22.1 and 26.1). In so doing, the following rules apply.
Ex. 1. Rosaceae Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 334. 1789), Rosa L. (Sp. Pl.: 491. 1753), Rosa gallica L. (l.c.: 492. 1753), Rosa gallica var. versicolor L. (Sp. Pl.,
ed. 2: 704. 1762), Rosa gallica L. var. gallica.
Note 1. A name of a taxon is attributed to the author(s) of the publication in which it appears (see Art. 46.5) unless one or more
of the provisions of Art. 46 rules otherwise.
46.2. A name of a new taxon is attributed to the author(s) to whom the name was ascribed when the validating
description or diagnosis was simultaneously ascribed to or unequivocally associated with the same author(s), even
when authorship of the publication is different. A new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name is
attributed to the author(s) to whom it was ascribed when, in the publication in which it appears, it is explicitly stated
that the same author(s) contributed in some way to that publication. Art. 46.5 notwithstanding, authorship of a
nomenclatural novelty is always accepted as ascribed, even when it differs from authorship of the publication, when
at least one author is common to both.
85
Ex. 2. The name Pinus longaeva was published in a paper by Bailey (in Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 57: 243. 1971) and was ascribed to “D. K.
Bailey”. The validating description is unequivocally associated with Bailey because he is the author of the publication (see Note 5). The name
is therefore cited as P. longaeva D. K. Bailey (see also Note 1).
Ex. 3. Wallich (Pl. Asiat. Rar. 3: 66. 15 Aug 1832) ascribed the name Aikinia brunonis to himself (“Wall.”) and, although he ascribed both the
diagnosis and description to “Brown”, the correct attribution is A. brunonis Wall. because Wallich is the author of the publication and the
name is not ascribed to anyone else (see Note 1).
Ex. 4. The name Viburnum ternatum was published in Sargent (Trees & Shrubs 2: 37. 1907). It was ascribed to “Rehd.”, and the account of
the species has “Alfred Rehder” at the end. The name is therefore cited as V. ternatum Rehder.
Ex. 5. In a paper by Hilliard & Burtt (in Notes Roy. Bot. Gard. Edinburgh 43: 365. 1986) names of new species
of Schoenoxiphium, including S. altum, were ascribed to Kukkonen, preceded by a statement “The following diagnostic descriptions of new
species have been supplied by Dr. I. Kukkonen in order to make the names available for use.” The name is therefore cited
as S. altum Kukkonen.
Ex. 6. In Torrey & Gray (Fl. N. Amer. 1: 198. 1838) the names Calyptridium and C. monandrum were ascribed to “Nutt. mss.”, and the
descriptions were enclosed in double quotes indicating that Nuttall wrote them, as acknowledged in the preface. The names are therefore
cited as Calyptridium Nutt. and C. monandrum Nutt.
Ex. 7. When publishing Eucryphiaceae (in Bot. Zeitung (Berlin) 6: 130. 1848) the otherwise unnamed author “W.”, in a review of Gay’s Flora
chilena (1845–1854), wrote “wird die Gattung Eucryphia als Typus einer neuen Familie, der Eucryphiaceae, angesehen”, thus ascribing both
the name and its validating description to Gay (Fl. Chil. 1: 348. 1846), who had used the designation “Eucrifiáceas” (see Art. 18.4). The name
is therefore cited as Eucryphiaceae Gay.
Ex. 8. When Candolle (Essai Propr. Méd. Pl., ed. 2: 87. 1816) wrote “Elaeocarpeae. Juss., Ann. Mus. 11, p. 233” he ascribed the name to Jussieu
and, to validate it, used Jussieu’s diagnosis of an unnamed family (in Ann. Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat. 11: 233. 1808). The name is therefore cited
as Elaeocarpaceae Juss., nom. cons. (see App. IIB), not Elaeocarpaceae “Juss. ex DC.”
Ex. 9. Green (Census Vasc. Pl. W. Australia, ed. 2: 6. 1985) ascribed the new combination Neotysonia phyllostegia to Wilson and elsewhere in
the same publication acknowledged his assistance. The name is therefore cited as N. phyllostegia (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson.
Ex. 10. The authorship of Sophora tomentosa subsp. occidentalis (L.) Brummitt (in Kirkia 5: 265. 1966) is accepted as originally ascribed,
although the new combination was published in a paper authored jointly by Brummitt & Gillett.
Note 2. When authorship of a name differs from authorship of the publication in which it was validly published, both are
sometimes cited, connected by the word “in”. In such a case, “in” and what follows are part of a bibliographic citation and are
better omitted unless the place of publication is being cited.
Ex. 11. The name and original description of Verrucaria aethiobola Wahlenb. (in Acharius, Methodus, Suppl.: 17. 1803) were published in a
single paragraph ascribed to “Wahlenb. Msc.” The name is therefore cited as V. aethiobola Wahlenb., not “Wahlenb. ex Ach.” nor “Wahlenb.
in Ach.” (unless a full bibliographic citation is given), regardless of the accompanying description provided by Acharius.
Ex. 12. The new combination Crepis lyrata was published in Candolle’s Prodromus systematis naturalis regni vegetabilis (7: 170. 1838), as “C.
lyrata (Froel. in litt. 1837)”, and in a footnote on p. 160 Candolle acknowledged Froelich as having authored the account of the relevant
section of Crepis (“Sectiones generis iv, v et vi, à cl. Froelich elaboratae sunt”). The name is therefore cited as C. lyrata (L.) Froel.
or C. lyrata (L.) Froel. in Candolle (followed by a bibliographic citation of the place of publication), but not C. lyrata “(L.) Froel. ex DC.”
Ex. 13. The name Physma arnoldianum was published in a paper authored by Arnold (in Flora 41: 94. 1858). Arnold introduced the name as
“Ph. Arnoldianum Hepp. lit. 12. Decbr. 1857”, and the description is immediately followed by the phrase “Hepp. in lit.” The name is therefore
cited as P. arnoldianum Hepp, not P. arnoldianum “Hepp ex Arnold”. Because Arnold is the author of the paper, not of the whole work (the
journal Flora), his name is not required even in a full bibliographic citation.
Note 3. The authorship of a descriptive name (Art. 16.1(b)) is not changed if the name is used at a rank different from that at which
it was first validly published because it is not a name at new rank (see Art. 6 Note 3; see also Art. 49.2).
Ex. 14. Streptophyta Caval.-Sm. (in Lewin, Origins of Plastids: 340. 1993) was originally published as a name at the rank of infrakingdom (used
as a rank between subkingdom and phylum). When the name is used at the rank of phylum, it is still cited as Streptophyta Caval.-Sm. (1993).
46.3. For the purposes of Art. 46, ascription is the direct association of the name of a person or persons with a new
name or description or diagnosis of a taxon. An author citation associated with a synonym does not constitute
ascription of the accepted name, nor does reference to a basionym or a replaced synonym (regardless of bibliographic
accuracy) or reference to a homonym.
Ex. 15. The name Atropa sideroxyloides was published in Roemer & Schultes (Syst. Veg. 4: 686. 1819), with the name and diagnosis in a single
paragraph followed by “Reliq. Willd. MS.” As this represents direct association of Willdenow with both the name and the diagnosis, the name
is cited as A. sideroxyloides Willd., not A. sideroxyloides “Roem. & Schult.” nor A. sideroxyloides “Willd. ex Roem. & Schult.”
Ex. 16. Sicyos triqueter Moc. & Sessé ex Ser. (in Candolle, Prodr. 3: 309. 1830) was ascribed to Mociño and Sessé by Seringe’s writing “S.
triqueter (Moc. & Sessé, fl. mex. mss.)”. However, Malpighia emarginata DC. (Prodr. 1: 578. 1824) was not ascribed to these authors by
Candolle’s writing “M. emarginata (fl. mex. ic. ined.)”.
86
Ex. 17. Lichen debilis Sm. (in Smith & Sowerby, Engl. Bot. 35: t. 2462. 1812) was not ascribed to Turner and Borrer by Smith’s citing “Calicium
debile. Turn. and Borr. Mss.” as a synonym.
Ex. 18. When Opiz (1852) wrote “Hemisphace Benth.” he did not ascribe the generic name to Bentham but provided an indirect reference to
the basionym, Salvia sect. Hemisphace Benth. (see Art. 41 Ex. 4).
Ex. 19. When Brotherus (in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam. 1(3): 875. 1907) published “Dichelodontium nitidum Hook. fil. et Wils.” he
provided an indirect reference to the basionym, Leucodon nitidus Hook. f. & Wilson, and did not ascribe the new combination to Hooker and
Wilson. He did, however, ascribe to them the simultaneously published name of his new genus, Dichelodontium Hook. f. & Wilson ex Broth.
Ex. 20. When Sheh & Watson (in Wu & al., Fl. China 14: 72. 2005) wrote “Bupleurum hamiltonii var. paucefulcrans C. Y. Wu ex R. H. Shan &
Yin Li, Acta Phytotax. Sin. 12: 291. 1974” they did not ascribe the new combination to any of those authors but provided a full and direct
reference to the basionym, B. tenue var. paucefulcrans C. Y. Wu ex R. H. Shan & Yin Li.
Ex. 21. When Sirodot (1872) wrote “Lemanea Bory” he in fact published a later homonym (see Art. 48 Ex. 1). His reference to Bory’s earlier
homonym is not therefore ascription of the later homonym, Lemanea Sirodot, to Bory.
Note 4. When the name of a new taxon is validly published by reference to a previously and effectively published description or
diagnosis (Art. 38.1(a)), the name of the author of that description or diagnosis, even if not explicitly mentioned, is unequivocally
associated with it.
Ex. 22. The appropriate author citation for Baloghia pininsularis (see Art. 40 Ex. 4) is Guillaumin, and not McPherson & Tirel, because in the
protologue the name was ascribed to Guillaumin and a full and direct reference was given to Guillaumin’s earlier Latin description. Even
though McPherson & Tirel did not explicitly ascribe the validating description to its author, Guillaumin, he is “unequivocally associated” with
it.
Ex. 23. “Pancheria humboldtiana” was published by Guillaumin (in Mém. Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat., Ser. B, Bot. 15: 47. 1964), but not validly so
because no type was indicated. Valid publication was effected by Hopkins & Bradford (in Adansonia 31: 119. 2009), who designated
“Baumann-Bodenheim 15515 (P! P00143076)” as the holotype, ascribed the name to Guillaumin, and by citing “Pancheria
humboldtiana Guillaumin, Mémoires du Muséum national d’Histoire naturelle, sér. B, botanique 15: 47 (1964), nom. inval.”, provided a full
and direct reference to a validating description that is unequivocally associated with Guillaumin. Art. 46.10 notwithstanding, the name is
therefore attributed to Guillaumin, not “Guillaumin ex H. C. Hopkins & J. Bradford” as given by Hopkins & Bradford.
Note 5. A name or its validating description or diagnosis is treated as though ascribed to the author(s) of the publication (as defined
in Art. 46.6) when there is no ascription to or unequivocal association with a different author or different authors.
Ex. 24. The name Asperococcus pusillus was published in Hooker (Brit. Fl., ed. 4, 2(1): 277. 1833), with the name and diagnosis ascribed
simultaneously, at the end of the paragraph, to “Carm. MSS.” followed by a description ascribed similarly to Carmichael. Direct association of
Carmichael with both the name and the diagnosis is evident, and the name must be cited as A. pusillus Carmich. However, the paragraph
containing the name and the diagnosis of A. castaneus, published by Hooker on the same page of the same work, ends with “Scytosiphon
castaneus, Carm. MSS.” Because Carmichael is directly associated with “S. castaneus” and not A. castaneus, the latter name is correctly cited
as A. castaneus Hook., the author of the publication, even though the description is ascribed to Carmichael.
Ex. 25. Brown is accepted as the author of the treatments of genera and species appearing under his name in Aiton’s Hortus kewensis, ed. 2
(1810–1813), even when names of new taxa or the descriptions validating them are not explicitly ascribed to him. In a postscript to that work
(5: 532. 1813), Aiton wrote: “Much new matter has been added by [Robert Brown] … the greater part of his able improvements are
distinguished by the signature Brown mss.” The latter phrase is therefore a statement of authorship not merely an ascription. For example,
the combination Oncidium triquetrum, based by indirect reference on Epidendrum triquetrum Sw. (Prodr.: 122. 1788), is cited
as O. triquetrum (Sw.) R. Br. (in Aiton, Hort. Kew., ed. 2, 5: 216. 1813) and is not attributed to “R. Br. ex W. T. Aiton”, nor to Aiton alone,
because in the generic heading Brown is credited with authorship of the treatment of Oncidium.
46.4. When a validly published name or its final epithet is taken up from and attributed to the author of a different
“name” that has not been validly published, or one at a different rank likewise not validly published, only the author
of the validly published name is cited (except as provided in Art. 46.7).
Ex. 26. When publishing the new generic name Anoplon, Reichenbach (Consp. Regn. Veg.: 212b. 1828–1829) attributed the name to Wallroth
and referred to the designation published by Wallroth (Orobanches Gen. Diask.: 25, 66. 1825) as Orobanche “Tribus III. Anoplon”, which was
not validly published under Art. 37.6 because its rank was denoted by a misplaced term (tribe between genus and species). The generic name
is cited as Anoplon Rchb., not Anoplon “Wallr. ex Rchb.”
Ex. 27. When publishing Andropogon drummondii, Steudel (Syn. Pl. Glumac. 1: 393. 1854) attributed the name to “Nees. (mpt.
sub: Sorghum.)”. This reference to the unpublished binary designation “Sorghum drummondii Nees” is not ascription of A. drummondii to
Nees, and the name is cited as A. drummondii Steud., not A. drummondii “Nees ex Steud.”
Ex. 28. “Porphyra yezoensis f. narawaensis” was published by Miura (in J. Tokyo Univ. Fish. 71: 6. 1984), but two gatherings (from the same
place but on different dates) were cited as “holotype” and the designation was not therefore validly published. Kikuchi & al. (in J. Jap. Bot.
90: 381. 2015), using Miura’s description and designating a single specimen as the holotype, validly published the name Pyropia
yezoensis f. narawaensis N. Kikuchi & al., which is not to be cited as P. yezoensis f. narawaensis “A. Miura ex N. Kikuchi & al.”
87
46.5. A name of a new taxon is attributed to the author(s) of the publication in which it appears when the name was
ascribed to a different author or different authors but the validating description or diagnosis was neither ascribed to
nor unequivocally associated with that author or those authors. A new combination, name at new rank, or
replacement name is attributed to the author(s) of the publication in which it appears, although it was ascribed to a
different author or different authors, when no separate statement was made that one or more of those authors
contributed in some way to that publication. However, in both cases authorship as ascribed, followed by “ex”, may be
inserted before the name(s) of the publishing author(s).
Ex. 29. Henry (in Bull. Trimestriel Soc. Mycol. France 74: 303. 1958) published the designation “Cortinarius balteatotomentosus” with a Latin
description and a locality citation but without indicating a type (Art. 40 Note 2). He later (in Bull. Trimestriel Soc. Mycol. France 101: 4. 1985)
validated the name by designating a holotype and providing a full and direct reference to his earlier description (see Art. 33.1). The description
is therefore unequivocally associated with Henry (Art. 46 Note 4) and the name, although not explicitly ascribed, is treated as ascribed to
Henry because he was the author of the publication (Note 5). Liimatainen & al. (in Persoonia 33: 118. 2014) cited the authorship as C.
balteatotomentosus “Rob. Henry ex Rob. Henry”, but Art. 46.5 does not apply because Henry did not ascribe the name to a different author.
Under Art. 46.2 the name is correctly cited as C. balteatotomentosus Rob. Henry.
Ex. 30. Lilium tianschanicum was described by Grubov (in Grubov & Egorova, Rast. Tsent. Azii, Mater. Bot. Inst. Komarova 7: 70. 1977) as a
new species, with its name ascribed to Ivanova; because there is no indication that Ivanova provided the validating description, the name is
cited as either L. tianschanicum N. A. Ivanova ex Grubov or L. tianschanicum Grubov.
Ex. 31. In a paper by Boufford, Tsi & Wang (in J. Arnold Arbor. 71: 123. 1990) the name Rubus fanjingshanensis was ascribed to Lu with no
indication that Lu provided the description; the name is attributed to either L. T. Lu ex Boufford & al. or Boufford & al.
Ex. 32. Seemann (Fl. Vit.: 22. 1865) published Gossypium tomentosum “Nutt. mss.”, followed by a validating description not ascribed to
Nuttall; the name is cited as either G. tomentosumNutt. ex Seem. or G. tomentosum Seem.
Ex. 33. Rudolphi published Pinaceae (Syst. Orb. Veg.: 35. 1830) as “Pineae. Spreng.”, followed by a validating diagnosis not ascribed to
Sprengel; the name is cited as either PinaceaeSpreng. ex F. Rudolphi or Pinaceae F. Rudolphi.
Ex. 34. Green (Census Vasc. Pl. W. Australia, ed. 2: 6. 1985) ascribed the new combination Tersonia cyathiflora to “(Fenzl) A. S. George”;
because Green nowhere mentioned that George had contributed in any way, the name is cited as either T. cyathiflora (Fenzl) A. S. George ex
J. W. Green or T. cyathiflora (Fenzl) J. W. Green.
46.6. For the purposes of Art. 46, the authorship of a publication is the authorship of that part of a publication in which
a name appears regardless of the authorship or editorship of the publication as a whole.
Ex. 35. Pittosporum buxifolium was described as a new species, with its name ascribed to Feng, in Wu & Li, Flora yunnanica, vol. 3 (1983). The
account of Pittosporaceae in that flora was authored by Yin, while the whole volume was edited by Wu & Li. The author of the publication
(including the validating diagnosis) was Yin. The name is therefore cited as either P. buxifolium K. M. Feng ex W. Q. Yin
or P. buxifolium W. Q. Yin, but not P. buxifolium “K. M. Feng ex C. Y. Wu & H. W. Li” nor P. buxifolium “C. Y. Wu & H. W. Li”.
Ex. 36. Vicia amurensis f. sanneensis, ascribed to Jiang & Fu, was published in Ma & al. (ed.), Flora intramongolica, ed. 2, vol. 3 (1989). The
author of the account of Vicia in that flora is Jiang, one of the persons to whom the name was ascribed (see Art. 46.2 last sentence). The
name is therefore cited as V. amurensis f. sanneensis Y. C. Jiang & S. M. Fu, not V. amurensis f. sanneensis “Y. C. Jiang & S. M. Fu ex Ma & al.”
Ex. 37. Centaurea funkii var. xeranthemoides “Lge. ined.” was described in Prodromus florae hispanicae, which was authored as a whole by
Willkomm & Lange, although the different family treatments are by individual authors, and Fam. 63 Compositae has a footnote “Auctore
Willkomm”. Because the validating description was not ascribed to Lange, the name is cited as C. funkii var. xeranthemoides Lange ex Willk.
Its full bibliographic citation is C. funkii var. xeranthemoides Lange ex Willk. in Willkomm & Lange, Prodr. Fl. Hispan. 2: 154. 1865.
Ex. 38. The name Solanum dasypus was published in a work of Candolle (Prodr. 13(1): 161. 1852), in which the account of Solanaceae was
authored by Dunal. Dunal introduced the name as “S. dasypus (Drège, n. 1933, in h. DC)” thereby ascribing it to Drège. The name is therefore
cited as either S. dasypus Drège ex Dunal or S. dasypus Dunal.
Ex. 39. Schultes & Schultes (Mant. 3: 526. 1827), in a note, published a new classification of the traditional genera Avena and Trisetum, which
they had received from “Besser in litt.” The publishing author of that text, in which the new genera Acrospelion Bess., Helictotrichon Bess.,
and Heterochaeta Bess. were described, is Besser. The new names are validly published, authored by Besser alone, irrespective of whether
or not the volume authors, Schultes & Schultes, accepted them. (See also Art. 36 Ex. 3).
46.7. When a name has been ascribed by its author to a pre-starting-point author, the latter may be included in the
author citation, followed by “ex”. For groups with a starting-point later than 1753, when a taxon of a pre-starting-
point author was changed in rank or taxonomic position upon valid publication of its name, that pre-starting-point
author may be cited in parentheses, followed by “ex”.
Ex. 40. Linnaeus (Gen. Pl., ed 5: 322. 1754) ascribed the name Lupinus to the pre-starting-point author Tournefort; the name is cited as
either Lupinus Tourn. ex L. (Sp. Pl.: 751. 1753) or Lupinus L. (see Art. 13.4).
88
Ex. 41. “Lyngbya glutinosa” (Agardh, Syst. Alg.: 73. 1824) was taken up as Hydrocoleum glutinosum by Gomont in the publication that marks
the starting-point of the “Nostocaceae homocysteae” (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 7, 15: 339. 1892). The name is cited as
either H. glutinosum (C. Agardh) ex Gomont or H. glutinosum Gomont.
Ex. 42. Designations of desmids published prior to their starting-point (see Art. 13.1(e)) may be cited according to their validation in Ralfs
(Brit. Desmid. 1848) as follows: “Closterium dianae” (Ehrenberg, Infusionsthierchen: 92. 1838), cited as C. dianae Ehrenb. ex Ralfs (Brit.
Desmid.: 168. 1848); “Euastrum pinnatifidum” (Kützing, Phycol. Germ.: 134. 1845), cited as Micrasterias pinnatifida (Kütz.) ex Ralfs (Brit.
Desmid.: 77. 1848).
46.8. In determining the correct author citation, only internal evidence in the publication as a whole (as defined in Art.
37.5) where the name was validly published is to be accepted, including ascription of the name, statements in the
introduction, title, or acknowledgements, and typographical or stylistic distinctions in the text.
Ex. 43. Although the descriptions in Aiton’s Hortus kewensis (1789) are generally considered to have been written by Solander or Dryander,
the names of new taxa published there are attributed to Aiton, the stated author of the work, except where a name and description were
both ascribed in that work to someone else.
Ex. 44. The name Andreaea angustata was published in a work of Limpricht (Laubm. Deutschl. 1: 144. 1885) with the ascription “nov. sp.
Lindb. in litt. ad Breidler 1884”, but there is no internal evidence that Lindberg had supplied the validating description. Authorship is therefore
cited as either Limpr. or Lindb. ex Limpr., but not “Lindb.”
46.9. External evidence may be used to determine authorship of nomenclatural novelties included in a publication for
which there is no internal evidence of authorship.
Ex. 45. If no internal or external evidence of authorship of effectively and validly published names can be determined, the standard form
“Anon.” (for Anonymous) may be used, e.g. Ficus cooperi Anon. (in Proc. Roy. Hort. Soc. London 2: 374. 1862) or Nymphaea
gigantea f. hudsonii (Anon.) K. C. Landon (in Phytologia 40: 439. 1978).
Ex. 46. No authorship appears anywhere in the work known as “Cat. Pl. Upper Louisiana. 1813”, a catalogue of plants available from the
Fraser Brothers Nursery. Based on external evidence (cf. Stafleu & Cowan in Regnum Veg. 105: 785. 1981), authorship of the document, and
of included nomenclatural novelties such as Oenothera macrocarpa, is attributed to Thomas Nuttall.
Ex. 47. The book that appeared under the title Vollständiges systematisches Verzeichniß aller Gewächse Teutschlandes … (Leipzig 1782) bears
no explicit authorship but is attributed to “einem Mitgliede der Gesellschaft Naturforschender Freunde”. External evidence may be used to
determine that G. A. Honckeny is the author of the work and of the nomenclatural novelties that appear in it (e.g. Poa
vallesiana Honck., Phleum hirsutum Honck.; see also Art. 23 Ex. 18), as was done by Pritzel (Thes. Lit. Bot.: 123. 1847).
46.10. Authors publishing nomenclatural novelties and wishing other persons’ names followed by “ex” to precede
theirs in author citation may adopt the “ex” citation in the protologue.
Ex. 48. In validly publishing the name Nothotsuga, Page (in Notes Roy. Bot. Gard. Edinburgh 45: 390. 1989) ascribed it to “H.-H. Hu ex
C. N. Page”, noting that in 1951 Hu had published it as a nomen nudum; the name is attributed to either Hu ex C. N. Page or C. N. Page.
Ex. 49. Atwood (in Selbyana 5: 302. 1981) ascribed the name of a new species, Maxillaria mombachoensis, to “Heller ex Atwood”, with a note
stating that it was originally named by Heller, then deceased; the name is attributed to either A. H. Heller ex J. T. Atwood or J. T. Atwood.
Recommendation 46A
46A.1. For the purpose of author citation, prefixes indicating ennoblement (see Rec. 60C.4(d) and (e) should be suppressed unless
they are an inseparable part of the name.
Ex. 1. Lam. for J. B. P. A. Monet Chevalier de Lamarck, but De Wild. for E. De Wildeman.
46A.2. When a name in an author citation is abbreviated, the abbreviation should be long enough to be distinctive, and should
normally end with a consonant that, in the full name, precedes a vowel. The first letters should be given without any omission,
but one of the last characteristic consonants of the name may be added when this is customary.
Ex. 2. L. for Linnaeus; Fr. for Fries; Juss. for Jussieu; Rich. for Richard; Bertol. for Bertoloni, to be distinct from Bertero; Michx. for Michaux, to
be distinct from Micheli.
46A.3. Given names or accessory designations serving to distinguish two authors of the same name should be abridged in the
same way.
Ex. 3. R. Br. for Robert Brown; A. Juss. for Adrien de Jussieu; Burm. f. for Burman filius; J. F. Gmel. for Johann Friedrich Gmelin, J. G. Gmel. for
Johann Georg Gmelin, C. C. Gmel. for Carl Christian Gmelin, S. G. Gmel. for Samuel Gottlieb Gmelin; Müll. Arg. for Jean Müller argoviensis [of
Aargau].
46A.4. When it is a well-established custom to abridge a name in another manner, it is advisable to conform to custom.
89
Ex. 4. DC. for Augustin-Pyramus de Candolle; St.-Hil. for Saint-Hilaire; Rchb. for H. G. L. Reichenbach.
Note 1. Brummitt & Powell’s Authors of plant names (1992) provides unambiguous standard forms for a large number of authors
of names of organisms in conformity with this Recommendation. These standard forms, updated as necessary from the
International Plant Names Index (http://www.ipni.org) and Index Fungorum (http://www.indexfungorum.org), have been used
for author citations throughout this Code, albeit with additional spacing.
Recommendation 46B
46B.1. In citing the author of the scientific name of a taxon, the romanization of the author’s name given in the original publication
should normally be accepted. Where an author failed to give a romanization, or where an author has at different times used
different romanizations, then the romanization known to be preferred by the author or that most frequently adopted by the
author should be accepted. In the absence of such information the author’s name should be romanized in accordance with an
internationally available standard.
46B.2. Authors of scientific names whose personal names are not written in the Latin alphabet should romanize their names,
preferably (but not necessarily) in accordance with an internationally recognized standard and, as a matter of typographical
convenience, without diacritical signs. Once authors have selected the romanization of their personal names, they should use it
consistently. Whenever possible, authors should not permit editors or publishers to change the romanization of their personal
names.
Recommendation 46C
46C.1. After a name published jointly by two authors, both authors should be cited, linked by an ampersand (&) or by the word
“et”.
Ex. 1. Didymopanax gleasonii Britton & P. Wilson or D. gleasonii Britton et P. Wilson.
46C.2. After a name published jointly by more than two authors, the citation should be restricted to the first author followed by
“& al.” or “et al.”, except in the original publication.
Ex. 2. Lapeirousia erythrantha var. welwitschii (Baker) Geerinck, Lisowski, Malaisse & Symoens (in Bull. Soc. Roy. Bot. Belgique 105: 336. 1972)
should be cited as L. erythrantha var. welwitschii (Baker) Geerinck & al. or L. erythrantha var. welwitschii (Baker) Geerinck et al.
Recommendation 46D
46D.1. Authors should cite themselves by name after each nomenclatural novelty they publish rather than refer to themselves by
expressions such as “nobis” (nob.) or “mihi” (m.).
ARTICLE 47
47.1. An alteration of the diagnostic characters or of the circumscription of a taxon without the exclusion of the type
does not warrant a change of authorship of the name of the taxon.
Ex. 1. When the original material of Arabis beckwithii S. Watson (in Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts 22: 467. 1887) is attributed to two different species,
as by Munz (in Bull. S. Calif. Acad. Sci. 31: 62. 1932), the species not including the lectotype must bear a different name (A. shockleyi Munz)
but the other species is still named A. beckwithii S. Watson.
Ex. 2. Myosotis as revised by Brown differs from the genus as originally circumscribed by Linnaeus, but the generic name
remains Myosotis L. because the type of the name is still included in the genus (it may be cited as Myosotis L. emend. R. Br.: see Rec. 47A).
Ex. 3. The variously defined species that includes the types of Centaurea jacea L. (Sp. Pl.: 914. 1753), C. amara L. (Sp. Pl., ed. 2: 1292. 1763),
and a variable number of other species names is still called C. jacea L. (or C. jacea L. emend. Coss. & Germ., C. jacea L. emend. Vis.,
or C. jacea L. emend. Godr., as the case may be: see Rec. 47A).
Recommendation 47A
47A.1. When an alteration as mentioned in Art. 47.1 has been considerable, the nature of the change may be indicated by adding
such words, abbreviated where suitable, as “emendavit” (emend.) followed by the name of the author responsible for the change,
“mutatis characteribus” (mut. char.), “pro parte” (p. p.), “excluso genere” or “exclusis generibus” (excl. gen.), “exclusa specie” or
“exclusis speciebus” (excl. sp.), “exclusa varietate” or “exclusis varietatibus” (excl. var.), “sensu amplo” (s. ampl.), “sensu lato” (s.
l.), “sensu stricto” (s. str.), etc.
Ex. 1. Phyllanthus L. emend. Müll. Arg.; Globularia cordifolia L. excl. var. (emend. Lam.).
ARTICLE 48
90
48.1. When an author adopts an existing name but definitely excludes its type, a later homonym that must be
attributed solely to that author is considered to have been published. Similarly, when an author who adopts a name
refers to an apparent basionym or replaced synonym but explicitly excludes its type, the name of a new taxon is
considered to have been published that must be attributed solely to that author. Exclusion can be effected by
simultaneous explicit inclusion of the type in a different taxon by the same author.
Ex. 1. Sirodot included Lemanea corallina Bory, the type of Lemanea Bory (in Ann. Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat. 12: 178. 1808), in his new
genus Sacheria Sirodot (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 5, 16: 69. 1872); hence Lemanea, as treated by Sirodot (l.c.), is cited as Lemanea Sirodot
non Bory, and not as Lemanea “Bory emend. Sirodot”.
Ex. 2. The name Amorphophallus campanulatus Decne. (in Nouv. Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. 3: 366. 1834) was apparently based on the
illegitimate Arum campanulatum Roxb. (Hort. Bengal.: 65. 1819). However, the type of the latter was explicitly excluded by Decaisne, and his
name is therefore a legitimate name of a new species, to be attributed solely to him.
Ex. 3. The type of Myginda sect. Gyminda Griseb. (Cat. Pl. Cub.: 55. 1866) is M. integrifolia Poir. even though Grisebach misapplied the latter
name. When Sargent raised the section to the rank of genus, he named the species described by Grisebach G. grisebachii and explicitly
excluded M. integrifolia from the genus. Gyminda Sarg. (in Gard. & Forest 4: 4. 1891) is therefore the name of a new genus, typified
by G. grisebachii Sarg., not a name at new rank based on M. sect. Gyminda.
Note 1. Misapplication of a new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name to a different taxon, but without explicit
exclusion of the type of the basionym or replaced synonym, is dealt with under Art. 7.3–7.4.
Note 2. Retention of a name in a sense that excludes its original type, or its type designated under Art. 7–10, can be effected only
by conservation (see Art. 14.9).
48.2. For the purpose of Art. 48.1, exclusion of a type means exclusion of (a) the holotype under Art. 9.1 or the original
type under Art. 10 or all syntypes under Art. 9.6 or all elements eligible as types under Art. 10.2; or (b) the type
previously designated under Art. 9.11–9.13 or 10.2; or (c) the type previously conserved under Art. 14.9.
ARTICLE 49
49.1. Author citation for a name at the rank of genus or below that has a basionym (Art. 6.10) comprises the author(s)
of the basionym cited in parentheses followed by the author(s) of the name itself (see also Art. 46.7).
Ex. 1. Medicago polymorpha var. orbicularis L. (Sp. Pl.: 779. 1753) when raised to the rank of species is cited as M. orbicularis (L.) Bartal. (Cat.
Piante Siena: 60. 1776).
Ex. 2. Anthyllis sect. Aspalathoides DC. (Prodr. 2: 169. 1825) raised to generic rank, retaining the epithet Aspalathoides as its name, is cited
as Aspalathoides (DC.) K. Koch (Hort. Dendrol.: 242. 1853).
Ex. 3. Cineraria sect. Eriopappus Dumort. (Fl. Belg.: 65. 1827) when transferred to Tephroseris (Rchb.) Rchb. is cited
as T. sect. Eriopappus (Dumort.) Holub (in Folia Geobot. Phytotax. 8: 173. 1973).
Ex. 4. Cistus aegyptiacus L. (Sp. Pl.: 527. 1753) when transferred to Helianthemum Mill. is cited as H. aegyptiacum (L.) Mill. (Gard. Dict., ed.
8: Helianthemum No. 23. 1768).
Ex. 5. Fumaria bulbosa var. solida L. (Sp. Pl.: 699. 1753) was raised to specific rank as F. solida (L.) Mill. (Gard. Dict. Abr., ed. 6: Fumaria No. 8.
1771). The name of this species when transferred to Corydalis DC. is cited as C. solida (L.) Clairv. (Man. Herbor. Suisse: 371. 1811),
not C. solida “(Mill.) Clairv.”
Ex. 6. Pulsatilla montana var. serbica W. Zimm. (in Feddes Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni Veg. 61: 95. 1958), originally placed
under P. montana subsp. australis (Heuff.) Zämelis, retains its authorship when placed under P. montana subsp. dacica Rummelsp. (see Art.
24.1) and is not to be cited as var. serbica “(W. Zimm.) Rummelsp.” (in Feddes Repert. 71: 29. 1965).
Ex. 7. Salix subsect. Myrtilloides C. K. Schneid. (Ill. Handb. Laubholzk. 1: 63. 1904), originally placed under S. sect. Argenteae W. D. J. Koch,
retains its authorship when placed under S. sect. Glaucae Pax (see Art. 21.1) and is not to be cited as S. subsect. Myrtilloides “(C. K. Schneid.)
Dorn” (in Canad. J. Bot. 54: 2777. 1976).
Ex. 8. The name Lithocarpus polystachyus published by Rehder (in J. Arnold Arbor. 1: 130. 1919) was based on Quercus polystachya A. DC.
(Prodr. 16(2): 107. 1864), ascribed by Candolle to “Wall.! list n. 2789” (a nomen nudum); Rehder’s combination is cited as
either L. polystachyus (Wall. ex A. DC.) Rehder or L. polystachyus (A. DC.) Rehder (see Art. 46.5).
Note 1. Author citation for a replacement name (Art. 6.11) comprises only the author(s) of the name itself, not those of the
replaced synonym.
91
Ex. 9. Mycena coccineoides, a replacement name for Omphalina coccinea Murrill (see Art. 6 Ex. 15), is cited as M. coccineoides Grgur., not M.
coccineoides “(Murrill) Grgur.” (see also Art. 58 Ex. 1, 3 and 4).
Note 2. Art. 46.7 provides for the use of parenthetical author citations preceding the word “ex” after some names in groups with
a starting-point later than 1753.
49.2. Parenthetical author citations are not used for suprageneric names.
Ex. 10. Even though Illiciaceae A. C. Sm. (in Sargentia 7: 8. 1947) was validly published by reference to Illicieae DC. (Prodr. 1: 77. 1824) it is
not to be cited as Illiciaceae “(DC.) A. C. Sm.”
ARTICLE 50
50.1. When a taxon at the rank of species or below is transferred from the non-hybrid category to the hybrid category
at the same rank (Art. H.10 Note 1), or vice versa, the authorship remains unchanged but may be followed by an
indication in parentheses of the original category.
Ex. 1. Stachys ambigua Sm. (in Smith & Sowerby, Engl. Bot. 30: t. 2089. 1809) was published as the name of a species. If regarded as applying
to a hybrid, it may be cited as S. ×ambiguaSm. (pro sp.).
Ex. 2. Salix ×glaucops Andersson (in Candolle, Prodr. 16(2): 281. 1868) was published as the name of a hybrid. Later, Rydberg (in Bull. New
York Bot. Gard. 1: 270. 1899) considered the taxon to be a species. If this view is accepted, the name may be cited as S. glaucops Andersson
(pro hybr.).
SECTION 2
GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS ON CITATION
Recommendation 50A
50A.1. In the citation of a designation that is not validly published because it was merely cited as a synonym (Art. 36.1(b)), the
words “as synonym” or “pro syn.” should be added.
Recommendation 50B
50B.1. In the citation of a nomen nudum, its status should be indicated by adding the words “nomen nudum” or “nom. nud.”
Ex. 1. “Carex bebbii” (Olney, Carices Bor.-Amer. 2: 12. 1871), published without a description or diagnosis, should be cited as Carex
bebbii Olney, nomen nudum (or nom. nud.).
Recommendation 50C
50C.1. The citation of a later homonym should be followed by the name of the author of the earlier homonym preceded by the
word “non”, preferably with the date of publication added. In some instances it will be advisable to cite also any other homonyms,
preceded by the word “nec”.
Ex. 1. Ulmus racemosa Thomas in Amer. J. Sci. Arts 19: 170. 1831, non Borkh. 1800.
Ex. 2. Lindera Thunb., Nov. Gen. Pl.: 64. 1783, non Adans. 1763.
Ex. 3. Bartlingia Brongn. in Ann. Sci. Nat. (Paris) 10: 373. 1827, non Rchb. 1824 nec F. Muell. 1882.
Recommendation 50D
50D.1. Misidentifications should not be included in synonymies but added after them. A misapplied name should be indicated by
the words “auct. non” followed by the name(s) of the original author(s) and the bibliographic reference of the misidentification.
Ex. 1. Ficus stortophylla Warb. in Ann. Mus. Congo Belge, Bot., ser. 4, 1: 32. 1904. F. irumuensis De Wild., Pl. Bequaert. 1: 341. 1922. F.
exasperata auct. non Vahl: De Wildeman & Durand in Ann. Mus. Congo Belge, Bot., ser. 2, 1: 54. 1899; De Wildeman, Miss. Ém. Laurent: 26.
1905; Durand & Durand, Syll. Fl. Congol.: 505. 1909.
Recommendation 50E
50E.1. After a conserved name (nomen conservandum; see Art. 14 and App. II–IV) the abbreviation “nom. cons.” or, in the case of
a conserved spelling, “orth. cons.” (orthographia conservanda) should be added in a formal citation.
Ex. 1. Protea L., Mant. Pl.: 187. 1771, nom. cons., non L. 1753.
Ex. 2. Combretum Loefl. 1758, nom. cons. [= Grislea L. 1753].
92
Ex. 3. Glechoma L. 1753, orth. cons., ‘Glecoma’.

50E.2. After a name rejected under Art. 56 (nomen utique rejiciendum, suppressed name; see App. V) the abbreviation “nom. rej.”
should be added in a formal citation.
Ex. 4. Betula alba L. 1753, nom. rej.
Note 1. Rec. 50E.2 also applies to any combination based on a nomen utique rejiciendum (suppressed name; see Art. 56.1).
Ex. 5. Dryobalanops sumatrensis (J. F. Gmel.) Kosterm. in Blumea 33: 346. 1988, nom. rej.
Recommendation 50F
50F.1. If a name is cited with alterations from the form as originally published, it is desirable that in full citations the exact original
form should be added, preferably between single or double quotation marks.
Ex. 1. Pyrus calleryana Decne. (P. mairei H. Lév. in Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni Veg. 12: 189. 1913, ‘Pirus’).
Ex. 2. Zanthoxylum cribrosum Spreng., Syst. Veg. 1: 946. 1824, ‘Xanthoxylon’ (Z. caribaeum var. floridanum (Nutt.) A. Gray in Proc. Amer.
Acad. Arts 23: 225. 1888, ‘Xanthoxylum’).
Ex. 3. Spathiphyllum solomonense Nicolson in Amer. J. Bot. 54: 496. 1967, ‘solomonensis’.
Recommendation 50G
50G.1. Authors should avoid mentioning in their publications previously unpublished names that they do not accept, especially if
the persons responsible for these unpublished names have not formally authorized their publication (see Rec. 23A.3(i)).
CHAPTER VII
REJECTION OF NAMES
ARTICLE 51
93
51.1. A legitimate name must not be rejected merely because it, or its epithet, is inappropriate or disagreeable, or
because another is preferable or better known (but see Art. 56.1 and F.7.1), or because it has lost its original meaning.
Ex. 1. Changes such as the following are contrary to Art. 51.1: Mentha to Minthe, Staphylea to Staphylis, Tamus to Tamnus,
Thamnos, or Thamnus, Tillaea to Tillia, Vincetoxicum to Alexitoxicon; and Orobanche
artemisiae to O. artemisiepiphyta, O. columbariae to O. columbarihaerens, O. rapum-genistae to O. rapum or O. sarothamnophyta.
Ex. 2. Ardisia quinquegona Blume (Bijdr. Fl. Ned. Ind. 13: 689. 1825) is not to be rejected in favour of A. pentagona A. DC. (in Trans. Linn. Soc.
London 17: 124. 1834) merely because the specific epithet quinquegona is a hybrid word (Latin and Greek) (contrary to Rec. 23A.3(c)).
Ex. 3. The name Scilla peruviana L. (Sp. Pl.: 309. 1753) is not to be rejected merely because the species does not grow in Peru.
Ex. 4. The name Petrosimonia oppositifolia (Pall.) Litv. (Sched. Herb. Fl. Ross. 7: 13. 1911), based on Polycnemum oppositifolium Pall. (Reise
Russ. Reich. 1: 484. 1771), is not to be rejected merely because the species has leaves only partly opposite, and partly alternate, although
there is another closely related species, Petrosimonia brachiata (Pall.) Bunge, that has all its leaves opposite.
Ex. 5. Richardia L. (Sp. Pl.: 330. 1753) is not to be rejected in favour of Richardsonia, as was done by Kunth (in Mém. Mus. Hist. Nat. 4: 430.
1818), merely because the name was originally dedicated to Richardson.
ARTICLE 52
52.1. A name, unless conserved (Art. 14), protected (Art. F.2), or sanctioned (Art. F.3), is illegitimate and is to be
rejected if it was nomenclaturally superfluous when published, i.e. if the taxon to which it was applied, as
circumscribed by its author, definitely included the type (as qualified in Art. 52.2) of a name that ought to have been
adopted, or of which the epithet ought to have been adopted, under the rules (but see Art. 52.4 and F.8.1).
52.2. For the purpose of Art. 52.1, definite inclusion of the type of a name is effected by citation of (a) the holotype
under Art. 9.1 or the original type under Art. 10 or all syntypes under Art. 9.6 or all elements eligible as types
under Art. 10.2; or (b) the type previously designated under Art. 9.11–9.13 or 10.2; or (c) the type previously
conserved under Art. 14.9; or (d) the illustrations of these. It is also effected (e) by citation of the name itself or any
name homotypic at that time, unless the type is at the same time excluded either explicitly or by implication.
Ex. 1. The generic name Cainito Adans. (Fam. Pl. 2: 166. 1763) is illegitimate because it was a superfluous name for Chrysophyllum L. (Sp. Pl.:
192. 1753), which Adanson cited as a synonym.
Ex. 2. Picea excelsa Link (in Linnaea 15: 517. 1841) is illegitimate because it is based on Pinus excelsa Lam. (Fl. Franç. 2: 202. 1779), a
superfluous name for Pinus abies L. (Sp. Pl.: 1002. 1753). Under Picea the correct name is Picea abies (L.) H. Karst. (Deut. Fl.: 324. 1881).
Ex. 3. Salix myrsinifolia Salisb. (Prodr. Stirp. Chap. Allerton: 394. 1796) is legitimate because it is explicitly based on “S. myrsinites” of
Hoffmann (Hist. Salic. Ill.: 71. 1787), a misapplication of S. myrsinites L. (Sp. Pl.: 1018. 1753), a name that Salisbury excluded by implication by
not citing Linnaeus as he did under each of the other 14 species of Salix.
Ex. 4. Cucubalus latifolius Mill. and C. angustifolius Mill. are not illegitimate names, although Miller’s species are now united with the species
previously named C. behen L. (Sp. Pl.: 414. 1753): C. latifolius and C. angustifolius as circumscribed by Miller (Gard. Dict., ed. 8: Cucubalus No.
2, 3. 1768) did not include the type of C. behen L., a name that he adopted for another species.
Ex. 5. Explicit exclusion of type. When publishing the name Galium tricornutum, Dandy (in Watsonia 4: 47. 1957) cited G. tricorne Stokes (Bot.
Arr. Brit. Pl., ed. 2, 1: 153. 1787) pro parte as a synonym while explicitly excluding its type.
Ex. 6. Exclusion of type by implication. Tmesipteris elongata P. A. Dang. (in Botaniste 2: 213. 1891) was published as a new species
but Psilotum truncatum R. Br. was cited as a synonym. However, on the following page, T. truncata (R. Br.) Desv. is recognized as a different
species and two pages later both are distinguished in a key, thus showing that the meaning of the cited synonym was either “P.
truncatum R. Br. pro parte” or “P. truncatum auct. non R. Br.”
Ex. 7. Under Persicaria maculosa Gray (Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 2: 269. 1821), the name Polygonum persicaria L. (Sp. Pl.: 361. 1753) was cited as the
replaced synonym, and hence the type of Polygonum persicaria was definitely included. However, because Persicaria mitis Delarbre (Fl.
Auvergne ed. 2: 518. 1806) is an earlier legitimate replacement name for Polygonum persicaria and is thereby homotypic (Art. 7.4), Persicaria
maculosa when published was an illegitimate superfluous name for Persicaria mitis. Its continued use has been made possible by conservation
(see App. IV).
Ex. 8. Under Bauhinia semla Wunderlin (in Taxon 25: 362. 1976), the name B. retusa Roxb. (Fl. Ind., ed. 1832, 2: 322. 1832) non Poir. (in
Lamarck, Encycl. Suppl. 1: 599. 1811), was cited as the replaced synonym while B. emarginata Roxb. ex G. Don (Gen. Syst. 2: 462. 1832) non
Mill. (Gard. Dict., ed. 8: Bauhinia No. 5. 1768), was also cited in synonymy, and hence the types of the two synonyms were definitely included.
However, B. roxburghiana Voigt (Hort. Suburb. Calcutt.: 254. 1845), which was published as a replacement name for B. emarginataRoxb. ex
G. Don, is necessarily homotypic with it (Art. 7.4) and should have been adopted by Wunderlin. Therefore, B. semla is an illegitimate
superfluous name but is typified by the type of its replaced synonym, B. retusa (see Art. 7 Ex. 5).
94
Ex. 9. Both Apios americana Medik. (Vorles. Churpfälz. Phys.-Ökon. Ges. 2: 355. 1787) and A. tuberosa Moench (Methodus: 165. 1794) are
replacement names for the legitimate Glycine apios L. (Sp. Pl.: 753. 1753), the epithet of which in combination with Apios would form a
tautonym (Art. 23.4) and would not therefore be validly published (Art. 32.1(c)). Apios tuberosawas nomenclaturally superfluous when
published, and is therefore illegitimate, because Moench cited in synonymy G. apios, which was then, as now, homotypic
with A. americana, the name that has priority and that Moench should have adopted.
Ex. 10. Welwitschia Rchb. (Handb. Nat. Pfl.-Syst.: 194. 1837) was based on Hugelia Benth. (Edwards’s Bot. Reg. 19: t. 1622. 1833),
non Huegelia Rchb. (in Mitth. Geb. Fl. Pomona 1829(13): 50. 1829). Welwitschia Hook. f. (in Gard. Chron. 1862: 71. 1862) was conserved
against Welwitschia Rchb., becoming effective on 18 May 1910 (see Art. 14 Note 4(b)). Eriastrum Wooton & Standl. (in Contr. U. S. Natl. Herb.
16: 160. 1913), also based on Hugelia Benth., was not therefore nomenclaturally superfluous when published because WelwitschiaRchb. was
no longer available for use.
Note 1. The inclusion, with an expression of doubt, of an element in a new taxon, e.g. the citation of a name with a question mark,
or in a sense that excludes one or more of its potential type elements, does not make the name of the new taxon nomenclaturally
superfluous.
Ex. 11. The protologue of Blandfordia grandiflora R. Br. (Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holland.: 296. 1810) includes, in synonymy, “Aletris punicea. Labill.
nov. holl. 1. p. 85. t. 111 ?”, indicating that the new species might be the same as A. punicea Labill. (Nov. Holl. Pl. 1: 85. 1805). Blandfordia
grandiflora is nevertheless a legitimate name.
Note 2. The inclusion, in a new taxon, of an element that was subsequently designated as the type of a name that, so typified,
ought to have been adopted, or of which the epithet ought to have been adopted, does not in itself make the name of the new
taxon illegitimate.
Ex. 12. Leccinum Gray (Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 1: 646. 1821) does not include all potential types (in fact, none) of Boletus L. (Sp. Pl.: 1176. 1753) : Fr.
and is not therefore illegitimate even though it included, as L. edule (Bull. : Fr.) Gray, the subsequently conserved type
of Boletus, B. edulis Bull. : Fr.
52.3. For the purpose of Art. 52.2(e), citation of a name can be effected by a direct and unambiguous reference to it,
e.g. by citation of its original sequential number or exact diagnostic phrase name (Linnaean “nomen specificum
legitimum”) rather than its epithet.
Ex. 13. In publishing the name Matricaria suaveolens (Fl. Suec., ed. 2: 297. 1755), Linnaeus adopted the phrase name and included all the
synonyms of M. recutita L. (Sp. Pl.: 891. 1753), but did not explicitly cite M. recutita. Because in 1755 M. recutita had no holotype, no
syntypes, and no designated lectotype or conserved type, the provisions of Art. 52.2 alone do not make M. suaveolens illegitimate. However,
because the exact diagnostic phrase name (nomen specificum legitimum) of M. recutita was that provided for M. suaveolens, the latter name
is illegitimate under Art.52.3.
Note 3. For the purpose of Art. 52.2(e), citation of a later isonym is equivalent to citation of the name itself if the citing author
does not normally cite the primary source, or if the name is usually not cited from its primary source in contemporary literature.
However, if it is possible to imply that the isonym is cited “in the sense of” the later author or “as used in” the later source, its
inclusion does not by itself cause illegitimacy.
52.4. A name that was nomenclaturally superfluous when published is not illegitimate on account of its superfluity if
it has a basionym (which is necessarily legitimate; see Art. 6.10), or if it is formed from a legitimate generic name.
When published it is incorrect, but it may become correct later.
Ex. 14. Chloris radiata (L.) Sw. (Prodr.: 26. 1788) was nomenclaturally superfluous when published because Swartz cited the
legitimate Andropogon fasciculatus L. (Sp. Pl.: 1047. 1753) as a synonym. However, it is not illegitimate because it has a basionym, Agrostis
radiata L. (Syst. Nat., ed. 10: 873. 1759). Chloris radiata is the correct name in the genus Chloris for Agrostis radiata when Andropogon
fasciculatus is treated as a different species, as was done by Hackel (in Candolle & Candolle, Monogr. Phan. 6: 177. 1889).
Ex. 15. Juglans major (Torr.) A. Heller (in Muhlenbergia 1: 50. 1904), based on J. rupestris var. major Torr. (in Rep. Exped. Zuni and Colorado
Rivers: 171. 1853), was nomenclaturally superfluous when published because Heller cited the legitimate J. californica S. Watson (in Proc.
Amer. Acad. Arts 10: 349. 1875) as a synonym. Nevertheless, J. major is legitimate because it has a basionym, and it may be correct when
considered taxonomically distinct from J. californica.
Ex. 16. The generic name Hordelymus (Jess.) Harz (Landw. Samenk.: 1147. 1885) was nomenclaturally superfluous when published because
its type, Elymus europaeus L., is also the type of Cuviera Koeler (Descr. Gram.: 328. 1802). However, it is not illegitimate because it has a
basionym, Hordeum [unranked] Hordelymus Jess. (Deutschl. Gräser: 202. 1863). CuvieraKoeler has since been rejected in favour of its later
homonym Cuviera DC., and Hordelymus can now be used as the correct name for a segregate genus containing E. europaeus L.
Ex. 17. Carpinaceae Vest (Anleit. Stud. Bot.: 265, 280. 1818) was nomenclaturally superfluous when published because of the inclusion
of Salix L., the type of Salicaceae Mirb. (Elém. Physiol. Vég. Bot. 2: 905. 1815). However, it is not illegitimate because it is formed from a
legitimate generic name, Carpinus L.
Ex. 18. Wormia suffruticosa Griff. ex Hook. f. & Thomson (in Hooker, Fl. Brit. India 1: 35. 1872), nom. cons., was nomenclaturally superfluous
when published because of the inclusion of W. subsessilis Miq. (Fl. Ned. Ind., Eerste Bijv.: 619. 1861), nom. rej. With conservation, the
95
previously illegitimate W. suffruticosa became available to serve as basionym of Dillenia suffruticosa (Griff. ex Hook. f. & Thomson) Martelli
(in Malesia 3: 163. 1886), which thereby also became legitimate (see Art. 6.4), although it too was nomenclaturally superfluous when
published because of the inclusion of W. subsessilis.
Note 4. In no case does a statement of parentage accompanying the publication of a name for a hybrid make the name illegitimate
(see Art. H.4 and H.5).
Ex. 19. The name Polypodium ×shivasiae Rothm. (in Kulturpflanze, Beih. 3: 245. 1962) was proposed for hybrids between P. australe Fée
and P. vulgare subsp. prionodes (Asch.) Rothm., while in the same publication (l.c.) the author accepted P. ×font-queri Rothm. (in Cadevall y
Diars & Font Quer, Fl. Catalun. 6: 353. 1937) for hybrids between P. australe and P. vulgareL. subsp. vulgare. Under Art. H.4.1, P. ×shivasiae is
a synonym of P. ×font-queri; nevertheless, it is not an illegitimate name.
ARTICLE 53
53.1. A name of a family, genus, or species, unless conserved (Art. 14), protected (Art. F.2), or sanctioned (Art. F.3), is
illegitimate if it is a later homonym, that is, if it is spelled exactly like a name based on a different type that was
previously and validly published for a taxon at the same rank (see also Art. 53.3 and F.3.3).
Note 1. Simultaneously published homonyms are not illegitimate on account of their homonymy unless an earlier homonym
exists.
Ex. 1. Tapeinanthus Boiss. ex Benth. (in Candolle, Prodr. 12: 436. 1848), given to a genus of Labiatae, is a later homonym
of Tapeinanthus Herb. (Amaryllidaceae: 190. 1837), a name previously and validly published for a genus of Amaryllidaceae.
Tapeinanthus Boiss. ex Benth. is therefore illegitimate and unavailable for use; it was replaced by Thuspeinanta T. Durand (Index Gen. Phan.:
703. 1888).
Ex. 2. Torreya Arn. (in Ann. Nat. Hist. 1: 130. 1838) is a nomen conservandum and is therefore available for use in spite of the existence of
the earlier homonym Torreya Raf. (in Amer. Monthly Mag. & Crit. Rev. 3: 356. 1818).
Ex. 3. Astragalus rhizanthus Boiss. (Diagn. Pl. Orient., ser. 1, 2: 83. 1843) is a later homonym of the validly published name A. rhizanthus Royle
ex Benth. (in Royle, Ill. Bot. Himal. Mts.: 200. 1835) and is therefore illegitimate; it was replaced by A. cariensis Boiss. (Diagn. Pl. Orient., ser.
1, 9: 56. 1849).
Ex. 4. Molina racemosa Ruiz & Pav. (Syst. Veg. Fl. Peruv. Chil. 1: 209. 1798) (Compositae) is an illegitimate later homonym of Molina
racemosa Cav. (Diss. 9: 435. 1790) (Malpighiaceae).
Ex. 5. Moreae Britton & Rose (in Britton, N. Amer. Fl. 23: 201, 217. 1930), formed from Mora Benth. (in Trans. Linn. Soc. London 18: 210.
1839), although a later homonym of MoreaeDumort. (Anal. Fam. Pl.: 17. 1829), formed from Morus L. (Sp. Pl.: 986. 1753), is not illegitimate
because the provisions on homonymy do not apply to subdivisions of families.
Note 2. A validly published earlier homonym, even if illegitimate, rejected under Art. 56 or F.7, or otherwise generally treated as
a synonym, causes rejection of any later homonym that is not conserved, protected, or sanctioned (but see Art. F.3.3).
Ex. 6. Zingiber truncatum S. Q. Tong (in Acta Phytotax. Sin. 25: 147. 1987) is illegitimate because it is a later homonym of the validly
published Z. truncatum Stokes (Bot. Mat. Med. 1: 68. 1812), even though the latter name is itself illegitimate under Art.
52.1; Z. truncatum S. Q. Tong was replaced by Z. neotruncatum T. L. Wu & al. (in Novon 10: 91. 2000).
Ex. 7. Amblyanthera Müll. Arg. (in Martius, Fl. Bras. 6(1): 141. 1860) is a later homonym of the validly published Amblyanthera Blume (Mus.
Bot. 1: 50. 1849) and is therefore illegitimate, although Amblyanthera Blume is now considered to be a synonym of Osbeckia L. (Sp. Pl.: 345.
1753).
53.2. When two or more names of genera or species based on different types are so similar that they are likely to be
confused (because they are applied to related taxa or for any other reason) they are to be treated as homonyms (see
also Art. 61.5). If established practice has been to treat two similar names as homonyms, this practice is to be
continued if it is in the interest of nomenclatural stability.
*Ex. 8. Names treated as homonyms: Asterostemma Decne. (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 2, 9: 271. 1838) and Astrostemma Benth. (in Hooker’s
Icon. Pl. 14: 7. 1880); Pleuropetalum Hook. f. (in London J. Bot. 5: 108. 1846) and Pleuripetalum T. Durand (Index Gen. Phan.: 493.
1888); Eschweilera DC. (Prodr. 3: 293. 1828) and Eschweileria Boerl. (in Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg 6: 106, 112. 1887); Skytanthus Meyen
(Reise 1: 376. 1834) and Scytanthus Hook. (in Icon. Pl. 7: ad t. 605–606. 1844).
*Ex. 9. Bradlea Adans. (Fam. Pl. 2: 324, 527. 1763), Bradleja Banks ex Gaertn. (Fruct. Sem. Pl. 2: 127. 1790), and Braddleya Vell. (Fl. Flumin.:
93. 1829), all commemorating Richard Bradley, are treated as homonyms because only one can be used without serious risk of confusion.
*Ex. 10. Acanthoica Lohmann (in Wiss. Meeresuntersuch., Abt. Kiel 7: 68. 1902) and Acanthoeca W. N. Ellis (in Ann. Soc. Roy. Zool. Belgique
60: 77. 1930), both applied to flagellates, are sufficiently alike to be considered homonyms (Taxon 22: 313. 1973).
96
*Ex. 11. Epithets so similar that they are likely to be confused if combined under the same name of a genus or
species: ceylanicus and zeylanicus; chinensis and sinensis; heteropodus and heteropus; macrocarpon and macrocarpum; macrostachys and
macrostachyus; napaulensis, nepalensis, and nipalensis; poikilantha and poikilanthes; polyanthemos and polyanthemus;pteroides and pteroi
deus; thibetanus and tibetanus; thibetensis and tibetensis; thibeticus and tibeticus; trachycaulon and trachycaulum; trinervis and trinervius.
*Ex. 12. Names not likely to be confused: Desmostachys Miers (in Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2, 9: 399. 1852) and Desmostachya (Stapf) Stapf
(in Thiselton-Dyer, Fl. Cap. 7: 316. 1898); Euphorbia peplis L. (Sp. Pl.: 455. 1753) and E. peplus L. (l.c.: 456. 1753); Gerrardina Oliv. (in Hooker’s
Icon. Pl. 11: 60. 1870) and Gerardiina Engl. (in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 23: 507. 1897); Iris L. (Sp. Pl.: 38. 1753) and Iria (Pers.) R. Hedw. (Gen. Pl.: 360.
1806); Lysimachia hemsleyana Oliv. (in Hooker’s Icon. Pl. 20: ad t. 1980. 1891) and L. hemsleyi Franch. (in J. Bot. (Morot) 9: 461. 1895) (see,
however, Rec. 23A.2); Monochaetum (DC.) Naudin (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 3, 4: 48. 1845) and Monochaete Döll (in Martius, Fl. Bras. 2(3):
78. 1875); Peltophorus Desv. (in Nouv. Bull. Sci. Soc. Philom. Paris 2: 188. 1810) and Peltophorum (Vogel) Benth. (in J. Bot. (Hooker) 2: 75.
1840); Peponia Grev. (in Trans. Microscop. Soc. London, n.s., 11: 75. 1863) and Peponium Engl. (in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam., Nachtr.
1: 318. 1897); Rubia L. (Sp. Pl.: 109. 1753) and Rubus L. (l.c.: 492. 1753); Senecio napaeifolius (DC.) Sch. Bip. (in Flora 28: 498.
1845, ‘napeaefolius’; see Art. 60 Ex. 37) and S. napifolius MacOwan (in J. Linn. Soc., Bot. 25: 388. 1890; the epithets derived, respectively,
from Napaea L. and Brassica napus L.); Symphyostemon Miers (in Proc. Linn. Soc. London 1: 123. 1841) and Symphostemon Hiern (Cat. Afr.
Pl. 1: 867. 1900); Urvillea Kunth (in Humboldt & al., Nov. Gen. Sp. 5, ed. qu.: 105; ed. fol.: 81. 1821) and Durvillaea Bory (Dict. Class. Hist. Nat.
9: 192. 1826).
Ex. 13. Names conserved against earlier names treated as homonyms (see App. III): Cephalotus Labill. (vs Cephalotos Adans.); Columellia Ruiz
& Pav. (vs Columella Lour., both commemorating Columella, the Roman writer on agriculture); Lyngbya Gomont
(vs Lyngbyea Sommerf.); Simarouba Aubl. (vs Simaruba Boehm.).
53.3. The names of two subdivisions of the same genus, or of two infraspecific taxa within the same species, even if
they are at different ranks, are homonyms if they are not based on the same type and have the same final epithet, or
are treated as homonyms if they have a confusingly similar final epithet. The later name is illegitimate.
Ex. 14. Andropogon sorghum subsp. halepensis (L.) Hack. (in Candolle & Candolle, Monogr. Phan. 6: 501. 1889)
and A. sorghum var. halepensis (L.) Hack. (l.c.: 502. 1889) are legitimate because both have the same type (see also Rec. 26A.1).
Ex. 15. Anagallis arvensis subsp. caerulea Hartm. (Sv. Norsk Exc.-Fl.: 32. 1846), based on the later homonym A. caerulea Schreb. (Spic. Fl. Lips.:
5. 1771), is illegitimate because it is itself a later homonym of A. arvensis var. caerulea (L.) Gouan (Fl. Monsp.: 30. 1765), based
on A. caerulea L. (Amoen. Acad. 4: 479. 1759).
Ex. 16. Scenedesmus armatus var. brevicaudatus (Hortob.) Pankow (in Arch. Protistenk. 132: 153. 1986), based
on S. carinatus var. brevicaudatus Hortob. (in Acta Bot. Acad. Sci. Hung. 26: 318. 1981), is a later homonym
of S. armatus f. brevicaudatus L. S. Péterfi (in Stud. Cercet. Biol. (Bucharest), Ser. Biol. Veg. 15: 25. 1963) even though the two names apply
to taxa at different infraspecific ranks. However, S. armatus var. brevicaudatus (L. S. Péterfi) E. H. Hegew. (in Arch. Hydrobiol. Suppl. 60: 393.
1982) is not a later homonym because it is based on the same type as S. armatus f. brevicaudatus L. S. Péterfi.
Note 3. The same final epithet may be used in the names of subdivisions of different genera and in the names of infraspecific taxa
within different species.
Ex. 17. Verbascum sect. Aulacosperma Murb. (Monogr. Verbascum: 34, 593. 1933) is permissible, although there is an
earlier Celsia sect. Aulacospermae Murb. (Monogr. Celsia: 34, 56. 1926). This, however, is not an example to be followed because it is contrary
to Rec. 21B.3 second sentence.
53.4. When it is doubtful whether names or their epithets are sufficiently alike to be confused, a request for a decision
may be submitted to the General Committee, which will refer it for examination to the specialist committee(s) for the
appropriate taxonomic group(s) (see Div. III Prov. 2.2, 7.9, and 7.10). A recommendation whether or not to treat the
names concerned as homonyms may then be put forward to an International Botanical Congress and, if ratified, will
become a binding decision with retroactive effect. These binding decisions are listed in App. VII.
Ex. 18. Gilmania Coville (in J. Wash. Acad. Sci. 26: 210. 1936) was published as a replacement name for Phyllogonum Coville (in Contr. U. S.
Natl. Herb. 4: 190. 1893) because the author considered the latter to be a later homonym of Phyllogonium Brid. (Bryol. Univ. 2: 671. 1827).
Although treating Phyllogonum Coville and Phyllogonium Brid. as homonyms had become accepted, e.g. in Index Nominum Genericorum, a
binding decision was requested under Art. 53.4. The Nomenclature Committee for Spermatophyta concluded (in Taxon 54: 536. 2005) that
the two names should be treated as homonyms, and this was endorsed by the General Committee (later reported in Taxon 55: 799. 2006)
and ratified by the XVII International Botanical Congress in Vienna in 2005 (see App. VII). The name Gilmania is therefore to be accepted as
legitimate.
53.5. When two or more legitimate homonyms have equal priority (see Note 1), the first of them that is adopted in an
effectively published text (Art. 29–31) by an author who simultaneously rejects the other(s) is treated as having
priority. Likewise, if an author in an effectively published text replaces with other names all but one of these
homonyms, the homonym for the taxon that is not renamed is treated as having priority (see also Rec. F.5A.2).
97
Ex. 19. Linnaeus simultaneously published “10.” Mimosa cinerea (Sp. Pl.: 517. 1753) and “25.” M. cinerea (Sp. Pl.: 520. 1753). In 1759 (Syst.
Nat., ed. 10: 1311), he renamed species 10 as M. cineraria L. and retained the name M. cinerea for species 25, so that the latter is treated as
having priority over its homonym.
Ex. 20. Rouy & Foucaud (Fl. France 2: 30. 1895) published the name Erysimum hieraciifolium var. longisiliquum, with two different types, for
two different taxa under different subspecies. Only one of these names can be maintained.
Note 4. A homonym renamed or rejected under Art. 53.5 remains legitimate and has priority over a later synonym at the same
rank should it be transferred to another genus or species.
Ex. 21. Mimosa cineraria L. (Syst. Nat., ed. 10: 1311. 1759), based on M. cinerea L. (Sp. Pl.: 517 [non 520]. 1753; see Art. 53 Ex. 19), was
transferred to Prosopis L. by Druce (in Bot. Exch. Club Brit. Isles Rep. 3: 422. 1914) as P. cineraria (L.) Druce. However, the correct name
in Prosopis would have been a combination based on M. cinerea (l.c.) had not that name been successfully proposed for rejection (see App.
V).
ARTICLE 54
54.1. Consideration of homonymy does not extend to the names of taxa not treated under this Code, except as stated
below (see also Art. F.6.1):
(a) Later homonyms of the names of taxa once treated as algae, fungi, or plants are illegitimate, even when the taxa
have been reassigned to a different group of organisms to which this Code does not apply.
(b) A name applied to an organism covered by this Code and validly published under it (Art. 32–45) but originally
published for a taxon other than an alga, fungus, or plant, i.e. under another Code, is illegitimate if it (1) is
unavailable for use under the provisions of the other Code , usually because of homonymy, or (2) becomes a
1
homonym of an algal, fungal, or plant name when the taxon to which it applies is first treated as an alga, fungus,
or plant (see also Art. 45.1).
[footnote] Such names are termed “objectively invalid” in the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature and “illegitimate” in
1
the International Code of Nomenclature of Prokaryotes.
(c) A name of a genus is treated as an illegitimate later homonym if it is spelled identically with a previously published
intergeneric graft hybrid “name” established under the provisions of the International Code of Nomenclature for
1
Cultivated Plants.
[footnote] The term “established” is used by the International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants for the concept of validly published
1
in the International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants.

Ex. 1. (b)(1) Cribrosphaerella Deflandre ex Góka (in Acta Palaeontol. Polon. 2: 239, 260, 280. 5 Sep 1957) was published under the provisions
of the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature for the Cretaceous coccolith algae previously known as Cribrosphaera Arkhang. (in
Mater. Geol. Rossii 25: 411. 1912), an objectively invalid (equivalent to illegitimate) name under that Code because it is a later homonym
of Cribrosphaera Popofsky (in Ergebn. Plankton-Exped. 3(L.f.β): 22, 32, 63. 1906), a radiolarian genus. Although Cribrosphaera Arkhang. is not
a later homonym under this Code, it is illegitimate because it is not available for use according to the provisions of the Code under which it
was published; consequently Cribrosphaerella is the correct name for the coccolith genus under both Codes.
Note 1. The International Code of Nomenclature of Prokaryotes provides that a prokaryotic name is illegitimate if it is a later
homonym of a name of a taxon of prokaryotes, fungi, algae, protozoa, or viruses.
Recommendation 54A
54A.1. Authors naming new taxa under this Code should, as far as is practicable, avoid using such names as already exist for
zoological and prokaryotic taxa (see also Art. F.6.1).
ARTICLE 55
55.1. A name of a species or subdivision of a genus may be legitimate even if its epithet was originally placed under
an illegitimate generic name (see also Art. 22.5).
Ex. 1. Agathophyllum neesianum Blume (in Mus. Bot. 1: 340. 1851) is legitimate even though Agathophyllum Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 431. 1789) is
illegitimate (it is a superfluous replacement name for Ravensara Sonn., Voy. Indes Orient. 3: 248. 1782). Because Meisner (in Candolle, Prodr.
15(1): 104. 1864) cited A. neesianum as a synonym of his new Mespilodaphne mauritiana, M. mauritiana Meisn. is illegitimate under Art. 52.
Ex. 2. Calycothrix sect. Brachychaetae Nied. (in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam. 3(7): 100. 1893) is legitimate even though it was published
under Calycothrix Meisn. (Pl. Vasc. Gen.: 107. 1838), a superfluous replacement name for Calytrix Labill. (Nov. Holl. Pl. 2: 8. 1806).
98
55.2. An infraspecific name may be legitimate even if its final epithet was originally placed under an illegitimate species
name (see also Art. 27.2).
Ex. 3. Agropyron japonicum var. hackelianum Honda (1927) is legitimate even though it was published under the
illegitimate A. japonicum Honda (1927), a later homonym of A. japonicum(Miq.) P. Candargy (1901) (see also Art. 27 Ex. 1).
Note 1. A name falling under the provisions of Art. 55.1 or 55.2 is unavailable for use, but may serve as a replaced synonym or, if
not itself illegitimate, basionym of another name or combination.
55.3. The names of species and of subdivisions of genera assigned to genera the names of which are conserved,
protected, or sanctioned later homonyms, and that had earlier been assigned to the genera under the rejected
homonyms, are legitimate under the conserved, protected, or sanctioned names without change of authorship or date
if there is no other obstacle under the rules.
Ex. 4. When published, Alpinia languas J. F. Gmel. (Syst. Nat. 2: 7. 1791) and A. galanga (L.) Willd. (Sp. Pl. 1: 12. 1797) were assigned
to Alpinia L. (Sp. Pl.: 1753. 1753). When the name Alpinia was conserved from a later publication (Art. 14.9), as Alpinia Roxb. (in Asiat. Res.
11: 350. 1810), these two species were included in the newly named genus and their names are to be accepted without any change in status
under this Code.
55.4.. The epithet of the name of a species or subdivision of a genus that was originally placed under a generic name
that is a later homonym, or the final epithet of the name of an infraspecific taxon that was originally placed under a
species name that is a later homonym, may be placed under the respective legitimate earlier homonym without
change of authorship and date.
Ex. 5. The epithet of Haplanthus hygrophiloides T. Anderson (in J. Linn. Soc., Bot. 9: 503. 1867) was originally placed under the illegitimate
generic name Haplanthus T. Anderson (l.c. 1867), a later homonym of Haplanthus Nees (in Wallich, Pl. Asiat. Rar. 3: 77, 115. 1832). When H.
hygrophiloides is considered to belong instead to Haplanthus Nees, it is so accepted without change of authorship and date.
Ex. 6. When the homonyms Acidosasa B. M. Yang (in J. Hunan Teachers’ Coll., Nat. Sci. Ed., 1981(2): 54. 1981) and Acidosasa C. D. Chu & C. S.
Chao (in J. Bamboo Res. 1: 165. 1982) are considered to apply to the same genus, A. chinensis C. D. Chu & C. S. Chao (in J. Bamboo Res. 1:
165. 1982) is so accepted even though its epithet was originally placed under the illegitimate Acidosasa C. D. Chu & C. S. Chao (1982).
ARTICLE 56
56.1. Any name that would cause a disadvantageous nomenclatural change (Art. 14.1) may be proposed for rejection.
A name thus rejected, or its basionym if it has one, is placed on a list of nomina utique rejicienda (suppressed
names, App. V). Along with each listed name, all names for which it is the basionym are similarly rejected, and none is
to be used (see Rec. 50E.2).
Note 1. A name rejected under Art. 56.1 does not become illegitimate on account of its rejection and can continue to provide the
type of a name at higher rank. Similarly, a combination under a rejected name, although unavailable for use because of the
inclusion of the rejected name, may be legitimate, and may serve as basionym for another combination.
56.2. The list of nomina utique rejicienda (suppressed names) will remain permanently open for additions and
changes. Any proposal for rejection of a name must be accompanied by a detailed statement of the cases both for and
against its rejection, including considerations of typification. Such proposals must be submitted to the General
Committee, which will refer them for examination to the specialist committees for the various taxonomic groups
(see Rec. 56A, Div. III Prov. 2.2, 7.9, and 7.10; see also Art. 14.12 and 34.1).
56.3. When a proposal for the rejection of a name under Art. 56 or F.7 has been approved by the General Committee
after study by the specialist committee for the taxonomic group concerned, rejection of that name is authorized
subject to the decision of a later International Botanical Congress (see also Art. 14.15 and 34.2). Rejection takes effect
on the date of effective publication (Art. 29–31) of the General Committee’s approval.
99
Note 2. The date of the General Committee decision on a particular rejection proposal can be determined by consulting
the International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants Appendices database
(http://botany.si.edu/references/codes/props/index.cfm).
Recommendation 56A
56A.1. When a proposal for the rejection of a name under Art. 56 or F.7 has been referred to the appropriate specialist committee
for study, authors should follow existing usage of names as far as possible pending the General Committee’s recommendation on
the proposal (see also Rec. 14A and 34A).
ARTICLE 57
57.1. A name that has been widely and persistently used for a taxon or taxa not including its type is not to be used in
a sense that conflicts with current usage unless and until a proposal to deal with it under Art. 14.1 or 56.1 has been
submitted and rejected.
Ex. 1. The name Bovista pusilla (Batsch : Pers.) Pers. (Syn. Meth. Fung.: 138. 1801) : Pers., based on Lycoperdon pusillum Batsch (Elench. Fung.
Cont. Secunda: 123. 1789), is typified by a plate (Batsch, l.c.: t. 41, fig. 228. 1789) that represents the species currently known
as B. limosa Rostr. (in Meddel. Grønland 18: 52. 1894) s. l., but has been widely and persistently used for either or both of two different
species, the correct names of which are B. dermoxantha Vitt. and B. furfuracea Pers. : Pers. Unless and until a proposal to reject the
name B. pusilla or to conserve B. limosa against it has been submitted and rejected, the name B. pusilla is not to be used.
ARTICLE 58
58.1. If there is no obstacle under the rules, the final epithet in an illegitimate name may be re-used in a different
name, at either the same or a different rank; or an illegitimate generic name may be re-used as the epithet in the
name of a subdivision of a genus. The resulting name is then treated either as a replacement name with the same type
as the illegitimate name (Art. 7.4; see also Art. 7.5 and Art. 41 Note 3) or as the name of a new taxon with a different
type. Its priority does not date back to the publication of the illegitimate name (see Art. 11.3 and 11.4).
Ex. 1. The name Talinum polyandrum Hook. (in Bot. Mag.: ad t. 4833. 1855) is illegitimate under Art. 53.1 because it is a later homonym
of T. polyandrum Ruiz & Pav. (Fl. Peruv. Prodr.: 65. 1794). When Bentham (Fl. Austral. 1: 172. 1863) transferred T. polyandrum Hook.
to Calandrinia Kunth, he called it C. polyandra. This name has priority from 1863, and is cited as C. polyandra Benth.,
not C. polyandra “(Hook.) Benth.”
Ex. 2. Cymbella subalpina Hust. (in Int. Rev. Gesamten Hydrobiol. Hydrogr. 42: 98. 1942) is illegitimate under Art. 53.1 because it is a later
homonym of C. subalpina F. Meister (Kieselalg. Schweiz: 182, 236. 1912). When Mann (in Round & al., Diatoms: 667. 1990) transferred C.
subalpina Hust. to Encyonema Kütz., he called it E. subalpinum D. G. Mann. This name is a replacement name with priority from 1990 and as
such is illegitimate under Art. 52.1 because C. mendosa VanLand. (Cat. Fossil Recent Gen. Sp. Diatoms Syn. 3: 1211, 1236. 1969) had already
been published as a replacement name for C. subalpina Hust.
Ex. 3. Hibiscus ricinifolius E. Mey. ex Harv. (Fl. Cap. 1: 171. 1860) is illegitimate under Art. 52.1 because H. ricinoides Garcke (in Bot. Zeitung
(Berlin) 7: 834. 1849) was cited in synonymy. When the epithet ricinifolius was combined at varietal rank under H. vitifolius by Hochreutiner
(in Annuaire Conserv. Jard. Bot. Genève 4: 170. 1900) his name was legitimate and is treated as a replacement name, typified (Art. 7.4) by
the type of H. ricinoides. The name is cited as H. vitifolius var. ricinifolius Hochr., not H. vitifolius var. ricinifolius “(E. Mey. ex Harv.) Hochr.”
Ex. 4. Geiseleria Klotzsch (in Arch. Naturgesch. 7: 254. 1841) is illegitimate under Art. 52.1 because Klotzsch’s circumscription included Croton
glandulosus L., the original type of Decarinium Raf. (Neogenyton: 1. 1825). Later, Gray (Manual, ed. 2: 391. 1856)
published Croton subg. Geiseleria, which has priority from that date and is cited as C. subg. GeiseleriaA. Gray,
not C. subg. Geiseleria “(Klotzsch) A. Gray”. Because the subgeneric name is a replacement name, its type is C. glandulosus, the type (Art. 7.4)
of Decarinium and automatic type (Art. 7.5) of Geiseleria.
Note 1. When the epithet of a name illegitimate under Art. 52.1 is re-used at the same rank, the resulting name is illegitimate
unless either the type of the name causing illegitimacy is explicitly excluded or its epithet is unavailable for use.
Ex. 5. Menispermum villosum Lam. (Encycl. 4: 97. 1797) is illegitimate under Art. 52.1 because M. hirsutum L. (Sp. Pl.: 341. 1753) was cited in
synonymy. The name Cocculus villosusDC. (Syst. Nat. 1: 525. 1817), based on M. villosum, is also illegitimate because the type
of M. hirsutum was not excluded and the epithet hirsutus was available for use in Cocculus.
Ex. 6. Cenomyce ecmocyna Ach. (Lichenogr. Universalis: 549. 1810) is an illegitimate renaming of Lichen gracilis L. (Sp. Pl.: 1152.
1753). Scyphophorus ecmocynus Gray (Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 1: 421. 1821), based on C. ecmocyna, is also illegitimate because the type
of L. gracilis was not excluded and the epithet gracilis was available for use. When proposing the combination Cladonia ecmocyna, Leighton
100
(in Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 3, 18: 406. 1866) explicitly excluded L. gracilis and thereby published the legitimate name of a new
species, Cladonia ecmocyna Leight.
Ex. 7. Ferreola ellipticifolia Stokes (in Bot. Mat. Med. 4: 556. 1812) is illegitimate under Art. 52.1 because Maba elliptica J. R. Forst. & G. Forst.
(Char. Gen. Pl., ed. 2: 122. 1776) was cited in synonymy. Bakhuizen van den Brink published Diospyros ellipticifolia Bakh. (in Gard. Bull. Straits
Settlem. 7: 162. 1933) as a replacement name for F. ellipticifolia and did not exclude the type of M. elliptica. Diospyros ellipticifolia is
nevertheless a legitimate name because in 1933 the epithet elliptica was not available for use in Diospyros due to the existence
of D. elliptica Knowlt. (in Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 204: 83. 1902), of which D. elliptica (J. R. Forst. & G. Forst.) P. S. Green (in Kew Bull. 23: 340.
1969) is an illegitimate later homonym (Art. 53.1).
ARTICLE 59
(NAMES OF FUNGI WITH A PLEOMORPHIC LIFE CYCLE)
SEE ART. F.8 IN CHAPTER F

101
CHAPTER VIII
ORTHOGRAPHY AND GENDER OF NAMES
SECTION 1
ORTHOGRAPHY
ARTICLE 60
60.1. The original spelling of a name or epithet is to be retained, except for the correction of typographical or
orthographical errors and the standardizations imposed by Art. 60.4 (letters and ligatures foreign to classical
Latin), 60.5 and 60.6 (interchange between u/v, i/j, or eu/ev), 60.7 (diacritical signs and ligatures), 60.8 (terminations;
see also Art. 32.2), 60.9 (intentional latinizations), 60.10 (compounding
forms), 60.11 and 60.12 (hyphens), 60.13(apostrophes and full stops), 60.14 (abbreviations), and F.9.1 (epithets of
fungal names) (see also Art. 14.8, 14.11, and F.3.2).
Ex. 1. Retention of original spelling: The generic names Mesembryanthemum L. (Sp. Pl.: 480. 1753) and Amaranthus L. (Sp. Pl.: 989. 1753)
were deliberately so spelled by Linnaeus and the spelling is not to be altered to ‘Mesembrianthemum’ and ‘Amarantus’, respectively,
although these latter forms are linguistically correct (see Bull. Misc. Inform. Kew 1928: 113, 287. 1928). – Phoradendron Nutt. (in J. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Philadelphia, ser. 2, 1: 185. 1848) is not to be altered to ‘Phoradendrum’. – Triaspis mozambica A. Juss. (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 2, 13:
268. 1840) is not to be altered to ‘T. mossambica’, as in Engler (Pflanzenw. Ost-Afrikas C: 232. 1895). – Alyxia ceylanica Wight (Icon. Pl. Ind.
Orient. 4: t. 1293. 1848) is not to be altered to ‘A. zeylanica’, as in Trimen (Handb. Fl. Ceylon 3: 127. 1895). – Fagus sylvatica L. (Sp. Pl.: 998.
1753) is not to be altered to ‘F. silvatica’. Although the classical spelling is silvatica, the mediaeval spelling sylvatica is not an orthographical
error (see also Rec. 60E). – Scirpus cespitosus L. (Sp. Pl.: 48. 1753) is not to be altered to ‘S. caespitosus’.
*Ex. 2. The epithet of Agaricus rhacodes Vittad. (Descr. Fung. Mang.: 158. 1833) is to be so spelled, even though it was originally
spelled ‘rachodes’ (see Wilson in Taxon 66: 189. 2017).
*Ex. 3. Typographical errors: Globba ‘brachycarpa’ Baker (in Hooker, Fl. Brit. India 6: 205. 1890) and Hetaeria ‘alba’ Ridl. (J. Linn. Soc., Bot.
32: 404. 1896) are typographical errors for Globba trachycarpa Baker and Hetaeria alta Ridl., respectively (see Sprague in J. Bot. 59: 349.
1921).
Ex. 4. ‘Torilis’ taihasenzanensis Masam. (in J. Soc. Trop. Agric. 6: 570. 1934) was a typographical error for Trollius taihasenzanensis, as noted
on the errata slip inserted between pages 4 and 5 of the same volume.
Ex. 5. The misspelled Indigofera ‘longipednnculata’ Y. Y. Fang & C. Z. Zheng (in Acta Phytotax. Sin. 21: 331. 1983) is presumably a
typographical error and is to be corrected to I. longipedunculata.
*Ex. 6. Orthographical error: Gluta ‘benghas’ L. (Mant. Pl.: 293. 1771), which is an orthographical error for G. renghas, is cited as G. renghas L.
(see Engler in Candolle & Candolle, Monogr. Phan. 4: 225. 1883); the vernacular name used as a specific epithet by Linnaeus is “renghas”, not
“benghas”.
Ex. 7. The original spelling of the generic name ‘Nilsonia’ Brongn. (in Ann. Sci. Nat. (Paris) 4: 210. 1825) is an orthographical error correctable
under Art. 60.1 to Nilssonia, the conservation of which is not therefore required. Brongniart named the genus after Sven Nilsson, whose name
he consistently misspelled as “Nilson” in his 1825 publication.
Note 1. Art. 14.11 provides for the conservation of a particular spelling of a name of a family, genus, or species (see Art. 14.8).
Ex. 8. Bougainvillea Comm. ex Juss. (‘Buginvillaea’), orth. cons. (see App. III).
Ex. 9. Wisteria Nutt., nom. cons. is not to be altered to ‘Wistaria’, although the genus was named in honour of Caspar Wistar,
because Wisteria is the spelling used in App. III (see Art. 14.8).
60.2. The words “original spelling” mean the spelling used when a name of a new taxon or a replacement name was
validly published. They do not refer to the use of an initial capital or lower-case letter, which is a matter of typography
(see Art. 20.1, 21.2, and Rec. 60F).
102
60.3. The liberty of correcting a name is to be used with reserve, especially if the change affects the first syllable and,
above all, the first letter of the name (but see *Ex. 6).
*Ex. 10. The spelling of the generic name Lespedeza Michx. (Fl. Bor.-Amer. 2: 70. 1803) is not to be altered, although it commemorates
Vicente Manuel de Céspedes (see Rhodora 36: 130–132, 390–392. 1934). – Cereus jamacaru DC. (Prodr. 3: 467. 1828) may not be altered
to C. ‘mandacaru’, even if jamacaru is believed to be a corruption of the vernacular name “mandacaru”.
60.4. The letters w and y, foreign to classical Latin, and k, rare in that language, are permissible in scientific names
(see Art. 32.1(b)). Other letters and ligatures foreign to classical Latin that may appear in scientific names, such as the
German ß (ſs, or double s), are to be transcribed.
60.5. When a name has been published in a work where the letters u, v or i, j are used interchangeably or in any other
way incompatible with modern typographical practices (e.g. one letter of a pair not being used in capitals, or not at
all), those letters are to be transcribed in conformity with modern nomenclatural usage.
Ex. 11. Curculigo Gaertn. (Fruct. Sem. Pl. 1: 63. 1788), not ‘Cvrcvligo’; Taraxacum Zinn (Cat. Pl. Hort. Gott.: 425. 1757),
not ‘Taraxacvm’; Uffenbachia Fabr. (Enum., ed. 2: 21. 1763), not ‘Vffenbachia’.
Ex. 12. ‘Geastrvm hygrometricvm’ and ‘Vredo pvstvlata’ of Persoon (in Syn. Meth. Fung.: 135, 219 1801) are spelled, respectively, Geastrum
hygrometricum Pers. : Pers. and Uredo pustulata Pers. : Pers.
60.6. When the original publication of a name adopted a use of the letters u, v or i, j in any way incompatible with
modern nomenclatural practices, those letters are to be transcribed in conformity with modern nomenclatural usage.
When names or epithets are derived from Greek words that include the diphthong ey (ευ), its transcription as ev is
treated as an error correctable to eu. When names or epithets of Latin but not Greek origin include the letter i used
as a semi-vowel (followed by another vowel), it is treated as an error correctable to j.
Ex. 13. The generic name ‘Mezonevron’ Desf. is correctable to Mezoneuron Desf., and the basionym of Neuropteris (Brongn.) Sternb. (nom.
& orth. cons.), Filicites sect. ‘Nevropteris’Brongn., is correctable to Filicites sect. Neuropteris. Similarly, ‘Evonymus’ L. is correctable
to Euonymus L. (nom. & orth. cons.).
Ex. 14. Jatropha L., Jondraba Medik., and Clypeola jonthlaspi L., because they are of Greek origin, are not to be altered
to ‘Iatropha’, ‘Iondraba’, and Clypeola ‘ionthlaspi’; nor are Ionopsidium Rchb. and Ionthlaspi Adans. to be altered
to ‘Jonopsidium’ and ‘Jonthlaspi’, respectively.
Ex. 15. Brachypodium ‘iaponicum’ Miq. is correctable to Brachypodium japonicum because the epithet is Latin and, in Latin, an
initial i followed by a vowel is a semi-vowel. Meiandra ‘maior’ Markgr. is correctable to Meiandra major because the epithet is Latin and, in
Latin, an i between two vowels is a semi-vowel, but the generic name is of Greek origin, and so the spelling “Meiandra” is correct.
60.7. Diacritical signs are not used in scientific names. When names (either new or old) are drawn from words in which
such signs appear, the signs are to be suppressed with the necessary transcription of the letters so modified; for
example ä, ö, ü become, respectively, ae, oe, ue (not æ or œ, see
below); é, è, êbecome e; ñ becomes n; ø becomes oe (not œ); å becomes ao. The diaeresis, indicating that a vowel is
to be pronounced separately from the preceding vowel (as in Cephaëlis, Isoëtes), is a phonetic device that is not
considered to alter the spelling; as such, its use is optional. The ligatures æ and œ, indicating that the letters are
pronounced together, are to be replaced by the separate letters ae and oe.
Ex. 16. Transcription (e.g. umlaut): ‘Lühea’, dedicated to Carl Emil von der Lühe, is spelled Luehea Willd. (in Neue Schriften Ges. Naturf.
Freunde Berlin 3: 410. 1801); suppression (e.g. tilde): Vochysia ‘kosñipatae’, named after the valley of Kosñipata, is spelled V.
kosnipatae Huamantupa (in Arnaldoa 12: 82. 2005).
60.8. The termination of specific or infraspecific epithets derived from personal names that are not already in Greek
or Latin and do not possess a well-established latinized form (see Rec. 60C.1) is as follows:
(a) If the personal name ends with a vowel or -er, substantival epithets are formed by adding the genitive inflection
appropriate to the gender and number of the person(s) honoured (e.g. scopoli-i for Scopoli (m), fedtschenko-i for
Fedtschenko (m), fedtschenko-ae for Fedtschenko (f), glaziou-i for Glaziou (m), lace-ae for Lace (f), gray-i for Gray
(m), hooker-orum for the Hookers (m)), except when the name ends with -a, in which case adding -e (singular)
103
or -rum (plural) is appropriate (e.g. triana-e for Triana (m), pojarkova-e for Pojarkova (f), orlovskaja-e for
Orlovskaja (f)).
(b) If the personal name ends with a consonant (but not in -er), substantival epithets are formed by adding -i- (stem
augmentation) plus the genitive inflection appropriate to the gender and number of the person(s) honoured
(e.g. lecard-ii for Lecard (m), wilson-iae for Wilson (f), verlot-iorum for the Verlot brothers, braun-iarum for the
Braun sisters, mason-iorum for Mason, father and daughter).
(c) If the personal name ends with a vowel, adjectival epithets are formed by adding -an- plus the nominative singular
inflection appropriate to the gender of the generic name (e.g. Cyperus heyne-anus for Heyne, Vanda
lindley-ana for Lindley, Aspidium bertero-anum for Bertero), except when the personal name ends with -a in which
case -n- plus the appropriate inflection is added (e.g. balansa-nus (m), balansa-na (f), and balansa-num (n) for
Balansa).
(d) If the personal name ends with a consonant, adjectival epithets are formed by adding -i- (stem augmentation)
plus -an- (stem of adjectival suffix) plus the nominative singular inflection appropriate to the gender of the generic
name (e.g. Rosa webb-iana for Webb, Desmodium griffith-ianum for Griffith, Verbena hassler-iana for Hassler).
Terminations contrary to the above standards are treated as errors to be corrected
to -[i]i, -[i]ae, -[i]ana, -[i]anus, -[i]anum, -[i]arum, or -[i]orum, as appropriate (see also Art. 32.2). However, epithets
formed in accordance with Rec. 60C.1 are not correctable (see also Art. 60.9).
Note 2. The hyphens in Art. 60.8 are used only to set off the termination.
Note 3. Art. 60.8 does not preclude the use, as epithets, of names of genera commemorating persons, or feminine nouns formed
by analogy (see Rec. 20A.1(i)), placed in apposition (Art. 23.1).
Ex. 17. In Rhododendron ‘potanini’ Batalin (in Trudy Imp. S.-Peterburgsk. Bot. Sada 11: 489. 1892), commemorating G. N. Potanin, the epithet
is to be spelled potaninii under Art. 60.8(b). However, in Phoenix theophrasti Greuter (in Bauhinia 3: 243. 1967), commemorating
Theophrastus, it is not spelled ‘theophrastii’ because Rec. 60C.1 applies.
Ex. 18. Rosa ‘pissarti’ Carrière (in Rev. Hort. (Paris) 1880: 314. 1880) is a typographical error for R. ‘pissardi’ (see Rev. Hort. (Paris) 1881: 190.
1881), which is to be spelled R. pissardiiunder Art. 60.8(b).
Ex. 19. In Caulokaempferia ‘dinabandhuensis’ Biseshwori & Bipin (in J. Jap. Bot. 92: 84. 2017), commemorating Prof. Dinabandhu Sahoo, the
adjectival epithet was wrongly given the geographical termination -ensis (see Rec. 60D.1), but is to be spelled C. dinabandhuana under Art.
60.8(c).
Ex. 20. In Uladendron codesuri Marc.-Berti (in Pittieria 3: 10. 1971) the epithet derives from an acronym (CODESUR, Comisión para el
Desarrollo del Sur de Venezuela), not a personal name, and is not to be changed to ‘codesurii’ (as in Brenan, Index Kew., Suppl. 16: 296. 1981).
Ex. 21. In Asparagus tamaboki Yatabe (in Bot. Mag. (Tokyo) 7: 61. 1893) and Agropyron kamoji Ohwi (in Acta Phytotax. Geobot. 11: 179. 1942)
the epithets correspond, respectively, to a Japanese vernacular designation, “tamaboki”, or to part of such a designation, “kamojigusa”, and
are not therefore spelled ‘tamabokii’ and ‘kamojii’.
Note 4. If the gender and/or number of a substantival epithet derived from a personal name is inappropriate for the gender and/or
number of the person(s) whom the name commemorates, the termination is to be corrected in conformity with Art. 60.8.
Ex. 22. Rosa ×‘toddii’ Wolley-Dod (in J. Bot. 69, Suppl.: 106. 1931) was named for “Miss E. S. Todd”; the epithet is to be spelled toddiae.
Ex. 23. Astragalus ‘matthewsii’ Podlech & Kirchhoff (in Mitt. Bot. Staatssamml. München 11: 432. 1974) commemorates Victoria
A. Matthews; the epithet is to be spelled matthewsiaeand the name is not to be treated as a later homonym of A. matthewsii S. Watson (in
Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts 18: 192. 1883) commemorating Washington Matthews (see App. VII).
Ex. 24. Codium ‘geppii’ (Schmidt in Biblioth. Bot. 91: 50. 1923), which commemorates A. Gepp and E. S. Gepp, is to be corrected
to C. geppiorum O. C. Schmidt.
Ex. 25. Acacia ‘Bancrofti’ Maiden (in Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland 30: 26. 1918) “commemorates the Bancrofts, father and son, the former the
late Dr. Joseph Bancroft, and the latter Dr. Thomas Lane Bancroft”; the epithet is to be spelled bancroftiorum.
Ex. 26. Chamaecrista leonardiae Britton (N. Amer. Fl. 23: 281. 1930, ‘Leonardae’), Scolosanthus leonardii Alain (in Brittonia 20: 160. 1968),
and Frankenia leonardiorum Alain (l.c.: 155. 1968, ‘leonardorum’) were all based on type material collected by Emery C. Leonard and
Genevieve M. Leonard. Because there is no explicit contradicting statement, these names are to be accepted as dedicated to either or both,
as indicated by the termination of the epithet.
60.9. When changes in spelling by authors who adopt personal, geographical, or vernacular names in nomenclature
are intentional latinizations, they are to be preserved, except, in epithets formed from personal names, when they
concern (a) only a termination to which Art. 60.8 applies, or (b) personal names in which the changes involve
104
only (1) omission of the terminal vowel or terminal consonant or (2) conversion of the terminal vowel to a different
vowel, for which the omitted or converted letter is to be restored.
Ex. 27. Clutia L. (Sp. Pl.: 1042. 1753), Gleditsia J. Clayton (in Linnaeus, l.c.: 1056. 1753), and Valantia L. (l.c.: 1051. 1753), commemorating
Cluyt, Gleditsch, and Vaillant, respectively, are not to be altered to ‘Cluytia’, ‘Gleditschia’, and ‘Vaillantia’; these personal names were
deliberately latinized as Clutius, Gleditsius, and Valantius.
Ex. 28. Abies alcoquiana Veitch ex Lindl. (in Gard. Chron. 1861: 23. 1861), commemorating “Rutherford Alcock Esq.”, implies an intentional
latinization of his family name to Alcoquius. In transferring the epithet to Picea, Carrière (Traité Gén. Conif., ed. 2: 343. 1867) deliberately
changed the spelling to ‘alcockiana’. The resulting combination is nevertheless correctly cited as P. alcoquiana (Veitch ex Lindl.) Carrière
(see Art. 61.4).
Ex. 29. Abutilon glaziovii K. Schum. (in Martius, Fl. Bras. 12(3): 408. 1891), Desmodium bigelovii A. Gray (in Smithsonian Contr. Knowl. 5(6):
47. 1843), and Rhododendron bureaviiFranch. (in Bull. Soc. Bot. France 34: 281. 1887), commemorating A. F. M. Glaziou, J. Bigelow, and
L. E. Bureau, respectively, are not to be changed to A. ‘glazioui’, D. ‘bigelowii’, or R. ‘bureaui’. In these three cases, the implicit latinizations
Glaziovius, Bigelovius, and Bureavius result from conversion of the terminal vowel or consonant to a consonant and do not affect merely the
termination of the names.
Ex. 30. Arnica chamissonis Less. (in Linnaea 6: 238. 1831) and Tragus berteronianus Schult. (Mant. 2: 205. 1824), commemorating L. K. A. von
Chamisso and C. L. G. Bertero, are not to be changed to A. ‘chamissoi’ or T. ‘berteroanus’. The derivation of these epithets from the third
declension genitive (Rec. 60C Ex. 1(b)), a practice normally discouraged (see Rec. 60C.1), involves the addition of letters to the personal name
and does not affect merely the termination.
Ex. 31. Acacia ‘brandegeana’, Blandfordia ‘backhousii’, Cephalotaxus ‘fortuni’, Chenopodium ‘loureirei’, Convolvulus ‘loureiri’, Glochidion
‘melvilliorum’, Hypericum ‘buckleii’,Solanum ‘rantonnei’, and Zygophyllum ‘billardierii’ were published to commemorate T. S. Brandegee,
J. Backhouse, R. Fortune, J. de Loureiro, R. Melville and E. F. Melville, S. B. Buckley, V. Rantonnet, and J. J. H. de Labillardière (de la Billardière).
The implicit latinizations are Brandegeus, Backhousius, Fortunus, Loureireus or Loureirus, Melvillius, Buckleius, Rantonneus, and Billardierius,
but these are not acceptable under Art. 60.9. The names are correctly cited as A. brandegeeana I. M. Johnst. (in Contr. Gray Herb. 75: 27.
1925), B. backhousei Gunn & Lindl. (in Edwards’s Bot. Reg. 31: t. 18. 1845), Cephalotaxus fortunei Hook. (in Bot. Mag.: ad t. 4499.
1850), Chenopodium loureiroi Steud. (Nomencl. Bot., ed. 2. 1: 348. 1840), Convolvulus loureiroi G. Don (Gen Hist. 10: 290.
1836), G. melvilleorum Airy Shaw (in Kew Bull. 25: 487. 1971), H. buckleyi M. A. Curtis (in Amer. J. Sci. Arts 44: 80.
1843), S. rantonnetii Carrière (in Rev. Hort. 32: 135. 1859), and Z. billardierei DC. (Prodr. 1: 705. 1824).
Ex. 32. Mycena seynii Quél. (in Bull. Soc. Bot. France 23: 351. 1877), commemorating Jules de Seynes, is not to be altered to M. ‘seynesii’. The
implicit latinization of that name to Seynius results from omission of more than the terminal letter.
Note 5. The provisions of Art. 60.8, 60.9, and Rec. 60C deal with the latinization of names through their modification. Latinization
is not the same as translation of a name (e.g. Tabernaemontanus, Latin for Bergzabern; Nobilis, Latin for Noble). Epithets derived
from such Latin translations fall under Rec. 60C.1 and are not subject to standardization under Art. 60.8.
Ex. 33. In Wollemia nobilis W. G. Jones & al. (in Telopea 6: 174. 1995), nobilis, an adjective with genitive nobilis, is the translation into Latin
of the family name of the discoverer David Noble. Cladonia abbatiana S. Stenroos (in Ann. Bot. Fenn. 28: 107. 1991) honours the French
lichenologist H. des Abbayes, where Abbayes can be translated to Abbatiae (abbeys). Neither epithet may be altered.
60.10. Adjectival epithets that combine elements derived from two or more Greek or Latin words are to be
compounded as follows:
A noun or adjective in a non-final position appears as a compounding form generally obtained by
(a) removing the case ending of the genitive singular (Latin -ae, -i, -us, -is; transcribed Greek -ou, -os, -es, -as, -ous and
its equivalent -eos) and
(b) before a consonant, adding a connecting vowel (-i- for Latin elements, -o- for Greek elements).
Adjectival epithets not formed in accordance with this provision are to be corrected to conform with it, unless Rec.
60G.1(a) or (b) applies. In particular, the use of the genitive singular case ending of Latin first-declension nouns instead
of a connecting vowel is treated as an error to be corrected unless it serves to make a semantic distinction.
Ex. 34. The epithet meaning “having leaves like those of Quercus” is quercifolia (Querc-, connecting vowel -i-, and ending -folia).
Ex. 35. The epithet ‘aquilegifolia’, derived from the name Aquilegia must be changed to aquilegiifolia (Aquilegi-, connecting vowel -i-, and
ending -folia).
Ex. 36. The epithet of Pereskia ‘opuntiaeflora’ DC. (in Mém. Mus. Hist. Nat. 17: 76. 1828) is to be spelled opuntiiflora, and that of Myrosma
‘cannaefolia’ L. f. (Suppl. Pl. 80. 1782), cannifolia.
Ex. 37. The epithet of Cacalia ‘napeaefolia’ DC. (Prodr. 6: 328. 1838) and Senecio ‘napeaefolius’ (DC.) Sch. Bip. (in Flora 28: 498. 1845) is to be
spelled napaeifolia (-us); it refers to the resemblance of the leaves to those found in Napaea L. (not ‘Napea’), and the connecting
vowel -i- should have been used instead of the genitive singular inflection -ae-.
105
Ex. 38. In Andromeda polifolia L. (Sp. Pl.: 393. 1753), the epithet is taken from a pre-Linnaean generic designation (“Polifolia” of Buxbaum)
and is a noun used in apposition, not an adjective; it is not to be altered to ‘poliifolia’ (Polium-leaved).
Ex. 39. Tetragonia tetragonoides (Pall.) Kuntze (Revis. Gen. Pl. 1: 264. 1891) was based on Demidovia tetragonoides Pall. (Enum. Hort.
Demidof: 150. 1781), the specific epithet of which was derived from the generic name Tetragonia and the suffix -oides. Because this is a
compound epithet derived from a noun and a suffix, not two Greek or Latin words, it is not to be altered to ‘tetragonioides’.
60.11. The use of a hyphen in a compound epithet is treated as an error to be corrected by deletion of the hyphen. A
hyphen is permitted only when the epithet is formed of words that usually stand independently, or when the letters
before and after the hyphen are the same (see also Art. 23.1 and 23.3).
Ex. 40. Hyphen to be deleted: Acer pseudoplatanus L. (Sp. Pl.: 1024. 1753, ‘pseudo-platanus’); Croton ciliatoglandulifer Ortega (Nov. Pl. Descr.
Dec.: 51. 1797, ‘ciliato-glandulifer’); Eugenia costaricensis O. Berg (in Linnaea 27: 213. 1856, ‘costa-ricensis’); Eunotia
rolandschmidtii Metzeltin & Lange-Bert. (Iconogr. Diatomol. 18: 117. 2007, ‘roland-schmidtii’), in which the given name and surname do not
stand independently because the former is not separately latinized; Ficus neoebudarum Summerh. (in J. Arnold Arbor. 13: 97. 1932, ‘neo-
ebudarum’); Lycoperdon atropurpureum Vittad. (Monogr. Lycoperd.: 42. 1842, ‘atro-purpureum’); Mesospora vanbosseae Børgesen (in
Skottsberg, Nat. Hist. Juan Fernandez 2: 258. 1924, ‘van-bosseae’); Peperomia lasierrana Trel. & Yunck. (Piperac. N. South Amer.: 530.
1950, ‘la-sierrana’); Scirpus sect. Pseudoeriophorum Jurtzev (in Byull. Moskovsk. Obshch. Isp. Prir., Otd. Biol. 70(1): 132. 1965, ‘Pseudo-
eriophorum’).
Ex. 41. Hyphen to be maintained: Athyrium austro-occidentale Ching (in Acta Bot. Boreal.-Occid. Sin. 6: 152. 1986); Enteromorpha roberti-
lamii H. Parriaud (in Botaniste 44: 247. 1961), in which the given name and surname stand independently because they are separately
latinized; Piper pseudo-oblongum McKown (in Bot. Gaz. 85: 57. 1928); Ribes non-scriptum (Berger) Standl. (in Publ. Field Mus. Nat. Hist., Bot.
Ser. 8: 140. 1930); Solanum fructu-tecto Cav. (Icon. 4: 5. 1797); Vitis novae-angliae Fernald (in Rhodora 19: 146. 1917).
Ex. 42. Hyphen to be inserted: Arctostaphylos uva-ursi (L.) Spreng. (Syst. Veg. 2: 287. 1825, ‘uva ursi’); Aster novae-angliae L. (Sp. Pl.: 875.
1753, ‘novae angliae’); Coix lacryma-jobi L. (l.c.: 972. 1753, ‘lacryma jobi’); Marattia rolandi-principis Rosenst. (in Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni
Veg. 10: 162. 1911, ‘rolandi principis’); Veronica anagallis-aquatica L. (Sp. Pl.: 12. 1753, ‘anagallis ’), (see Art. 23.3); Veronica argute-
serrata Regel & Schmalh. (in Trudy Imp. S.-Peterburgsk. Bot. Sada 5: 626. 1878, ‘argute serrata’).
Ex. 43. Hyphen not to be inserted: Synsepalum letestui Aubrév. & Pellegr. (in Notul. Syst. (Paris) 16: 263. 1961, ‘Le Testui’), not ‘le-testui’.
Note 6. Art. 60.11 refers only to epithets (in combinations), not to names of genera (for names of fossil-genera see Art. 60.12) or
taxa at higher ranks; a non-fossil generic name published with a hyphen can be changed only by conservation (Art. 14.11; see
also Art. 20.3; but see Art. H.6.2).
Ex. 44. Pseudo-fumaria Medik. (Philos. Bot. 1: 110. 1789) may not be changed to ‘Pseudofumaria’; whereas by conservation ‘Pseudo-
elephantopus’ was changed to PseudelephantopusRohr (in Skr. Naturhist.-Selsk. 2: 214. 1792).
60.12. The use of a hyphen in the name of a fossil-genus is in all cases treated as an error to be corrected by deletion
of the hyphen.
Ex. 45. ‘Cicatricosi-sporites’ R. Potonié & Gelletich (in Sitzungsber. Ges. Naturf. Freunde Berlin 1932: 522. 1932) and ‘Pseudo-Araucaria’ Fliche
(in Bull. Soc. Sci. Nancy 14: 181. 1896) are names of fossil-genera. They are treated as errors to be corrected by deletion of the hyphen
to Cicatricosisporites and Pseudoaraucaria, respectively.
60.13. The use of an apostrophe or quotation mark in an epithet is treated as an error to be corrected by deletion of
the apostrophe or quotation mark unless it follows m to represent the patronymic prefix Mc (or M ), in which case it c
is replaced by the letter c. The use of a full stop (period) in an epithet that is derived from a personal or geographical
name that contains this full stop is treated as an error to be corrected by expansion or, when nomenclatural tradition
does not support expansion (Art. 60.14), deletion of the full stop.
Ex. 46. In Cymbidium ‘i’ansoni’ Rolfe (in Orchid Rev. 8: 191. 1900), Lycium ‘o’donellii’ F. A. Barkley (in Lilloa 26: 202. 1953), and Solanum
tuberosum var. ‘muru’kewillu’ Ochoa (in Phytologia 65: 112. 1988), the final epithet is to be
spelled iansonii, odonellii, and murukewillu, respectively.
Ex. 47. In Nesoluma ‘St.-Johnianum’ Lam & Meeuse (in Occas. Pap. Bernice Pauahi Bishop Mus. 14: 153. 1938), derived from St. John, the
family name of one of the collectors, the epithet is to be spelled st-johnianum.
Ex. 48. Harvey (Fl. Cap. 3: 494. 1865) published Stobaea ‘M‘Kenii’. The name commemorates one of the collectors of the type specimen, Mark
Johnston McKen (1823–1872). The spelling has been changed to S. ‘mkenii’, but must be corrected to S. mckenii.
60.14. Abbreviated names and epithets are to be expanded in conformity with nomenclatural tradition (see also Art.
23 *Ex. 23 and Rec. 60C.4(d)).
106
Ex. 49. In Allium ‘a.-bolosii’ P. Palau (in Anales Inst. Bot. Cavanilles 11: 485. 1953), dedicated to Antonio de Bolòs y Vayreda, the epithet is
spelled antonii-bolosii.
Recommendation 60A
60A.1. When a name of a new taxon or a replacement name, or its epithet, is to be derived from Greek, the transcription to Latin
should conform to classical usage.
Ex. 1. The Greek spiritus asper (an inverted apostrophe) in words transcribed to Latin should be replaced by the letter h, as
in Hyacinthus (from ὑάκινθος) and Rhododendron (from ῥοδόδενδρον).
Recommendation 60B
60B.1. When a new generic name, or epithet in a new name of a subdivision of a genus, is taken from the name of a person, it
should be formed as follows (see also Rec. 20A.1(i); but see Rec. 21B.2):
(a) When the name of the person ends with a vowel, the letter -a is added (e.g. Ottoa after Otto; Sloanea after Sloane), except
when the name ends with -a, when -ea is added (e.g. Collaea after Colla), or with -ea, when nothing is added (e.g. Correa).
(b) When the name of the person ends with a consonant, the letters -ia are added, but when the name ends with -er, either of the
terminations -ia and -a is appropriate (e.g. Sesleria after Sesler and Kernera after Kerner).
(c) In latinized personal names ending with -us this termination is dropped before applying the procedure described under (a) and
(b) (e.g. Dillenia after Dillenius).
Note 1. The syllables not modified by these endings are unaffected unless they contain letters, ligatures, or diacritical signs that
must be transcribed under Art. 60.4 and 60.7.
Note 2. More than one generic name, or epithet of a subdivision of a genus, may be based on the same personal name, e.g. by
adding a prefix or suffix to that personal name or by using an anagram or abbreviation of it (but see Art. 53.2 and 53.3).
Ex. 1. Bouchea Cham. (in Linnaea 7: 252. 1832) and Ubochea Baill. (Hist. Pl. 11: 103. 1891); Engleria O. Hoffm. (in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 10: 273.
1888), Englerella Pierre (Not. Bot.: 46. 1891), and Englerastrum Briq. (in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 19: 178. 1894); Gerardia L. (Sp. Pl.: 610. 1753)
and Graderia Benth. (in Candolle, Prodr. 10: 521. 1846); Lapeirousia Pourr. (in Hist. & Mém. Acad. Roy. Sci. Toulouse 3: 79. 1788)
and Peyrousea DC. (Prodr. 6: 76. 1838); Martia Spreng. (Anleit. Kenntn. Gew., ed. 2, 2: 788. 1818) and Martiusia Schult. (Mant. 1: 69, 226.
1822); Orcuttia Vasey (in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 13: 219. 1886) and Tuctoria Reeder (in Amer. J. Bot. 69: 1090. 1982); Urvillea Kunth (in
Humboldt & al., Nov. Gen. Sp. 5, ed. qu.: 105; ed. fol.: 81. 1821) and Durvillaea Bory (Dict. Class. Hist. Nat. 9: 192. 1826) (see Art. 53 *Ex. 12).
Recommendation 60C
60C.1. When forming specific and infraspecific epithets from personal names already in Greek or Latin, or that possess a well-
established latinized form, the epithets, when substantival, should (Art. 60.8 notwithstanding) be given the appropriate Latin
genitive form (e.g. alexandri from Alexander or Alexandre, alberti from Albert, arnoldi from Arnold, augusti from Augustus or
August or Auguste, ferdinandi from Ferdinand or Fernando or Fernand, martini from Martinus or Martin, linnaei from
Linnaeus, martiifrom Martius, wislizeni from Wislizenus, edithae from Editha or Edith, elisabethae from Elisabetha or
Elisabeth, murielae from Muriela or Muriel, conceptionis from Conceptio or Concepción, beatricis from Beatrix or
Béatrice, hectoris from Hector; but not ‘cami’ from Edmond Gustave Camus or Aimée Camus). Treating modern family names, i.e.
ones that do not have a well-established latinized form, as if they were in third declension should be avoided (e.g. munronis from
Munro, richardsonis from Richardson).
60C.2. New epithets based on personal names that have a well-established latinized form should maintain the traditional use of
that latinized form.
Ex. 1. In addition to the epithets in Rec. 60C.1, the following epithets commemorate personal names already in Latin or possessing a well-
established latinized form: (a) second declension: afzelii based on Afzelius; allemanii based on Allemanius (Freire Allemão); bauhini based on
Bauhinus (Bauhin); clusii based on Clusius; rumphii based on Rumphius (Rumpf); solandribased on Solandrus (Solander); (b) third declension
(otherwise discouraged, see Rec. 60C.1): bellonis based on Bello; brunonis based on Bruno (Robert Brown); chamissonis based on
Chamisso; (c) adjectives (see Art. 23.5): afzelianus, clusianus, linnaeanus, martianus, rumphianus, brunonianus, and chamissonianus.
60C.3. In forming new epithets based on personal names the customary spelling of the personal name should not be modified
unless it contains letters, ligatures, or diacritical signs that must be transcribed under Art. 60.4 and 60.7.
60C.4. In forming new epithets based on personal names prefixes and particles should be treated as follows:
(a) The Scottish and Irish patronymic prefix Mac, Mc, M , or M‘, meaning “son of”, should either all be spelled as mac or the latter
c
three as mc and united with the rest of the name (e.g. macfadyenii after Macfadyen, macgillivrayi after
MacGillivray, macnabii or mcnabii after McNab, macclellandii or mcclellandii after M‘Clelland).
(b) The Irish patronymic prefix O should be united with the rest of the name (Art. 60.13) or omitted (e.g. obrienii, brienianus after
O’Brien, okellyi after O’Kelly).
107
(c) A prefix consisting of an article (e.g. le, la, l’, les, el, il, lo), or containing an article (e.g. du, de la, des, del, della), should be
united to the name (e.g. leclercii after Le Clerc, dubuyssonii after Du Buysson, lafarinae after La Farina, logatoi after Lo Gato).
See Art. 23.1 and Art. 60 Ex. 43 for cases where such epithets were originally spelled in two words.
(d) A prefix to a person’s family name indicating ennoblement or canonization should be omitted (e.g. candollei after de
Candolle, jussieui after de Jussieu, hilairei after Saint-Hilaire, remyi after St Rémy); in geographical epithets, however, “St”
should be rendered as sanctus (m) or sancta (f) (e.g. sancti-johannis, of St John, sanctae-helenae, of St Helena).
(e) A German or Dutch prefix should be omitted (e.g. iheringii after von Ihering, martii after von Martius, steenisii after van
Steenis, strassenii after zu Strassen, vechtiiafter van der Vecht), but when it is normally treated as part of the family name it
should be included in the epithet (e.g. vonhausenii after Vonhausen, vanderhoekii after Vanderhoek, vanbruntiae after Van
Brunt).
Recommendation 60D
60D.1. An epithet derived from a geographical name is preferably an adjective and usually takes one of the
terminations -ensis, -(a)nus, -inus, or -icus.
Ex. 1. Rubus quebecensis L. H. Bailey (from Quebec), Ostrya virginiana (Mill.) K. Koch (from Virginia), Eryngium amorginum Rech. f. (from
Amorgos), Fraxinus pennsylvanica Marshall (from Pennsylvania).
Recommendation 60E
60E.1. The epithet in a name of a new taxon or replacement name should be written in conformity with the customary spelling of
the word or words from which it is derived and in accordance with the accepted usage of Latin and latinization (see also Art. 23.5).
Ex. 1. sinensis (not chinensis).
Recommendation 60F
60F.1. All specific and infraspecific epithets should be written with an initial lower-case letter.
Recommendation 60G
60G.1. A name or epithet that combines elements derived from two or more Greek or Latin words should be formed, as far as
practicable, in accordance with classical usage, subject to the provisions of Art. 60.10.
(a) Exceptions to the procedure outlined in Art. 60.10 are common, and one should review earlier usages of a particular
compounding form. In forming apparently irregular compounds, classical usage is commonly followed.
Ex. 1. The compounding forms hydro- and hydr- (Hydro-phyllum) stem from water (hydor, hydatos); calli- (Calli-stemon) derives from the
adjective beautiful (kalos); and meli- (Meli-osma, Meli-lotus) stems from honey (meli, melitos).
(b) In pseudocompounds, a noun or adjective in a non-final position appears as a word with a case ending, not as a modified stem.
Examples are: nidus-avis (nest of bird, nominative), Myos-otis (mouse ear, genitive), albo-marginatus (white-margined,
ablative), etc. In epithets where tingeing is expressed, the modifying colour is often in the ablative because the preposition e
or ex is implicit, e.g. atropurpureus (blackish purple) from “ex atro purpureus” (purple tinged with black). Pseudocompounds,
in particular those using the genitive singular of Latin first-declension nouns, are considered as correctable errors under Art.
60.10, except when they serve to reveal semantic differences between identically spelled regular compounds formed from
different elements.
Ex. 2. The Latin words for tube (tubus, tubi) and for trumpet (tuba, tubae) in regular compounds result in identical epithets (e.g. tubiformis),
whereas the pseudocompound tubaeformis can only mean trumpet-formed, as in Cantharellus tubaeformis Fr. (Syst. Mycol. 1: 319. 1821) :
Fr.
Ex. 3. Regular compounds derived from papaya (Carica, Caricae) and sedge (Carex, Caricis) are identical, whereas the
pseudocompound caricaefolius can only mean papaya-leaved, as in Solanum caricaefolium Rusby (in Bull. New York Bot. Gard. 8: 118. 1912).
Note 1. The hyphens in the above examples are given solely for explanatory reasons. For the use of hyphens in generic names and
in epithets see Art. 20.3, 23.1, 60.11, and 60.12.
Recommendation 60H
60H.1. When naming new genera or lower-ranked taxa or providing replacement names, authors should explicitly state the
etymology of the names and epithets, especially when their meaning is not obvious.
ARTICLE 61
108
61.1. Only one orthographical variant of any one name is treated as validly published: the form that appears in the
original publication (but see Art. 6.10), except as provided in Art. 60 and F.9 (typographical or orthographical errors
and standardizations), Art. 14.8 and 14.11 (spelling of conserved names), Art. F.3.2 (spelling of sanctioned names),
and Art. 18.4, 19.7, and 32.2 (improper Latin terminations).
61.2. For the purpose of this Code, orthographical variants are the various spelling, compounding, and inflectional
forms of a name or its final epithet (including typographical errors) when only one nomenclatural type is involved.
Ex. 1. Nelumbo Adans. (Fam. Pl. 2: 76. 1763) and ‘Nelumbium’ (Jussieu, Gen. Pl.: 68. 1789) are spelling forms of a generic name based
on Nymphaea nelumbo L., and are treated as orthographical variants. Similarly ‘Musenium’ (Nuttall in Torrey & Gray, Fl. N. Amer. 1: 642.
1840), for which Pfeiffer (Nomencl. Bot. 2: 377. 1873) designated Seseli divaricatum Pursh as type, is an orthographical variant
of Musineon Raf. (in J. Phys. Chim. Hist. Nat. Arts 91: 71. 1820), of which S. divaricatum is the original type.
Ex. 2. The epithet of Selaginella apus Spring (in Martius, Fl. Bras. 1(2): 119. 1840) is a noun in apposition, so that apus cannot be treated as
an orthographical variant of the adjective apodus, used in Lycopodium apodum L. (Sp. Pl.: 1105. 1753). Spring cited L. apodum as a synonym
of S. apus, but instead he should have adopted the former epithet and published “S. apoda”; consequently S. apus was nomenclaturally
superfluous when published and is illegitimate under Art. 52.1.
61.3. If orthographical variants of a name of a new taxon or replacement name appear in the original publication, the
one that conforms to the rules and best suits the recommendations of Art. 60 is to be retained. If the variants conform
and suit equally well, the first author who, in an effectively published text (Art. 29–31), explicitly adopts one of the
variants and rejects the other(s) must be followed (see also Rec. F.5A.2).
61.4. The orthographical variants of a name are to be corrected to the validly published form of that name. Whenever
such a variant appears in a publication, it is to be treated as if it appeared in its corrected form.
Note 1. In full citations it is desirable that the original form of a corrected orthographical variant of a name be added (Rec. 50F).
61.5. Confusingly similar names based on the same type are treated as orthographical variants. (For confusingly similar
names based on different types, see Art. 53.2–53.4.)
Ex. 3. ‘Geaster’ (Fries, Syst. Mycol. 3: 8. 1829) and Geastrum Pers. (in Neues Mag. Bot. 1: 85. 1794) : Pers. (Syn. Meth. Fung.: 131. 1801) are
similar names with the same type (see Taxon 33: 498. 1984); they are treated as orthographical variants despite the fact that they are derived
from two different nouns, aster (asteris) and astrum (astri).
SECTION 2
GENDER
ARTICLE 62
62.1. A generic name retains the gender assigned by nomenclatural tradition, irrespective of classical usage or the
author’s original usage. A generic name without a nomenclatural tradition retains the gender assigned by its author
(but see Art. 62.4).
Note 1. Tradition for generic names usually maintains the classical gender of the corresponding Greek or Latin word, if such exists,
but may differ.
*Ex. 1. In accordance with tradition, Adonis L., Atriplex L., Diospyros L., Eucalyptus L’Hér., Hemerocallis L., Orchis L., Stachys L.,
and Strychnos L. must be treated as feminine while Lotus L. and Melilotus Mill. must be treated as masculine. Although their ending suggests
masculine gender, Cedrus Trew and Fagus L., like most other classical tree names, were traditionally treated as feminine and thus retain that
gender; similarly, Rhamnus L. is feminine, despite the fact that Linnaeus assigned it masculine gender. Erigeron L. (m, not n), PhyteumaL. (n,
not f), and Sicyos L. (m, not f) are other names for which tradition has reestablished the classical gender despite another choice by Linnaeus.
62.2. Compound generic names take the gender of the last word in the nominative case in the compound (but see Art.
14.11). If the termination is altered, however, the gender is altered accordingly.
109
Ex. 2. Irrespective of the fact that the name Parasitaxus de Laub. (Fl. Nouv.-Calédonie & Dépend. 4: 44. 1972) was treated as masculine when
published, its gender is feminine: it is a compound of which the last part coincides with the generic name Taxus L., which is feminine by
tradition (Art. 62.1).
Ex. 3. Compound generic names in which the termination of the last word is altered: Dipterocarpus C. F. Gaertn., Stenocarpus R. Br., and all
other compounds ending in the Greek masculine -carpos (or -carpus), e.g. Hymenocarpos Savi, are masculine; those
in -carpa or -carpaea, however, are feminine, e.g. Callicarpa L. and Polycarpaea Lam.; and those in -carpon, -carpum, or -carpium are neuter,
e.g. Polycarpon L., Ormocarpum P. Beauv., and Pisocarpium Link.
(a) Compounds ending in -botrys, -codon, -myces, -odon, -panax, -pogon, -stemon, and other masculine words, are
masculine.
Ex. 4. Irrespective of the fact that the generic names Andropogon L. and Oplopanax (Torr. & A. Gray) Miq. were originally treated as neuter
by their authors, they are masculine.
(b) Compounds ending in -achne, -chlamys, -daphne, -glochin, -mecon, -osma (the modern transcription of the
feminine Greek word οσμή, osmē), and other feminine words, are feminine. An exception is made in the case of
names ending in -gaster, which strictly speaking ought to be feminine but are treated as masculine in accordance
with tradition.
Ex. 5. Irrespective of the fact that Tetraglochin Poepp., Triglochin L., Dendromecon Benth., and Hesperomecon Greene were originally
treated as neuter, they are feminine.
(c) Compounds ending in -ceras, -dendron, -nema, -stigma, -stoma, and other neuter words, are neuter. An exception
is made for names ending
in -anthos(or -anthus), -chilos (-chilus or -cheilos), and -phykos (-phycos or -phycus), which ought to be neuter,
because that is the gender of the Greek words άνθος, anthos, χείλος, cheilos, and φύκος, phykos, but are treated
as masculine in accordance with tradition.
Ex. 6. Irrespective of the fact that Aceras R. Br. and Xanthoceras Bunge were treated as feminine when first published, they are neuter.
Note 2. Art. 14.11 provides for the conservation of a generic name in order to preserve a particular gender.
Ex. 7. As an exception to Art. 62.2, the generic name Bidens L., formed from the Latin masculine noun dens (tooth), has been assigned
feminine gender by conservation (see App. III).
62.3. Arbitrarily formed generic names or vernacular names or adjectives used as generic names, of which the gender
is not apparent, take the gender assigned to them by their authors. If the original author failed to indicate the gender,
a subsequent author may choose a gender, and the first such choice, if effectively published (Art. 29–31), is to be
accepted (see also Rec. F.5A.2).
Ex. 8. Taonabo Aubl. (Hist. Pl. Guiane 1: 569. 1775) is feminine because Aublet’s two species were T. dentata and T. punctata.
Ex. 9. Agati Adans. (Fam. Pl. 2: 326. 1763) was published without indication of gender; feminine gender was assigned to it by Desvaux (in
J. Bot. Agric. 1: 120. 1813), who was the first subsequent author to adopt the name in an effectively published text, and his choice is to be
accepted.
Ex. 10. The original gender of Manihot Mill. (Gard. Dict. Abr., ed. 4: Manihot. 1754), as apparent from some of the species polynomials, was
feminine, and Manihot is therefore to be treated as feminine.
62.4. Generic names ending in -anthes, -oides, or -odes are treated as feminine and those ending in -ites as masculine,
irrespective of the gender assigned to them by the original author.
Recommendation 62A
62A.1. When a genus is divided into two or more genera, the gender of the new generic name or names should, if there is no
obstacle under the rules, be that of the generic name that is retained (see also Rec. 20A.1(i) and 60B).
Ex. 1. When Boletus L. : Fr. (masculine) was divided, the segregated new genera were usually given masculine names: Xerocomus Quél. (in
Mougeot & Ferry, Fl. Vosges, Champ.: 477. 1887), Boletellus Murrill (in Mycologia 1: 9. 1909), etc.
110
CHAPTER F
NAMES OF ORGANISMS TREATED AS FUNGI
This Chapter brings together the provisions of this Code that deal solely with names of organisms treated as fungi.
Content in this Chapter may be modified by action of the Nomenclature Session of an International Mycological
Congress (IMC) (see Div. III Prov. 8). Results of the IMC Nomenclature Sessions for 2018 and 2022 will not be available
until after print publication of this Code, and therefore mycologists should always consult the online version of
this Code in case of subsequent changes (http://www.iapt-taxon.org/nomen/main.php).
Mycologists should note that the content of this Code outside of Chapter F pertains to all organisms covered by
this Code, including fungi, unless expressly limited. This content includes rules about effective publication, valid
publication, typification, legitimacy, and priority of names; citation and orthography; and names of hybrids.
Some provisions in the Preamble, Principles, Articles, and Recommendations elsewhere in this Code, such as those
listed below, while not restricted to fungi, are of particular relevance to mycologists. The full wording of these and all
other relevant provisions of this Code should be consulted in all cases.
Pre. 8. The provisions of this Code apply to all organisms traditionally treated as fungi, whether fossil or non-fossil,
including chytrids, oomycetes, and slime moulds (but excluding Microsporidia).
Principle I. This Code applies to names of taxonomic groups treated as fungi, whether or not these groups were
originally so treated.
Art. 4 Note 4. In classifying parasites, especially fungi, authors may distinguish within the species special forms
(formae speciales) characterized by their adaptation to different hosts, but the nomenclature of special forms
is not governed by the provisions of this Code.
Art. 8.4 (see also Art. 8 Ex. 12, Rec. 8B, Art. 40 Note 3, and Art. 40.8). Cultures of fungi are acceptable as types if
preserved in a metabolically inactive state, and this must be stated in the protologue.
Art. 14.15 and Art. 14 Note 4(c)(2). Before 1 January 1954, decisions on conservation of names made by the Special
Committee for Fungi, became effective on 20 July 1950 at the VII International Botanical Congress in
Stockholm.
111
Art. 16.3. Automatically typified suprafamilial names of fungi end as follows: division or phylum
in -mycota, subdivision or subphylum in -mycotina, class in -mycetes, and subclass in -mycetidae.
Automatically typified names not in accordance with these terminations are to be corrected.
Rec. 38E.1. The hosts should be indicated in descriptions or diagnoses of new taxa of parasitic organisms, especially
fungi.
Art. 40.5. The type of a name of a new species or infraspecific taxon of non-fossil microfungi may be an effectively
published illustration if there are technical difficulties of specimen preservation or if it is impossible to preserve
a specimen that would show the features attributed to the taxon by the author of the name (but see Art. 40
Ex. 6, which treats representations of DNA sequences as falling outside of the definition of illustrations in Art.
6.1 footnote).
Art. 41.8(b) (see also Art. 41 Ex. 26). Failure to cite the place of valid publication of a basionym or replaced
synonym, when explained by the backward shift of the starting date for some fungi, is a correctable error.
Art. 45.1 (see also Art. 45 Ex. 6 and 7 and Note 1). If a taxon originally assigned to a group not covered by
this Code is treated as belonging to the algae or fungi, any of its names need satisfy only the requirements of
the relevant other Code that the author was using for status equivalent to valid publication under this Code.
Note especially that names of Microsporidia are not covered by this Code even when Microsporidia are
considered as fungi.
SECTION 1
LIMITATION OF THE PRINCIPLE OF PRIORITY
ARTICLE F.1
NOMENCLATURAL STARTING-POINT
F.1.1. Valid publication of names for non-fossil fungi (Pre. 8) is treated as beginning at 1 May 1753 (Linnaeus, Species
plantarum, ed. 1, treated as having been published on that date; see Art. 13.1). For nomenclatural purposes, names
given to lichens apply to their fungal component. Names of Microsporidiaare governed by the International Code of
Zoological Nomenclature (see Pre. 8).
Note 1. For fossil fungi, see Art. 13.1(f).
ARTICLE F.2
PROTECTED NAMES
F.2.1. In the interest of nomenclatural stability, for organisms treated as fungi, lists of names proposed for protection
may be submitted to the General Committee, which will refer them to the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi (see Div.
III Prov. 2.2, 7.9, and 7.10) for examination by subcommittees established by that Committee in consultation with the
General Committee and appropriate international bodies. Protected names on these lists, which become part of the
Appendices of the Code (see App. IIA, III, and IV) once reviewed and approved by the Nomenclature Committee for
Fungi and the General Committee (see Art. 14.15 and Rec. 20A.1(i) ), are to be listed with their types and are treated
as conserved against any competing listed or unlisted synonyms or homonyms (including sanctioned names), although
conservation under Art. 14 overrides this protection. The lists of protected names remain open for revision through
the procedures described in this Article (see also Art. F.7.1).
ARTICLE F.3
SANCTIONED NAMES
F.3.1. Names in Uredinales, Ustilaginales, and Gasteromycetes (s. l.) adopted by Persoon (Synopsis methodica
fungorum, 1801) and names of other fungi (excluding slime moulds) adopted by Fries (Systema mycologicum, vol. 1–
3. 1821–1832, with additional Index, 1832; and Elenchus fungorum, vol. 1–2. 1828), are sanctioned.
112
F.3.2. Names sanctioned are treated as if conserved against earlier homonyms and competing synonyms. Such names,
once sanctioned, remain sanctioned even if elsewhere in the sanctioning works the sanctioning author does not
recognize them. The spelling used when the name was sanctioned is treated as conserved, except for changes
mandated by Art. 60 and F.9.
Ex. 1. Agaricus ericetorum Pers. (Observ. Mycol. 1: 50. 1796) was accepted by Fries in Systema mycologicum (1: 165. 1821), but later (Elench.
Fung. 1: 22. 1828) regarded by him as a synonym of A. umbelliferus L. (Sp. Pl.: 1175. 1753) and not included in his Index (p. 18. 1832) as an
accepted name. Nevertheless A. ericetorum Pers. : Fr. is a sanctioned name.
Ex. 2. The spelling used when the name Merulius lacrimans (Wulfen : Fr.) Schumach. : Fr. was sanctioned (Fries, Syst. Mycol. 1: 328. 1821) is
to be maintained, even though the epithet was spelled ‘lacrymans’ by Schumacher (Enum. Pl. 2: 371. 1803) and the basionym was originally
published as Boletus ‘lacrymans’ Wulfen (in Jacquin, Misc. Austriac. 2: 111. 1781).
F.3.3. A sanctioned name is illegitimate if it is a later homonym of another sanctioned name (see also Art. 53).
F.3.4. An earlier homonym of a sanctioned name is not made illegitimate by that sanctioning but is unavailable for
use; if not otherwise illegitimate, it may serve as a basionym of another name or combination based on the same type
(see also Art. 55.3).
Ex. 3. Patellaria Hoffm. (Descr. Pl. Cl. Crypt. 1: 33, 54, 55. 1789) is an earlier homonym of the sanctioned generic name Patellaria Fr. (Syst.
Mycol. 2: 158. 1822) : Fr. Hoffmann’s name is legitimate but unavailable for use. Lecanidion Endl. (Fl. Poson.: 46. 1830), based on the same
type as Patellaria Fr. : Fr., is illegitimate under Art. 52.1.
Ex. 4. Agaricus cervinus Schaeff. (Fung. Bavar. Palat. Nasc. 4: 6. 1774) is an earlier homonym of the sanctioned A. cervinus Hoffm. (Nomencl.
Fung. 1: t. 2, fig. 2. 1789) : Fr.; Schaeffer’s name is unavailable for use, but it is legitimate and may serve as basionym for combinations in
other genera. In Pluteus Fr. the combination is cited as P. cervinus (Schaeff.) P. Kumm. and has priority over the heterotypic (taxonomic)
synonym P. atricapillus (Batsch) Fayod, based on A. atricapillus Batsch (Elench. Fung.: 77. 1786).
F.3.5. When, for a taxon at a rank from family to genus, inclusive, two or more sanctioned names compete, Art.
11.3 governs the choice of the correct name (see also Art. F.3.7).
F.3.6. When, for a taxon at a rank lower than genus, two or more sanctioned names and/or two or more names with
the same final epithet and type as a sanctioned name compete, Art. 11.4 governs the choice of the correct name.
Note 1. The date of sanctioning does not affect the date of valid publication, and therefore priority (Art. 11), of a sanctioned name.
In particular, when two or more homonyms are sanctioned only the earliest of them may be used because the later one(s) are
illegitimate under Art. F.3.3.
Ex. 5. Fries (Syst. Mycol. 1: 41. 1821) accepted Agaricus flavovirens Pers. (in Hoffmann, Abbild. Schwämme 3: t. 24. 1793) : Fr. and
treated A. equestris L. (Sp. Pl.: 1173. 1753) as a synonym. He later (Elench. Fung. 1: 6. 1828) accepted A. equestris, stating “Nomen prius et
aptius certe restituendum [The prior and more apt name is certainly to be restored]”. Both names are sanctioned, but, when they are treated
as synonyms, A. equestris L. : Fr. is to be used because it has priority.
F.3.7. A name that neither is sanctioned nor has the same type and final epithet as a sanctioned name at the same
rank may not be used for a taxon that includes the type of a sanctioned name at that rank with a final epithet that is
available for the required combination (see Art. 11.4(c)).
F.3.8. Conservation (Art. 14), protection (Art. F.2), and explicit rejection (Art. 56 and F.7) override sanctioning.
F.3.9. The type of a name of a species or infraspecific taxon adopted in one of the works specified in Art. F.3.1, and
thereby sanctioned, may be selected from among the elements associated with the name in the protologue and/or
the sanctioning treatment.
Note 2. For names falling under Art. F.3.9, elements from the context of the protologue are original material and those from the
context of the sanctioning work are considered as equivalent to original material.
113
F.3.10. When a sanctioning author accepted an earlier name but did not include, even implicitly, any element
associated with its protologue, or when the protologue did not include the subsequently designated type of the
sanctioned name, the sanctioning author is considered to have created a later homonym, treated as if conserved (see
also Art. 48).
Note 3. For typification of sanctioned generic names, see Art. 10.2. Note that automatic typification under Art. 7.5 does not apply
to sanctioned names. For legitimacy of sanctioned names (or names based on them), see also Art. 6.4, 52.1, 53.1, and 55.3.
Recommendation F.3A
F.3A.1. After a sanctioned name (Art. F.3.1), either “: Fr.” or “: Pers.” (to indicate the sanctioning author Fries or Persoon) or the
abbreviation “nom. sanct.” (nomen sanctionatum) should be added in a formal citation, together with the citation of the place of
sanctioning if considered desirable. In a formal citation of a new combination based either on a sanctioned name or on the
basionym of a sanctioned name, “: Fr.” or “: Pers.” should be added within the parentheses after the author(s) of the basionym
(Art. 49.1). 1
[footnote] In this Code and its Appendices, sanctioning is indicated by “: Fr.” or “: Pers.”
1
Ex. 1. Boletus piperatus Bull. (Herb. France: t. 451, fig. 2. 1790) was adopted in Fries (Syst. Mycol. 1: 388. 1821) and was thereby sanctioned.
It can be cited as either B. piperatus Bull. : Fr. or B. piperatus Bull., nom. sanct.
Ex. 2. Agaricus compactus [unranked] sarcocephalus (Fr.) Fr. was sanctioned when adopted by Fries (Syst. Mycol. 1: 290. 1821). That status
can be indicated by citing it as either A. compactus [unranked] sarcocephalus (Fr. : Fr.) Fr. : Fr. or A. compactus [unranked] sarcocephalus (Fr.)
Fr., nom. sanct. The designation “: Fr.” is not to be added when citing its basionym A. sarcocephalus Fr. (Observ. Mycol. 1: 51. 1815), but it
can be added when citing subsequent combinations such as Psathyrella sarcocephala (Fr. : Fr.) Singer (in Lilloa 22: 468. 1949).
SECTION 2
VALID PUBLICATION AND TYPIFICATION OF NAMES
ARTICLE F.4
MISPLACED RANK-DENOTING TERMS
F.4.1. A name is not validly published if it is given to a taxon of which the rank is at the same time, contrary to Art. 5,
denoted by a misplaced term (Art. 37.6), but an exception is made for names of the subdivisions of genera termed
tribes (tribus) in Fries’s Systema mycologicum, which are treated as validly published names of unranked subdivisions
of genera.
Ex. 1. Agaricus “tribus” [unranked] Pholiota Fr. (Syst. Mycol. 1: 240. 1821), sanctioned in the same work, is the validly published basionym of
the generic name Pholiota (Fr. : Fr.) P. Kumm. (Führer Pilzk.: 22. 1871) (see Art. 41 Ex. 9).
ARTICLE F.5
REGISTRATION OF NAMES AND NOMENCLATURAL ACTS
F.5.1. In order to be validly published, nomenclatural novelties (Art. 6 Note 4) applied to organisms treated as fungi
under this Code (Pre. 8; including fossil fungi and lichen-forming fungi) and published on or after 1 January 2013 must,
in the protologue, include citation of the identifier issued for the name by a recognized repository (Art. F.5.3).
Ex. 1. The protologue of Albugo arenosa Mirzaee & Thines (in Mycol. Prog. 12: 50. 2013) complies with Art. F.5.1 because it includes citation
of “MB 564515”, an identifier issued by MycoBank, one of three recognized repositories. The decision by the Nomenclature Committee for
Fungi to appoint (Art. F.5.3) Fungal Names, Index Fungorum, and MycoBank as repositories (Redhead & Norvell in Taxon 62: 173–174. 2013)
was ratified (Art. F.5.3) by the 10th International Mycological Congress (May in Taxon 66: 484. 2017).
F.5.2. For an identifier to be issued by a recognized repository as required by Art. F.5.1, the minimum elements of
information that must be accessioned by author(s) of scientific names are the proposed name itself and those
elements required for valid publication under Art. 38.1(a) and 39.2 (validating description or diagnosis) and Art.
40.1 and 40.7 (type) or Art. 41.5 (reference to the basionym or replaced synonym). When the accessioned and
subsequently published information for a name with a given identifier differ, the published information is considered
definitive.
114
Note 1. Issuance of an identifier by a recognized repository presumes subsequent fulfilment of the requirements for valid
publication of the name (Art. 32–45, F.5.1, and F.5.2) but does not in itself constitute or guarantee valid publication.
Note 2. The words “name” and “names” are used in Art. F.5.1 and F.5.2 for names that may not yet be validly published, in which
case the definition in Art. 6.3 does not apply.
F.5.3. The Nomenclature Committee for Fungi (see Div. III Prov. 7) has the power to (a) appoint one or more localized
or decentralized, open and accessible electronic repositories to accession the information required by Art.
F.5.2 and F.5.5 and issue the identifiers required by Art. F.5.1 and F.5.4; (b) cancel such appointment at its discretion;
and (c) set aside the requirements of Art. F.5.1, F.5.2, F.5.4, and F.5.5, should the repository mechanism, or essential
parts thereof, cease to function. Decisions made by this Committee under these powers are subject to ratification by
a subsequent International Mycological Congress.
F.5.4. For purposes of priority (Art. 9.19, 9.20, and 10.5), designation of a type, on or after 1 January 2019, of the name
of an organism treated as a fungus under this Code (Pre. 8), is achieved only if an identifier issued by a recognized
repository (Art. F.5.3) is cited.
Note 3. Art. F.5.4 applies only to the designation of lectotypes (and their equivalents under Art. 10), neotypes, and epitypes; it
does not apply to the designation of a holotype when publishing the name of a new taxon, for which see Art. F.5.2.
F.5.5. For an identifier to be issued by a recognized repository as required by Art. F.5.4, the minimum elements of
information that must be accessioned by author(s) of type designations are the name being typified, the author
designating the type, and those elements required by Art. 9.21, 9.22, and 9.23.
Note 4. Issuance of an identifier by a recognized repository presumes subsequent fulfilment of the requirements for effective type
designation (Art. 7.8–7.11 and F.5.4) but does not in itself constitute a type designation.
Recommendation F.5A
F.5A.1. Authors of names of organisms treated as fungi are encouraged to (a) deposit the required elements of information for
any nomenclatural novelty in a recognized repository as soon as possible after a work is accepted for publication, so as to obtain
accession identifiers; and (b) inform the recognized repository of the complete bibliographic details upon publication of the name,
including volume and part number, page number, date of publication, and (for books) the publisher and place of publication.
F.5A.2. In addition to meeting the requirements for effective publication of choices of name (Art. 11.5 and 53.5), orthography (Art.
61.3), or gender (Art. 62.3), those publishing such choices for names of organisms treated as fungi are encouraged to record the
choice in a recognized repository (Art. F.5.3) and cite the accession identifier in the place of publication.
Art. 5, denoted by a misplaced term (Art. 37.6), but an exception is made for names of the subdivisions of genera
termed tribes (tribus) in Fries’s Systema mycologicum, which are treated as validly published names of unranked
subdivisions of genera.
Ex. 1 Agaricus “tribus” [unranked] Pholiota Fr. (Syst. Mycol. 1: 240. 1821), sanctioned in the same work, is the validly published basionym of
the generic name Pholiota (Fr. : Fr.) P. Kumm. (Führer Pilzk.: 22. 1871) (see Art. 41 Ex. 9).
SECTION 3
REJECTION OF NAMES
ARTICLE F.6
F.6.1. The name of a taxon treated as a fungus published on or after 1 January 2019 is illegitimate if it is a later
homonym of a prokaryotic or protozoan name (see also Art. 54 and Rec. 54A).
ARTICLE F.7
115
F.7.1. In the interest of nomenclatural stability, for organisms treated as fungi, lists of names proposed for rejection
may be submitted to the General Committee, which will refer them to the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi (see Div.
III Prov. 2.2, 7.9, and 7.10) for examination by subcommittees established by that Committee in consultation with the
General Committee and appropriate international bodies. Names on these lists, which become part of the Appendices
of the Code once reviewed and approved by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi and the General Committee
(see Art. 56.3 and Rec. 56A.1), are to be treated as rejected under Art. 56.1, except that they may become eligible for
use by conservation under Art. 14 (see also Art. F.2.1).
SECTION 4
NAMES OF FUNGI WITH A PLEOMORPHIC LIFE CYCLE
ARTICLE F.8
F.8.1. A name published prior to 1 January 2013 for a taxon of non-lichen-forming Ascomycota and Basidiomycota,
with the intent or implied intent of applying to or being typified by one particular morph (e.g. anamorph or
teleomorph; see Note 2), may be legitimate even if it otherwise would be illegitimate under Art. 52 on account of the
protologue including a type (as defined in Art. 52.2) referable to a different morph. If the name is otherwise legitimate,
it competes for priority (Art. 11.3 and 11.4).
Ex. 1. Penicillium brefeldianum B. O. Dodge (in Mycologia 25: 92. 1933) was described and based on a type with both the anamorph and
teleomorph (and therefore necessarily typified by the teleomorph element alone under editions of the Code prior to the Melbourne Code of
2012). The combination Eupenicillium brefeldianum (B. O. Dodge) Stolk & D. B. Scott (in Persoonia 4: 400. 1967) for the teleomorph is
legitimate. Penicillium dodgei Pitt (Gen. Penicillium: 117. 1980), typified by the anamorph in a dried culture “derived from Dodge’s type”, did
not include the teleomorphic type of P. brefeldianum and therefore it too is legitimate. However, when considered a species
of Penicillium, the correct name for all its states is P. brefeldianum.
Note 1. Except as provided in Art. F.8.1, names of fungi with mitotic asexual morphs (anamorphs) as well as a meiotic sexual morph
(teleomorph) must conform to the same provisions of this Code as all other fungi.
Note 2. Editions of the Code prior to the Melbourne Code of 2012 provided for separate names for mitotic asexual morphs
(anamorphs) of certain pleomorphic fungi and required that the name applicable to the whole fungus be typified by a meiotic
sexual morph (teleomorph). Under the current Code, however, all legitimate fungal names are treated equally for the purposes of
establishing priority, regardless of the life-history stage of the type (see also Art. F.2.1).
Ex. 2. Mycosphaerella aleuritidis (Miyake) S. H. Ou (in Sinensia 11: 183. 1940), when published as a new combination, was accompanied by a
Latin diagnosis of the newly discovered teleomorph corresponding to the anamorph on which the basionym Cercospora aleuritidis Miyake (in
Bot. Mag. (Tokyo) 26: 66. 1912) was typified. Under editions of the Code prior to the Melbourne Code of 2012, M. aleuritidis was considered
to be the name of a new species with a teleomorph type, dating from 1940, and with authorship attributed solely to Ou. Under the
current Code, the name is cited as originally published, M. aleuritidis (Miyake) S. H. Ou, and is typified by the type of the basionym.
Ex. 3. In the protologue of the teleomorph-typified Venturia acerina Plakidas ex M. E. Barr (in Canad. J. Bot. 46: 814. 1968) the anamorph-
typified Cladosporium humile Davis (in Trans. Wisconsin Acad. Sci. 19: 702. 1919) was included as a synonym. Because it was published prior
to 1 January 2013, the name V. acerina is not illegitimate, but C. humile is the earliest legitimate name at the rank of species.
Note 3. Names proposed simultaneously for separate morphs (e.g. anamorph and teleomorph) of a taxon of non-lichen-
forming Ascomycota and Basidiomycota are necessarily heterotypic and are not therefore alternative names as defined by Art.
36.3.
Ex. 4. Hypocrea dorotheae Samuels & Dodd and Trichoderma dorotheae Samuels & Dodd were simultaneously validly published (in Stud.
Mycol. 56: 112. 2006) for what the authors considered a single species with Samuels & Dodd 8657 (PDD 83839) as the holotype. Because
these names were published before 1 January 2013 (see Art. F.8.1 and Note 2), and because the authors explicitly indicated that the
name T. dorotheae was typified by the anamorphic element of PDD 83839, both names are validly published and legitimate. They are not
alternative names as defined in Art. 36.3.
SECTION 5
ORTHOGRAPHY OF NAMES
ARTICLE F.9
116
F.9.1. Epithets of fungal names derived from the generic name of an associated organism are to be spelled in
accordance with the accepted spelling of the name of that organism; other spellings are regarded as orthographical
variants to be corrected (see Art. 61).
Ex. 1. Phyllachora ‘anonicola’ Chardón (in Mycologia 32: 190. 1940) is to be corrected to P. annonicola in accordance with the accepted
spelling of Annona L.; Meliola ‘albizziae’ Hansf. & Deighton (in Mycol. Pap. 23: 26. 1948) is to be corrected to M. albiziae in accordance with
the accepted spelling of Albizia Durazz.
Ex. 2. Dimeromyces ‘corynitis’ Thaxter (in Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts 48: 157. 1912) was stated to occur “On the elytra of Corynites ruficollis Fabr.”,
but the name of the host, a species of beetle, is correctly spelled Corynetes ruficollis. The fungal name is therefore to be spelled D. corynetis.
CHAPTER H
NAMES OF HYBRIDS
ARTICLE H.1
H.1.1. Hybridity is indicated by use of the multiplication sign × or by addition of the prefix “notho-” to the term 1
denoting the rank of the taxon.

[footnote] From the Greek νόθος, nothos, meaning hybrid.
1
ARTICLE H.2
H.2.1. A hybrid between named taxa may be indicated by placing the multiplication sign × between the names of the
taxa; the whole expression is then called a hybrid formula.
117
Ex. 1. Agrostis L. × Polypogon Desf.; Agrostis stolonifera L. × Polypogon monspeliensis (L.) Desf.; Melampsora medusae Thüm.
× M. occidentalis H. S. Jacks.; Mentha aquatica L. × M. arvensis L. × M. spicata L.; Polypodium vulgare subsp. prionodes (Asch.) Rothm. × P.
vulgare L. subsp. vulgare; Salix aurita L. × S. caprea L.; Tilletia caries (DC.) Tul. & C. Tul. × T. foetida (Wallr.) Liro.
Ex. 2. Kunzea linearis (Kirk) de Lange × Kunzea robusta de Lange & Toelken or Kunzea linearis (Kirk) de Lange × K. robusta de Lange & Toelken,
but not “Kunzea linearis (Kirk) de Lange × robusta de Lange & Toelken”, which omits the generic name or its abbreviation from the second
species name contrary to Art. 23.1.
Recommendation H.2A
H.2A.1. It is usually preferable to place the names or epithets in a formula in alphabetical order. The direction of a cross may be
indicated by including the gender-denoting symbols (♀: female; ♂: male) in the formula, or by placing the female parent first. If
a non-alphabetical sequence is used, its basis should be clearly indicated.
ARTICLE H.3
H.3.1. Hybrids between representatives of two or more taxa may receive a name. For nomenclatural purposes, the
hybrid nature of a taxon is indicated by placing the multiplication sign × before the name of an intergeneric hybrid or
before the epithet in the name of an interspecific hybrid, or by prefixing the term “notho-” (optionally abbreviated “n-
”) to the term denoting the rank of the taxon (see Art. 3.2 and 4.4). All such taxa are designated nothotaxa.
Ex. 1. ×Agropogon P. Fourn. (Quatre Fl. France: 50. 1934); ×Agropogon littoralis (Sm.) C. E. Hubb. (in J. Ecol. 33: 333. 1946); Melampsora
×columbiana G. Newc. (in Mycol. Res. 104: 271. 2000); Mentha ×smithiana R. A. Graham (in Watsonia 1: 89. 1949); Polypodium
vulgare nothosubsp. [or nsubsp.] mantoniae (Rothm.) Schidlay (in Futák, Fl. Slov. 2: 225. 1966); Salix ×capreola Andersson (in Kongl. Svenska
Vetensk. Acad. Handl., n.s., 6(1): 71. 1867). (The putative or known parentage of these nothotaxa is found in Art. H.2 Ex. 1.)
H.3.2. A nothotaxon cannot be designated unless at least one parental taxon is known or can be postulated.
H.3.3. For purposes of homonymy and synonymy the multiplication sign × and the prefix “notho-” are disregarded.
Ex. 2. ×Hordelymus Bachteev & Darevsk. (in Bot. Zhurn. (Moscow & Leningrad) 35: 191. 1950) (Elymus L. × Hordeum L.) is a later homonym
of Hordelymus (Jess.) Harz (Landw. Samenk.: 1147. 1885).
Note 1. Taxa that are believed to be of hybrid origin need not be designated as nothotaxa.
Ex. 3. The true-breeding tetraploid raised from the artificial cross Digitalis grandiflora L. × D. purpurea L. may, if desired, be referred to
as D. mertonensis B. H. Buxton & C. D. Darl. (in Nature 77: 94. 1931); Triticum aestivum L. (Sp. Pl.: 85. 1753), which provides the type
of Triticum L., is treated as a species although it is not found in nature and its genome has been shown to be composed of those of several
wild species; the taxon known as Phlox divaricata subsp. laphamii (A. W. Wood) Wherry (in Morris Arbor. Monogr. 3: 41. 1955) was believed
by Levin (in Evolution 21: 92–108. 1967) to be a stabilized product of hybridization
between P. divaricata L. subsp. divaricata and P. pilosa subsp. ozarkana Wherry; Rosa canina L. (Sp. Pl.: 492. 1753), a polyploid believed to
be of ancient hybrid origin, is treated as a species.
Recommendation H.3A
H.3A.1. In named hybrids, the multiplication sign × belongs with the name or epithet but is not actually part of it, and its placement
should reflect that relation. The exact amount of space, if any, between the multiplication sign and the initial letter of the name
or epithet should depend on what best serves readability.
Note 1. The multiplication sign × in a hybrid formula is always placed between, and separate from, the names of the parents.
H.3A.2. If the multiplication sign × is not available it should be approximated by the lower-case letter “x” (not italicized).
ARTICLE H.4
118
H.4.1. When all the parent taxa can be postulated or are known, a nothotaxon is circumscribed so as to include all
individuals recognizably derived from the crossing of representatives of the stated parent taxa (i.e. not only the F but 1
subsequent filial generations and also back-crosses and combinations of these). There can thus be only one correct
name corresponding to a particular hybrid formula; this is the earliest legitimate name (Art. 6.5) at the appropriate
rank (Art. H.5), and other names corresponding to the same hybrid formula are synonyms of it (but see Art. 52 Note
4).
Ex. 1. The names Oenothera ×drawertii Renner ex Rostański (in Acta Bot. Acad. Sci. Hung. 12: 341. 1966) and O. ×wienii Renner ex Rostański
(in Fragm. Florist. Geobot. 23: 289. 1977) are both considered to apply to the hybrid O. biennis L. × O. villosa Thunb.; the types of the two
nothospecific names are known to differ by a whole gene complex; nevertheless, the earlier name is the correct name and the later name is
treated as a synonym of it.
Note 1. Variation within nothospecies and infraspecific nothotaxa may be treated according to Art. H.12 or, if appropriate,
according to the International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants.
ARTICLE H.5
H.5.1. The appropriate rank of a nothotaxon is that of the postulated or known parent taxa.
H.5.2. If the postulated or known parent taxa are at unequal ranks, the appropriate rank of the nothotaxon is the
lowest of these ranks.
Note 1. When a nothotaxon is designated by a name at a rank inappropriate to its hybrid formula, the name is incorrect in relation
to that hybrid formula but may nevertheless be correct, or may become correct later (see also Art. 52 Note 4).
Ex. 1. The combination Elymus ×laxus (Fr.) Melderis & D. C. McClint. (in Watsonia 14: 394. 1983), based on Triticum laxum Fr. (Novit. Fl. Suec.
Mant. 3: 13. 1842), was published for hybrids with the formula E. farctus subsp. boreoatlanticus (Simonet & Guin.) Melderis × E. repens (L.)
Gould, so that the combination is at a rank inappropriate to the hybrid formula. It is, however, the correct name applicable to all hybrids
between E. farctus (Viv.) Melderis and E. repens.
Ex. 2. Radcliffe-Smith published the nothospecific name Euphorbia ×cornubiensis Radcl.-Sm. (in Kew Bull. 40: 445. 1985)
for E. amygdaloides L. × E. characias subsp. wulfenii(W. D. J. Koch) Radcl.-Sm., but the correct nothospecific name for all hybrids
between E. amygdaloides and E. characias L. is E. ×martini Rouy (Ill. Pl. Eur. Rar.: 107. 1900); later, he published the appropriate
combination E. ×martini nothosubsp. cornubiensis (Radcl.-Sm.) Radcl.-Sm. (in Taxon 35: 349. 1986). However, the name E. ×cornubiensis is
potentially correct for hybrids with the formula E. amygdaloides × E. wulfenii W. D. J. Koch.
Recommendation H.5A
H.5A.1. When publishing a name of a new nothotaxon at the rank of species or below, authors should provide any available
information on the taxonomic identity, at lower ranks, of the known or postulated parents of the type of the name.
ARTICLE H.6
H.6.1. A nothogeneric name (i.e. the name at generic rank for a hybrid between representatives of two or more
genera) is a condensed formula or is equivalent to a condensed formula (but see Art. 11.9 and 54.1(c)).
H.6.2. The nothogeneric name of a bigeneric hybrid is a condensed formula in which the names adopted for the
parental genera are combined into a single word, using the first part or the whole of one, the last part or the whole of
the other (but not the whole of both) and, optionally, a connecting vowel. The use of a hyphen instead of or in addition
to a connecting vowel is treated as an error to be corrected by deletion of the hyphen.
Ex. 1. ×Agropogon P. Fourn. (Quatre Fl. France: 50. 1934) (Agrostis L. × Polypogon Desf.); ×Gymnanacamptis Asch. & Graebn. (Syn. Mitteleur.
Fl. 3: 854. 1907) (Anacamptis Rich. × Gymnadenia R. Br.); ×Cupressocyparis Dallim. (Hand-List Conif., Roy. Bot. Gard., Kew, ed. 4: 37. 1938)
(Chamaecyparis Spach × Cupressus L.); ×Seleniphyllum G. D. Rowley (in Backeberg, Cactaceae 6: 3557. 1962) (Epiphyllum Haw.
× Selenicereus (A. Berger) Britton & Rose).
Ex. 2. ×Amarcrinum Coutts (in Gard. Chron., ser. 3, 78: 411. 1925) is correct for Amaryllis L. × Crinum L., not “×Crindonna”. The latter formula
was proposed by Ragionieri (in Gard. Chron., ser. 3, 69: 32. 1921) for the same nothogenus, but was formed from the generic name adopted
119
for one parent (Crinum) and a synonym (Belladonna Sweet) of the generic name adopted for the other (Amaryllis). Because it is contrary
to Art. H.6, it is not validly published under Art. 32.1(c).
Ex. 3. The name ×Leucadenia Schltr. (in Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni Veg. 16: 290. 1919) is correct for Leucorchis E. Mey. × Gymnadenia R. Br.,
but if the generic name Pseudorchis Ség. is adopted instead of Leucorchis, ×Pseudadenia P. F. Hunt (in Orchid Rev. 79: 141. 1971) is correct.
Ex. 4. Boivin (in Naturaliste Canad. 94: 526. 1967) published ×Maltea for what he considered to be the intergeneric hybrid Phippsia (Trin.)
R. Br. × Puccinellia Parl. Because this is not a condensed formula, the name cannot be used for that intergeneric hybrid, for which the correct
name is ×Pucciphippsia Tzvelev (in Novosti Sist. Vyssh. Rast. 8: 76. 1971). MalteaB. Boivin is nevertheless a validly published generic name,
because Boivin provided a Latin description and designated a type, and may be correct if its type is not treated as belonging to a nothogenus.
Ex. 5. The nothogeneric name ×Anthematricaria Asch. (in Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 9: (99). 1892), proposed for hybrids with the
parentage Anthemis L. × Matricaria L., was originally published as ‘Anthe-Matricaria’; the nothogeneric name ×Brassocattleya Rolfe (in Gard.
Chron., ser. 3, 5: 438. 1889), proposed for hybrids with the parentage Brassavola R. Br. × CattleyaLindl., was originally published as ‘Brasso-
Cattleya’.
H.6.3. The nothogeneric name of an intergeneric hybrid derived from four or more genera is formed from the name
of a person to which is added the termination -ara; no such name may exceed eight syllables. Such a name is
equivalent to a condensed formula.
Ex. 6. ×Beallara Moir (in Orchid Rev. 78(929): New Orch. Hybr. [1, 3]. 1970) (Brassia R. Br. × Cochlioda Lindl. × Miltonia Lindl.
× Odontoglossum Kunth); ×Cogniauxara Garay & H. R. Sweet (see Art. H.8 Ex. 3) (Arachnis Blume × Euanthe Schltr. × Renanthera Lour.
× Vanda W. Jones ex R. Br.).
H.6.4. The nothogeneric name of a trigeneric hybrid is either (a) a condensed formula in which the three names
adopted for the parental genera are combined into a single word not exceeding eight syllables, using the whole or first
part of one, followed by the whole or any part of another, followed by the whole or last part of the third (but not the
whole of all three) and, optionally, one or two connecting vowels, or (b) a name formed like that of a nothogenus
derived from four or more genera, i.e. from a personal name to which is added the termination -ara.
Ex. 7. ×Sophrolaeliocattleya Hurst (in J. Roy. Hort. Soc. 21: 468. 1898) (Cattleya Lindl. × Laelia Lindl. × Sophronitis Lindl.); ×Rodrettiopsis Moir
(in Orchid Rev. 84: ix. 1976) (Comparettia Poepp. & Endl. × Ionopsis Kunth × Rodriguezia Ruiz & Pav.); ×Holttumara Holttum (see Art. H.8 Ex.
3) (Arachnis Blume × Renanthera Lour. × Vanda W. Jones ex R. Br.).
Recommendation H.6A
H.6A.1. When a nothogeneric name is formed from the name of a person by adding the termination -ara, that person should
preferably be a collector, grower, or student of the group.
ARTICLE H.7
H.7.1. The name of a nothotaxon that is a hybrid between subdivisions of a genus is a combination of an epithet, which
is a condensed formula formed in the same way as a nothogeneric name (Art. H.6.2–H.6.4), with the name of the
genus.
Ex. 1. Ptilostemon nothosect. Platon Greuter (in Boissiera 22: 159. 1973), comprising hybrids between P. sect. Platyrhaphium Greuter
and P. Cass. sect. Ptilostemon; P. nothosect. PliniaGreuter (in Boissiera 22: 158. 1973), comprising hybrids between P. sect. Cassinia Greuter
and P. sect. Platyrhaphium.
ARTICLE H.8
H.8.1. When the name or the epithet in the name of a nothotaxon is a condensed formula (Art. H.6 and H.7), the
parental names used in its formation must be those that are correct for the particular circumscription, position, and
rank accepted for the parental taxa.
120
Ex. 1. If the genus Triticum L. is interpreted on taxonomic grounds as including Triticum (s. str.) and Agropyron Gaertn., and the
genus Hordeum L. as including Hordeum (s. str.) and Elymus L., then hybrids between Agropyron and Elymus as well as between Triticum (s.
str.) and Hordeum (s. str.) are placed in the same nothogenus, ×Tritordeum Asch. & Graebn. (Syn. Mitteleur. Fl. 2(1): 748. 1902). If,
however, Agropyron is treated as a genus separate from Triticum, hybrids between Agropyron and Hordeum (s. str. or s. l.) are placed in the
nothogenus ×Agrohordeum E. G. Camus ex A. Camus (in Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. (Paris) 33: 537. 1927). Similarly, if Elymus is treated as a genus
separate from Hordeum, hybrids between Elymus and Triticum (s. str. or s. l.) are placed in the nothogenus ×Elymotriticum P. Fourn. (Quatre
Fl. France: 88. 1935). If both Agropyron and Elymus are given generic rank, hybrids between them are placed in the
nothogenus ×Agroelymus E. G. Camus ex A. Camus (in Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. (Paris) 33: 538. 1927); ×Tritordeum is then restricted to hybrids
between Hordeum (s. str.) and Triticum (s. str.), and hybrids between Elymus and Hordeum are placed in ×Elyhordeum Mansf. ex Tsitsin &
Petrova (in Züchter 25: 164. 1955), replacing ×Hordelymus Bachteev & Darevsk. (in Bot. Zhurn. (Moscow & Leningrad) 35: 191. 1950)
non Hordelymus (Jess.) Harz (Landw. Samenk.: 1147. 1885).
Ex. 2. When Orchis fuchsii Druce was renamed Dactylorhiza fuchsii (Druce) Soó, the name for its hybrid with Coeloglossum viride (L.)
Hartm., ×Orchicoeloglossum mixtum Asch. & Graebn. (Syn. Mitteleur. Fl. 3: 847. 1907), had to be changed to ×Dactyloglossum mixtum (Asch.
& Graebn.) Rauschert (in Feddes Repert. 79: 413. 1969).
H.8.2. Names ending in -ara for nothogenera, which are equivalent to condensed formulae (Art. H.6.3 and H.6.4(b)),
are applicable only to hybrids that are accepted taxonomically as derived from the parents named.
Ex. 3. If Euanthe Schltr. is recognized as a distinct genus, hybrids simultaneously involving its only species, E. sanderiana (Rchb.) Schltr., and
the three genera Arachnis Blume, Renanthera Lour., and Vanda W. Jones ex R. Br. must be placed in ×Cogniauxara Garay & H. R. Sweet (in
Bot. Mus. Leafl. 21: 156. 1966); if, on the other hand, E. sanderiana is included in Vanda, the same hybrids are placed in ×Holttumara Holttum
(in Malayan Orchid Rev. 5: 75. 1958) (Arachnis × Renanthera × Vanda).
ARTICLE H.9
H.9.1. In order to be validly published, the name of a nothogenus or a nothotaxon at the rank of a subdivision of a
genus (Art. H.6 and H.7) must be effectively published (Art. 29–31) with a statement of the names of the parent genera
or subdivisions of genera, but no description or diagnosis is necessary, whether in Latin, English, or any other language.
Ex. 1. Validly published names: ×Philageria Mast. (in Gard. Chron. 1872: 358. 1872), published with a statement of parentage, Lapageria Ruiz
& Pav. × Philesia Comm. ex Juss.; Eryngium nothosect. Alpestria Burdet & Miège (pro sect.) (in Candollea 23: 116. 1968), published with a
statement of parentage, E. sect. Alpina H. Wolff × E. sect. Campestria H. Wolff; ×Agrohordeum E. G. Camus ex A. Camus (in Bull. Mus. Hist.
Nat. (Paris) 33: 537. 1927), published with a statement of parentage, Agropyron Gaertn. × Hordeum L.; and its later
synonym ×Hordeopyron Simonet (in Compt. Rend. Hebd. Séances Acad. Sci. 201: 1212. 1935, ‘Hordeopyrum’; see Art. 32.2), published with
an identical statement of parentage.
Note 1. Because the names of nothogenera and nothotaxa at the rank of a subdivision of a genus are condensed formulae or
equivalent to such, they do not have types.
Ex. 2. The name ×Ericalluna Krüssm. (in Deutsche Baumschule 12: 154. 1960) was published for plants that were thought to be the product
of the cross Calluna vulgaris (L.) Hull × Erica cinerea L. If it is considered that these plants are not hybrids but variants of E. cinerea, the
name ×Ericalluna Krüssm. remains available for use should known or postulated hybrids of Calluna Salisb. × Erica L. be produced.
Ex. 3. ×Arabidobrassica Gleba & Fr. Hoffm. (in Naturwissenschaften 66: 548. 1979), a nothogeneric name that was validly published with a
statement of parentage for the result of somatic hybridization by protoplast fusion of Arabidopsis thaliana (L.) Heynh. with Brassica
campestris L., is also available for intergeneric hybrids resulting from normal crosses between Arabidopsis Heynh. and Brassica L., should any
be produced.
Note 2. Names published merely in anticipation of the existence of a hybrid are not validly published under Art. 36.1(a).
ARTICLE H.10
H.10.1. Names of nothotaxa at the rank of species or below must conform with the provisions (a) of the Code outside
of Chapter H applicable to names at the same ranks (see Art. 32.4) and (b) in Art. H.3. Infringements of Art. H.3.1 are
treated as errors to be corrected (see also Art. 11.9).
Ex. 1. The nothospecific name Melampsora ×columbiana G. Newc. (in Mycol. Res. 104: 271. 2000) was validly published, with a Latin
description and designation of a holotype, for the hybrid between M. medusae Thüm. and M. occidentalis H. S. Jacks.
121
Note 1. Taxa previously published as species or infraspecific taxa that are later considered to be nothotaxa may be indicated as
such, without change of rank, in conformity with Art. 3 and 4 and by the application of Art. 50 (which also operates in the reverse
direction).
H.10.2. The following are considered to be formulae and not true epithets: designations consisting of the epithets of
the names of the parents combined in unaltered form by a hyphen, or with only the termination of one epithet
changed, or consisting of the specific epithet of the name of one parent combined with the generic name of the other
(with or without change of termination).
Ex. 2. The designation “Potentilla atrosanguinea-pedata” published by Maund (in Bot. Gard. 5: No. 385, t. 97. 1833) is considered to be a
formula meaning P. atrosanguinea Lodd. ex D. Don × P. pedata Nestl.
Ex. 3. “Verbascum nigro-lychnitis” (Schiede, Pl. Hybr.: 40. 1825) is considered to be a formula meaning V. lychnitis L. × V. nigrum L.; the correct
binary name for this hybrid is V. ×schiedeanum W. D. J. Koch (Syn. Fl. Germ. Helv., ed. 2: 592. 1844).
Ex. 4. In Acaena ×anserovina Orchard (in Trans. Roy. Soc. South Australia 93: 104. 1969) (A. anserinifolia (J. R. Forst. & G. Forst.) J. Armstr.
× A. ovina A. Cunn.) the epithet (contrary to Rec. H.10A) combines the first part of the first and the whole of the second epithet in the names
of the parental species; because more than the termination of the first epithet is omitted, anserovina is a true epithet.
Ex. 5. In Micromeria ×benthamineolens Svent. (Index Seminum Hortus Acclim. Pl. Arautap.: 48. 1969) (M. benthamii Webb & Berthel.
× M. pineolens Svent.) the epithet (contrary to Rec. H.10A) combines the first part of the first and the second part of the second epithet in
the names of the parental species; because neither epithet is unaltered, benthamineolens is a true epithet.
Note 2. Because the name of a nothotaxon at the rank of species or below has a type, statements of parentage play a secondary
part in determining the application of the name.
Ex. 6. Quercus ×deamii Trel. (in Mem. Natl. Acad. Sci. 20: 14. 1924) when described was considered as the cross Q. alba L.
× Q. muehlenbergii Engelm. However, progeny grown from acorns of the tree from which the type originated led Bartlett to conclude that
the parents were in fact Q. macrocarpa Michx. and Q. muehlenbergii. If this conclusion is accepted, the name Q. ×deamii applies
to Q. macrocarpa × Q. muehlenbergii, and not to Q. alba × Q. muehlenbergii.
Recommendation H.10A
H.10A.1. In forming epithets for names of nothotaxa at the rank of species and below, authors should avoid combining parts of
the epithets of the names of the parents.
Recommendation H.10B
H.10B.1. When contemplating the publication of names for hybrids between named infraspecific taxa, authors should carefully
consider whether these names are really needed, bearing in mind that formulae, though more cumbersome, are more informative.
ARTICLE H.11
H.11.1. The name of a nothospecies of which the postulated or known parent species belong to different genera is a
combination of a nothogeneric name with a nothospecific epithet.
Ex. 1. ×Heucherella tiarelloides (Lemoine & É. Lemoine) H. R. Wehrh. is considered to have originated from the cross between a garden hybrid
of Heuchera L. and Tiarella cordifolia L. (see Stearn in Bot. Mag. 165: ad t. 31. 1948). Its basionym, Heuchera ×tiarelloides Lemoine &
É. Lemoine (in Catalogue (Lemoine) 182: 3. 1912), is therefore incorrect.
H.11.2. The final epithet in the name of an infraspecific nothotaxon of which the postulated or known parental taxa
are assigned to different species may be placed under the correct name of the corresponding nothospecies (but
see Rec. H.10B).
Ex. 2. Mentha ×piperita L. nothosubsp. piperita (M. aquatica L. × M. spicata L. subsp. spicata); M. ×piperita nothosubsp. pyramidalis (Ten.)
Harley (in Kew Bull. 37: 604. 1983) (M. aquatica L. × M. spicata subsp. tomentosa (Briq.) Harley).
122
ARTICLE H.12
H.12.1. Subordinate taxa within nothospecies may be recognized without an obligation to specify parent taxa at the
subordinate rank. In this case non-hybrid infraspecific categories at the appropriate rank are used.
Ex. 1. Mentha ×piperita f. hirsuta Sole; Populus ×canadensis var. serotina (R. Hartig) Rehder and P. ×canadensis var. marilandica (Poir.)
Rehder (see also Art. H.4 Note 1).
Note 1. When there is no statement of parentage, Art. H.4 and H.5, governing the circumscription and appropriate rank of hybrid
taxa, do not apply.
Note 2. Art. H.11.2 and H.12.1 cannot both be applied simultaneously at the same infraspecific rank.
H.12.2. Names published at the rank of nothomorph are treated as having been published as names of varieties
1
(see Art. 50).

[footnote] Editions of the Code prior to the Sydney Code of 1983 permitted only one rank of infraspecific nothotaxa under provisions equivalent
1
to Art. H.12. That rank was equivalent to variety and the category was termed “nothomorph”.
123
DIVISION III
PROVISIONS FOR GOVERNANCE OF THE CODE
PROVISION 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR GOVERNANCE OF THE CODE
1.1. The International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants is governed by its users, who are represented
by members of a Nomenclature Section of an International Botanical Congress acting under the authority of that
Congress and, between such Congresses, by the Permanent Nomenclature Committees and any Special-purpose
Committees.
1.2. The Code may be modified only by action of a plenary session of an International Botanical Congress on a
resolution moved by the Nomenclature Section of that Congress.
1.3. In the event that there should not be another International Botanical Congress, authority for the International
Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants shall be transferred to the International Union of Biological Sciences
or to an organization at that time corresponding to it. The General Committee is empowered to define the machinery
to achieve this.
1.4. The Code is provided with logistical and financial support by the International Association for Plant Taxonomy
(IAPT), which liaises with the Permanent Nomenclature Committees and the Bureau of Nomenclature. The
nomenclatural publications required by Div. III are published as specified by the General Committee (currently in the
1
journal Taxon, except for proposals to amend the Code relating solely to names of organisms treated as fungi and
proposals to protect or reject names under Art. F.2 or F.7, submitted as lists, which are published in the journal IMA
Fungus).
[footnote] The nomenclatural publications required by Div. III include proposals to conserve, protect, or reject names or suppress works,
1
requests for decisions, reports of Permanent Nomenclature Committees and Special-purpose Committees, proposals to amend the Code and
a synopsis of these proposals, notices of institutional votes, and the results of the preliminary guiding vote and Congress-approved decisions
and elections of the Nomenclature Section or Fungal Nomenclature Session.
PROVISION 2
PROPOSALS TO AMEND THE CODE
2.1. Proposals concerning the Preamble, Divisions I–III, and the Glossary are submitted by publication (see Prov. 1.4)
to the Nomenclature Section of an International Botanical Congress.
2.2. Proposals concerning Appendices I–VII, i.e. proposals to conserve, protect, or reject names (Art. 14.12, F.2.1, 56.2,
and F.7.1), proposals to suppress works (Art. 34.1), and requests for decisions (Art. 38.4 and 53.4), are submitted by
publication (see Prov. 1.4) to the General Committee.
2.3. At least three years prior to an International Botanical Congress, the Rapporteur-général publishes an
announcement that proposals to amend the Codemay be published between specified dates.
2.4. Approximately six months prior to an International Botanical Congress, a synopsis of proposals to amend
the Code is published. It is compiled by the Rapporteur-général and Vice-rapporteur, includes their comments on the
proposals, and may include opinions of the Permanent Nomenclature Committees on certain proposals.
124
2.5. A guiding vote on proposals to amend the Code is organized by the Bureau of Nomenclature in conjunction with
the International Association for Plant Taxonomy (IAPT) to coincide with the publication of the synopsis of proposals.
No accumulation or transfer of votes is permissible in this vote. The following persons are entitled to vote:
(a) individual members of the IAPT;
(b) authors of proposals to amend the Code;
(c) members of the Permanent Nomenclature Committees.
2.6. The purpose of the guiding vote is to advise the Nomenclature Section of the International Botanical Congress of
the level of support for proposals to amend the Code. The results of the vote and any Permanent Nomenclature
Committee opinions are provided at the Nomenclature Section (see also Prov. 5.5).
PROVISION 3
INSTITUTIONAL VOTES
3.1. Prior to an International Botanical Congress, the Committee on Institutional Votes updates the list of institutions
from the previous Congress and allocates to each institution one to seven votes (see Prov. 5.9(b)). The list must be
approved by the General Committee and published (see Prov. 1.4) prior to the Congress. No single institution, even in
the wide sense of the term (e.g. mycological and botanical divisions together), is entitled to more than seven votes.
3.2. Prior to an International Botanical Congress, any institution desiring to vote in the Nomenclature Section and not
listed as having been allocated any votes in the previous Nomenclature Section should notify the Rapporteur-général
of its wish to be allocated one or more votes and provide relevant information regarding its level of taxonomic activity
(e.g. number of active staff, size of collections, current publications). An institution allocated one or more votes in the
previous Nomenclature Section and desiring to alter its number of votes may similarly notify the Rapporteur-général.
3.3. An institution wishing to exercise its vote(s), as allocated in the published list (Prov. 3.1), must provide its official
written authorization to be presented at the Nomenclature Section by its delegate (Prov. 5.9(b)).
3.4. A delegate who is a member of an institution that has not previously applied for, or been allocated, votes may
apply in person for one institutional vote at the Nomenclature Section.
PROVISION 4
NOMENCLATURE SECTION
4.1. The Nomenclature Section is part of an International Botanical Congress and meets prior to a plenary session of
the Congress.
4.2. Registration for the Nomenclature Section is through the International Botanical Congress. Only registered
members of the Nomenclature Section are entitled to vote at the Nomenclature Section.
4.3. The Nomenclature Section has the following functions:

(a) approves the previous Code as published as a basis for discussion by the Section;
(b) decides on proposals to amend the Code;
(c) appoints ad hoc committees to consider specific questions and report back to the Section;
125
(d) authorizes Special-purpose Committees, with a specific mandate, to be appointed by the General Committee and
report back to the Nomenclature Section of the next Congress;
(e) elects the ordinary members of the Permanent Nomenclature Committees;
(f) elects the Rapporteur-général for the next Congress;
(g) receives the reports of the Permanent Nomenclature Committees and Special-purpose Committees;
(h) decides on the recommendations of the General Committee.
4.4. The decisions and appointments of the Nomenclature Section become binding upon their acceptance by a
subsequent plenary session of the same International Botanical Congress acting on a resolution moved by the
Nomenclature Section (see Prov. 1.2).
4.5. The Bureau of Nomenclature of the International Botanical Congress comprises the following officers: President
of the Nomenclature Section; up to five Vice-presidents; the Rapporteur-général; the Vice-rapporteur; the Recorder.
The Bureau of Nomenclature defines the sequence and timing of debates; appoints Tellers to collect and count voting
cards in the event of a card vote (see Prov. 5.10); and advises the President on procedural matters.
4.6. The President of the Nomenclature Section is elected by the General Committee prior to the Congress. The
President chairs the debates and is responsible for their harmony and timely conclusion; recognizes and silences
speakers; may end a debate; decides on procedural matters not covered in Div. III; and is authorized to move a
resolution on behalf of the Nomenclature Section at a plenary session of the same International Botanical Congress
that the decisions and appointments of the Nomenclature Section be approved.
4.7. The Vice-presidents are appointed by the Bureau of Nomenclature, either in advance of the International
Botanical Congress or from those present at the Nomenclature Section. A Vice-president serves in place of the
President if and when requested.
4.8. The Rapporteur-général is elected by the previous International Botanical Congress. The Rapporteur-général is
responsible for: presentation of nomenclature proposals to the subsequent Congress; general duties in connection
with the editing of the Code resulting from that Congress; and deposition in the IAPT nomenclature archives of
unpublished relevant material.
4.9. The Vice-rapporteur is appointed by the Rapporteur-général and approved by the General Committee no later
than three years prior to the Congress. The Vice-rapporteur assists and, if necessary, serves in place of the Rapporteur-
général.
4.10. The Recorder is appointed by the Organizing Committee of the International Botanical Congress in consultation
with the Rapporteur-général. The Recorder is responsible for all local facilities needed by the Nomenclature Section,
such as the venue and its equipment, and in particular for the detailed recording of the proceedings of the Section and
for facilitating the voting.
4.11. The Nominating Committee comprises members who should preferably be unavailable to serve on the
Permanent Nomenclature Committees or as Rapporteur-général. They are proposed by the President of the
Nomenclature Section, in consultation with the other members of the Bureau of Nomenclature, and are elected by
the Nomenclature Section.
126
4.12. The Nominating Committee is charged with preparing lists of candidates to serve on the Permanent
Nomenclature Committees (with the exception of the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi; see Prov. 4.13), in
consultation with the current secretaries of those committees, and to propose the Rapporteur-général for the next
International Botanical Congress. The nominations of the Nominating Committee are subject to approval by the
Nomenclature Section.
4.13. The Nominating Committee of the Fungal Nomenclature Session (Prov. 8.1) is charged with preparing lists of
candidates to serve on the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi, in consultation with the current Secretary of that
Committee, and to propose the Secretary of the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau for the next International Mycological
Congress. The nominations of the Nominating Committee of the Fungal Nomenclature Session are subject to approval
by the Fungal Nomenclature Session.
Recommendation 1. The Nominating Committee of the Nomenclature Section should represent the different taxonomic groups
covered by the Code and both Nominating Committees, so far as is practicable, should be geographically balanced.
PROVISION 5
PROCEDURE AND VOTING AT THE NOMENCLATURE SECTION
5.1. A qualified majority (at least 60%) of votes cast is required for the following decisions:
(a) accepting a proposal to amend the Code;
(b) referring items to the Editorial Committee;
(c) accepting a motion to end discussion and proceed to a vote (to “call the question”);
(d) accepting a motion to set a time limit for a debate;
(e) rejecting a singled-out recommendation of the General Committee (see Prov. 5.3);
(f) rejecting one or more recommendations of the General Committee on conservation, protection, or rejection of
names, suppression of works, or binding decisions.
5.2. A simple majority (more than 50%) of votes cast is required for all other decisions, including the following:
(a) electing the Nominating Committee for the Nomenclature Section;
(b) accepting the Code that arose from the previous International Botanical Congress as the basis for discussion at the
Nomenclature Section;
(c) choosing between two alternative proposals;
(d) accepting an amendment to a proposal;
(e) establishing an ad hoc committee;
(f) establishing and referring items to a Special-purpose Committee;
(g) accepting recommendations of the General Committee not included in Prov. 5.1(e) or (f);
(h) approving the nominations made by the Nominating Committee.
5.3. When a report of the General Committee contains more than one recommendation, the Nomenclature Section
may vote separately on an individual recommendation if such a procedure is proposed by a member of the Section,
supported (seconded) by five other members (see Prov. 5.7), and approved by a simple majority (more than 50%) of
the Section.
127
5.4. When a vote to reject a General Committee recommendation achieves the required majority (Prov. 5.1(e) or (f)),
that recommendation is cancelled and the matter is referred back to the General Committee. Retention or rejection
of a name or suppression of a work is no longer authorized (Art. 14.15, 56.3, and 34.2).
5.5. Any proposal to amend the Code that receives 75% or more “no” votes in the preliminary guiding vote is
automatically rejected at the Nomenclature Section unless a proposal to discuss it is moved by a member of the Section
and supported (seconded) by five other members.
5.6. Any proposal to amend the Code that concerns only Examples (excluding voted Examples) or the Glossary is
automatically referred to the Editorial Committee unless a proposal to discuss it is moved by a member of the Section
and supported (seconded) by five other members (but see Prov. 5.5).
5.7. A new proposal to amend the Code (i.e. one not previously published) or an amendment to a proposal to amend
the Code may be introduced at the Nomenclature Section by a member of the Section only when supported
(seconded) by five other members.
5.8. A member of the Nomenclature Section may propose a friendly amendment to a proposal to amend the Code; if
accepted by the original proposer(s), such an amendment does not require the support of other members (seconders).
5.9. There are two kinds of votes at the Nomenclature Section:

(a) Personal votes. Each member of the Section has one personal vote. No accumulation or transfer of personal votes
is permissible.
(b) Institutional votes (see Prov. 3). An institution may authorize in writing any member of the Section as a delegate
to carry its votes.
No single person will be allowed more than 15 votes, including personal vote and institutional votes.
5.10. A card vote requires members of the Nomenclature Section to deposit anonymous cards printed to indicate the
kind and number of votes, which are counted by the Tellers (see Prov. 4.5). A card vote may be conducted when the
required majority cannot be detected by other means or may be requested in advance of the vote by at least five
members.
PROVISION 6
AFTER AN INTERNATIONAL BOTANICAL CONGRESS
6.1. Certain publications, which may be electronic or printed or both, appear as soon as feasible after an International
Botanical Congress, not necessarily in this sequence:
(a) the Congress-approved decisions and elections of the Nomenclature Section including the results (if not published
prior to the Congress) of the preliminary guiding vote;
(b) the announcement of Special-purpose Committees and their membership;
(c) the new edition of the Code, including the Glossary;
(d) the Appendices of the Code (App. I–VII);
(e) a transcript of the Nomenclature Section.
PROVISION 7
PERMANENT NOMENCLATURE COMMITTEES
128
7.1. There are nine Permanent Nomenclature Committees, including five specialist committees (clauses (e)–(i)):
(a) General Committee;
(b) Editorial Committee;
(c) Committee on Institutional Votes;
(d) Registration Committee;
(e) Nomenclature Committee for Vascular Plants;
(f) Nomenclature Committee for Bryophytes;
(g) Nomenclature Committee for Fungi;
(h) Nomenclature Committee for Algae;
(i) Nomenclature Committee for Fossils.
Membership
7.2. Members of the Permanent Nomenclature Committees are elected by an International Botanical Congress (except
where indicated otherwise). The committees have power to elect officers as desired, to fill vacancies, and to establish
temporary subcommittees in consultation with the General Committee.
7.3. The General Committee has, in addition to its ordinary (elected) members, the following ex-officio members: the
secretaries of the five specialist committees (Prov. 7.1(e)–(i)), the Rapporteur-général, the Vice-rapporteur, and the
President and Secretary-general of the International Association for Plant Taxonomy.
7.4. The Editorial Committee comprises individuals who should preferably have been present at the Nomenclature
Section of the relevant International Botanical Congress and includes at least one specialist in each of vascular plants,
bryophytes, fungi, algae, and fossils and at least one individual nominated by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi
who attended the Fungal Nomenclature Session of the relevant International Mycological Congress; the Rapporteur-
général and Vice-rapporteur of the relevant International Botanical Congress serve as Chair and Secretary,
respectively, of the Editorial Committee.
7.5. The Committee on Institutional Votes comprises six members, each to represent a different continent, plus the
Rapporteur-général, who serves as its chair.
7.6. The Registration Committee includes at least five members appointed by the Nomenclature Section selected, in
part, to ensure geographical balance, and representatives nominated by:
(a) the other Permanent Nomenclature Committees;
(b) prospective or functioning nomenclatural repositories;
(c) the International Association for Plant Taxonomy;
(d) the International Association of Bryologists;
(e) the International Federation of Palynological Societies;
(f) the International Mycological Association;
(g) the International Organisation of Palaeobotany;
(h) the International Phycological Society.
129
7.7. Each specialist committee includes the Rapporteur-général, the Vice-rapporteur, and the Secretary of the General
Committee as non-voting ex-officio members.
7.8. The Nomenclature Committee for Fungi is elected by an International Mycological Congress and includes the
Secretary and the Deputy Secretary of the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau (Prov. 8.1) as non-voting ex-officio members
if they are not already members of the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi.
Recommendation 1. Each committee should, so far as is practicable, be geographically and gender balanced.
Functions
7.9. The General Committee is charged with receiving proposals to conserve, protect, or reject names, proposals to
suppress works, and requests for decisions (Art. 14.12, F.2.1, 56.2, F.7.1, 34.1, 38.4, and 53.4) and for referring these
proposals or requests to the specialist committee(s) concerned (receipt and referral of proposals and requests are
automatic upon their publication). The General Committee is also charged with considering recommendations of the
specialist committees and either approving or overturning those recommendations or referring them back to the
specialist committees for further consideration. The General Committee may also communicate an international
standard format in addition to, or as a successor to, Portable Document Format (PDF) for effective publication of
electronic material (Art. 29.3) and is empowered to ratify a list of institutional votes drawn up by the Committee on
Institutional Votes (see Prov. 3.1).
7.10. Each of the five specialist committees examines proposals to conserve or reject names, proposals to suppress
works, and requests for decisions (Art. 14.12, 56.2, 34.1, 38.4, and 53.4) referred to them by the General Committee,
to which they then submit their recommendations. They may also submit opinions on proposals to amend the Code to
the Bureau of Nomenclature. The Nomenclature Committee for Fungi has a mandate under Art. F.2.1 and F.7.1with
respect to lists of protected or rejected names proposed for approval and under Art. F.5.3 with respect to repositories
for fungal names.
7.11. The Editorial Committee is charged with the preparation and publication of the Code in conformity with the
decisions approved by the relevant International Botanical Congress. It is empowered to make any editorial
modification not affecting the meaning of the provisions concerned, e.g. to change the wording of any Article, Note,
or Recommendation and to avoid duplication, to add or remove non-voted Examples, and to place Articles, Notes,
Recommendations, and Chapters of the Code in the most convenient place, while retaining the previous numbering
insofar as possible.
7.12. The Committee on Institutional Votes maintains a list of institutions and their allocated votes for the upcoming
International Botanical Congress (see Prov. 3.1).
7.13. The Registration Committee is charged with assisting the design and implementation of repositories for
nomenclatural novelties and/or any nomenclatural act, monitoring the functioning of existing repositories, and
advising the General Committee on relevant matters.
Procedural rules
7.14. A specialist committee, provided that a qualified majority (at least 60%) of its members supports or opposes a
proposal, may make any of the following recommendations to the General Committee: conserve or not conserve a
name; reject or not reject a name; suppress or not suppress a publication; and for names of organisms treated as fungi,
protect or not protect names on a list. In the case of binding decisions on valid publication (Art. 38.4) and homonymy
(Art. 53.4), the qualified majority decides whether or not a binding decision should be recommended, then a simple
majority (more than 50%) decides between the two alternatives: i.e. treat a name as validly published or not validly
published; treat names as homonyms or not homonyms. If a specialist committee is unable to make a recommendation
130
after voting at least twice, the proposal is referred to the General Committee without a recommendation from the
specialist committee.
7.15. The General Committee may approve or overturn a recommendation of a specialist committee provided that a
qualified majority (at least 60%) of the General Committee members supports or opposes the recommendation. In
either case, the General Committee makes its own recommendation, which is subject to the decision of a later
International Botanical Congress (see also Art. 14.15, 34.2 and 56.3). If the required majority is not achieved after
voting at least twice, the General Committee is considered to have recommended against the proposal or against
making a binding decision. The General Committee may also decide to refer the matter back to the specialist
committee for further consideration.
Recommendation 2. The General Committee and the specialist committees should publish their recommendations at least
annually.
PROVISION 8
PROPOSALS TO AMEND THE CODE RELATING SOLELY
TO NAMES OF ORGANISMS TREATED AS FUNGI
8.1. For proposals relating to the content of Chapter F, which brings together the provisions of this Code that deal
solely with names of organisms treated as fungi (but excluding any other content), exactly the same procedures
outlined in Prov. 1–7 are to be followed except that in Prov. 1, 2, 4, and 5 mentions of International Botanical
Congress, Nomenclature Section [of that Congress], Bureau of Nomenclature, and Nominating Committee are to be
replaced by International Mycological Congress, Fungal Nomenclature Session [of that Congress], Fungal
Nomenclature Bureau, and Nominating Committee of the Fungal Nomenclature Session, respectively; and officers
such as President, Rapporteur-général, and Vice-rapporteur (these specifically renamed Chair, Secretary, and Deputy
Secretary, respectively) are to be understood as members of the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau rather than the Bureau
of Nomenclature (specifically in Prov. 1.1, 1.2, 1.4 footnote, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 2.6, 4.2, 4.4, 4.5, 4.7, 4.8, 4.10, 4.11, 5.2, 5.5,
5.6, 5.7, and 5.8; but not in Prov. 5.3 and 5.4; and the following clauses do not apply: Prov. 5.1(e) and (f)and Prov.
5.2(g)).
8.2. The General Committee in consultation with the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi is responsible for deciding
which proposals relate solely to names of organisms treated as fungi.
8.3. A guiding vote on proposals to amend the Code relating solely to names of organisms treated as fungi is organized
by the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau in conjunction with the International Mycological Association (IMA) to coincide
with the publication of the synopsis of proposals. No accumulation or transfer of votes is permissible in this vote. The
following persons are entitled to vote:
(a) individual members of the IMA;
(b) individual members of organizations affiliated with the IMA;
(c) individual members of other organizations approved by Fungal Nomenclature Bureau;
(d) authors of proposals to amend the Code relating solely to names of organisms treated as fungi;
(e) members of the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi.
8.4. The Fungal Nomenclature Session is part of an International Mycological Congress and meets prior to a plenary
session of the Congress at a time and with a duration to be determined by consultation between the International
Mycological Association and the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau.
8.5. The Fungal Nomenclature Session has the following functions:

131
(a) approves the previous Code if amended at the last International Mycological Congress (in the circumstance where
there has not been an International Botanical Congress since the last International Mycological Congress) as a
basis for discussion by the Session, and otherwise utilizes the most recent published Code;
(b) decides on proposals to amend the Code relating solely to organisms treated as fungi;
(c) appoints ad hoc committees to consider specific questions and report back to the Session;
(d) authorizes Special-purpose Committees, with a specific mandate, to deal with matters relating solely to names of
organisms treated as fungi, to be appointed by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi in consultation with the
General Committee and report back to the Fungal Nomenclature Session of the next International Mycological
Congress;
(e) elects the ordinary members of the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi;
(f) elects the Secretary of the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau for the next International Mycological Congress;
(g) receives reports of Special-purpose Committees dealing with matters relating solely to names of organisms treated
as fungi.
8.6. The Chair of the Fungal Nomenclature Session is elected by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi in consultation
with the General Committee prior to the International Mycological Congress. The Chair chairs the debates and is
responsible for their harmony and timely conclusion; recognizes and silences speakers; may end a debate; decides on
procedural matters not covered in Div. III; and is authorized to move a resolution on behalf of the Fungal Nomenclature
Session at a plenary session of the same International Mycological Congress that the decisions and appointments of
the Fungal Nomenclature Session with respect to matters relating solely to names of organisms treated as fungi be
approved.
8.7. In the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau, the Deputy Secretary is appointed by the Secretary and approved by the
Nomenclature Committee for Fungi in consultation with the General Committee no later than three years prior to the
International Mycological Congress. The Deputy Secretary assists and, if necessary, serves in place of the Secretary.
8.8. The Rapporteur-général elected for the International Botanical Congress that follows the International
Mycological Congress, or an alternate appointed by that Rapporteur-général, is invited to attend the Fungal
Nomenclature Session as a non-voting advisor to the Session.
8.9. When proposals relating solely to names of organisms treated as fungi are dealt with in a Fungal Nomenclature
Session, there are no institutional votes, and therefore Prov. 3, 7.5, and 7.12 do not apply. Each member of the Session
has one personal vote. No accumulation or transfer of personal votes is permissible.
8.10. The decisions taken at the Fungal Nomenclature Session of an International Mycological Congress relating solely
to names of organisms treated as fungi, once accepted by a subsequent plenary session of the same Congress, are
binding on the Nomenclature Section convened at the subsequent International Botanical Congress. Such decisions
will, however, be open for any editorial adjustments deemed necessary by the Editorial Committee.
8.11. Certain publications, which may be electronic or printed or both, appear as soon as feasible after an International
Mycological Congress, not necessarily in this sequence:
(a) the Congress-approved decisions and elections of the Fungal Nomenclature Session including the results of the
preliminary guiding vote;
(b) the announcement of Special-purpose Committees and their membership;
(c) a transcript of the Fungal Nomenclature Session.
132
8.12. Where modifications to the Code have been authorized by a plenary session of an International Mycological
Congress on a resolution moved by the Fungal Nomenclature Session of that Congress, such modifications should be
inserted into any online version of the Code in such a manner that it is clear that the modifications originated from
that International Mycological Congress.
GLOSSARY
DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED IN THIS CODE
The particular usage of a few other words, not defined in the Code, is also indicated; these are italicized in the list
below and are accompanied by an editorial explanation of their use.
admixture. [Not defined] – something mixed in, especially a minor ingredient; used for components of a gathering that represent
a taxon or taxa other than that intended by the collector and, because the admixture is disregarded, do not prevent the
gathering, or part thereof, from being a type specimen (Art. 8.2).
affirmation. The adoption in a publication that did not use a largely mechanical method of selection of a choice of type that had
been made using such a method and that had not in the interval been superseded (Art. 10.5). Choices of type that have been
so affirmed can no longer be superseded (see also superseded).
alternative names. Two or more different names based on the same type accepted simultaneously for the same taxon by the
same author and accepted as alternatives by that author in the same publication (Art. 36.3) (see also nomen alternativum).
analysis. A figure or group of figures, commonly separate from the main illustration of the organism (though usually on the same
page or plate), showing details aiding identification, with or without a separate caption (Art. 38.9; see also Art. 38.10).
anamorph. A mitotic asexual morph in pleomorphic fungi (Art. F.8 Notes 1 and 2).
ascription. The direct association of the name of a person or persons with a new name or description or diagnosis of a taxon (Art.
46.3).
attributed. [Not defined] – regarded as belonging to or produced by a person or a taxon, e.g. a name attributed to its author(s) as
determined by Art. 46, a feature attributed to a taxon (Art. 40.5), or a specimen attributed to a taxon (Art. 26 Ex. 3 and 6).
author citation. A statement of the name(s) of the author(s) responsible for the establishment or introduction of a name; when
used, it is appended to that name (Art. 46–50).
automatic typification. (1) Typification of a nomenclaturally superfluous and illegitimate name by the type of the name (the
replaced synonym) that itself or the epithet of which ought to have been adopted under the rules (Art. 7.5). (2) Typification
of the name of a taxon above the rank of genus by the type of the generic name on which it is based (Art. 10.9 and 10.10).
autonym. The automatically established name of a subdivision of a genus or of an infraspecific taxon that includes the type of the
adopted, legitimate name of the genus or species, respectively. Its final epithet repeats unaltered the generic name or specific
epithet and is not followed by an author citation (Art. 22.1 and 26.1). Autonyms need not be effectively published nor comply
with the provisions for valid publication (Art. 32.1), they are automatically established, at any given rank, by the first instance
of valid publication at that rank of a name of a subdivision of a genus under a legitimate generic name or of a name of an
133
infraspecific taxon under a legitimate species name (Art. 22.3 and 26.3). [Autonyms are not allowed under illegitimate names
of genera or species (Art. 22.5 and 27.2); nor do they exist above the rank of genus.]
available. [Not defined] – applied to an epithet in a name (Art. 11.4, 11.5, and F.3.7), the type of which falls within the
circumscription of the taxon under consideration and where the use of the epithet would not be contrary to the rules (see
also available name).
available name. A name published under the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature with a status equivalent to that of a
validly published name under the International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants (Art. 45 Ex. 1 footnote).
avowed substitute. See replacement name.
basionym. The legitimate, previously published name on which a new combination or name at new rank is based. The basionym
does not itself have a basionym; it provides the final epithet, name, or stem of the new combination or name at new rank
(Art. 6.10) (see also name at new rank, new combination).
binary combination (binomial). A generic name combined with a specific epithet to form a species name (Art. 23.1) (see
also combination).
binary designation. [Not defined] – an apparent binary combination that has not been validly published (see also Art. 6.3) (see
also designation).
binding decision. A recommendation made by the General Committee and ratified by an International Botanical Congress on (1)
whether or not a name is validly published (Art. 38.4) or (2) whether or not names are to be treated as homonyms (Art. 53.4).
Binding decisions are listed in (1) App. VI or (2) App. VII.
binomial. See binary combination.
combinatio nova (comb. nov.). See new combination.
combination. A name of a taxon below the rank of genus, consisting of the name of a genus combined with one or two epithets
(Art. 6.7).
compound. A name or epithet that combines elements derived from two or more Greek or Latin words; a regular compound is
one in which a noun or adjective in a non-final position appears as a modified stem (Art. 60.10) (see also pseudocompound).
confusingly similar names. Orthographically similar names at the rank of genus or below that are likely to be confused and are to
be treated as homonyms if heterotypic (Art. 53.2 and 53.3) or as orthographical variants if homotypic (Art. 61.5). Binding
decisions may be made on whether or not the former are to be treated as homonyms (Art. 53.4 and App. VII) (see
also homonym).
conserved name (nomen conservandum). (1) A name of a family, genus, or species, or in certain cases a name of a subdivision of
a genus or of an infraspecific taxon, declared legitimate, even though it may have been illegitimate when published, and
taking precedence over other specified names even if it lacks priority (Art. 14.1–14.7, 14.10, App. II, III, and IV). (2) A name for
which the type, orthography, or gender has been fixed by the conservation process (Art. 14.8, 14.9, 14.11, App. III, and IV).
correct name. The name that must be adopted in accordance with the rules for a taxon with a particular circumscription, position,
and rank (Art. 6.6, 11.1, 11.3, and 11.4).
cultivar. The basic independent category used for organisms in agriculture, forestry, and horticulture and defined and regulated
in the International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants (Art. 28 Notes 2, 4, and 5).
date of name. The date of valid publication of a name (Art. 33.1).
descriptio generico-specifica. A single description simultaneously validating the names of a genus and its single species (Art. 38.5).
description. [Not defined] – a published statement of a feature or features of an individual taxon; a description (or a diagnosis) is
required for valid publication of a name of a new taxon (Art. 38.1(a) and 38.3); a validating description need not be diagnostic
(Art. 38 Note 2).
descriptive name. A name of a taxon above the rank of family not formed from a generic name (Art. 16.1(b)).
designation. [Not defined] – the term used for what appears to be a name but that (1) has not been validly published and hence
is not a name in the sense of the Code (Art. 6.3) or (2) is not to be regarded as a name (Art. 20.4 and 23.6) (see also type
designation).
diagnosis. A statement of that which in the opinion of its author distinguishes a taxon from other taxa (Art. 38.2); a diagnosis (or
a description) is required for valid publication of a name of a new taxon (Art. 38.1(a)).
duplicate. Part of a single gathering of a single species or infraspecific taxon (Art. 8.3 footnote) (see also gathering).
effective publication. Publication in accordance with Art. 29–31 (Art. 6.1).
134
element (as applied to typification). [Not defined] – applied to a specimen or illustration eligible as a type; also applied to a species
name considered as the full equivalent of its type for the purposes of designation or citation of the type of a name of a genus
or subdivision of a genus (Art. 10.1).
epithet. [Not defined] – used for the words in a combination other than the generic name and any rank-denoting term; hyphenated
words are equivalent to a single word (Art. 6.7, 11.4, 21.1, 23.1, and 24.1; see also Art. H.10.2) (see also final epithet).
epitype. A specimen or illustration selected to serve as an interpretative type when the holotype, lectotype, or previously
designated neotype, or all original material associated with a validly published name, cannot be identified for the purpose of
the precise application of the name to a taxon (Art. 9.9).
ex-type (ex typo), ex-holotype (ex holotypo), ex-isotype (ex isotypo), etc. A living isolate obtained from the type of a name when
this is a culture permanently preserved in a metabolically inactive state (Rec. 8B.2).
final epithet. The last epithet in sequence in any particular combination, whether at the rank of a subdivision of a genus, or of
species, or of an infraspecific taxon (Art. 6.10 footnote).
forma specialis. See special form.
fossil-taxon. A taxon (diatom taxa excepted) the name of which is based on a fossil type (Art. 1.2 and 13.3).
gathering. A collection presumed to be of a single taxon made by the same collector(s) at the same time from a single locality (Art.
8.2 footnote; see also Art. 8 Note 1).
heterotypic synonym (taxonomic synonym). A name based on a type different from that of another name referring to the same
taxon (Art. 14.4); indicated by the symbol “=” in the Appendices of the Code; termed a “subjective synonym” in
the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature (Art. 14.4 footnote).
holotype. The one specimen or illustration indicated as the nomenclatural type by the author(s) of a name of a new species or
infraspecific taxon or, when no type was indicated, used by the author(s) when preparing the account of the new taxon (Art.
9.1 and Note 1; see also Art. 9.2).
homonym. A name spelled exactly like another name published for a taxon at the same rank based on a different type (Art. 53.1).
Note: names of subdivisions of the same genus or of infraspecific taxa within the same species that are based on different
types and have the same final epithet are homonyms, even if they differ in rank (Art. 53.3), because the rank-denoting term
is not part of the name (Art. 21 Note 1 and Art. 24 Note 2) (see also confusingly similar names).
homotypic synonym (nomenclatural synonym). A name based on the same type as that of another name (Art. 14.4); indicated by
the symbol “≡” in the Appendices of the Code; termed an “objective synonym” in the International Code of Zoological
Nomenclature (Art. 14.4 footnote).
hybrid formula. An expression consisting of the names of the parent taxa of a hybrid with a multiplication sign × placed between
them (Art. H.2.1).
identifier. [Not defined] – (1) a unique number or string of characters issued by a recognized nomenclatural repository as required
by Art. F.5.1 and F.5.4 for the purpose of registering nomenclatural novelties and certain nomenclatural acts. (2) A unique
number or string of characters applied to a specimen, e.g. an accession number or a barcode.
illegitimate name. A validly published name that is not in accordance with specified rules (Art. 6.4), principally those on superfluity
(Art. 52) and homonymy (Art. 53 and 54).
illustration. A work of art or a photograph depicting a feature or features of an organism, e.g. a drawing, a picture of a herbarium
specimen, or a scanning electron micrograph (Art. 6.1 footnote).
improper Latin termination. A termination of a name or epithet not in accordance with the termination mandated by
the Code (Art. 16.3, 18.4, 19.7, and 32.2).
indelible autograph. Handwritten material reproduced by some mechanical or graphic process (such as lithography, offset, or
metallic etching) (Art. 30.6).
indirect reference. A clear (if cryptic) indication, by an author citation or in some other way, that a previously and effectively
published description or diagnosis applies (Art. 38.14) or that a basionym or replaced synonym exists (Art. 41.3).
informal usage. Usage of the same or equivalent rank-denoting term at more than one non-consecutive position in the taxonomic
sequence. Note: names involved in such usage are validly published but unranked (Art. 37.8).
infraspecific. [Not defined] – below the rank of species.
isoepitype. A duplicate specimen of the epitype (Art. 9.4 footnote).
isolectotype. A duplicate specimen of the lectotype (Art. 9.4 footnote).
135
isoneotype. A duplicate specimen of the neotype (Art. 9.4 footnote).

isonym. The same name based on the same type, published independently at different times perhaps by different authors. Note:
only the earliest isonym has nomenclatural status (Art. 6 Note 2; but see Art. 14.14).
isosyntype. A duplicate specimen of a syntype (Art. 9.4 footnote).
isotype. A duplicate specimen of the holotype (Art. 9.5).
lectotype. One specimen or illustration designated from the original material as the nomenclatural type, in conformity with Art.
9.11 and 9.12, if the name was published without a holotype, or if the holotype is lost or destroyed, or if a type is found to
belong to more than one taxon (Art. 9.3).
legitimate name. A validly published name that is in accordance with the rules, i.e. one that is not illegitimate (Art. 6.5) (see
also illegitimate name).
misplaced term. A rank-denoting term used contrary to the relative order specified in the Code (Art. 18.2, 19.2, 37.6, and 37 Note
1).
monotypic genus. A genus for which a single binomial is validly published (Art. 38.6) (see also unispecific).
name. A name that has been validly published, whether it is legitimate or illegitimate (Art. 6.3) (see also designation).
name at new rank (status novus). A new name based on a legitimate, previously published name at a different rank, which is its
basionym and which provides the final epithet, name, or stem of the name at new rank (Art. 6.10 and 7.3) (see
also basionym, new combination).
name of a new taxon. A name validly published in its own right, i.e. one not based on a previously validly published name; it is not
a new combination, a name at new rank (status novus), or a replacement name (nomen novum) (Art. 6.9).
neotype. A specimen or illustration selected to serve as nomenclatural type if no original material is extant or as long as it is
missing (Art. 9.8 and 9.13; see also Art. 9.16 and 9.19).
new combination (combinatio nova). A new name for a taxon below the rank of genus based on a legitimate, previously published
name, which is its basionym and which provides the final epithet of the new combination (Art. 6.10 and 7.3) (see
also basionym, name at new rank).
new name. [Not defined] – a name as it appears in the place of its valid publication (see also nomenclatural novelty).
nomen alternativum (nom. alt.). One of eight family names, each regularly formed from a generic name in accordance with Art.
18.1, allowed as an alternative (Art. 18.6) to one of the family names of long usage treated as validly published under Art.
18.5. In addition, one subfamily name of long usage, Papilionoideae, may be used as an alternative to Faboideae (Art. 19.8)
(see also alternative names).
nomen conservandum (nom. cons.). See conserved name.
nomen novum (nom. nov.). See replacement name.
nomen nudum (nom. nud.). A designation of a new taxon published without a description or diagnosis or reference to a
description or diagnosis (Art. 38 Ex. 1, Rec. 50B).
nomen rejiciendum (nom. rej.). A name rejected in favour of a name conserved under Art. 14 or a name ruled as rejected
under Art. 56 (App. IIA, III, IV, and V) (see also rejected name).
nomen sanctionatum (nom. sanct.). See sanctioned name.
nomen utique rejiciendum (suppressed name). A name ruled as rejected under Art. 56. Note: it and all names for which it is a
basionym are not to be used (see App. V).
nomenclatural act. An act requiring effective publication that results in a nomenclatural novelty or affects aspects of names such
as typification (Art. 7.10, 7.11, and F.5.4), priority (Art. 11.5 and 53.5), orthography (Art. 61.3), or gender (Art. 62.3) (Art. 34.1
footnote) (see also nomenclatural novelty).
nomenclatural novelty. Any or all of the categories: name of a new taxon, new combination, name at new rank, and replacement
name (Art. 6 Note 4; see also Art. 6 Note 5) (see also new name).
nomenclatural synonym. See homotypic synonym.
nomenclatural type. The element to which the name of a taxon is permanently attached (Art. 7.2).
non-fossil taxon. A taxon the name of which is based on a non-fossil type (Art. 13.3).
nothogenus. A hybrid genus (Art. 3.2).
136
nothomorph. A term formerly denoting the only rank of infraspecific nothotaxa, equivalent to variety, that was permitted in
editions of the Code prior to the Sydney Codeof 1983. Names published as nothomorphs are now treated as having been
published as names of varieties (Art. H.12.2 and footnote).
nothospecies. A hybrid species (Art. 3.2).
nothotaxon. A hybrid taxon (Art. 3.2 and H.3.1).
objective synonym. See homotypic synonym.
opera utique oppressa. See suppressed works.
organism. As used in this Code, the term is applied only to organisms traditionally studied by botanists, mycologists, and
phycologists (Pre. 2 footnote, Pre. 8).
original material. The set of specimens and illustrations from which a lectotype may be chosen (see Art. 9.4, Notes 2 and 3, Art.
F.3.9, and Note 2 for details), or the holotype (see Art. 9.1).
original spelling. The spelling used when a name of a new taxon or a replacement name was validly published (Art. 60.2).
orthographical variants. Various spelling, compounding, and inflectional forms of a name or its final epithet when only one
nomenclatural type is involved (Art. 61.2).
page reference. Citation of the page or pages on which the basionym or replaced synonym was validly published or on which the
protologue appears (Art. 41 Note 1).
paratype. Any specimen cited in the protologue that is neither the holotype nor an isotype, nor one of the syntypes if in the
protologue two or more specimens were simultaneously designated as types (Art. 9.7).
position. [Not defined] – used to denote the placement of a taxon relative to other taxa in a classification, regardless of rank
(Principle IV, Art. 6.6, and 11.1).
priority. A right to precedence established by the date of valid publication of a legitimate name (Art. 11) or of an earlier homonym
(Art. 53 Note 2), or by the date of designation of a type (Art. 7.10, 7.11, and F.5.4).
pro synonymo (pro syn., as synonym). A citation indicating that a designation is not validly published because it was merely cited
as a synonym (Art. 36.1(b) and Rec. 50A).
protected name. The name of an organism treated as a fungus listed (in App. IIA, III, and IV) with its type and treated as conserved
against any competing listed or unlisted synonyms or homonyms (including sanctioned names), although conservation
under Art. 14 overrides this protection (Art. F.2.1).
protologue. Everything associated with a name at its valid publication, e.g. description, diagnosis, illustrations, references,
synonymy, geographical data, citation of specimens, discussion, and comments (Art. 6.13 footnote).
provisional name. A designation proposed in anticipation of the future acceptance of the taxon concerned, or of a particular
circumscription, position, or rank of the taxon (Art. 36.1(a)).
pseudocompound. A name or epithet that combines elements derived from two or more Greek or Latin words and in which a
noun or adjective in a non-final position appears as a word with a case ending, not as a modified stem (Rec. 60G.1(b)) (see
also compound).
rank. [Not defined] – used for the relative position of a taxon in the taxonomic hierarchy (Art. 2.1). For suprageneric names
published on or after 1 January 1887, the rank is indicated by the termination of the name (see Art. 37.2 and footnote). For
names published on or after 1 January 1953, a clear indication of the rank is required for valid publication (Art. 37.1).
rejected name. A name ruled as not to be used, either by formal action under Art. 14, 56, or F.7 overriding other provisions of
the Code (see nomen rejiciendum, nomen utique rejiciendum) or because it was nomenclaturally superfluous when
published (Art. 52) or a later homonym (Art. 53 and 54). A name treated as rejected under Art. F.7 may become eligible for
use by conservation under Art. 14.
replaced synonym. The legitimate or illegitimate, previously published name on which a replacement name (nomen novum) is
based. The replaced synonym, when legitimate, does not provide the final epithet, name, or stem of the replacement name
(Art. 6.11).
replacement name (nomen novum). A new name published as an explicit substitute (avowed substitute) for a legitimate or
illegitimate, previously published name, which is its replaced synonym and which, when legitimate, does not provide the final
epithet, name, or stem of the replacement name (Art. 6.11 and 7.4; for names not explicitly proposed as substitutes see Art.
6.12 and 6.13).
sanctioned name (nomen sanctionatum). The name of a fungus treated as if conserved against earlier homonyms and competing
synonyms, through acceptance in a sanctioning work (Art. F.3.1).
137
special form (forma specialis). A taxon of parasites, especially fungi, characterized from a physiological standpoint but scarcely or
not at all from a morphological standpoint, the nomenclature of which is not governed by this Code (Art. 4 Note 4).
specimen. A gathering, or part of a gathering, of a single species or infraspecific taxon, disregarding admixtures, mounted either
as a single preparation or as more than one preparation with the parts clearly labelled as being part of the same specimen or
bearing a single, original label in common (Art. 8.2 and 8.3). A specimen may not be a living organism or an active culture (Art.
8.4).
status. (1) Nomenclatural standing with regard to effective publication, valid publication, legitimacy, and correctness (Art.
6 and 12.1). (2) Rank of a taxon within the taxonomic hierarchy (see name at new rank). (3) Category of nomenclatural novelty
(Art. 6.14).
status novus (stat. nov.). See name at new rank.
subdivision of a family. Any taxon at a rank between family and genus (Art. 4 Note 2).
subdivision of a genus. Any taxon at a rank between genus and species (Art. 4 Note 2).
subjective synonym. See heterotypic synonym.
superfluous name. A name that, when published, was applied to a taxon that, as circumscribed by its author, definitely included
the type of a name that ought to have been adopted, or of which the epithet ought to have been adopted, under the rules
(Art. 52.1). A superfluous name is illegitimate except as provided by Art. 52.4 or unless conserved (Art. 14), protected (Art.
F.2), or sanctioned (Art. F.3).
superseded. [Not defined] – used for a designation of a type that is not followed but is replaced by a subsequent designation of a
different type under the provisions of Art. 9.15, 9.18, 9.19, 10.2, or 10.5.
suppressed name. See nomen utique rejiciendum.
suppressed works (opera utique oppressa). Works, ruled as suppressed, in which new names at specified ranks are not validly
published and no nomenclatural act within the work associated with any name at the specified ranks is effective (Art.
34.1 and App. I).
synonym. [Not defined] – one of two or more names that apply to the same taxon (see heterotypic synonym, homotypic
synonym).
syntype. Any specimen cited in the protologue when there is no holotype, or any of two or more specimens simultaneously
designated in the protologue as types (Art. 9.6).
tautonym. A binary designation in which the specific epithet exactly repeats the generic name (Art. 23.4).
taxon (taxa). A taxonomic group at any rank (Art. 1.1).
taxonomic synonym. See heterotypic synonym.
teleomorph. A meiotic sexual morph in pleomorphic fungi (Art. F.8 Notes 1 and 2).
type. See nomenclatural type.
type designation. [Not defined] – an explicit statement that establishes the type of a name; either (1) a holotype (Art. 9.1) or
syntype(s) (Art. 9.6) designated in the protologue or (2) a lectotype, neotype, or epitype subsequently designated under the
provisions of Art. 9–10 and in accordance with Art. 7.8–7.11 and F.5.4.
unispecific. [Not defined] – with a single species.
validate. [Not defined] – to make validly published; used in the context of a description or diagnosis, or illustration, effecting valid
publication of a name (e.g. Art. 38 Ex. 21, 43.3, and 46 Ex. 7).
validly published. Effectively published and in accordance with the relevant provisions of Art. 32–45, F.4, F.5.1, F.5.2, and H.9 (Art.
6.2) (see designation, name).
voted Example. An Example, denoted by an asterisk in the Code, accepted by an International Botanical Congress in order to
govern nomenclatural practice when the corresponding Article is open to divergent interpretation or does not adequately
cover the matter. A voted Example is therefore comparable to a rule, as contrasted with other Examples provided by the
Editorial Committee solely for illustrative purposes (Art. 7 *Ex. 16 footnote).
138
INDEX OF SCIENTIFIC NAMES
This index includes the scientific names appearing in the Preamble and Division II of the Code. The references are not
to pages but to the Articles, Examples, Notes, Preamble, and Recommendations, as follows: Ex. = Example; *Ex. = voted
Example; F. = Chapter F (fungi); H. = Chapter H (hybrids); N. = Note; Pre. = Preamble. Arabic numerals indicate an
Article (e.g. 60); Arabic numerals immediately followed by an upper-case letter indicate a Recommendation (e.g. 19A).
Where more than one Article or Recommendation is cited, these are separated by a semicolon; in the few cases where
a main paragraph in an Article is cited in addition to a Note or Example(s), these are separated by a comma (e.g. F.8.1,
N.3 = Art. F.8.1 in addition to Art. F.8 Note 3). Continuous sequences are indicated by a dash (e.g. H.6.Ex.6–7);
interrupted sequences are indicated by a plus sign (e.g. 23.Ex.5+7). Double quotation marks indicate designations (i.e.
not validly published names, e.g. “Anthopogon”); single quotation marks indicate spellings other than the correct
spelling of a name (e.g. Bougainvillea Comm. ex Juss., ‘Buginvillaea’). Pre-Linnaean designations are excluded. Authors
are cited after validly published names at the rank of genus or below, even when names are cited without authors in
the main text of the Code.
A sub-index of epithets appearing in the Code other than in combinations is provided in the Subject index, under
Epithets (see p. xxx).
Abies alcoquiana Veitch ex Lindl..............................60.Ex.28

– balsamea (L.) Mill.......................................23.Ex.5+7
– “koreana var. yuanbaoshanensis”............................30.Ex.10
“Abrus Abrus”..........................................10.Ex.10
Abutilon glaziovii K. Schum.................................60.Ex.29
Acacia bancroftiorum Maiden, ‘Bancrofti’.......................60.Ex.25
– brandegeeana I. M. Johnst., ‘brandegeana’......................60.Ex.31
– nelsonii Maslin........................................6.Ex.18
139
– nelsonii Saff...........................................6.Ex.18
Acaena anserinifolia (J. R. Forst. & G. Forst.) J. Armstr...............H.10.Ex.4
– ×anserovina Orchard....................................H.10.Ex.4
– ovina A. Cunn.........................................H.10.Ex.4
Acanthoeca W. N. Ellis....................................53.*Ex.10
Acanthoica Lohmann.....................................53.*Ex.10
Acanthopanax (Decne. & Planch.) Miq..........................23.Ex.8
– trifoliatus (L.) Voss, ‘trifoliatum’............................23.Ex.8
Acer pseudoplatanus L., ‘pseudo-platanus’.......................60.Ex.40
Aceras R. Br............................................62.Ex.6
Achyranthes L...........................................10.Ex.11
– aspera L.............................................10.Ex.11
– repens L.............................................10.Ex.11
Acidosasa B. M. Yang.....................................55.Ex.6
Acidosasa C. D. Chu & C. S. Chao............................55.Ex.6
“Acisanthera Acisanthera”.................................10.Ex.10
Acrospelion Bess.........................................46.Ex.39
Adansonia grandidieri Baill..................................9.Ex.4
Adenanthera bicolor Moon..................................7.Ex.9
Adiantum capillus-veneris L.................................23.Ex.1
Adonis L..............................................62.*Ex.1
Aesculus L.............................................11.Ex.6
Aextoxicaceae..........................................18.Ex.1
Aextoxicon Ruiz & Pav.....................................18.Ex.1
Agaricaceae...........................................37.Ex.6
Agaricus L.............................................41.Ex.9
– “tribus” [unranked] Hypholoma Fr. : Fr.........................41.Ex.9
– “tribus” [unranked] Pholiota Fr. : Fr...........................F.4.Ex.1
– atricapillus Batsch......................................F.3.Ex.4
– cervinus Hoffm.........................................F.3.Ex.4
– cervinus Schaeff........................................F.3.Ex.4
– cinereus Schaeff. : Fr.....................................23.Ex.17
– compactus [unranked] sarcocephalus (Fr. : Fr.) Fr. : Fr...............F.3A.Ex.2
– equestris L. : Fr.........................................F.3.Ex.5
– ericetorum Pers.........................................F.3.Ex.1
– fascicularis Huds. : Fr....................................41.Ex.9
– flavovirens Pers........................................F.3.Ex.5
– rhacodes Vittad., ‘rachodes’...............................60.*Ex.2
– sarcocephalus Fr........................................F.3A.Ex.2
– umbelliferus L.........................................F.3.Ex.1
Agathophyllum Juss.......................................55.Ex.1
– neesianum Blume.......................................55.Ex.1
Agati Adans............................................62.Ex.9
×Agroelymus E. G. Camus ex A. Camus.........................11.Ex.41; H.8.Ex.1
×Agrohordeum E. G. Camus ex A. Camus........................H.8.Ex.1; H.9.Ex.1
×Agropogon P. Fourn......................................H.3.Ex.1; H.6.Ex.1
– littoralis (Sm.) C. E. Hubb.................................H.3.Ex.1
Agropyron Gaertn........................................11.Ex.41; H.8.Ex.1; H.9.Ex.1
– desertorum f. pilosiusculum Melderis..........................41.Ex.18
– – var. pilosiusculum (Melderis) H. L. Yang......................41.Ex.18
– japonicum Honda.......................................27.Ex.1; 55.Ex.3
– japonicum (Miq.) P. Candargy..............................27.Ex.1; 55.Ex.3
– – var. hackelianum Honda.................................27.Ex.1; 55.Ex.3
– kamoji Ohwi..........................................60.Ex.21
Agrostis L.............................................23.Ex.18; H.2.Ex.1; H.6.Ex.1
– alpina Scop...........................................23.Ex.18
– radiata L.............................................52.Ex.14
– stolonifera L..........................................H.2.Ex.1
Aikinia brunonis Wall......................................46.Ex.3
Albizia Durazz..........................................F.9.Ex.1
Albugo arenosa Mirzaee & Thines.............................F.5.Ex.1
Alcicornopteris hallei J. Walton..............................1.Ex.1
Aletris punicea Labill......................................52.Ex.11
Alexitoxicon St.-Lag.......................................51.Ex.1
Algae................................................13.1(e)
Alkanna Tausch.........................................11.Ex.18
– matthioli Tausch.......................................11.Ex.18
140
– tinctoria Tausch........................................11.Ex.18
Allium antonii-bolosii P. Palau, ‘a.-bolosii’.......................60.Ex.49
Aloe perfoliata L.........................................24.Ex.6
– – var. vera L...........................................6.Ex.12; 24.Ex.6
– vera (L.) Burm. f........................................6.Ex.12
Alpinia L..............................................55.Ex.4
Alpinia Roxb...........................................55.Ex.4
– galanga (L.) Willd.......................................55.Ex.4
– languas J. F. Gmel.......................................55.Ex.4
Alsophila kalbreyeri Baker..................................6.Ex.1; 41.Ex.24
– podophylla Baker.......................................6.Ex.1
Alternaria Nees : Fr.......................................14.Ex.13
Alyssum flahaultianum Emb..................................39.Ex.3
Alyxia ceylanica Wight....................................60.Ex.1
Amaranthaceae.........................................10.Ex.11
Amaranthus L...........................................60.Ex.1
– caudatus L............................................10.Ex.11
×Amarcrinum Coutts......................................H.6.Ex.2
Amaryllidaceae.........................................53.Ex.1
Amaryllis L............................................H.6.Ex.2
Amblyanthera Blume......................................53.Ex.7
Amblyanthera Müll. Arg....................................53.Ex.7
Amerimnon brownei Jacq...................................6.Ex.3
Ammanthus Boiss. & Heldr..................................6.Ex.10
Amorphophallus campanulatus Decne...........................48.Ex.2
Ampelopsis cantoniensis var. grossedentata Hand.-Mazz...............41.Ex.19
Amphiprora Ehrenb.......................................45.Ex.1
Amphitecna Miers........................................14.Ex.7
Amygdalaceae..........................................19.Ex.6
Amygdaloideae.........................................19.Ex.6
Amygdalus L............................................19.Ex.6
Anacamptis Rich.........................................H.6.Ex.1
Anacyclus L............................................10.Ex.1
– valentinus L...........................................10.Ex.1
Anaeromyces polycephalus (Y. C. Chen & al.) Fliegerová & al...........29.Ex.1
Anagallis arvensis subsp. caerulea Hartm.........................53.Ex.15
– – var. caerulea (L.) Gouan.................................53.Ex.15
– caerulea L............................................53.Ex.15
– caerulea Schreb........................................53.Ex.15
“Ananas Ananas”........................................10.Ex.10
Anchusa lanata L.........................................24.Ex.9
Andreaea angustata......................................46.Ex.44
Andromeda polifolia L.....................................60.Ex.38
Andropogon L...........................................62.Ex.4
– distachyos L., ‘distachyon’.................................23.Ex.9
– drummondii Steud.......................................46.Ex.27
– fasciculatus L..........................................52.Ex.14
– martini Roxb..........................................41.Ex.5
– sorghum subsp. halepensis (L.) Hack..........................53.Ex.14
– – var. halepensis (L.) Hack.................................53.Ex.14
Anemone alpina L........................................9.Ex.6
– ×elegans Decne........................................11.Ex.40
– hupehensis (Lemoine & É. Lemoine) Lemoine & É. Lemoine..........11.Ex.40
– ×hybrida Paxton.......................................11.Ex.40
– vitifolia Buch.-Ham. ex DC.................................11.Ex.40
Angiospermae..........................................16.Ex.2
Annona L..............................................F.9.Ex.1
“Anonymos”...........................................20.Ex.9
– “aquatica”...........................................35.Ex.3
Anoplon Rchb...........................................46.Ex.26
×Anthematricaria Asch., ‘Anthe-Matricaria’......................H.6.Ex.5
Anthemis L.............................................H.6.Ex.5
– subg. Ammanthus (Boiss. & Heldr.) R. Fern......................6.Ex.10
– valentina L............................................10.Ex.1
Anthocerotae...........................................13.1(c)
Anthophyta............................................16.Ex.2
“Anthopogon”..........................................20.N.2
141
Anthyllis sect. Aspalathoides DC...............................41.Ex.1; 49.Ex.2

– barba-jovis L., ‘Barba jovis’...............................23.Ex.20
Antidesmatinae.........................................19A.Ex.1
Antidesmatoideae........................................19A.Ex.1
Antirrhinum spurium L.....................................11.Ex.8
Apiaceae..............................................18.5
Apios Fabr.............................................52.Ex.9
– americana Medik.......................................52.Ex.9
– tuberosa Moench.......................................52.Ex.9
Apium L...............................................18.5
Apocynum androsaemifolium L., ‘fol. [foliis] androsaemi’.............23.Ex.22
×Arabidobrassica Gleba & Fr. Hoffm...........................H.9.Ex.3
Arabidopsis Heynh........................................H.9.Ex.3
– thaliana (L.) Heynh......................................H.9.Ex.3
Arabis “Sekt. Brassicarabis”................................39.Ex.1
– “Sekt. Brassicoturritis”...................................39.Ex.1
– beckwithii S. Watson....................................47.Ex.1
– shockleyi Munz........................................47.Ex.1
Arachnis Blume.........................................H.6.Ex.6–7; H.8.Ex.3
Arctostaphylos uva-ursi (L.) Spreng., ‘uva ursi’....................60.Ex.42
Ardisia pentagona A. DC...................................51.Ex.2
– quinquegona Blume.....................................51.Ex.2
Areca L...............................................18.5
Arecaceae.............................................18.5
Arenaria L.............................................11.Ex.12
– ser. Anomalae McNeill...................................21.Ex.1
– stricta Michx..........................................11.Ex.12
– uliginosa Schleich. ex Schltdl...............................11.Ex.12
Arnica chamissonis Less....................................60.Ex.30
Aronia arbutifolia var. nigra (Willd.) F. Seym......................41.Ex.17
Artemisia nova A. Nelson...................................23.Ex.15
Arum campanulatum Roxb..................................48.Ex.2
– dracunculus L.........................................11.Ex.13
Arytera sect. Mischarytera Radlk..............................6.Ex.6
Ascomycetes...........................................16.Ex.2
Ascomycota............................................16.Ex.2; 38.Ex.8; F.8.1, N.3
Ascomycotina..........................................16.Ex.2
Aspalathoides (DC.) K. Koch................................41.Ex.1; 49.Ex.2
Asparagus kansuensis F. T. Wang & Tang ex S. C. Chen..............8.Ex.1
– tamaboki Yatabe.......................................60.Ex.21
Asperococcus castaneus Hook................................46.Ex.24
– pusillus Carmich........................................46.Ex.24
Aspidium ciliatum Wall. ex Benth..............................11.Ex.17
Asplenium L............................................23.*Ex.23
– dentatum L., ‘Trich. dentatum’..............................23.*Ex.23
Aster L...............................................11.Ex.39; 18.5
– novae-angliae L., ‘novae angliae’............................60.Ex.42
Asteraceae............................................18.5; 29.Ex.3
×Asterago Everett.......................................11.Ex.39
Asterostemma Decne......................................53.*Ex.8
Astragalus alpinus L......................................6.Ex.17
– cariensis Boiss.........................................53.Ex.3
– (Cycloglottis) contortuplicatus L.............................21A.Ex.1
– matthewsiae Podlech & Kirchhoff, ‘matthewsii’...................60.Ex.23
– matthewsii S. Watson....................................60.Ex.23
– penduliflorus Lam.......................................6.Ex.17
– rhizanthus Boiss........................................53.Ex.3
– rhizanthus Royle ex Benth.................................53.Ex.3
– trimestris L...........................................9.Ex.9
– (Phaca) umbellatus Pers...................................21A.Ex.1
Astrostemma Benth.......................................53.*Ex.8
Atherospermataceae, ‘Atherospermeae’.........................18.Ex.9
Athyrium austro-occidentale Ching............................60.Ex.41
Atriplex L..............................................23.Ex.15; 62.*Ex.1
– “nova”.............................................23.Ex.15
Atropa bella-donna L......................................23.Ex.1
– sideroxyloides Willd.....................................46.Ex.15
142
Avena L...............................................46.Ex.39
Baloghia pininsularis Guillaumin.............................40.Ex.4; 46.Ex.22
Bartlingia Brongn........................................50C.Ex.3
Bartramia L............................................20.Ex.1
Basidiomycota..........................................F.8.1, N.3
Batodendron Chachlov....................................43.Ex.2
Batodendron Nutt........................................43.Ex.2
Bauhinia emarginata Roxb. ex G. Don..........................52.Ex.8
– retusa Roxb...........................................7.Ex.5; 52.Ex.8
– roxburghiana Voigt.....................................7.Ex.5; 52.Ex.8
– semla Wunderlin.......................................7.Ex.5; 52.Ex.8
×Beallara Moir.........................................H.6.Ex.6
Behen Moench..........................................11.Ex.14
– vulgaris Moench.......................................11.Ex.14
Belladonna Sweet........................................H.6.Ex.2
Berberis L.............................................14.Ex.2
Besenna A. Rich.........................................36.Ex.8
– anthelmintica A. Rich....................................36.Ex.8
Betula alba L...........................................50E.Ex.4
Biatorina A. Massal.......................................10.Ex.7
– atropurpurea (Schaer.) A. Massal.............................10.Ex.7
– griffithii (Ach.) A. Massal..................................10.Ex.7
Blandfordia backhousei Gunn & Lindl., ‘backhousii’.................60.Ex.31
– grandiflora R. Br.......................................52.Ex.11
Blephilia Raf...........................................35.Ex.6
Blumea DC.............................................14.Ex.11
Blumea Rchb...........................................14.Ex.11
Boletellus Murrill........................................62A.Ex.1
Boletus L. : Fr...........................................52.Ex.12; 62A.Ex.1
– edulis Bull. : Fr.........................................52.Ex.12
– lacrimans Wulfen, ‘lacrymans’..............................F.3.Ex.2
– piperatus Bull. : Fr......................................F.3A.Ex.1
– ungulatus Schaeff.......................................23.Ex.17
Bouchea Cham..........................................60B.Ex.2
Bougainvillea Comm. ex Juss., ‘Buginvillaea’.....................60.Ex.8
Bovista dermoxantha Vitt...................................57.Ex.1
– furfuracea Pers. : Pers....................................57.Ex.1
– limosa Rostr...........................................57.Ex.1
– pusilla (Batsch : Pers.) Pers.................................57.Ex.1
Brachypodium P. Beauv....................................23.Ex.9
– distachyon (L.) P. Beauv., ‘distachyum’........................23.Ex.6+9
– japonicum Miq., ‘iaponicum’...............................60.Ex.15
Braddleya Vell..........................................53.*Ex.9
Bradlea Adans..........................................53.*Ex.9
Bradleja Banks ex Gaertn...................................53.*Ex.9
Brassavola R. Br.........................................H.6.Ex.5
Brassia R. Br...........................................H.6.Ex.6
Brassica L.............................................18.5; H.9.Ex.3
– campestris L..........................................H.9.Ex.3
– napus L..............................................53.*Ex.12
– nigra (L.) W. D. J. Koch..................................23.Ex.5
Brassicaceae...........................................18.5
×Brassocattleya Rolfe, ‘Brasso-Cattleya’........................H.6.Ex.5
Brazzeia Baill...........................................36.Ex.9
Bromelia L.............................................16.Ex.1
Bromeliineae...........................................16.Ex.1
Bromus distachyos L......................................23.Ex.6+9
– inermis subsp. pumpellianus (Scribn.) Wagnon...................36.Ex.14
– – var. pumpellianus (Scribn.) C. L. Hitchc.......................36.Ex.14
– mollis L..............................................23.Ex.5
– pumpellianus Scribn.....................................36.Ex.14
– sterilis L.............................................14.Ex.9
Brosimum Sw...........................................36.Ex.11
Brugmansia aurea Harrison.................................38.Ex.9
Brunfelsia L., ‘Brunsfelsia’..................................13.Ex.4
Bryopsis J. V. Lamour.....................................30.Ex.15
Bupleurum hamiltonii var. paucefulcrans (C. Y. Wu ex R. H. Shan & Yin Li) M. L. Sheh & M. Watson 46.Ex.20
143
– tenue var. paucefulcrans C. Y. Wu ex R. H. Shan & Yin Li...........46.Ex.20

Cacalia napaeifolia DC., ‘napeaefolia’..........................60.Ex.37
Cactaceae.............................................18.Ex.3
Cactales..............................................16.Ex.4
Cactus L..............................................16.Ex.4; 18.Ex.3; 22.Ex.5; 41.Ex.6
– [unranked] Melocactus L..................................22.Ex.5
– ficus-indica L..........................................41.Ex.6
– mammillaris L.........................................22.Ex.5
– melocactus L..........................................22.Ex.5
– opuntia L.............................................41.Ex.6
Caenopteris Bergius......................................10.Ex.8
– furcata Bergius........................................10.Ex.8
– rutifolia Bergius........................................10.Ex.8
Cainito Adans...........................................52.Ex.1
Calandrinia Kunth.......................................58.Ex.1
– polyandra Benth........................................58.Ex.1
Callicarpa L............................................62.Ex.3
Callistemon R. Br........................................60G.Ex.1
Callixene Comm. ex Juss...................................14.Ex.5
Calluna Salisb...........................................H.9.Ex.2
– vulgaris (L.) Hull.......................................H.9.Ex.2
Calothyrsus Spach.......................................11.Ex.6
Calycothrix Meisn........................................55.Ex.2
– sect. Brachychaetae Nied..................................55.Ex.2
Calyptridium Nutt........................................46.Ex.6
– monandrum Nutt........................................46.Ex.6
Calytrix Labill...........................................55.Ex.2
Cambogia gummi-gutta L., ‘G. gutta’...........................23.*Ex.23
Camellia L.............................................13.Ex.3
Campanopsis (R. Br.) Kuntze................................11.Ex.2
Campanula sect. Campanopsis R. Br............................11.Ex.2
Canarium pimela K. D. Koenig...............................6.Ex.2
Candida populi Hagler & al..................................8.Ex.12
Canna L...............................................6.Ex.7
– indica L..............................................6.Ex.7
Cannaceae............................................6.Ex.7
Cantharellus tubaeformis Fr.................................60G.Ex.2
Capnoides Mill..........................................23.Ex.8
– chaerophylla (DC.) Kuntze, ‘chaerophyllum’....................23.Ex.8
Cardamine L...........................................11.Ex.20
Cardaminum Moench.....................................14.Ex.3
Caretta caretta (Linnaeus, 1758)..............................8.Ex.2
Carex L...............................................37.Ex.4; 60G.Ex.3
– sect. “Eucarex”........................................21.Ex.3
– [unranked] Scirpinae Tuck.................................37.Ex.4
– sect. Scirpinae (Tuck.) Kük.................................37.Ex.4
– “bebbii”.............................................50B.Ex.1
– henryi (C. B. Clarke) T. Koyama.............................41.Ex.30
– longicruris var. henryi C. B. Clarke...........................41.Ex.30
Carica L..............................................60G.Ex.3
Carpinaceae...........................................52.Ex.17
Carpinus L.............................................52.Ex.17
Caryophyllaceae........................................18.Ex.6; 19.Ex.8
Caryophyllales..........................................16.Ex.1
Caryophyllidae.........................................16.Ex.1
Caryophylloideae........................................19.Ex.8
Caryophyllus Mill........................................16.Ex.1; 18.Ex.6; 19.Ex.8
Cassia [unranked] Chamaecrista L.............................10.Ex.13; 32.Ex.1; 41.Ex.11
– chamaecrista L.........................................10.Ex.13; 41.Ex.11
Castanella Spruce ex Benth. & Hook. f..........................10.Ex.2
– granatensis Planch. & Linden...............................10.Ex.2
Cattleya Lindl...........................................H.6.Ex.5+7
Caulerpa racemosa (Forssk.) J. Agardh.........................7.Ex.8
– – var. racemosa........................................7.Ex.8
Caulinia Moench........................................22.Ex.7
Caulinia Willd..........................................22.Ex.7
– sect. Hardenbergia (Benth.) Kuntze...........................22.Ex.7
144
Caulokaempferia dinabandhuana Biseshwori & Bipin, ‘dinabandhuensis’...60.Ex.19

Cedrus Trew...........................................62.*Ex.1
Celsia sect. Aulacospermae Murb..............................53.Ex.17
Cenomyce ecmocyna Ach...................................58.Ex.6
Centaurea L............................................6.Ex.16
– subg. Crupina Pers......................................6.Ex.9
– amara L.............................................47.Ex.3
– – subsp. weldeniana (Rchb.) Kušan...........................6.Ex.13
– benedicta (L.) L........................................6.Ex.8
– chartolepis Greuter......................................6.Ex.16
– crupina L.............................................6.Ex.9
– funkii var. xeranthemoides Lange ex Willk.......................46.Ex.37
– intermedia Mutel.......................................6.Ex.16
– jacea L..............................................47.Ex.3
– – subsp. weldeniana (Rchb.) Greuter..........................6.Ex.13
– – var. weldeniana (Rchb.) Briq..............................6.Ex.13
– weldeniana Rchb........................................6.Ex.13
Centrospermae..........................................16.Ex.2
Cephaëlis Sw. ..........................................60.7
– acanthacea Steyerm......................................8.Ex.7
Cephalotaxus fortunei Hook., ‘fortuni’..........................60.Ex.31
Cephalotos Adans........................................53.Ex.13
Cephalotus Labill........................................53.Ex.13
Ceratocystis omanensis Al-Subhi & al...........................31.Ex.4
Cercospora aleuritidis Miyake...............................F.8.Ex.2
Cereus jamacaru DC......................................60.*Ex.10
Cervicina Delile.........................................11.Ex.2
Chamaecrista (L.) Moench..................................41.Ex.11
– leonardiae Britton, ‘Leonardae’.............................60.Ex.26
Chamaecyparis Spach.....................................H.6.Ex.1
Chartolepis intermedia Boiss.................................6.Ex.16
Chenopodium L..........................................10.Ex.11
– album L..............................................10.Ex.11
– loureiroi Steud., ‘loureirei’................................60.Ex.31
– rubrum L.............................................10.Ex.11
Chloris Sw.............................................52.Ex.14
– radiata (L.) Sw.........................................52.Ex.14
Chlorophyta...........................................16.Ex.2
Chlorosarcina Gerneck....................................7.Ex.15
– elegans Gerneck.......................................7.Ex.15
– minor Gerneck.........................................7.Ex.15
Chlorosphaera G. A. Klebs.................................7.Ex.15
Chrysophyllum L.........................................52.Ex.1
Cicatricosisporites R. Potonié & Gelletich, ‘Cicatricosi-sporites’........60.Ex.45
Cineraria sect. Eriopappus Dumort.............................49.Ex.3
Cistus aegyptiacus L......................................49.Ex.4
Cladium iridifolium (Bory) Baker.............................41.Ex.25
Cladonia abbatiana S. Stenroos..............................60.Ex.33
– ecmocyna Leight........................................58.Ex.6
Cladosporium humile Davis.................................F.8.Ex.3
Claudopus Gillet........................................11.Ex.21
Cleistogenes Keng.......................................20.Ex.5
Clematis L.............................................30.Ex.14
Clianthus Sol. ex Lindl.....................................11.Ex.25
– dampieri Lindl.........................................11.Ex.25
– formosus (G. Don) Ford & Vickery...........................11.Ex.25
– oxleyi Lindl...........................................11.Ex.25
– speciosus (G. Don) Asch. & Graebn...........................11.Ex.25
– speciosus (Endl.) Steud...................................11.Ex.25
Climacioideae..........................................19.Ex.10
Closterium dianae Ehrenb. ex Ralfs............................46.Ex.42
Clusia L...............................................18.5
Clusiaceae............................................18.5
Clutia L...............................................60.Ex.27
Clypeola jonthlaspi L......................................60.Ex.14
– “minor”.............................................33.Ex.1
Cnicus benedictus L.......................................6.Ex.8
145
Cocculus DC...........................................58.Ex.5
– villosus DC...........................................58.Ex.5
Cochlioda Lindl.........................................H.6.Ex.6
Codium geppiorum O. C. Schmidt, ‘geppii’.......................60.Ex.24
Coeloglossum viride (L.) Hartm...............................H.8.Ex.2
×Cogniauxara Garay & H. R. Sweet...........................H.6.Ex.6; H.8.Ex.3
Coix lacryma-jobi L., ‘lacryma jobi’...........................60.Ex.42
Collaea DC............................................60B.1(a)
Collema nummularium Dufour ex Durieu & Mont...................38.Ex.10
Cololejeunea (Spruce) Steph.................................41.Ex.12
– elegans Steph..........................................41.Ex.12
Columella Lour..........................................53.Ex.13
Columellia Ruiz & Pav.....................................53.Ex.13
Combretaceae..........................................14.Ex.4
Combretum Loefl.........................................50E.Ex.2
Comparettia Poepp. & Endl..................................H.6.Ex.7
Compositae............................................18.5; 46.Ex.37; 53.Ex.4
Conferva ebenea Dillwyn...................................7.Ex.3
Coniferae.............................................16.Ex.2
“Conophyton”..........................................36.Ex.4
Conophytum N. E. Br......................................36.Ex.4
– littlewoodii L. Bolus.....................................41.Ex.16
– marginatum subsp. littlewoodii (L. Bolus) S. A. Hammer.............41.Ex.16
Convolvulus L...........................................20.Ex.1; 37.Ex.3
– [unranked] Soldanellae House..............................37.Ex.3
– bicolor Vahl..........................................7.Ex.6
– bracteatus Vahl........................................7.Ex.6
– cantabrica L...........................................23.Ex.7
– loureiroi G. Don, ‘loureiri’................................60.Ex.31
Coralloides gorgonina Bory.................................36.Ex.3
Coriaria L.............................................16.Ex.4
Coriariales............................................16.Ex.4
Coriolus Quél...........................................10.Ex.9
– lutescens (Pers.) Quél.....................................10.Ex.9
Cornus “gharaf”........................................23.Ex.16
– paucinervis Hance......................................11.Ex.37
– paucinervis Heer.......................................11.Ex.37
– sanguinea L...........................................23.Ex.1
Coronilla argentea L......................................9.Ex.2
Correa Andrews.........................................60B.1(a)
Cortinarius balteatotomentosus Rob. Henry.......................46.Ex.29
– collinitus var. trivialis (J. E. Lange) A. H. Sm.....................41.Ex.8
– trivialis J. E. Lange.....................................41.Ex.8
Corydalis DC...........................................49.Ex.5
– chaerophylla DC........................................23.Ex.8
– solida (L.) Clairv........................................49.Ex.5
Corynetes ruficollis Fabr...................................F.9.Ex.2
Coscinodiscaceae, ‘Coscinodisceae’...........................18.Ex.8
Costus subg. Metacostus...................................21.Ex.3
Cotyledon sedoides DC.....................................11.Ex.19
Crepis L...............................................46.Ex.12
– lyrata (L.) Froel........................................46.Ex.12
– “praemorsa subsp. tatrensis”...............................38.Ex.4
Cribrosphaera Arkhang....................................54.Ex.1
Cribrosphaera Popofsky...................................54.Ex.1
Cribrosphaerella Deflandre ex Góka...........................54.Ex.1
“×Crindonna”..........................................H.6.Ex.2
Crinum L..............................................H.6.Ex.2
Crocus antalyensioides Rukšāns..............................41A.Ex.1
Croton subg. Geiseleria A. Gray..............................58.Ex.4
– ciliatoglandulifer Ortega, ‘ciliato-glandulifer’....................60.Ex.40
– glandulosus L..........................................58.Ex.4
– nitidulus var. acuminatus Radcl.-Sm...........................40.Ex.3
Cruciferae.............................................18.5
Crupina (Pers.) DC.......................................6.Ex.9
Cucubalus angustifolius Mill.................................52.Ex.4
– behen L..............................................11.Ex.14; 52.Ex.4
146
– latifolius Mill..........................................52.Ex.4
Cucurbita L............................................10.Ex.10
– argyrosperma C. Huber...................................26.Ex.6
– – var. stenosperma (Pangalo) Merrick & D. M. Bates...............26.Ex.6
– lagenaria L...........................................10.Ex.10
– mixta Pangalo.........................................26.Ex.6
– – var. cyanoperizona Pangalo...............................26.Ex.6
– – var. mixta...........................................26.Ex.6
– – var. stenosperma Pangalo................................26.Ex.6
– pepo L..............................................10.Ex.10
×Cupressocyparis Dallim...................................H.6.Ex.1
Cupressus L............................................H.6.Ex.1
Curculigo Gaertn., ‘Cvrcvligo’...............................60.Ex.11
Cuscutales, ‘Cuscuteae’....................................41.Ex.2
“Cuscuteae”...........................................41.Ex.2
Cuviera DC............................................52.Ex.16
Cuviera Koeler..........................................52.Ex.16
Cyanobacteria..........................................Pre.8
Cybella mendosa VanLand..................................58.Ex.2
Cyclosorus Link.........................................11.Ex.17
– ciliatus (Wall. ex Benth.) Panigrahi...........................11.Ex.17
– tener (Fée) Christenh.....................................11.Ex.17
Cylindrocladiella infestans Boesew.............................41.Ex.15
“Cylindrocladium infestans”................................41.Ex.15
Cymbella subalpina Hust...................................58.Ex.2
– subalpina F. Meister.....................................58.Ex.2
Cymbidium iansonii Rolfe, ‘i’ansoni’...........................60.Ex.46
Cymbopogon martini (Roxb.) Will. Watson.......................41.Ex.5
Cynoglossum cheirifolium var. lanatum (L.) Lehm...................24.Ex.9
Cyperaceae............................................18.Ex.4
Cyrilloideae...........................................19.Ex.1
Cystocoleus ebeneus (Dillwyn) Thwaites.........................7.Ex.3
Cytisus Desf............................................11.Ex.11
– biflorus L’Hér.........................................11.Ex.11
– fontanesii Spach ex Ball..................................11.Ex.11
Daboecia cantabrica (Huds.) K. Koch..........................23.Ex.5
×Dactyloglossum mixtum (Asch. & Graebn.) Rauschert...............H.8.Ex.2
Dactylorhiza fuchsii (Druce) Soó..............................H.8.Ex.2
Dalbergia brownei (Jacq.) Schinz.............................6.Ex.3
Damapana Adans........................................14.Ex.11
Decarinium Raf..........................................58.Ex.4
Delesseria bonnemaisonii C. Agardh...........................7.Ex.2
– gmelinii J. V. Lamour.....................................7.Ex.2
– palmetta (Stackh.) J. V. Lamour..............................7.Ex.2
Delissea eleeleensis H. St. John...............................8.Ex.5
Delphinium L...........................................10.Ex.6; 37.Ex.8
– “tribus Brevipedunculata”.................................37.Ex.8
– “tribus Involuta”.......................................37.Ex.8
– consolida L...........................................10.Ex.6
– peregrinum L..........................................10.Ex.6
Demidovia tetragonoides Pall.................................60.Ex.39
“Dendrobium sibuyanense”.................................8.Ex.11; 40.Ex.5
Dendromecon Benth.......................................62.Ex.5
Dendrosicus Raf.........................................14.Ex.7
Dentaria L.............................................11.Ex.20
Derbesia Solier.........................................30.Ex.15
Desmidiaceae..........................................13.1(e)
Desmodium bigelovii A. Gray................................60.Ex.29
Desmostachya (Stapf) Stapf.................................53.*Ex.12
Desmostachys Miers......................................53.*Ex.12
Dianthus monspessulanus L..................................23.Ex.1
Dichanthelium hirstii (Swallen) Kartesz in Kartesz & Meacham.........30A.Ex.1
Dichelodontium Hook. f. & Wilson ex Broth.......................46.Ex.19
Didymopanax gleasonii Britton & P. Wilson......................46C.Ex.1
Digitalis grandiflora L.....................................H.3.Ex.3
– mertonensis B. H. Buxton & C. D. Darl.........................H.3.Ex.3
– purpurea L............................................H.3.Ex.3
147
Dillenia L.............................................60B.1(c)
– suffruticosa (Griff. ex Hook. f. & Thomson) Martelli...............52.Ex.18
Dimeromyces corynetis Thaxter, ‘corynitis’.......................F.9.Ex.2
Dionysia Fenzl..........................................11.Ex.7
– sect. Ariadna Wendelbo..................................11.Ex.7
– sect. Dionysiopsis (Pax) Melch..............................11.Ex.7
Dioscorea belophylla (Prain) Haines...........................41.Ex.7
– nummularia var. belophylla Prain............................41.Ex.7
Diospyros L............................................62.*Ex.1
– elliptica (J. R. Forst. & G. Forst.) P. S. Green....................58.Ex.7
– elliptica Knowlt........................................58.Ex.7
– ellipticifolia Bakh.......................................58.Ex.7
Dipterocarpus C. F. Gaertn..................................62.Ex.3
×Disophyllum..........................................28.Ex.2
Dodecatheon L..........................................22.Ex.4
– sect. “Etubulosa”.......................................22.Ex.4
– meadia L.............................................22.Ex.4
Donia formosa G. Don....................................11.Ex.25
– speciosa G. Don........................................11.Ex.25
Dracula trigonopetala Gary Mey. & Baquero ex A. Doucette...........29.Ex.5
Dracunculus Mill.........................................11.Ex.13
– vulgaris Schott........................................11.Ex.13
Drimys J. R. Forst. & G. Forst................................18.Ex.6
Dryobalanops sumatrensis (J. F. Gmel.) Kosterm....................50E.Ex.5
Dryopteris hirsutosetosa Hieron...............................7.Ex.13
Drypeteae.............................................19A.Ex.1
Drypetinae............................................19A.Ex.1
Durvillaea Bory.........................................53.*Ex.12; 60B.Ex.2
Dussia Krug & Urb. ex Taub.................................6.Ex.5
– martinicensis Krug & Urb. ex Taub...........................6.Ex.5
Eccilia (Fr. : Fr.) P. Kumm..................................11.Ex.21
“Echinocereus sanpedroensis”...............................8.Ex.3
Echinops L.............................................30.Ex.7
– antalyensis C. Vural.....................................30.Ex.7
Echium lycopsis L........................................7.Ex.10
Eclipta erecta L..........................................11.Ex.24
– prostrata (L.) L.........................................11.Ex.24
Ectocarpus mucronatus D. A. Saunders.........................41.Ex.14
“Egeria”.............................................38.Ex.1
Elaeocarpaceae, ‘Elaeocarpeae’..............................46.Ex.8
Elcaja “roka”..........................................23.Ex.16
Elodes Adans...........................................10.Ex.3
×Elyhordeum Mansf. ex Tsitsin & Petrova.......................H.8.Ex.1
×Elymopyrum Cugnac.....................................11.Ex.41
×Elymotriticum P. Fourn....................................H.8.Ex.1
Elymus L..............................................11.Ex.41; H.3.Ex.2; H.8.Ex.1
– europaeus L...........................................52.Ex.16
– farctus (Viv.) Melderis...................................H.5.Ex.1
– – subsp. boreoatlanticus (Simonet & Guin.) Melderis...............H.5.Ex.1
– ×laxus (Fr.) Melderis & D. C. McClint.........................H.5.Ex.1
– repens (L.) Gould.......................................H.5.Ex.1
Embelia sarasiniorum Mez..................................23.Ex.1
Enallagma (Miers) Baill....................................14.Ex.7
Enantioblastae..........................................16.Ex.2
Enargea Banks ex Gaertn...................................14.Ex.5
Encyonema Kütz.........................................58.Ex.2
– subalpinum D. G. Mann..................................58.Ex.2
Endolepis Schleid........................................11.Ex.36
Endolepis Torr..........................................11.Ex.36
Englerastrum Briq........................................60B.Ex.2
Englerella Pierre........................................60B.Ex.2
Engleria O. Hoffm........................................60B.Ex.2
Enteromorpha roberti-lamii H. Parriaud.........................60.Ex.41
Entoloma (Fr. ex Rabenh.) P. Kumm............................11.Ex.21
Epidendrum triquetrum Sw..................................46.Ex.25
Epilichen Clem..........................................38.Ex.5
Epiphyllum Haw.........................................H.6.Ex.1
148
Equisetum palustre var. americanum Vict.........................6.Ex.6

– – f. fluitans Vict........................................6.Ex.6
Eriastrum Wooton & Standl..................................52.Ex.10
Erica L...............................................19.Ex.4; H.9.Ex.2
– cinerea L.............................................H.9.Ex.2
Ericaceae.............................................19.Ex.4
Ericales..............................................3.Ex.2
×Ericalluna Krüssm.......................................H.9.Ex.2
Ericeae...............................................19.Ex.4
Ericoideae............................................19.Ex.4
Erigeron L.............................................62.*Ex.1
– plantagineus Greene.....................................9.Ex.14
Eriobotrya japonica (Thunb.) Lindl.............................28.Ex.2
Erioderma chilense Mont...................................35.Ex.8
– – subsp. “velligerum”....................................35.Ex.8
– polycarpum subsp. verruculosum Vain.........................35.Ex.7
Eryngium nothosect. Alpestria Burdet & Miège....................H.9.Ex.1
– sect. Alpina H. Wolff....................................H.9.Ex.1
– sect. Campestria H. Wolff.................................H.9.Ex.1
– amorginum Rech. f......................................60D.Ex.1
Erysimum hieraciifolium var. longisiliquum Rouy & Foucaud...........53.Ex.20
Erythrina falcata Benth.....................................8.Ex.10
Eschweilera DC.........................................53.*Ex.8
Eschweileria Boerl........................................53.*Ex.8
Euanthe Schltr..........................................H.6.Ex.6; H.8.Ex.3
– sanderiana (Rchb.) Schltr..................................H.8.Ex.3
Euastrum pinnatifidum”....................................46.Ex.42
Eucalyptus L’Hér.........................................62.*Ex.1
Eucommia Oliv..........................................38.Ex.20
Eucommiales...........................................38.Ex.20
Eucryphiaceae..........................................46.Ex.7
Eugenia ceibensis Standl....................................8.Ex.8
– costaricensis O. Berg, ‘costa-ricensis’.........................60.Ex.40
Eulophus Nutt. ex DC......................................35.Ex.6
Eunotia gibbosa Grunow...................................38.Ex.17
– rolandschmidtii Metzeltin & Lange-Bert., ‘roland-schmidtii’..........60.Ex.40
Euonymus L., ‘Evonymus’..................................60.Ex.13
Eupenicillium brefeldianum (B. O. Dodge) Stolk & D. B. Scott..........F.8.Ex.1
“Euphlebium sibuyanense”.................................40.Ex.5
Euphorbia subg. Esula Pers..................................10.Ex.12
– subsect. Tenellae (Pax & K. Hoffm.) Pax & K. Hoffm...............21.Ex.1
– sect. Tithymalus (Gaertn.) Roep..............................21.Ex.1
– amygdaloides L........................................H.5.Ex.2
– characias L...........................................H.5.Ex.2
– – subsp. wulfenii (W. D. J. Koch) Radcl.-Sm.....................H.5.Ex.2
– ×cornubiensis Radcl.-Sm..................................H.5.Ex.2
– esula L..............................................10.Ex.12
– “jaroslavii”..........................................36.Ex.12
– ×martini Rouy.........................................H.5.Ex.2
– – nothosubsp. cornubiensis (Radcl.-Sm.) Radcl.-Sm.................H.5.Ex.2
– peplis L..............................................53.*Ex.12
– peplus L.............................................10.Ex.12; 53.*Ex.12
– wulfenii W. D. J. Koch...................................H.5.Ex.2
– yaroslavii Poljak........................................36.Ex.12
Eurya hebeclados Y. Ling..................................9.Ex.8
Faba Mill..............................................18.5
Fabaceae.............................................18.5; 19.8
Faboideae.............................................19.8
Fagus L...............................................62.*Ex.1
– sylvatica L............................................60.Ex.1
Ferreola ellipticifolia Stokes.................................58.Ex.7
Festuca myuros L........................................26.Ex.2
Ficus cooperi Anon.......................................46.Ex.45
– crassipes F. M. Bailey....................................11.Ex.38
– crassipes (Heer) Heer....................................11.Ex.38
– exasperata Vahl........................................50D.Ex.1
– irumuensis De Wild......................................50D.Ex.1
149
– neoebudarum Summerh., ‘neo-ebudarum’.......................60.Ex.40

– stortophylla Warb.......................................50D.Ex.1
– tiliifolia Baker.........................................11.Ex.38
– tiliifolia (A. Braun) Heer..................................11.Ex.38
– tremula Heer..........................................11.Ex.38
– tremula Warb..........................................11.Ex.38
Filago Loefl............................................20.Ex.1
Filicites sect. Neuropteris Brongn., ‘Nevropteris’...................60.Ex.13
Frankenia leonardiorum Alain, ‘leonardorum’.....................60.Ex.26
Fraxinus pennsylvanica Marshall..............................60D.Ex.1
Fucales...............................................16.Ex.1
Fucus L...............................................16.Ex.1
– palmetta S. G. Gmel.....................................7.Ex.2
– racemosus Forssk.......................................7.Ex.8
Fuirena Rottb...........................................20.Ex.10
– umbellata Rottb........................................35.Ex.4
Fumaria bulbosa var. solida L................................49.Ex.5
– densiflora DC..........................................32.Ex.5
– gussonei Boiss.........................................23.Ex.1
– officinalis L...........................................32.Ex.5
– “×salmonii”..........................................32.Ex.5
– solida (L.) Mill.........................................49.Ex.5
Fungi................................................13.1(d); 37.Ex.6
Galium tricorne Stokes....................................52.Ex.5
– tricornutum Dandy......................................52.Ex.5
– verum L. subsp. verum...................................24.Ex.5
– – var. verum..........................................24.Ex.5
“Ganymedes”..........................................36.Ex.10
Gasteromycetes.........................................F.3.1
Geastrum Pers., ‘Geaster’..................................61.Ex.3
– hygrometricum Pers. : Pers., ‘Geastrvm hygrometricvm’.............60.Ex.12
Geiseleria Klotzsch.......................................58.Ex.4
Gentiana lutea L.........................................6.Ex.6
– pneumonanthe L........................................23.Ex.7
– tenella var. occidentalis J. Rousseau & Raymond..................6.Ex.6
Geranium andicola [unranked] longipedicellatum Loes................37.Ex.5
– longipedicellatum (Loes.) R. Knuth...........................37.Ex.5
– molle L..............................................23.Ex.5
– robertianum L.........................................23.Ex.1
Gerardia L.............................................60B.Ex.2
Gerardiina Engl.........................................53.*Ex.12
Gerrardina Oliv.........................................53.*Ex.12
Giffordia Batters........................................41.Ex.14
– mucronata (D. A. Saunders) Kjeldsen & H. K. Phinney..............41.Ex.14
Gilia grinnellii Brand.....................................7.Ex.7
– splendens Mason & Grant.................................7.Ex.7
– – subsp. grinnellii Mason & Grant............................7.Ex.7
Gilmania Coville........................................53.Ex.18
Ginkgo L..............................................18.Ex.2
Ginkgoaceae...........................................18.Ex.2
Glechoma L., ‘Glecoma’...................................50E.Ex.3
Gleditsia J. Clayton.......................................60.Ex.27
Globba trachycarpa Baker, ‘brachycarpa’.......................60.*Ex.3
Globularia cordifolia L.....................................47A.Ex.1
Glochidion melvilleorum Airy Shaw, ‘melvilliorum’.................60.Ex.31
Gloeosporium balsameae Davis..............................23.Ex.7
Gloriosa L.............................................20.Ex.1
Gluta renghas L., ‘benghas’.................................33.Ex.4; 60.*Ex.6
Glycine apios L..........................................52.Ex.9
Gnaphalium angustifolium Lam...............................6.Ex.14
– barrelieri Ten..........................................11.Ex.4
– conglobatum Viv........................................11.Ex.4
Gnetidae..............................................16.Ex.3
Gnetophytina...........................................16.Ex.1
Gnetopsida............................................16.Ex.3
Gnetum L..............................................16.Ex.1
– “cleistostachyum”......................................40.Ex.1
150
Goniopteris tenera Fée....................................11.Ex.17

Gonyaulax ellegaardiae K. N. Mertens & al.......................11.Ex.35
Gossypium tomentosum Seem................................46.Ex.32
Graderia Benth..........................................60B.Ex.2
Gramineae............................................18.5; 19.Ex.3
Graphis meridionalis M. Nakan...............................33.Ex.2
Grislea L..............................................50E.Ex.2
Guttiferae.............................................18.5
Gyminda Sarg...........................................48.Ex.3
– grisebachii Sarg........................................48.Ex.3
Gymnadenia R. Br........................................H.6.Ex.1+3
– rubra Wettst...........................................9.Ex.12
×Gymnanacamptis Asch. & Graebn............................H.6.Ex.1
Gymnospermae.........................................16.Ex.2
Haplanthus T. Anderson...................................55.Ex.5
Haplanthus Nees........................................55.Ex.5
– hygrophiloides T. Anderson................................55.Ex.5
Haptanthus Goldberg & C. Nelson.............................3.Ex.1
Hedysarum L...........................................20.Ex.1
– ecastaphyllum L........................................6.Ex.3
Helianthemum Mill.......................................49.Ex.4
– aegyptiacum (L.) Mill....................................49.Ex.4
– italicum var. micranthum Gren. & Godr.........................11.Ex.15
– penicillatum Thibaud ex Dunal..............................11.Ex.15
– – var. micranthum (Gren. & Godr.) Grosser......................11.Ex.15
Helichrysum angustifolium..................................6.Ex.14
– barrelieri (Ten.) Greuter..................................11.Ex.4
– conglobatum (Viv.) Steud..................................11.Ex.4
– litoreum Guss..........................................6.Ex.14
– stoechas subsp. barrelieri (Ten.) Nyman........................11.Ex.4
Helictotrichon Bess.......................................46.Ex.39
Helleborus niger L........................................23.Ex.5
Hemerocallis L..........................................62.*Ex.1
Hemisphace (Benth.) Opiz..................................41.Ex.4
Hepaticae.............................................13.1(c), Ex.1
Heracleum sibiricum L.....................................11.Ex.27
– – subsp. lecokii (Godr. & Gren.) Nyman........................11.Ex.27
– – subsp. sibiricum......................................11.Ex.27
– sphondylium L.........................................11.Ex.27
– – subsp. sibiricum (L.) Simonk..............................11.Ex.27
Hesperomecon Greene.....................................62.Ex.5
Hesperonia glutinosa Standl.................................41.Ex.28
Hetaeria alta Ridl., ‘alba’..................................60.*Ex.3
Heterochaeta Bess........................................46.Ex.39
Heterotrichum pulchellum Fisch...............................6.Ex.7
Heuchera L............................................H.11.Ex.1
– ×tiarelloides Lemoine & É. Lemoine..........................H.11.Ex.1
×Heucherella tiarelloides (Lemoine & É. Lemoine) H. R. Wehrh.........H.11.Ex.1
Hewittia Wight & Arn.....................................7.Ex.6
– bicolor Wight & Arn.....................................7.Ex.6
Hibiscus ricinifolius E. Mey. ex Harv...........................58.Ex.3
– ricinoides Garcke.......................................58.Ex.3
– vitifolius L............................................58.Ex.3
– – var. ricinifolius Hochr...................................58.Ex.3
Hieracium “armerioides var. genuinum”........................24.Ex.3
– oribates Brenner.......................................7.Ex.11
– piliferum Hoppe........................................24.Ex.3
– – subsp. armerioides (Arv.-Touv.) Rouy........................24.Ex.3
– – var. “genuinum”......................................24.Ex.3
– saxifragum subsp. oreinum Dahlst. ex Brenner....................7.Ex.11
×Holttumara Holttum.....................................H.6.Ex.7; H.8.Ex.3
×Hordelymus Bachteev & Darevsk.............................H.3.Ex.2; H.8.Ex.1
Hordelymus (Jess.) Harz...................................52.Ex.16; H.3.Ex.2; H.8.Ex.1
×Hordeopyron Simonet, ‘Hordeopyrum’.........................H.9.Ex.1
Hordeum L.............................................H.3.Ex.2; H.8.Ex.1; H.9.Ex.1
– [unranked] Hordelymus Jess................................52.Ex.16
Huegelia Rchb..........................................52.Ex.10
151
Hugelia Benth...........................................52.Ex.10
Hyacinthus L...........................................60A.Ex.1
– non-scriptus L., ‘non scriptus’..............................23.Ex.20
Hyalodiscus Ehrenb.......................................11.Ex.33
– laevis Ehrenb..........................................11.Ex.33
Hydrocoleum glutinosum Gomont.............................46.Ex.41
Hydrophyllum L.........................................60G.Ex.1
Hymenocarpos Savi......................................62.Ex.3
Hypericum aegypticum L...................................10.Ex.3
– buckleyi M. A. Curtis, ‘buckleii’.............................60.Ex.31
– elodes L.............................................10.Ex.3
Hypholoma (Fr. : Fr.) P. Kumm...............................41.Ex.9
– fasciculare (Huds. : Fr.) P. Kumm............................41.Ex.9
Hypocrea dorotheae Samuels & Dodd..........................F.8.Ex.4
Hystrichosphaeridium zoharyi M. Rossignol......................11.Ex.29
Ifloga Cass.............................................20.Ex.1
Illiciaceae.............................................49.Ex.10
Illicieae..............................................49.Ex.10
Impatiens L............................................20.Ex.1
– noli-tangere L., ‘noli tangere’..............................23.Ex.1+20
Indigofera longipedunculata Y. Y. Fang & C. Z. Zheng, ‘longipednnculata’.60.Ex.5
Ionopsidium Rchb........................................60.Ex.14
Ionopsis Kunth..........................................H.6.Ex.7
Ionthlaspi Adans.........................................60.Ex.14
Iresine borschii Zumaya & Flores Olv...........................38.Ex.6
Iria (Pers.) R. Hedw.......................................53.*Ex.12
Iris L.................................................53.*Ex.12
Isoëtes L..............................................60.7
Jatropha L.............................................60.Ex.14
Johannesteijsmannia magnifica J. Dransf.........................8.Ex.6
Jondraba Medik.........................................60.Ex.14
Juglans californica S. Watson................................52.Ex.15
– major (Torr.) A. Heller...................................52.Ex.15
– rupestris var. major Torr...................................52.Ex.15
“Juncus bufonius var. occidentalis”............................41.Ex.23
Juniperus chinensis L......................................28.Ex.3
– ×pfitzeriana..........................................28.Ex.3
– sabina L.............................................28.Ex.3
Karschia Körb..........................................38.Ex.5
Kedarnatha P. K. Mukh. & Constance..........................38.Ex.11
– sanctuarii P. K. Mukh. & Constance..........................38.Ex.11
Kengia Packer..........................................20.Ex.5
Kernera Medik..........................................60B.1(b)
Kratzmannia Opiz.......................................38.Ex.22
Kunzea linearis (Kirk) de Lange..............................H.2.Ex.2
– robusta de Lange & Toelken...............................H.2.Ex.2
Kyllinga Rottb...........................................20.Ex.10
Labiatae..............................................18.5; 53.Ex.1
Labyrinthodictyon Valkanov, ‘Labyrinthodyction’..................45.Ex.4
“Laconiella”...........................................43.Ex.1
– “sardinica”..........................................43.Ex.1
Laelia Lindl............................................H.6.Ex.7
Lagenaria siceraria (Molina) Standl............................10.Ex.10
Lamiaceae............................................18.5
Lamium L.............................................18.5
“Lanceolatus”..........................................20.Ex.4
Lapageria Ruiz & Pav.....................................H.9.Ex.1
Lapeirousia Pourr........................................60B.Ex.2
– erythrantha var. welwitschii (Baker) Geerinck & al.................46C.Ex.2
Lasiobelonium corticale (Pers. : Fr.) Raitv........................41.Ex.26
Laurentia frontidentata E. Wimm..............................9.Ex.5; 40.Ex.2
“Lawreymyces”.........................................40.Ex.6
Lecanidion Endl.........................................F.3.Ex.3
Lecanora campestris f. “pseudistera”...........................41.Ex.21
– dissipata Nyl..........................................34.Ex.1
– pseudistera Nyl.........................................41.Ex.21
– saxicola (Pollich) Ach....................................41.Ex.13
152
Leccinum Gray..........................................52.Ex.12
– edule (Bull. : Fr.) Gray...................................52.Ex.12
Leguminosae...........................................18.5; 19.8
Lejeunea subg. Cololejeunea Spruce...........................41.Ex.12
Lemanea Bory..........................................46.Ex.21; 48.Ex.1
– corallina Bory.........................................48.Ex.1
Lemanea Sirodot........................................46.Ex.21; 48.Ex.1
Leptonia (Fr. : Fr.) P. Kumm.................................11.Ex.21
“Leptosiphon croceus”....................................41.Ex.20
“Leptostachys”.........................................20.N.2
Lespedeza Michx.........................................60.*Ex.10
Leucadendron L.........................................14.Ex.10
×Leucadenia Schltr.......................................H.6.Ex.3
Leucodon nitidus Hook. f. & Wilson...........................46.Ex.19
Leucorchis E. Mey........................................H.6.Ex.3
Lichen debilis Sm........................................46.Ex.17
– gracilis L.............................................58.Ex.6
– muralis Schreb.........................................41.Ex.13
– saxicola Pollich........................................41.Ex.13
Liliales...............................................16.Ex.3
Liliineae..............................................16.Ex.3
Lilium tianschanicum Grubov................................46.Ex.30
Linanthus croceus Eastw....................................41.Ex.20
Linaria Mill............................................11.Ex.8
– “linaria”............................................23.Ex.3
– spuria (L.) Mill.........................................11.Ex.8
“Lindenia”............................................30.Ex.11
Lindera Thunb..........................................50C.Ex.2
Linum multiflorum Lam....................................23.Ex.4
– radiola L.............................................23.Ex.4
Lippia L...............................................19.Ex.5
Lippieae..............................................19.Ex.5
Liquidambar L..........................................20.Ex.1
Liriodendron tulipifera L...................................23.Ex.7
Lithocarpus polystachyus...................................49.Ex.8
Lithospermum tinctorium L..................................11.Ex.18
“Lobata”.............................................20.Ex.4
Lobelia spicata Lam.......................................26.Ex.1
– – var. “originalis”......................................24.Ex.5
– – var. spicata..........................................26.Ex.1
– taccada Gaertn.........................................41.Ex.10
Lobeliaceae............................................18.Ex.4
Lophiolaceae...........................................37.Ex.2
Loranthus (sect. Ischnanthus) gabonensis Engl.....................21A.Ex.1
– macrosolen Steud. ex A. Rich...............................38.Ex.2
Lotus L...............................................62.*Ex.1
Luehea Willd., ‘Lühea’....................................60.Ex.16
Lupinus L..............................................46.Ex.40
Luzuriaga Ruiz & Pav.....................................14.Ex.5
Lycium odonellii F. A. Barkley, ‘o’donellii’.......................60.Ex.46
Lycoperdon Pers.........................................30.Ex.17
– atropurpureum Vittad., ‘atro-purpureum’.......................60.Ex.40
– pusillum Batsch........................................57.Ex.1
Lycopersicon esculentum Mill................................14.Ex.1
– lycopersicum (L.) H. Karst.................................14.Ex.1
Lycophyta.............................................16.Ex.2
Lycopinae.............................................30.Ex.3
Lycopodiophyta.........................................16.Ex.1
Lycopodium L...........................................13.Ex.2; 16.Ex.1
– apodum L............................................61.Ex.2
– clavatum L............................................13.Ex.2
– inundatum L...........................................26.Ex.5
– – var. bigelovii Tuck.....................................26.Ex.5
– – var. inundatum.......................................26.Ex.5
Lyngbya Gomont........................................53.Ex.13
– “glutinosa”...........................................46.Ex.41
Lyngbyea Sommerf.......................................53.Ex.13
153
Lysiloma Benth..........................................23.Ex.8
– latisiliquum (L.) Benth., ‘latisiliqua’..........................23.Ex.8
Lysimachia hemsleyana Oliv.................................23A.2; 53.*Ex.12
– hemsleyi Franch........................................23A.2; 53.*Ex.12
Lythrum salicaria L.......................................23.Ex.7
Maba elliptica J. R. Forst. & G. Forst...........................58.Ex.7
Machaerina Vahl........................................41.Ex.25
– “iridifolia”...........................................41.Ex.25
Macrosporium Fr.........................................14.Ex.13
Macrothyrsus Spach......................................11.Ex.6
Magnolia L............................................16.Ex.1
– foetida (L.) Sarg........................................11.Ex.5
– grandiflora L..........................................11.Ex.5
– virginiana var. foetida L...................................11.Ex.5
Magnoliophyta..........................................16.Ex.1
Mahonia Nutt...........................................14.Ex.2
– japonica DC...........................................28.Ex.1
Mairia Nees...........................................30.Ex.19
Malaceae.............................................19.Ex.6
Maloideae.............................................19.Ex.6
Malpighia L............................................22.Ex.2
– sect. Apyrae DC........................................22.Ex.2
– subg. Homoiostylis Nied...................................22.Ex.2
– sect. Malpighia........................................22.Ex.2
– subg. Malpighia........................................22.Ex.2
– emarginata DC.........................................46.Ex.16
– glabra L.............................................22.Ex.2
Malpighiaceae..........................................53.Ex.4
Maltea B. Boivin........................................H.6.Ex.4
Malus Mill.............................................19.Ex.6
Malvaceae............................................41.Ex.27
Malvidae..............................................41.Ex.27
Mammillaria Haw........................................18.Ex.3
Manihot Mill...........................................20.Ex.1; 62.Ex.10
Marattia L.............................................16.Ex.1
– rolandi-principis Rosenst., ‘rolandi principis’....................60.Ex.42
Marattiidae............................................16.Ex.1
Martia Spreng...........................................60B.Ex.2
Martiusia Schult.........................................60B.Ex.2
Masdevallia echidna Rchb. f.................................23.Ex.10
Matricaria L............................................H.6.Ex.5
– recutita L.............................................52.Ex.13
– suaveolens L..........................................52.Ex.13
Maxillaria mombachoensis J. T. Atwood.........................46.Ex.49
Mazocarpon M. J. Benson..................................11.Ex.1
Medicago orbicularis (L.) Bartal...............................49.Ex.1
– polymorpha L..........................................26.Ex.4
– – var. orbicularis L......................................49.Ex.1
Meiandra major Markgr., ‘maior’.............................60.Ex.15
Melampsora ×columbiana G. Newc............................H.3.Ex.1; H.10.Ex.1
– medusae Thüm.........................................H.2.Ex.1; H.10.Ex.1
– occidentalis H. S. Jacks...................................H.2.Ex.1; H.10.Ex.1
Melanthieae...........................................19.Ex.11
Melilotus Mill...........................................60G.Ex.1; 62.*Ex.1
Meliola Fr.............................................41.Ex.21
– albiziae Hansf. & Deighton, ‘albizziae’........................F.9.Ex.1
Meliosma Blume........................................60G.Ex.1
Menispermum hirsutum L...................................58.Ex.5
– villosum Lam..........................................58.Ex.5
Mentha L..............................................51.Ex.1
– aquatica L............................................H.2.Ex.1; H.11.Ex.2
– arvensis L............................................H.2.Ex.1
– ×piperita f. hirsuta Sole..................................H.12.Ex.1
– – L. nothosubsp. piperita..................................H.11.Ex.2
– – nothosubsp. pyramidalis (Ten.) Harley........................H.11.Ex.2
– ×smithiana R. A. Graham.................................H.3.Ex.1
– spicata L.............................................H.2.Ex.1
154
– – subsp. spicata........................................H.11.Ex.2
– – subsp. tomentosa (Briq.) Harley............................H.11.Ex.2
Merulius lacrimans (Wulfen : Fr.) Schumach. : Fr., ‘lacrymans’.........F.3.Ex.2
Mesembryanthemum L.....................................60.Ex.1
– sect. Minima Haw.......................................36.Ex.4
Mesospora vanbosseae Børgesen, ‘van-bosseae’....................60.Ex.40
Mespilodaphne mauritiana Meisn..............................55.Ex.1
Mespilus L.............................................41.Ex.17
Metasequoia Hu & W. C. Cheng..............................11.Ex.32
Metasequoia Miki........................................11.Ex.32
– disticha (Heer) Miki.....................................11.Ex.32
– glyptostroboides Hu & W. C. Cheng..........................11.Ex.32
Mezoneuron Desf., ‘Mezonevron’.............................60.Ex.13
Micrasterias pinnatifida (Kütz.) ex Ralfs.........................46.Ex.42
Micromeria benthamii Webb & Berthel..........................H.10.Ex.5
– ×benthamineolens Svent...................................H.10.Ex.5
– pineolens Svent.........................................H.10.Ex.5
Microsporidia..........................................Pre.8; 45.N.1; F.1.1
Miltonia Lindl...........................................H.6.Ex.6
Mimosa cineraria L.......................................53.Ex.19+21
– cinerea L.............................................53.Ex.19+21
– latisiliqua L...........................................23.Ex.8
Minthe St.-Lag..........................................51.Ex.1
Minuartia L............................................11.Ex.12
– stricta..............................................11.Ex.12
Mirabilis glutinosa Kuntze..................................41.Ex.28
– glutinosa A. Nels.......................................41.Ex.28
– laevis subsp. glutinosa (Standl.) A. E. Murray....................41.Ex.28
Molina racemosa Cav......................................53.Ex.4
– racemosa Ruiz & Pav.....................................53.Ex.4
Monochaete Döll........................................53.*Ex.12
Monochaetum (DC.) Naudin.................................53.*Ex.12
Monotropa L...........................................19.Ex.7
Monotropaceae.........................................19.Ex.7
Montanoa imbricata V. A. Funk..............................30.Ex.18
Montia parvifolia (DC.) Greene...............................25.Ex.1
– – subsp. flagellaris (Bong.) Ferris............................25.Ex.1
– – subsp. parvifolia......................................25.Ex.1
Mora Benth............................................53.Ex.5
Moreae...............................................53.Ex.5
Morus L..............................................53.Ex.5
Mouriri subg. Pericrene Morley..............................6.Ex.6
Musa basjoo Siebold & Zucc. ex Iinuma.........................38.Ex.7
Musci................................................13.1(b), Ex.1–2
Musineon Raf., ‘Musenium’.................................61.Ex.1
Mussaenda frondosa L., ‘fr. [fructu] frondoso’.....................23.Ex.22
Mycena (Pers.) Roussel....................................30.Ex.16
– coccinea (Sowerby) Quél..................................6.Ex.15
– coccineoides Grgur......................................6.Ex.15; 49.Ex.9
– seynii...............................................60.Ex.32
– taiwanensis Rexer......................................30.Ex.16
Mycosphaerella aleuritidis (Miyake) S. H. Ou.....................F.8.Ex.2
Myginda sect. Gyminda Griseb................................48.Ex.3
– integrifolia Poir........................................48.Ex.3
Myogalum boucheanum Kunth...............................36.Ex.7
Myosotis L.............................................47.Ex.2; 60G.1(b)
Myrcia laevis O. Berg.....................................7.Ex.4
– laevis G. Don.........................................7.Ex.4
– lucida McVaugh.......................................7.Ex.4
Myrosma cannifolia L. f., ‘cannaefolia’.........................60.Ex.36
Nanobubon hypogaeum J. Magee..............................30.Ex.4
Napaea L..............................................53.*Ex.12; 60.Ex.37
Narcissus bulbocodium subsp. albidus (Emb. & Maire) Maire...........24.Ex.4
– – var. “eu-albidus”.....................................24.Ex.4
– – var. “eu-praecox”.....................................24.Ex.4
– – subsp. praecox Gattef. & Maire............................24.Ex.4
– pseudonarcissus L., ‘Pseudo Narcissus’........................23.Ex.21
155
Nartheciaceae..........................................18.Ex.7
Narthecium Gérard.......................................18.Ex.7
Narthecium Huds.........................................18.Ex.7
Nasturtium W. T. Aiton....................................14.Ex.3
Nasturtium Mill..........................................14.Ex.3
– “nasturtium-aquaticum”..................................23.Ex.3
Nekemias grossedentata (Hand.-Mazz.) J. Wen & Z. L. Nie............41.Ex.19
Nelumbo Adans., ‘Nelumbium’...............................18.Ex.2; 61.Ex.1
Nelumbonaceae.........................................18.Ex.2
Neoptilota Kylin.........................................44.Ex.1
Neotysonia phyllostegia (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson..................46.Ex.9
Nepeta ×faassenii Bergmans ex Stearn..........................32.Ex.3
Nesoluma st-johnianum Lam & Meeuse, ‘St.-Johnianum’..............60.Ex.47
Neuropteris (Brongn.) Sternb.................................60.Ex.13
Neves-armondia K. Schum..................................20.Ex.8
Nilssonia Brongn., ‘Nilsonia’................................60.Ex.7
Nolanea (Fr. : Fr.) P. Kumm.................................11.Ex.21
Nostocaceae...........................................13.1(e); 46.Ex.41
Nothotsuga C. N. Page.....................................46.Ex.48
Nymphaea gigantea f. hudsonii (Anon.) K. C. Landon................46.Ex.45
– nelumbo L............................................61.Ex.1
Ocimum gratissimum L.....................................7.Ex.14
Odontoglossum Kunth.....................................H.6.Ex.6
Oedogoniaceae.........................................13.1(e)
Oenothera biennis L.......................................H.4.Ex.1
– ×drawertii Renner ex Rostański.............................H.4.Ex.1
– macrocarpa Nutt........................................46.Ex.46
– villosa Thunb..........................................H.4.Ex.1
– ×wienii Renner ex Rostański...............................H.4.Ex.1
Omphalina coccinea Murrill.................................6.Ex.15; 49.Ex.9
Oncidium Sw...........................................46.Ex.25
– triquetrum (Sw.) R. Br....................................46.Ex.25
Opegrapha oulocheila Tuck..................................9.Ex.1
Oplopanax (Torr. & A. Gray) Miq.............................62.Ex.4
Opuntia Mill............................................41.Ex.6
– ficus-indica (L.) Mill.....................................41.Ex.6
– vulgaris Mill..........................................41.Ex.6
×Orchicoeloglossum mixtum Asch. & Graebn......................H.8.Ex.2
Orchis L..............................................62.*Ex.1
– fuchsii Druce..........................................H.8.Ex.2
Orcuttia Vasey..........................................60B.Ex.2
Oreodoxa regia Kunth.....................................14.Ex.6
Ormocarpum P. Beauv.....................................62.Ex.3
Ornithogalum L..........................................36.Ex.7
– boucheanum (Kunth) Asch.................................36.Ex.7
Orobanche artemisiae Gren..................................51.Ex.1
– artemisiepiphyta St.-Lag...................................51.Ex.1
– columbariae Gren. & Godr.................................51.Ex.1
– columbarihaerens St.-Lag..................................51.Ex.1
– rapum Wallr...........................................51.Ex.1
– rapum-genistae Thuill....................................51.Ex.1
– sarothamnophyta St.-Lag..................................51.Ex.1
“Orontiaceae”..........................................37.Ex.7
Osbeckia L.............................................53.Ex.7
Ostrya virginiana (Mill.) K. Koch.............................60D.Ex.1
Ottoa Kunth...........................................60B.1(a)
Oxycoccus Hill..........................................23.Ex.9
– macrocarpos (Aiton) Pursh, ‘macrocarpus’......................23.Ex.6+9
Pachysphaera Ostenf......................................11.Ex.34
Palma elata W. Bartram...................................14.Ex.6
Palmae...............................................18.5
Panax nossibiensis Drake...................................38.Ex.16
Pancheria humboldtiana Guillaumin...........................46.Ex.23
Papaver rhoeas L........................................23.Ex.1
Papilionaceae..........................................18.5; 19.8
Papilionoideae..........................................19.8
Paradinandra Schönenberger & E. M. Friis.......................3.Ex.2
156
Parasitaxus de Laub.......................................62.Ex.2
Parietales.............................................16.Ex.2
Parnassiales...........................................37.Ex.2
Partitatheca D. Edwards & al................................30.Ex.5
Passiflora salpoensis S. Leiva & Tantalean, ‘salpoense’...............33.Ex.3
Patellaria Fr. : Fr.........................................F.3.Ex.3
Patellaria Hoffm.........................................F.3.Ex.3
Paullinia paullinioides Radlk.................................10.Ex.2
Pavia Mill.............................................11.Ex.6
Peltophorum (Vogel) Benth..................................53.*Ex.12
Peltophorus Desv........................................53.*Ex.12
Penicillium Link.........................................F.8.Ex.1
– brefeldianum B. O. Dodge.................................F.8.Ex.1
– dodgei Pitt...........................................F.8.Ex.1
Peperomia lasierrana Trel. & Yunck., ‘la-sierrana’.................60.Ex.40
Peponia Grev...........................................53.*Ex.12
Peponium Engl..........................................53.*Ex.12
Pereskia opuntiiflora DC., ‘opuntiaeflora’........................60.Ex.36
Peridermium balsameum Peck...............................23.Ex.5
Peridinium oblongum (Auriv.) Cleve...........................11.Ex.30
Persicaria maculosa Gray..................................52.Ex.7
– mitis Delarbre.........................................52.Ex.7
– runcinata (Buch.-Ham. ex D. Don) Masam......................41.Ex.3
– segetum (Kunth) Small, ‘segeta’.............................23.Ex.10
Petalodinium Cachon & Cachon-Enj............................45.Ex.2
Petrophiloides Bowerb.....................................11.Ex.31
Petrosimonia brachiata (Pall.) Bunge...........................51.Ex.4
– oppositifolia (Pall.) Litv...................................51.Ex.4
Peyrousea DC...........................................60B.Ex.2
Peziza corticalis Pers......................................41.Ex.26
Phaca alpina L..........................................6.Ex.17
Phaseolus leptostachyus f. purpureus Freytag.....................36.Ex.13
– – var. “pinnatifolius”....................................36.Ex.13
×Philageria Mast........................................H.9.Ex.1
Philesia Comm. ex Juss....................................H.9.Ex.1
Philgamia Baill..........................................38.Ex.14
– hibbertioides Baill.......................................38.Ex.14
Phippsia (Trin.) R. Br......................................H.6.Ex.4
Phleum hirsutum Honck....................................46.Ex.47
Phlox divaricata L. subsp. divaricata...........................H.3.Ex.3
– – subsp. laphamii (A. W. Wood) Wherry.......................H.3.Ex.3
– drummondii..........................................28.Ex.2
– pilosa subsp. ozarkana Wherry..............................H.3.Ex.3
Phlyctidia Müll. Arg......................................35.Ex.2
– boliviensis (Nyl.) Müll. Arg.................................35.Ex.2
– ludoviciensis Müll. Arg...................................35.Ex.2
Phlyctis andensis Nyl......................................35.Ex.2
– boliviensis Nyl.........................................35.Ex.2
– brasiliensis Nyl.........................................35.Ex.2
– sorediiformis Kremp.....................................35.Ex.2
Phoebe calcarea S. Lee & F. N. Wei...........................9.Ex.3
Phoenix theophrasti Greuter.................................60.Ex.17
Pholiota (Fr. : Fr.) P. Kumm.................................F.4.Ex.1
Phoradendron Nutt.......................................60.Ex.1
Phyllachora annonicola Chardón, ‘anonicola’.....................F.9.Ex.1
Phyllanthus L...........................................47A.Ex.1
Phyllerpa prolifera var. firma Kütz.............................24.Ex.8
Phyllogonium Brid........................................53.Ex.18
Phyllogonum Coville......................................53.Ex.18
Physconia Poelt.........................................10.Ex.4
– pulverulacea Moberg....................................10.Ex.4
Physma arnoldianum Hepp..................................46.Ex.13
Physospermum Cusson....................................30.Ex.1
Phyteuma L............................................62.*Ex.1
Picea L...............................................52.Ex.2; 60.Ex.28
– abies (L.) H. Karst.......................................52.Ex.2
– excelsa Link..........................................52.Ex.2
157
Pinaceae, ‘Pineae’.......................................46.Ex.33
Pinopsida.............................................16.Ex.1
Pinus L...............................................16.Ex.1
– abies L..............................................52.Ex.2
– alcoquiana (Veitch ex Lindl.) Carrière, ‘alcockiana’................60.Ex.28
– excelsa Lam...........................................52.Ex.2
– longaeva D. K. Bailey....................................46.Ex.2
– mairei H. Lév., ‘Pirus’...................................50F.Ex.1
– mertensiana Bong.......................................7.Ex.1
Piper pseudo-oblongum McKown.............................60.Ex.41
Piptolepis Benth.........................................38.Ex.12
– phillyreoides Benth......................................38.Ex.12
Piratinera Aubl..........................................36.Ex.11
Piromyces polycephalus Y. C. Chen & al.........................29.Ex.1
Pisocarpium Link........................................62.Ex.3
Pittosporaceae..........................................46.Ex.35
Pittosporum buxifolium W. Q. Yin.............................46.Ex.35
Planera aquatica J. F. Gmel.................................35.Ex.3
Platycarya Siebold & Zucc..................................11.Ex.31
Plectranthus L’Hér.......................................14.Ex.8
– fruticosus L’Hér........................................14.Ex.8
– punctatus (L. f.) L’Hér....................................14.Ex.8
Pleione subg. Scopulorum Torelli & Riccab.......................21.Ex.1
Pleuripetalum T. Durand...................................53.*Ex.8
Pleuropetalum Hook. f.....................................53.*Ex.8
Plumbaginaceae.........................................18.Ex.1
Plumbago L............................................18.Ex.1
Pluteus Fr.............................................F.3.Ex.4
– atricapillus (Batsch) Fayod................................F.3.Ex.4
– cervinus (Schaeff.) P. Kumm................................F.3.Ex.4
Pneumocystis P. Delanoë & Delanoë...........................45.Ex.6
– jirovecii Frenkel, ‘jiroveci’.................................45.Ex.7
Poa L................................................18.5; 19.Ex.3
– sibirica Roshev.........................................6.Ex.7
– vallesiana Honck.......................................46.Ex.47
Poaceae..............................................18.5; 19.Ex.3
Poeae................................................19.Ex.3
Poinae...............................................19.Ex.3
Polycarpaea Lam........................................62.Ex.3
Polycarpon L...........................................62.Ex.3
Polycnemum oppositifolium Pall...............................51.Ex.4
Polygonum L...........................................37.Ex.9
– persicaria L...........................................52.Ex.7
– runcinatum D. Don......................................41.Ex.3
– segetum Kunth.........................................23.Ex.10
Polypodium australe Fée...................................52.Ex.19
– filix-femina L., ‘F. femina’.................................23.*Ex.23
– filix-mas L., ‘F. mas’....................................23.*Ex.23
– ×font-queri...........................................52.Ex.19
– fragile L., ‘F. fragile’....................................23.*Ex.23
– ×shivasiae Rothm.......................................52.Ex.19
– subulatum Vell.........................................38.Ex.15
– tenerum Roxb..........................................11.Ex.17
– vulgare nothosubsp. mantoniae (Rothm.) Schidlay.................H.3.Ex.1
– – subsp. prionodes (Asch.) Rothm............................52.Ex.19; H.2.Ex.1
– – L. subsp. vulgare......................................52.Ex.19; H.2.Ex.1
Polypogon Desf..........................................H.2.Ex.1; H.6.Ex.1
– monspeliensis (L.) Desf...................................H.2.Ex.1
Polyporus versicolor (L.) Fr..................................10.Ex.9
– zonatus.............................................10.Ex.9
Polysphaeridium zoharyi (M. Rossignol) J. P. Bujak & al..............11.Ex.29
Pooideae..............................................19.Ex.3
Populus ×canadensis var. marilandica (Poir.) Rehder................H.12.Ex.1
– – var. serotina (R. Hartig) Rehder............................H.12.Ex.1
Porella L..............................................13.Ex.1
– pinnata L.............................................13.Ex.1
Porroglossum echidna (Rchb. f.) Garay, ‘echidnum’.................23.Ex.10
158
Potamogeton L..........................................18.Ex.1
Potamogetonaceae.......................................18.Ex.1
Potentilla atrosanguinea Lodd. ex D. Don........................H.10.Ex.2
– “atrosanguinea-pedata”..................................H.10.Ex.2
– pedata Nestl...........................................H.10.Ex.2
Primula sect. Dionysiopsis Pax...............................11.Ex.7
Prochlorothrix hollandica Burger-Wiersma & al....................45.Ex.3
Prosopis L.............................................53.Ex.21
– cineraria (L.) Druce.....................................53.Ex.21
Protea L..............................................14.Ex.10; 50E.Ex.1
– cynaroides (L.) L.......................................14.Ex.10
Protodiniferaceae, ‘Protodiniferidae’...........................45.Ex.5
Protofagacea allonensis Herend. & al...........................1.Ex.2
Psathyrella sarcocephala (Fr. : Fr.) Singer.......................F.3A.Ex.2
×Pseudadenia P. F. Hunt...................................H.6.Ex.3
Pseudelephantopus Rohr, ‘Pseudo-elephantopus’...................60.Ex.44
Pseudoaraucaria Fliche, ‘Pseudo-Araucaria’.....................60.Ex.45
Pseudoditrichaceae.......................................38.Ex.18
Pseudoditrichum mirabile Steere & Iwatsuki......................38.Ex.18
Pseudo-fumaria Medik.....................................60.Ex.44
Pseudolarix Gordon......................................10.Ex.5
– amabilis (J. Nelson) Rehder................................10.Ex.5
Pseudorchis Ség.........................................H.6.Ex.3
Pseudoyoungia D. Maity & Maiti sect. Pseudoyoungia...............22.Ex.6
– sect. Simulatrices (Sennikov) D. Maity & Maiti...................22.Ex.6
Psilotum truncatum R. Br...................................52.Ex.6
Psoroma murale (Schreb.) Samp...............................41.Ex.13
Pteridales.............................................16.Ex.5
Pteridium aquilinum subsp. caudatum (L.) Bonap...................26A.Ex.2
– – var. caudatum (L.) Sadeb.................................26A.Ex.2
Pteridophyta...........................................13.1(a); 16.Ex.3; 41.Ex.27
Pteridophytina..........................................16.Ex.3
“Pteridospermaexylon”....................................36.Ex.5
– “theresiae”...........................................36.Ex.5
Pteris caudata L.........................................26A.Ex.2
Ptilostemon Cass.........................................11.Ex.9
– sect. Cassinia Greuter....................................H.7.Ex.1
– nothosect. Platon Greuter.................................H.7.Ex.1
– sect. Platyrhaphium Greuter................................H.7.Ex.1
– nothosect. Plinia Greuter..................................H.7.Ex.1
– sect. Ptilostemon.......................................H.7.Ex.1
– chamaepeuce (L.) Less....................................11.Ex.9
– muticus Cass..........................................11.Ex.9
Puccinellia Parl..........................................H.6.Ex.4
×Pucciphippsia Tzvelev...................................H.6.Ex.4
Pulsatilla montana subsp. australis (Heuff.) Zämelis.................49.Ex.6
– – subsp. dacica Rummelsp.................................49.Ex.6
– – var. serbica W. Zimm...................................49.Ex.6
Pyraceae..............................................19.Ex.6
Pyrodinium bahamense L. Plate..............................11.Ex.29
Pyroideae.............................................19.Ex.6
Pyrola L..............................................19.Ex.7
Pyrolaceae............................................19.Ex.7
Pyroloideae............................................19.Ex.7
Pyropia yezoensis f. narawaensis N. Kikuchi & al...................46.Ex.28
Pyrus L...............................................19.Ex.6; 41.Ex.17
– calleryana Decne.......................................50F.Ex.1
Quercus L.............................................10A.2
– acutifolia Née.........................................7.Ex.12
– alba L...............................................H.10.Ex.6
– ×deamii Trel..........................................H.10.Ex.6
– frainetto Ten..........................................28.Ex.2
– macrocarpa Michx......................................H.10.Ex.6
– muehlenbergii Engelm....................................H.10.Ex.6
– polystachya A. DC......................................49.Ex.8
– robur L..............................................10A.2
Quisqualis L............................................20.Ex.8
159
Racodium rupestre Pers....................................7.Ex.3

Racosperma nelsonii Pedley.................................6.Ex.18
Radicula Moench........................................20.Ex.2
Radiola Hill............................................23.Ex.4
– linoides Roth..........................................23.Ex.4
– “radiola”............................................23.Ex.4
Ranzanioideae..........................................37.Ex.2
Raphidomonas F. Stein....................................16.Ex.6
Raphidophyceae.........................................16.Ex.6
Ravensara Sonn.........................................55.Ex.1
Renanthera Lour.........................................H.6.Ex.6–7; H.8.Ex.3
Rhamnus L.............................................62.*Ex.1
– sect. Pseudofrangula Grubov...............................22A.Ex.1
– subg. Pseudofrangula (Grubov) Brizicky.......................22A.Ex.1
– vitis-idaea Burm. f., ‘vitis idaea’.............................23.Ex.20
“Rhaptopetalaceae”......................................36.Ex.9
Rhaptopetalum Oliv.......................................36.Ex.9
Rheedia kappleri Eyma....................................9.Ex.7
“Rheum ×cultorum”......................................32.Ex.4
Rhododendreae.........................................19.Ex.4
Rhododendroideae.......................................19.Ex.4
Rhododendron L.........................................19.Ex.4; 20.Ex.1; 22.Ex.1; 60A.Ex.1
– subg. Rhododendron.....................................22.Ex.1
– aureodorsale (W. P. Fang ex J. Q. Fu) Y. P. Ma & J. Nielsen..........30.Ex.6
– bureavii Franch.........................................60.Ex.29
– potaninii Batalin, ‘potanini’................................60.Ex.17
Rhodophyllaceae........................................18.Ex.1
Rhodophyllidaceae.......................................18.Ex.1
Rhodophyllis Kütz.......................................18.Ex.1
Rhodophyllus Quél........................................18.Ex.1
Rhodora L.............................................19.Ex.4
Rhodoreae............................................19.Ex.4
Rhodymenia Grev., ‘Rhodomenia’.............................14.Ex.12
Rhynchospora Vahl.......................................37.Ex.10
Ribes non-scriptum (Berger) Standl.............................60.Ex.41
Richardia L............................................51.Ex.5
Richardsonia Kunth......................................51.Ex.5
Ricinocarpaceae.........................................6.Ex.11
Ricinocarpeae..........................................6.Ex.11
Ricinocarpos Desf........................................6.Ex.11
– sect. Anomodiscus Müll. Arg................................21.Ex.1
Rodaucea W. Rossi & Santam................................30.Ex.2
×Rodrettiopsis..........................................H.6.Ex.7
Rodriguezia Ruiz & Pav....................................H.6.Ex.7
Roridomyces Rexer.......................................30.Ex.16
Rorippa Scop...........................................14.Ex.3
Rosa L................................................18.Ex.1; 19.Ex.2+6; 20.Ex.1; 46.Ex.1
– canina L.............................................H.3.Ex.3
– gallica L.............................................46.Ex.1
– – var. gallica..........................................46.Ex.1
– – var. versicolor L.......................................46.Ex.1
– glutinosa var. leioclada H. Christ............................24.Ex.10
– jundzillii f. leioclada Borbás................................24.Ex.10
– pissardii Carrière, ‘pissarti’................................60.Ex.18
– ×toddiae Wolley-Dod, ‘toddii’..............................60.Ex.22
Rosaceae.............................................18.Ex.1; 19.Ex.2+6; 46.Ex.1
Roseae...............................................19.Ex.2
Rosoideae.............................................19.Ex.2
Roystonea elata (W. Bartram) F. Harper.........................14.Ex.6
– regia (Kunth) O. F. Cook..................................14.Ex.6
Rubia L...............................................53.*Ex.12
Rubus L...............................................53.*Ex.12
– aculeatiflorus Hayata....................................11.Ex.10
– – var. taitoensis (Hayata) T. S. Liu & T. Y. Yang..................11.Ex.10
– amnicola Blanch., ‘amnicolus’..............................23.Ex.11
– fanjingshanensis Boufford & al..............................46.Ex.31
– quebecensis L. H. Bailey..................................60D.Ex.1
160
– taitoensis Hayata.......................................11.Ex.10
– – var. taitoensis........................................11.Ex.10
Rumex cantabricus Rech. f..................................23.Ex.5
Saccharomyces Meyen....................................16.Ex.6
Saccharomycetes........................................16.Ex.6
Sacheria Sirodot.........................................48.Ex.1
Sadleria hillebrandii Rob...................................41.Ex.22
– pallida Hook. & Arn.....................................41.Ex.22
Salicaceae.............................................18.Ex.1; 52.Ex.17
Salicornia europaea L.....................................9.Ex.10; 26.Ex.3
– – var. herbacea L.......................................26.Ex.3
Salix L................................................18.Ex.1; 52.Ex.3+17
– sect. Argenteae W. D. J. Koch..............................49.Ex.7
– sect. Glaucae Pax.......................................49.Ex.7
– subsect. Myrtilloides C. K. Schneid............................49.Ex.7
– aurita L..............................................H.2.Ex.1
– caprea L.............................................H.2.Ex.1
– ×capreola Andersson....................................H.3.Ex.1
– glaucops Andersson.....................................50.Ex.2
– humilis Marshall.......................................11.Ex.28
– – var. microphylla (Andersson) Fernald........................11.Ex.28
– – var. tristis (Aiton) Griggs................................11.Ex.28
– myrsinifolia Salisb.......................................52.Ex.3
– myrsinites L...........................................52.Ex.3
– tristis var. microphylla...................................11.Ex.28
– – Aiton var. tristis......................................11.Ex.28
Salvia sect. Hemisphace Benth................................41.Ex.4; 46.Ex.18
– grandiflora subsp. willeana Holmboe..........................24.Ex.7
Sapium subsect. Patentinervia Pax & K. Hoffm.....................21.Ex.1
Saxifraga aizoon subf. surculosa Engl. & Irmsch....................24.Ex.1
Scaevola taccada (Gaertn.) Roxb..............................41.Ex.10
Scandix pecten-veneris L., ‘pecten ♀’...........................23.Ex.2
Scenedesmus armatus f. brevicaudatus L. S. Péterfi..................53.Ex.16
– – var. brevicaudatus (Hortob.) Pankow.........................53.Ex.16
– – var. brevicaudatus (L. S. Péterfi) E. H. Hegew...................53.Ex.16
– carinatus var. brevicaudatus Hortob...........................53.Ex.16
“Schaenoides”..........................................20.Ex.10
Schiedea kealiae Caum & Hosaka.............................39.Ex.2
Schinus molle L..........................................23.Ex.7
Schoenoxiphium Nees.....................................46.Ex.5
– altum Kukkonen.......................................46.Ex.5
Schoenus L.............................................20.Ex.10
Schollera Roth..........................................23.Ex.9
– macrocarpos (Aiton) Steud., ‘macrocarpa’......................23.Ex.9
Scilla peruviana L........................................51.Ex.3
“Scirpoides”...........................................20.Ex.10
– “paradoxus”..........................................35.Ex.4
Scirpoides Ség..........................................35.Ex.4; 38.Ex.19
Scirpus L..............................................20.Ex.10
– sect. Pseudoeriophorum Jurtzev, ‘Pseudo-eriophorum’..............60.Ex.40
– cespitosus L...........................................60.Ex.1
– iridifolius Bory........................................41.Ex.25
Sclerocroton integerrimus Hochst..............................11.Ex.23
– reticulatus Hochst.......................................11.Ex.23
Scleroderma Pers.........................................18.Ex.1
Sclerodermataceae.......................................18.Ex.1
Scolosanthus leonardii Alain................................60.Ex.26
Scyphophorus ecmocynus Gray...............................58.Ex.6
Scytanthus Hook.........................................53.*Ex.8
Scytopetalaceae.........................................36.Ex.9
“Scytopetalum”.........................................36.Ex.9
Sebastiano-schaueria Nees..................................20.Ex.8
Sebertia Engl...........................................36.Ex.1
Sedum L...............................................11.Ex.19
– candollei Raym.-Hamet...................................11.Ex.19
– eriocarpum subsp. spathulifolium ’t Hart.......................40.Ex.9
– “mucizonia subsp. urceolatum”.............................40.Ex.7
161
– sedoides (Decne.) Raym.-Hamet.............................11.Ex.19

Selaginella P. Beauv......................................31.Ex.6
– apus Spring...........................................61.Ex.2
Selenicereus (A. Berger) Britton & Rose.........................H.6.Ex.1
×Seleniphyllum G. D. Rowley................................H.6.Ex.1
Sempervivum sedoides Decne.................................11.Ex.19
Senecio sect. Synotii Benth..................................32.Ex.2
– napaeifolius (DC.) Sch. Bip., ‘napeaefolius’.....................53.*Ex.12; 60.Ex.37
– napifolius MacOwan.....................................53.*Ex.12
Serratula chamaepeuce L...................................11.Ex.9
Sersalisia R. Br..........................................36.Ex.1
Seseli divaricatum Pursh...................................61.Ex.1
Sesleria Scop...........................................60B.1(b)
Setaria excurrens var. leviflora Keng ex S. L. Chen..................40.Ex.8
Sicyos L...............................................62.*Ex.1
– triqueter Moc. & Sessé ex Ser...............................46.Ex.16
Sida retusa L...........................................9.Ex.11
Sideroxylon L., ‘Sideroxylum’................................13.Ex.4
Sigillaria Brongn.........................................11.Ex.1
Sigillariostrobus Schimp....................................11.Ex.1
Silene L...............................................11.Ex.14
– behen L..............................................11.Ex.14
– cucubalus Wibel.......................................11.Ex.14
– vulgaris (Moench) Garcke.................................11.Ex.14
Simarouba Aubl.........................................53.Ex.13
Simaruba Boehm.........................................53.Ex.13
Siphonia Benth..........................................30.Ex.11
Siphonia Rich. ex Schreb...................................30.Ex.11
Skeletonema Grev........................................6.Ex.4
Skeletonemopsis P. A. Sims.................................6.Ex.4
Skytanthus Meyen........................................53.*Ex.8
Sladenia integrifolia Y. M. Shui & W. H. Chen....................40A.Ex.1
Sloanea L..............................................60B.1(a)
Smithia Aiton...........................................14.Ex.11
Smithia Scop............................................14.Ex.11
Solanaceae............................................46.Ex.38
Solanum L.............................................22.Ex.3
– sect. Acanthophora Dunal.................................11.Ex.3
– sect. Leptostemonum Dunal................................11.Ex.3
– subg. Leptostemonum Bitter................................11.Ex.3
– subg. Minon Raf........................................22.Ex.3
– sect. Pseudocapsicum (Medik.) Roem. & Schult...................22.Ex.3
– subg. Solanum.........................................22.Ex.3
– baretiae Tepe.........................................31.Ex.5
– caricaefolium Rusby.....................................60G.Ex.3
– dasypus Dunal.........................................46.Ex.38
– fructu-tecto Cav........................................60.Ex.41
– lycopersicum L.........................................14.Ex.1
– mammosum L..........................................11.Ex.3
– melongena var. insanum (L.) Prain, ‘insana’.....................24.Ex.2
– pseudocapsicum L.......................................22.Ex.3
– rantonnetii Carrière, ‘rantonnei’.............................60.Ex.31
– tuberosum var. murukewillu Ochoa, ‘muru’kewillu’................60.Ex.46
– umtuma Voronts. & S. Knapp...............................6.Ex.7
Solidago L.............................................11.Ex.39
– ×snarskisii Gudžinskas & Žalneravičius........................8.Ex.4
×Solidaster H. R. Wehrh....................................11.Ex.39
Solms-laubachia Muschl. ex Diels.............................20.Ex.8
Sophora tomentosa subsp. occidentalis (L.) Brummitt................46.Ex.10
×Sophrolaeliocattleya.....................................H.6.Ex.7
Sophronitis Lindl.........................................H.6.Ex.7
Spartium biflorum Desf.....................................11.Ex.11
Spathiphyllum solomonense Nicolson, ‘solomonensis’................50F.Ex.3
Spergula stricta Sw.......................................11.Ex.12
Spermatophyta..........................................13.1(a); 41.Ex.27
Sphagnaceae...........................................13.1(b–c)
Sphagnum [unranked] Rigida Lindb............................21.Ex.4
162
– sect. Rigida (Lindb.) Limpr.................................21.Ex.4

Sphenocleoideae.........................................19.Ex.1
Spiniferites pachydermus (M. Rossignol) P. C. Reid.................11.Ex.35
Spiraea L..............................................19.Ex.6
Spiraeaceae............................................19.Ex.6
Spiraeoideae...........................................19.Ex.6
Spondias mombin L.......................................23.Ex.1
Stachys L..............................................62.*Ex.1
– ambigua Sm...........................................50.Ex.1
– palustris subsp. pilosa (Nutt.) Epling..........................26A.Ex.1
– – var. pilosa (Nutt.) Fernald................................26A.Ex.1
Stamnostoma A. G. Long...................................1.Ex.3
– huttonense A. G. Long...................................1.Ex.3
Staphylea L............................................51.Ex.1
Staphylis St.-Lag.........................................51.Ex.1
Stenocarpus R. Br........................................62.Ex.3
“Stereocaulon subdenudatum”...............................36.Ex.6
Stillingia integerrima (Hochst.) Baill............................11.Ex.23
Stobaea mckenii Harv., ‘M‘Kenii’.............................60.Ex.48
Streptophyta...........................................46.Ex.14
Strychnos L............................................62.*Ex.1
“Suaeda baccata”.......................................35.Ex.1
– “vera”..............................................35.Ex.1
Swainsona formosa (G. Don) Joy Thomps........................11.Ex.25
Symphostemon Hiern......................................53.*Ex.12
Symphyostemon Miers.....................................53.*Ex.12
Synsepalum letestui Aubrév. & Pellegr., ‘Le Testui’..................60.Ex.43
Synthyris subg. Plagiocarpus Pennell...........................11.Ex.26
– Benth. subg. Synthyris....................................11.Ex.26
Talinum polyandrum Hook..................................58.Ex.1
– polyandrum Ruiz & Pav...................................58.Ex.1
Tamnus Mill............................................51.Ex.1
Tamus L...............................................51.Ex.1
Taonabo Aubl...........................................62.Ex.8
– dentata Aubl..........................................62.Ex.8
– punctata Aubl..........................................62.Ex.8
Tapeinanthus Boiss. ex Benth................................41.Ex.1; 53.Ex.1
Tapeinanthus Herb........................................53.Ex.1
Taraxacum Zinn, ‘Taraxacvm’...............................60.Ex.11
Tasmanites E. J. Newton...................................11.Ex.34
Taxus L...............................................62.Ex.2
– baccata var. variegata Weston..............................28.Ex.1
Tephroseris (Rchb.) Rchb...................................49.Ex.3
– sect. Eriopappus (Dumort.) Holub............................49.Ex.3
Terminaliaceae.........................................14.Ex.4
Tersonia cyathiflora (Fenzl.) J. W. Green........................46.Ex.34
Tetraglochin Poepp.......................................62.Ex.5
Tetragonia L............................................60.Ex.39
– tetragonoides (Pall.) Kuntze................................60.Ex.39
Teucrium gnaphalodes L’Hér.................................9.Ex.15
Thamnos St.-Lag.........................................51.Ex.1
Thamnus Link..........................................51.Ex.1
Thea L................................................13.Ex.3
Thunbergia Montin.......................................19.Ex.9
Thunbergia Retz.........................................19.Ex.9
Thunbergioideae........................................19.Ex.9
Thuspeinanta T. Durand....................................41.Ex.1; 53.Ex.1
Thymus britannicus Ronniger................................11.Ex.16
– praecox subsp. arcticus (Durand) Jalas.........................11.Ex.16
– – subsp. britannicus (Ronniger) Holub.........................11.Ex.16
– serpyllum subsp. arcticus (Durand) Hyl.........................11.Ex.16
– – var. arcticus Durand....................................11.Ex.16
– – subsp. britannicus (Ronniger) P. Fourn........................11.Ex.16
Tiarella cordifolia L.......................................H.11.Ex.1
Tibetoseris sect. Simulatrices Sennikov..........................22.Ex.6
– Sennikov sect. Tibetoseris.................................22.Ex.6
Tillaea L..............................................51.Ex.1
163
Tillandsia barclayana var. minor (Gilmartin) Butcher................41.Ex.29

– bryoides Griseb. ex Baker.................................9.Ex.13
– lateritia André.........................................41.Ex.29
Tilletia caries (DC.) Tul. & C. Tul.............................H.2.Ex.1
– foetida (Wallr.) Liro.....................................H.2.Ex.1
Tillia St.-Lag...........................................51.Ex.1
Tithymalus Gaertn........................................36.Ex.12
– “jaroslavii”..........................................36.Ex.12
Tmesipteris elongata P. A. Dang...............................52.Ex.6
– truncata (R. Br.) Desv....................................52.Ex.6
Torreya Arn............................................53.Ex.2
Torreya Raf............................................53.Ex.2
Trachynia Link.........................................23.Ex.9
– distachyos (L.) Link, ‘distachya’.............................23.Ex.9
Tragus berteronianus Schult.................................60.Ex.30
Tremellaceae...........................................37.Ex.6
Triaspis mozambica A. Juss..................................60.Ex.1
Trichipteris kalbreyeri (Baker) R. M. Tryon.......................41.Ex.24
Trichoderma dorotheae Samuels & Dodd........................F.8.Ex.4
Tricholomataceae........................................18.Ex.10
Trifolium L.............................................23.*Ex.23
– indicum L., ‘M. indica’...................................23.*Ex.23
Triglochin L............................................62.Ex.5
Trilepisium Thouars......................................38.Ex.21
– madagascariense DC.....................................38.Ex.21
Trimerophytina.........................................16.Ex.6
Trimerophyton Hopping....................................16.Ex.6
Trisetum Pers...........................................46.Ex.39
Triticum L.............................................H.3.Ex.3; H.8.Ex.1
– aestivum L............................................H.3.Ex.3
– laxum Fr.............................................H.5.Ex.1
×Tritordeum Asch. & Graebn................................H.8.Ex.1
Trollius taihasenzanensis Masam..............................60.Ex.4
Tropaeolum majus L......................................23.Ex.5
Tsuga (Endl.) Carrière.....................................7.Ex.1
– heterophylla (Raf.) Sarg...................................7.Ex.1
– mertensiana (Bong.) Carrière...............................7.Ex.1
Tuber F. H. Wigg. : Fr.....................................20.Ex.3
– gulosorum F. H. Wigg....................................20.Ex.3
Tuctoria Reeder.........................................60B.Ex.2
Tursiocola denysii Frankovich & M. J. Sullivan....................8.Ex.2
– podocnemicola C. E. Wetzel................................29.Ex.4
Ubochea Baill...........................................60B.Ex.2
Uffenbachia Fabr., ‘Vffenbachia’..............................60.Ex.11
Uladendron codesuri Marc.-Berti.............................60.Ex.20
Ulmus racemosa Thomas...................................50C.Ex.1
Umbelliferae...........................................18.5
Uredinales............................................F.3.1
Uredo pustulata Pers. : Pers., ‘Vredo pvstvlata’....................60.Ex.12
Uromyces fabae (Pers.) de Bary...............................23.Ex.1
Urospatheae...........................................37.Ex.2
Urtica “dubia?”.........................................23.Ex.14
Urvillea Kunth..........................................53.*Ex.12; 60B.Ex.2
Ustilaginales...........................................F.3.1
Uva-ursi Duhamel.......................................20.Ex.7
Vaccinium sect. Vitis-idaea A. Gray............................21.Ex.2
– sect. “Vitis idaea”......................................21.Ex.2
– cantabricum Huds......................................23.Ex.5
– macrocarpon Aiton.....................................23.Ex.6+9
Valantia L.............................................60.Ex.27
Valeriana sect. Valerianopsis................................21.Ex.3
Vanda W. Jones ex R. Br....................................H.6.Ex.6–7; H.8.Ex.3
Venturia acerina Plakidas ex M. E. Barr.........................F.8.Ex.3
Verbascum sect. Aulacosperma Murb...........................53.Ex.17
– lychnitis L............................................H.10.Ex.3
– “nigro-lychnitis”.......................................H.10.Ex.3
– nigrum L.............................................23.Ex.5; H.10.Ex.3
164
– ×schiedeanum W. D. J. Koch...............................H.10.Ex.3
Verbena L.............................................19.Ex.5
Verbenaceae...........................................19.Ex.5
Verbesina alba L........................................11.Ex.24
– prostrata L............................................11.Ex.24
Veronica L.............................................11.Ex.26
– subg. Synthyris (Benth.) M. M. Mart. Ort. & al....................11.Ex.26
– agrestis L............................................9.Ex.16
– anagallis-aquatica L., ‘anagallis ’..........................23.Ex.2; 60.Ex.42
– argute-serrata Regel & Schmalh., ‘argute serrata’.................60.Ex.42
Verrucaria aethiobola Wahlenb...............................46.Ex.11
Vexillifera Ducke........................................6.Ex.5
– micranthera Ducke......................................6.Ex.5
Viburnum ternatum Rehder..................................46.Ex.4
Vicia L...............................................18.5; 46.Ex.36
– amurensis f. sanneensis Y. C. Jiang & S. M. Fu...................46.Ex.36
Vinca major L...........................................23.Ex.5
Vincetoxicum Wolf.......................................51.Ex.1
Viola hirta L............................................24.Ex.10
– “qualis”.............................................23.Ex.14
– tricolor var. hirta Ging....................................24.Ex.10
Vitis novae-angliae Fernald.................................60.Ex.41
Vochysia kosnipatae Huamantupa, ‘kosñipatae’....................60.Ex.16
Votadinium calvum P. C. Reid................................11.Ex.30
Vriesea barclayana var. minor Gilmartin.........................41.Ex.29
Vulpia myuros (L.) C. C. Gmel................................26.Ex.2
Wahlenbergia Roth.......................................11.Ex.2
Waltheria americana L.....................................11.Ex.22
– indica L..............................................11.Ex.22
Welwitschia Hook. f.......................................52.Ex.10
Welwitschia Rchb........................................52.Ex.10
Wintera Murray.........................................18.Ex.6
Winteraceae...........................................18.Ex.6
Wisteria Nutt...........................................60.Ex.9
Wollemia nobilis W. G. Jones & al.............................60.Ex.33
Wormia subsessilis Miq....................................52.Ex.18
– suffruticosa Griff. ex Hook. f. & Thomson......................52.Ex.18
Xanthoceras Bunge.......................................62.Ex.6
Xerocomus Quél.........................................62A.Ex.1
Xylomataceae..........................................18.Ex.4
Zanthoxyleae...........................................37.Ex.1
Zanthoxylum caribaeum var. floridanum (Nutt.) A. Gray, ‘Xanthoxylum’....50F.Ex.2
– cribrosum Spreng., ‘Xanthoxylon’............................50F.Ex.2
– trifoliatum L...........................................23.Ex.8
Zingiber neotruncatum T. L. Wu & al...........................53.Ex.6
– truncatum Stokes.......................................53.Ex.6
– truncatum S. Q. Tong....................................53.Ex.6
Zygophyllum billardierei DC., ‘billardierii’.......................60.Ex.31
Zyrphelis Cass...........................................30.Ex.19
165
SUBJECT INDEX
The references in this index are not to pages but to the Articles, Recommendations, etc. of the Code, as follows: Ex. =
Example; *Ex. = voted Example; F. = Chapter F (fungi); fn. = footnote; Gl. = Glossary; H. = Chapter H (hybrids); N. =
Note; Pre. = Preamble; Prin. = Principle; Prov. = Provision (Div. III); R. = Recommendation (Div. III). Arabic numerals
indicate an Article (e.g. 40); Arabic numerals immediately followed by an upper-case letter indicate a Recommendation
(e.g. 46A). Within an Article or Recommendation, the main paragraphs, including footnotes, are listed first, followed
after commas by Notes, then Examples; then after a semicolon by the next relevant Article or Recommendation (e.g.
14.15, N.4, Ex.8; 34.2). Provisions and Recommendations in Div. III are treated similarly (e.g. Prov.4.13, R.1; Prov.8.1).
Continuous sequences are indicated by a dash (e.g. 11.3–8 = Art. 11.3 to 11.8 inclusive; 60.8(a–b) = Art. 60.8(a) and
(b)); interrupted sequences are indicated by a plus sign (e.g. Prov.1.1+4+fn. = Prov. 1.1, 1.4, and 1.4 footnote).
For ease of reference, a few sub-indices have been included under the following headings: Abbreviations and
acronyms, Definitions, Epithets, Publications, Transcriptions, and Word elements.
Scientific names appearing in the Preamble and Division II of the Code are not included in this Subject index, but in the
preceding Index of scientific names.
166
Abbreviation, authors’ names.............................................................46A

– herbarium name..................................................................40.N.4
– personal name..................................................................60B.N.2
– ranks............................................................................5A
Abbreviations and acronyms:
auct. (auctorum)....................................................................50D
CD-ROM (Compact Disc Read-Only Memory)............................................30A.Ex.1
cl. (classis)........................................................................5A
comb. nov. (combinatio nova)....................................................6.10; 32A; Gl.
comb. & stat. nov. (combinatio et status novi)...............................................6.N.5
comb. in stat. nov. (combinatio in statu novo)..............................................6.Ex.13
emend. (emendavit).................................................................47A
& (et)..........................................................................46C.1
& al. (et alii, et aliorum).............................................................46C.2
excl. gen. (excluso genere, exclusis generibus)................................................47A
excl. sp. (exclusa specie, exclusis speciebus).................................................47A
excl. var. (exclusa varietate, exclusis varietatibus)..............................................47A
f. (forma).........................................................................5A
fam. (family, familia).................................................................5A
gen. (genus).......................................................................5A
gen. nov. (genus novum)...........................................................6.9; 32A
IAPT (International Association for Plant Taxonomy) .................Prov.1.4; Prov.2.5; Prov.4.8; Prov.7.3+6(c)
ICNCP (International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants)................................28.N.2
ISBN (International Standard Book Number).................................................29.1
ISSN (International Standard Serial Number).................................................29.1
loc. cit. (loco citato)................................................................41A.1
m. (mihi)........................................................................46D
mut. char. (mutatis characteribus)........................................................47A
n- (notho-).......................................................................H.3.1
nob. (nobis).......................................................................46D
nom. alt. (nomen alternativum)..............................................18.5–6; 19.8+Ex.3; Gl.
nom. cons. (nomen conservandum)...................................................50E.1; Gl.
nom. nov. (nomen novum)......................................................6.11; 32A; Gl.
nom. nud. (nomen nudum)..........................................................50B; Gl.
nom. rej. (nomen rejiciendum)......................................................50E.2; Gl.
nom. sanct. (nomen sanctionatum)....................................................F.3A; Gl.
nothosp. (nothospecies)................................................................5A
op. cit. (opere citato)................................................................41A.1
ord. (ordo)........................................................................5A
orth. cons. (orthographia conservanda)....................................................50E.1
PDF (Portable Document Format)........................................................29.1
p. p. (pro parte)....................................................................47A
pro hybr. (pro hybrida).............................................................50.Ex.2
pro sp. (pro specie).........................................................11.Ex.39; 50.Ex.1
pro syn. (pro synonymo)...........................................................50A; Gl.
s. ampl. (sensu amplo)................................................................47A
s. l. (sensu lato)....................................................................47A
s. str. (sensu stricto).................................................................47A
sect. (section, sectio)..................................................................5A
ser. (series)........................................................................5A
sp. (species).......................................................................5A
sp. nov. (species nova).............................................................6.9; 32A
St (Saint), in epithet..............................................................60C.4(d)
stat. nov. (status novus)...........................................................6.10; 32A
subg. (subgenus)....................................................................5A
subsp. (subspecies)...................................................................5A
tr. (tribe, tribus).....................................................................5A
URL (Uniform Resource Locator)........................................................30.3
var. (variety, varietas).................................................................5A
Absence of a rule...................................................................Pre.13
Abstract of nomenclatural novelties.......................................................30A.6
Abstracting journals..................................................................30A.4
Acceptance of name...............................................................33.1; 36.1
Adjective, as epithet....................................23.1+5+6(a+c); 23A.1–2; 24.2; 60.8(c–d)+10; 60D
– as generic name....................................................................62.3
– as noun.......................................................................20A.1(f)
– plural, as epithet.............................................................21.2; 21B.2–3
167
– – as noun.....................................................................18.1; 19.1
Admixture.......................................................................8.2; Gl.
Agreement, grammatical, see under Gender
– in number......................................................................60.N.4
Agriculture, organisms used in...................................................Pre.11; 4.N.3; 28
Algae, fungi, and plants.........................................................Pre.2+8; Prin.I
Algae
– homonymy with prokaryotic name......................................................54.N.1
– illustration....................................................................44.2; 44A
– Latin description or diagnosis...........................................................44.1
– living culture from holotype............................................................8B.1
– names of classes and subclasses.........................................................16.3
– Nomenclature Committee for......................................................Prov.7.1(h)
– originally assigned to group not covered by this Code............................................45
– starting-points...................................................................13.1(e)
Alliance, instead of order...............................................................17.2
Alteration of circumscription, author citation................................................47; 47A
– of rank, author citation.................................................................49
– – priority........................................................................11.2
– of status, hybrid/non-hybrid.............................................................50
Alternative names.................................................................36.3; Gl.
– different ranks.....................................................................36.3
– families.............................................................10.9; 11.1; 18.5–6; Gl.
– pleomorphic fungi................................................................F.8.N.3
– subfamilies...............................................................10.9; 11.1; 19.8
– valid publication...................................................................36.3
Ambiguity, avoidance.................................................................Pre.1
– of original material or types.........................................................9.9; 9B.2
Amendment, see Modification
American Code of Botanical Nomenclature.........................................10.6–7, Ex.6+10–11
Ampersand (&)......................................................................46C
Anagram.................................................................20.Ex.1; 60B.N.2
Analysis.......................................................................38.9; Gl.
– equivalence for organisms other than vascular plants...........................................38.10
– for valid publication...............................................................38.7–8
Anamorph.......................................................................F.8; Gl.
– names not alternative..............................................................F.8.N.3
– priority........................................................................F.8.N.2
– type..........................................................................F.8.N.2
Anthocerotae, starting-point............................................................13.1(c)
Apostrophe, deletion.................................................................60.13
Appendices.....................................................................Pre.9–10
– database...................................................................14.15; 56.N.2
– proposals concerning..............................................................Prov.2.2
– publication of.................................................................Prov.6.1(d)
Appendix
– I.........................................................................20.N.2; 34.1
– IIA..........................................................14.1, N.1; 18.Ex.10; 50E.1; F.2
– IIB....................................................14.1+5+14; 19.5, Ex.6–7; 46.Ex.8; 50E.1
– III.....6.Ex.4; 10.Ex.4–5; 13.Ex.4; 14.1, N.1, Ex.8+11+13; 18.Ex.7; 19.Ex.9; 50E.1; 53.Ex.13; 60.Ex.8–9; 62.Ex.7; F.2
– IV............................................7.Ex.7; 11.Ex.38; 14.1+3, N.1–2; 50E.1; 52.Ex.7; F.2
– V...........................................................10.Ex.13; 50E.2; 53.Ex.21; 56.1
– VI.......................................................................38.4, Ex.8–9
– VII.................................................................53.4, Ex.18; 60.Ex.23
Arbitrary formation, epithet..............................................................23.2
– generic name..................................................................20.1; 62.3
Archives, International Association for Plant Taxonomy........................................Prov.4.8
Archiving, electronic material............................................................29A
Article(s), in personal name...........................................................60C.4(c)
– of this Code......................................................................Pre.4
Ascomycota, pleomorphic................................................................F.8
Ascription, definition...............................................................46.3; Gl.
– effect on author citation..........................................................46.2+5, N.5
Asexual form, see Anamorph
Author citation (see also Citation)........................................................46; Gl.
– alteration of diagnostic characters.........................................................47
– autonyms....................................................................22.1; 26.1
168
– basionym.........................................................................49
– change of rank...............................................................19A.Ex.1; 49
– external evidence...................................................................46.9
– followed by “in”...........................................................46.N.2, Ex.12+37
– homonyms.......................................................................50C
– hybrid names.......................................................................50
– incorrect form.....................................................................41.6
– internal evidence................................................................46.8, N.5
– names taken up from different designations..................................................46.4
– omission.....................................................................22.1; 26.1
– parenthetical....................................................................46.7; 49
– pre-starting-point authors..............................................................46.7
– replacement name.................................................................49.N.1
– suprageneric names..................................................................49.2
– unchanged..........................................16.3; 18.4; 19.7; 21.4; 24.4; 32.2; 47; 50; 55.3–4
– with “&” or “& al.”..................................................................46C
– with “ex”....................................................................46.5–7+10
Author name, abbreviation........................................................46.Ex.45; 46A
– own to be used.....................................................................46D
– romanization......................................................................46B
– standard forms...........................................................46.Ex.45; 46A.N.1
Authors, method of working.............................................................9A.1
– of proposals to amend this Code................................................Prov.2.5; Prov.8.1
Autograph, indelible..............................................................30.5–6; Gl.
Automatic typification, see also Type........................................7.5–6; 10.8–10; 16; 17; Gl.
Autonym........................................................................6.8; Gl.
– conservation.....................................................................14.10
– establishment..........................................................22.3; 22B; 26.3; 26B
– in new combination................................................................11.N.4
– infraspecific taxa...................................................................26.1
– no author name.................................................................22.1; 26.1
– priority..........................................................................11.6
– subdivisions of genus................................................................22.1
– type of...........................................................................7.7
– valid publication............................................................22.3; 26.3; 32.3
Available, epithet.........................................................11.4–5; 58; F.3.8; Gl.
– name..........................................................................14.10
– printed matter.....................................................................31.1
– under zoological Code...........................................................45.Ex.1.fn.
Avowed substitute, see Replacement name
Back-cross.........................................................................H.4
Bacteria, see Prokaryotes
Basidiomycota, pleomorphic..............................................................F.8
Basionym...................................................................6.10; 52.4; Gl.
– author citation......................................................................49
– reference......................................................................41; 41A
– – full and direct...............................................................41.5+7; 41A
– – indirect........................................................................41.3
– – mere cross-reference to bibliography....................................................41A.1
– – not given.......................................................................41.4
– restrictions.......................................................................41.2
– type.............................................................................7.3
– without indication of rank.............................................................37.3
Bibliographic citation, error..............................................................41.6
– use of “in”......................................................................46.N.2
Bigeneric hybrid....................................................................H.6.2
Binary combination (binomial; see also Combination).........................................23.1; Gl.
– as epithet.....................................................................21.4; 24.4
Binary system.......................................................................20.2
Binding decision.................................................................Pre.9; Gl.
– on descriptive material satisfying requirements for valid publication..........................38.4; Prov.7.14
– on homonymy..............................................................53.4; Prov.7.14
– requests for....................................................38.4; 53.4; Prov.1.4.fn.; Prov.2.2
– – General Committee recommendation on.....................................Prov.5.1(f); Prov.7.9+15
– – specialist committee recommendation on............................................Prov.7.10+14
Binomial (binary combination).........................................................23.1; Gl.
Blue-green algae....................................................................Pre.8
169
Bona fide researchers...................................................................7A

Bryophytes, Nomenclature Committee for................................................Prov.7.1(f)
Bureau of Nomenclature....................................Prov.1.4; Prov.2.5; Prov.4.5+7+11; Prov.7.10
– officers.......................................................................Prov.4.5
Canonization, prefix indicating.........................................................60C.4(d)
Capital initial letter........................................................16.1; 20.1; 21.2; 60.2
Catalogues.........................................................................30.7
“Caulis”, not a generic name...........................................................20.Ex.6
Change of name, proper reasons.........................................................Pre.12
Choice between names, see under Priority
Choice of type, see Lectotype and Designation
Circumscription.............................................................Prin.IV; 6.6; 11.1
– alteration, citation................................................................47; 47A
– anticipation...............................................................36.1(a); H.9.N.2
– causing nomenclatural superfluity........................................................52.1
– nothotaxon........................................................................H.4
Citation (see also Author citation)
– altered circumscription...............................................................47A
– basionym.....................................................................41.3+5–6
– bibliographic error................................................................41.6+8
– concrete detail of type..............................................................40.N.2
– date of publication..................................................................31B
– holotype.........................................................................40.3
– homonym........................................................................50C
– identifier issued by recognized repository...........................................F.5.1+4; F.5A.2
– lectotype....................................................................9C; 40.2–3
– “loc. cit.”, avoid use................................................................41A.1
– misapplied name...................................................................50D
– name merely cited as a synonym.........................................................50A
– nomen conservandum...............................................................50E.1
– nomen nudum.....................................................................50B
– nomen rejiciendum.................................................................50E.2
– nomen sanctionatum................................................................F.3A
– nomen utique rejiciendum............................................................50E.2
– “op. cit.”, avoid use................................................................41A.1
– orthographia conservanda............................................................50E.1
– orthographical variant..............................................................61.N.1
– replaced synonym...........................................................6.13; 41.3+5–6
– rules to follow......................................................................46
– single element.....................................................................40.3
– synonym...................................................................36.1(b); 50A
Class (classis), abbreviation...............................................................5A
– name...........................................................................16.3
– rank..........................................................................3.1; 4.2
Classical usage, see Tradition
Coalball..........................................................................8A.3
Code, editing.............................................................Prov.4.8; Prov.7.11
– governance, general provisions....................................................Pre.7; Prov.1
– modification............................................................Prov.1.2; Prov.8.12
Cohors, instead of order................................................................17.2
Collection, culture or genetic resource.......................................................8B.1
– public...........................................................................7A
Collection details, citation.............................................................40.N.2
– illustrated material..................................................................8A.2
Colon, use in sanctioned name...........................................................F.3A
Combinatio nova, see New combination
Combination (see also New combination)..................................................6.7; Gl.
– based on rejected name..................................................14.4+7+10; 50.N.1; 56.1
– binary................................................................21.4; 23.1; 24.4; Gl.
– ternary (infraspecific name)............................................................24.1
– under conserved later homonym.........................................................55.3
– valid publication...................................................................35.2
Committee
– ad hoc.....................................................Prov.4.3(c); Prov.5.2(e); Prov.8.4(c)
– Editorial.....................................7.*Ex.16.fn.; Prov.5.1(b)+6; Prov.7.1(b)+4+11; Prov.8.10
– ex-officio members...........................................................Prov.7.3+7–8
170
– General.....................29.3; Prov.1.3–4; Prov.2.2; Prov.3.1; Prov.4.3(d+h)+6+9; Prov.5.1(e–f)+2(g)+3–4;

...........................................Prov.7.1(a)+2–3+7+9–10+13–15, R.2; Prov.8.2+5(d)+6–7
– – applications, proposals and requests submitted to................14.12+15, N.4; 14A; 34; 34A; 38.4; 42.2; 53.4;
................................................................56.2–3, N.2; 56A; F.2; F.7
– Institutional Votes, on...............................................Prov.3.1; Prov.7.1(c)+5+9+12
– Nomenclature
– – for Algae..................................................................Prov.7.1(h)
– – for Bryophytes...............................................................Prov.7.1(f)
– – for Fossils..................................................................Prov.7.1(i)
– – for Fungi........................F.2; F.5.3; F.7; Prov.4.13; Prov.7.1(g)+4+8+10; Prov.8.2+3(e)+5(d–e)+6–7
– – for Vascular Plants............................................................Prov.7.1(e)
– Nominating...................................................Prov.4.11–12, R.1; Prov.5.2(a+h)
– – of Fungal Nomenclature Session..........................................Prov.4.13, R.1; Prov.8.1
– Permanent Nomenclature.................42.2; Prov.1.1+4+fn.; Prov.2.4+5(c)+6; Prov.4.3(e+g)+11–12; Prov.7.1
– – functions..................................................................Prov.7.9–13
– – membership.................................................................Prov.7.2–8
– – procedural rules for..........................................................Prov.7.14–15
– – subcommittees.................................................................Prov.7.2
– Registration..........................................................42.2; Prov.7.1(d)+6+13
– special-purpose....................Prov.1.1+4.fn.; Prov.4.3(d+g); Prov.5.2(f); Prov.6.1(b); Prov.8.5(d+g)+11(b)
– specialist..............14.12+15; 14A; 34.1–2; 34A; 38.4; 53.4; 56.2–3; 56A; Prov.7.1(e–i)+3+7+9–10+14–15, R.2
Compact disk....................................................................30A.Ex.1
Component, fungal, in lichens.............................................................F.1
Compound.....................................................................60.10; Gl.
– correctable epithets..............................................................60.11+13
– generic names, gender................................................................62.2
– names and epithets.............................................................60.10; 60G
Condensed formula..........................................................H.6.1–2+4(a); H.7
– as epithet....................................................................H.7; H.8.1
– commemorating person...................................................H.6.3–4; H.6A; H.8.2
– form......................................................................H.6.2–4; H.7
– name equivalent to................................................H.6.3–4; H.6A; H.8.2; H.9.N.1
– no type.......................................................................H.9.N.1
– nothogeneric name....................................................20.N.1; H.6; H.6A; H.8–9
– – conserved or rejected...............................................................14.3
– – more than two parental genera.......................................................H.6.3–4
– – valid publication......................................................32.1(c), N.3; 40.1; H.9
– parental generic names...........................................................H.8.1; H.9
Conflict with protologue.................................................9.19(c), N.7; 9A.3–4; 10.2
Confused name, not to be used.............................................................57
Confusingly similar names......................................................53.2–4; 61.5; Gl.
– binding decision on..........................................................53.4; Prov.7.14
– treated as homonyms...............................................................53.2–4
Connecting vowel.........................................................16.1; 60.10; H.6.2+4
Conservation (see also Deposited material, Preservation, Protection)............................Pre.9; 14; 14A
– aims..........................................................................14.1–2
– approval by General Committee................................................14.15; Prov.5.1(f)
– citation.........................................................................50E.1
– combination under conserved homonym....................................................55.3
– date, effect on competing names........................................................14.N.3
– – not affecting priority..............................................................14.5–7
– extent......................................................................14.4–5+10
– family name................................................................14.1+4–5+14
– – formed from illegitimate generic name....................................................18.3
– – places of publication...............................................................14.14
– – to be formed from effectively typified generic name..........................................40A.2
– gender....................................................................14.11; 62.N.2
– generic name....................................................................14.1+4
– illegitimate name................................................................6.4; 14.1
– later homonym............................................................14.6+10+13; 53.1
– limitation of priority...............................................................11.3–4
– lists permanently open...............................................................14.12
– name against itself.................................................................14.N.1
– name of a subdivision of a genus.........................................................14.1
– name of an infraspecific taxon..........................................................14.1
– no entry to be deleted...............................................................14.13
– overrides sanctioning................................................................F.3.8
171
– proposal...............................................................14.12+15, N.4; 14A

– species name.................................................................14.1+4, N.2
– spelling.......................................................................14.8+11
– type...................................................................14.3+8–9; 48.N.2
Conserved name......................................................................Gl.
Correct, grammar....................................................................Pre.1
– name............................................................Prin.IV; 6.6; 11.1+3–4; Gl.
– – choice.........................................................11.3–8, N.3; 14.5–7; F.3.5–7
– – of nothotaxon................................................................H.4–5; H.8
– – of pleomorphic fungus...............................................................F.8
– – potentially................................................................52.4; H.5.N.1
– spelling, see Orthography
Correction slip.....................................................................30A.4
Cultivar......................................................................28.N.2; Gl.
– epithet.......................................................................28.N.4–5
Cultivated organisms..............................................................Pre.11; 28
– from the wild.......................................................................28
Culture............................................................................8.4
– collection........................................................................8B.1
– from type.........................................................................8B
– metabolically inactive state..................................................8.4; 8B.2; 40.8, N.3
Custom (see also Tradition), author abbreviation.............................................46A.2+4
– established..................................................................Pre.13; 23.8
– prevailing.......................................................................Pre.1
Date, of autonym.....................................................................32.3
– of name, definition...............................................................33.1; Gl.
– – Linnaean generic.............................................................13.4; 38.N.1
– of publication.................................................................31; 31A–C
– – starting-point works.............................................................13.1, N.1
– unchanged....................................................14.11; 16.3; 18.4; 19.7; 24.4; 32.2
Decision, request for (see also Binding decision)............................................38.4; 53.4
Deep-freezing........................................................................8.4
Definitions:
Admixture........................................................................Gl.
Affirmation........................................................................Gl.
Alternative family names..............................................................18.6
Alternative names................................................................36.3; Gl.
Analysis......................................................................38.9; Gl.
Anamorph.....................................................................F.8; Gl.
Ascription.....................................................................46.3; Gl.
Attributed.........................................................................Gl.
Author citation.....................................................................Gl.
Automatic typification................................................................Gl.
Autonym......................................................................6.8; Gl.
Available.........................................................................Gl.
Available name.............................................................45.Ex.1.fn.; Gl.
Avowed substitute..................................................................6.11
Basionym.....................................................................6.10; Gl.
Binary combination..............................................................23.1; Gl.
Binary designation...................................................................Gl.
Binding decision.............................................................38.4; 53.4; Gl.
Binomial, see Binary combination
Combinatio nova (comb. nov.)..........................................................6.10
Combination....................................................................6.7; Gl.
Compound....................................................................60.10; Gl.
Confusingly similar names....................................................53.2+4; 61.5; Gl.
Conserved name (nomen conservandum)..................................................14; Gl.
Correct name................................................................6.6; 11.4; Gl.
Cultivar..........................................................................Gl.
Date of name...................................................................33.1; Gl.
Descriptio generico-specifica........................................................38.5; Gl.
Description........................................................................Gl.
Descriptive name....................................................................Gl.
Designation.......................................................................Gl.
Diagnosis.....................................................................38.2; Gl.
Duplicate....................................................................8.3.fn.; Gl.
Effective publication...............................................................6.1; Gl.
172
Element..........................................................................Gl.
Epithet...........................................................6.7; 21.2; 23.1–2; 24.2; Gl.
Epitype.......................................................................9.9; Gl.
Ex-type, ex-holotype, ex-isotype......................................................8B.2; Gl.
Final epithet.................................................................6.10.fn.; Gl.
Forma specialis, formae speciales.......................................................4.N.4
Fossil material.....................................................................13.3
Fossil-taxon....................................................................1.2; Gl.
Gathering....................................................................8.2.fn.; Gl.
Heterotypic synonym.............................................................14.4; Gl.
Holotype......................................................................9.1; Gl.
Homonym.....................................................................53.1; Gl.
Homotypic synonym..............................................................14.4; Gl.
Hybrid formula..................................................................H.2; Gl.
Identifier.........................................................................Gl.
Illegitimate name.................................................................6.4; Gl.
Illustration...................................................................6.1.fn.; Gl.
Illustration with analysis............................................................38.9–10
Improper Latin termination.............................................................Gl.
Indelible autograph...............................................................30.6; Gl.
Indirect reference...............................................................38.14; Gl.
Informal usage..................................................................37.8; Gl.
Infraspecific.......................................................................Gl.
Isoepitype...................................................................9.4.fn.; Gl.
Isolectotype..................................................................9.4.fn.; Gl.
Isoneotype...................................................................9.4.fn.; Gl.
Isonym......................................................................6.N.2; Gl.
Isosyntype...................................................................9.4.fn.; Gl.
Isotype....................................................................9.5, N.4; Gl.
Later homonym....................................................................53.1
Lectotype......................................................................9.3; Gl.
Legitimate name.................................................................6.5; Gl.
Misplaced term.....................................................................Gl.
Monotypic genus................................................................38.6; Gl.
Name.........................................................................6.3; Gl.
Name at new rank (status novus)......................................................6.10; Gl.
Name below rank of genus.............................................................11.4
Name of infraspecific taxon............................................................24.1
Name of new taxon.............................................................6.9+13; Gl.
Name of species....................................................................23.1
Neotype.......................................................................9.8; Gl.
New combination (combinatio nova)...................................................6.10; Gl.
New name........................................................................Gl.
Nomen alternativum (nom. alt.).................................................18.5–6; 19.8; Gl.
Nomen conservandum (nom. cons.).......................................................14.1
Nomen novum (nom. nov.)..........................................................6.11–13
Nomen nudum (nom. nud.).......................................................38.Ex.1; Gl.
Nomen rejiciendum (nom. rej.)...........................................................Gl.
Nomen sanctionatum (nom. sanct.).......................................................F.3A
Nomen utique rejiciendum (suppressed name).............................................56.1; Gl.
Nomenclatural act...................................................................Gl.
Nomenclatural novelty..........................................................6.N.4–5; Gl.
Nomenclatural synonym..............................................................14.4
Nomenclatural type (typus)..........................................................7.2; Gl.
Non-fossil material..................................................................13.3
Non-fossil taxon.................................................................13.3; Gl.
Nothogenus.....................................................................3.2; Gl.
Nothomorph...............................................................H.12.2.fn.; Gl.
Nothospecies....................................................................3.2; Gl.
Nothotaxon................................................................3.2; H.3.1; Gl.
Objective synonym................................................................14.4.fn.
Online..........................................................................29.2
Opera utique oppressa................................................................34.1
Organism.................................................................Pre.2.fn.+8; Gl.
Original material........................................................9.4, N.2–3; F.3.9; Gl.
Original spelling.................................................................60.2; Gl.
Orthographical variant.............................................................61.2; Gl.
173
Page reference................................................................41.N.1; Gl.

Paratype.......................................................................9.7; Gl.
Position..........................................................................Gl.
Priority........................................................7.10–11; 11; 53.N.2; F.5.4; Gl.
pro synonymo (pro syn.)...............................................................Gl.
Protected name..................................................................F.2; Gl.
Protologue..................................................................6.13.fn.; Gl.
Provisional name..............................................................36.1(a); Gl.
Pseudocompound.............................................................60G.1(b); Gl.
Rank............................................................................Gl.
Rejected name...........................................................14.4; 56.1; F.7; Gl.
Replaced synonym...............................................................6.11; Gl.
Replacement name (avowed substitute, nomen novum).....................................6.11–13; Gl.
Sanctioned name (nomen sanctionatum)...............................................F.3.1–2; Gl.
Special form (forma specialis).......................................................4.N.4; Gl.
Specimen....................................................................8.2–4; Gl.
Status.......................................................................6; 12; Gl.
Status novus (stat. nov.)...............................................................6.10
Subdivision of family............................................................4.N.2; Gl.
Subdivision of genus.............................................................4.N.2; Gl.
Subjective synonym...............................................................14.4.fn.
Superfluous name................................................................52.1; Gl.
Superseded........................................................................Gl.
Suppressed name................................................................56.1; Gl.
Suppressed works (opera utique oppressa)................................................34.1; Gl.
Synonym.........................................................................Gl.
Syntype.......................................................................9.6; Gl.
Tautonym.....................................................................23.4; Gl.
Taxon (taxa)....................................................................1.1; Gl.
Taxonomic synonym.................................................................14.4
Teleomorph................................................................F.8.N.1–2; Gl.
Type (typus).......................................................................7.2
Type designation....................................................................Gl.
Unispecific........................................................................Gl.
Valid publication....................................................................6.2
Validate..........................................................................Gl.
Validly published..................................................32–45; F.4; F.5.1–2; H.9; Gl.
Voted Example............................................................7.*Ex.16.fn.; Gl.
Delivery, printed matter to carrier..........................................................31A
Deposited material, access policy...........................................................7A
– specification of herbarium..........................................9.21–22; 9C; 40.7, N.4; 40A.5–6
Descriptio generico-specifica..........................................................38.5; Gl.
Description.........................................................................Gl.
– in addition to diagnosis...............................................................39A
– not required to be diagnostic..........................................................38.N.2
– or diagnosis, ascription.........................................................46.2–3+5, N.5
– – any language..............................................................43.N.1; 44.N.1
– – as requirement for valid publication....................................................38.1(a)
– – author of......................................................................46.N.4
– – binding decision..................................................................38.4
– – combined generic and specific.........................................................38.5
– – doubtful........................................................................38.4
– – English.................................................................39.2; 39A; 43.1
– – Latin................................................................39; 39A; 43.1; 44.1
– – none provided in protologue.....................................................38.1(a), N.1
– – pre-Linnaean.....................................................................38A
– – provision.........................................................38.1+5+11–12; 38B; 38E
– – published before 1753...............................................................38A
– – reference to.................................................38.1(a)+11–14; 39; 43.1–2; 44.1–2
– – – full and direct..................................................................38.13
– – – indirect......................................................................38.14
– – – not acceptable...................................................................38.5
– – – of a genus.....................................................................38.12
– – – restricted.....................................................................38.11
– – unequivocal association with author...............................................46.2+5, N.4–5
Descriptive, name.....................................................6.N.3; 16.1(b); 46.N.3; Gl.
– phrase.....................................................................23.6(a–c)+7
174
Designation (see also Unitary).............................................................Gl.

Designation of type (see also Lectotype).......................................9.N.1; 9C; 10.1+5–6; 10A
– “designated here”, “hic designatus”.......................................................7.11
– effective, requirements..........................................................7.10–11, N.2
– mandatory.....................................................................40; 40A
– statement........................................................................7.11
– supersedable.................................................................10.5–7, N.3
Desmidiaceae, starting-point...........................................................13.1(e)
Diacritical signs.....................................................46B.2; 60.7; 60B.N.1; 60C.3
Diaeresis..........................................................................60.7
Diagnosis (see also Description)....................................................38.2, N.2; Gl.
– accompanying description........................................................38B.1; 39A
– definition.......................................................................38.2–3
– doubtful.........................................................................38.4
Diagnostic characters, alteration........................................................47; 47A
Diatoms........................................................1.2; 11.7–8; 13.1(f)+3; 38.Ex.17
Digital repository...................................................................29A.2
Direction of cross....................................................................H.2A
Disadvantageous change of name......................................................14.1; 56.1
Division (divisio) or phylum, name.......................................................16.1+3
– rank....................................................................3.1; 4.2; 16.N.1
Doubt......................................................Pre.13; 13.3; 36.1; 38.4; 52.N.1; 53.4
Duplicate, definition..............................................................8.3.fn.; Gl.
Editorial Committee, see Committee
Effective publication, as requirement for valid publication........................................32.1(a)
– date.......................................................................31; 31A–C
– definition......................................................................6.1; Gl.
– electronic material...........................................................29; 29A; 31B.2
– indelible autograph................................................................30.5–6
– non-scientific newspapers.............................................................30.7
– printed matter accompanying specimens.................................................30.8, N.2
– seed-exchange lists..................................................................30.7
– theses................................................................30.9, N.3, Ex.14–19
– trade catalogues....................................................................30.7
Electronic publication..........................................29; 29A; 30.1–4, N.1; 30A.1–3; 31.1–2
– alterations not effectively published.......................................................30.4
– archiving........................................................................29A
– content.......................................................................30.3, N.1
– date when issued in parallel with printed matter...............................................31.2
– pagination.................................................................30.N.1; 41.N.2
– preliminary and final versions......................................................30.2; 30A.1
Element, citation.................................................................40.3; 52.2
– conflicting with description............................................................9A.4
– heterogeneous.................................................................9.14; 9A.4
– inclusion.........................................................................52.2
– – with expression of doubt...........................................................52.N.1
English, description or diagnosis...................................................39.2; 39A; 43.1
Ennoblement, prefix indicating..................................................46A.1; 60C.4(d–e)
Ephemeral printed matter..............................................................30A.4
Epithet (see also Adjective, Noun)...................6.7; 21.2–4; 21A; 21B; 22; 22A; 23.1; 23A; 24; 24A; 24B; Gl.
– abbreviated......................................................................60.14
– avoidance...........................................................23A.2–3; 60C.1; H.10A
– compound...............................................................60.8+10–11; 60G
– considered as hybrid formula..........................................................H.10.2
– cultivar........................................................................28.N.2
– customary spelling.............................................................60C.3; 60E
– definite association with genus or species name...............................................35.2
– derived from, geographical name..........................................23A.1+3(j); 60.9+13; 60D
– – illegitimate name...................................................................58
– – name of associated organism...........................................................F.9
– – personal name....................................23A.1; 60.8–9+13, N.4–5; 60B; 60C; H.6.3–4; H.6A
– – vernacular name..................................................................60.9
– etymology........................................................................60H
– final.............................................................6.10.fn.; 11.4, N.2; 27; Gl.
– fungal name.......................................................................F.9
– generic name used as...............................................................60.N.3
– hyphenation..........................................................23.1; 23A.3; 60.11, N.6
175
– inadmissible....................................................21.3; 22.2+4–5; 23.4+6; 24.3–4

– initial letter.......................................................................60F
– not Latin form...................................................................28.N.5
– nothotaxon...........................................................H.10.2; H.10A; H.11.2
– recommended spelling................................................................60E
– sequence in hybrid formula............................................................H.2A
– unavailable for use................................................................58.N.1
Epithets (see also Index of scientific names):
afzelianus...................................................................60C.Ex.1(c)
afzelii.....................................................................60C.Ex.1(a)
alberti.........................................................................60C.1
albo-marginatus................................................................60G.1(b)
alexandri.......................................................................60C.1
allemanii...................................................................60C.Ex.1(a)
apodus........................................................................61.Ex.2
apus.........................................................................61.Ex.2
aquilegiifolia, not ‘aquilegifolia’......................................................60.Ex.35
arnoldi.........................................................................60C.1
atropurpureus..................................................................60G.1(b)
augusti.........................................................................60C.1
balansanus, -a, -um...................................................60.8(c)
bauhini....................................................................60C.Ex.1(a)
beatricis........................................................................60C.1
bellonis....................................................................60C.Ex.1(b)
berteroanum....................................................................60.8(c)
brauniarum.....................................................................60.8(b)
brienianus.....................................................................60C.4(b)
brunonianus.................................................................60C.Ex.1(c)
brunonis...................................................................60C.Ex.1(b)
candollei.....................................................................60C.4(d)
caricaefolius...................................................................60G.Ex.3
ceylanicus....................................................................53.*Ex.11
chamissonianus...............................................................60C.Ex.1(c)
chamissonis.................................................................60C.Ex.1(b)
chinensis..............................................................53.*Ex.11; 60E.Ex.1
clusianus..............................................................23A.1; 60C.Ex.1(c)
clusii.................................................................23A.1; 60C.Ex.1(a)
conceptionis.....................................................................60C.1
dahuricus.......................................................................23A.1
dubuyssonii....................................................................60C.4(c)
edithae.........................................................................60C.1
elisabethae......................................................................60C.1
fedtschenkoae...................................................................60.8(a)
fedtschenkoi.....................................................................60.8(a)
ferdinandi.......................................................................60C.1
genuinus.....................................................................9A.3; 24.3
glazioui.......................................................................60.8(a)
grayi.........................................................................60.8(a)
griffithianum....................................................................60.8(d)
hassleriana.....................................................................60.8(d)
hectoris........................................................................60C.1
heteropodus...................................................................53.*Ex.11
heteropus....................................................................53.*Ex.11
heyneanus......................................................................60.8(c)
hilairei.......................................................................60C.4(d)
hookerorum.....................................................................60.8(a)
iheringii......................................................................60C.4(e)
jussieui.......................................................................60C.4(d)
laceae.........................................................................60.8(a)
lafarinae......................................................................60C.4(c)
lecardii........................................................................60.8(b)
leclercii......................................................................60C.4(c)
lindleyana......................................................................60.8(c)
linnaeanus..................................................................60C.Ex.1(c)
linnaei.........................................................................60C.1
logatoi.......................................................................60C.4(c)
macclellandii...................................................................60C.4(a)
176
macfadyenii....................................................................60C.4(a)
macgillivrayi...................................................................60C.4(a)
macnabii......................................................................60C.4(a)
macrocarpon..................................................................53.*Ex.11
macrocarpum.................................................................53.*Ex.11
macrostachys..................................................................53.*Ex.11
macrostachyus.................................................................53.*Ex.11
martianus...................................................................60C.Ex.1(c)
martii......................................................................60C.1+4(e)
martini.........................................................................60C.1
masoniorum....................................................................60.8(b)
mcclellandii....................................................................60C.4(a)
mcnabii......................................................................60C.4(a)
munronis.......................................................................60C.1
murielae........................................................................60C.1
napaulensis...................................................................53.*Ex.11
nepalensis....................................................................53.*Ex.11
nidus-avis.....................................................................60G.1(b)
nipalensis....................................................................53.*Ex.11
obrienii......................................................................60C.4(b)
okellyi.......................................................................60C.4(b)
originalis........................................................................24.3
originarius.......................................................................24.3
orlovskajae.....................................................................60.8(a)
poikilantha...................................................................53.*Ex.11
poikilanthes...................................................................53.*Ex.11
pojarkovae.....................................................................60.8(a)
polyanthemos..................................................................53.*Ex.11
polyanthemus..................................................................53.*Ex.11
porsildiorum.....................................................................23A.1
pteroides.....................................................................53.*Ex.11
pteroideus....................................................................53.*Ex.11
quercifolia....................................................................60.Ex.34
remyi........................................................................60C.4(d)
richardsonis.....................................................................60C.1
rumphianus..................................................................60C.Ex.1(c)
rumphii....................................................................60C.Ex.1(a)
saharae........................................................................23A.1
sanctae-helenae.................................................................60C.4(d)
sancti-johannis.................................................................60C.4(d)
scopolii........................................................................60.8(a)
sinensis..............................................................53.*Ex.11; 60E.Ex.1
solandri....................................................................60C.Ex.1(a)
steenisii......................................................................60C.4(e)
strassenii.....................................................................60C.4(e)
thibetanus....................................................................53.*Ex.11
thibetensis....................................................................53.*Ex.11
thibeticus....................................................................53.*Ex.11
tibetanus.....................................................................53.*Ex.11
tibetensis....................................................................53.*Ex.11
tibeticus.....................................................................53.*Ex.11
trachycaulon..................................................................53.*Ex.11
trachycaulum..................................................................53.*Ex.11
trianae........................................................................60.8(a)
trinervis.....................................................................53.*Ex.11
trinervius....................................................................53.*Ex.11
tubaeformis...................................................................60G.Ex.2
tubiformis....................................................................60G.Ex.2
typicus......................................................................9A.3; 24.3
vanbruntiae....................................................................60C.4(e)
vanderhoekii...................................................................60C.4(e)
vechtii.......................................................................60C.4(e)
veridicus.........................................................................24.3
verlotiorum.....................................................................60.8(b)
verus...........................................................................24.3
vonhausenii....................................................................60C.4(e)
webbiana......................................................................60.8(d)
177
wilsoniae......................................................................60.8(b)
wislizeni........................................................................60C.1
zeylanicus....................................................................53.*Ex.11
Epitype (epitypus), definition...........................................................9.9; Gl.
– designation....................................................................9.9; 9B.2
– – effective, requirements................................................7.10–11; 9.9+21+23, N.8
– – first to be followed.................................................................9.20
– – subsequently narrowed..............................................................9.17
– destroyed........................................................................9.20
– equivalent in modern language..........................................................9.23
– illustration........................................................................9.9
– – bibliographic reference to be provided....................................................9.21
– location to be specified............................................................9.21; 9C
Error, application of name on transfer........................................................7.3
– bibliographic citation...............................................................41.6+8
– correctable spelling...........................16.3; 18.4; 19.7; 23.5; 32.2, N.2; 33.2; 60.1+3+8–14, N.4; F.9
Established custom, see Custom
Establishment, cultivar epithets..........................................................28.N.5
“et” (&)...........................................................................46C
Etymology.........................................................................60H
Euphony..........................................................................Pre.1
“ex” in author citation................................................................46.5–7
Examples in this Code...................................................Pre.4; Prov.5.6; Prov.7.11
– voted....................................................................7.Ex.16.fn.; Gl.
Exclusion of type, see under Type
External evidence in publication...........................................................46.9
ex-type (ex typo), ex-holotype (ex holotypo), ex-isotype (ex isotypo)...............................8B.2; Gl.
Family (familia), abbreviation.............................................................5A
– name............................................................................18
– – alternative..........................................................10.9; 11.1; 18.5–6; Gl.
– – formed from illegitimate generic name....................................................18.3
– – conservation..................................................................14.1+4–5
– – correction of termination.............................................................18.4
– – form.......................................................................18.1, N.2
– – type.....................................................................10.9; 18.N.1
– – valid publication................................................................38.11(a)
– rank.............................................................................3.1
– – change........................................................................19A.1
– – termed order..................................................................18.2, N.3
– subdivision of, see Subdivision of family
Female symbol (♀).................................................9.Ex.8; 23.Ex.2; 40.Ex.1; H.2A
Figure, see Illustration
Final epithet....................................................6.10.fn.; 11.4, N.2; 26.1–2; 27; Gl.
First, see Priority
“Folium”, not a generic name..........................................................20.Ex.6
Forestry, organisms used in.....................................................Pre.11; 4.N.3; 28
Form (forma) (see also Infraspecific taxon), abbreviation...........................................5A
– rank...........................................................................4.1–2
Forma specialis, definition..............................................................4.N.4
Fossils (see also Coalball, Wood)......................................................Pre.8; 13.3
– description or diagnosis.............................................................43.1–2
– life-history stage.................................................................1.2; 11.1
– name, priority.....................................................................11.7
– – type of.................................................................7.N.1; 8.5; 8A.3
– – valid publication of..................................................................43
– – – illustration required for...........................................................43.2–3
– Nomenclature Committee for.......................................................Prov.7.1(i)
– preservational state...............................................................1.2; 11.1
– starting-point....................................................................13.1(f)
– type specimen.................................................................9.15; 43.3
– vs non-fossil..................................................................11.8; 13.3
Fossil-taxon......................................................................1.2; Gl.
Full stop, deletion...................................................................60.13
Fungal Nomenclature Bureau...................................Prov.4.13; Prov.7.8; Prov.8.1+3–4+5(f)+7
Fungi (see also Anamorph, Teleomorph)
– epithet, derived from name of associated organism..............................................F.9
– formae speciales...................................................................4.N.4
178
– homonymy with prokaryotic name...................................................54.N.1; F.6

– host............................................................................38E
– indication of sanctioned status..........................................................F.3A
– lichen-forming...............................................................42N.1; F.5.1
– lists of names to be rejected.............................................................F.7
– lists of protected names................................................................F.2
– living culture from holotype.............................................................8B
– names of higher taxa.................................................................16.3
– Nomenclature Committee for..............F.2; F.5.3; F.7; Prov.4.13; Prov.7.1(g)+4+8+10; Prov.8.2+3(e)+5(e)+6–7
– non-lichen-forming..................................................................F.8
– originally assigned to group not covered by this Code............................................45
– parasitic.....................................................................4.N.4; 38E
– pleomorphic.......................................................................F.8
– – legitimacy of names.................................................................F.8
– – priority of names................................................................F.8.N.2
– – simultaneously proposed names for separate morphs.........................................F.8.N.3
– starting-point......................................................................F.1
Gasteromycetes, sanctioning.............................................................F.3.1
Gathering.................................................................9.2+fn., N.1; Gl.
– location........................................................................40.N.2
– part.............................................................................8.2
– reference to..........................................................8.N.1; 9.6; 40.2–3, N.2
– single....................................................................8.3; 9.17; 40.3
Gender, agreement in..........................................................21.2; 23.5; 24.2
– generic name...................................................................62; 62A
– – arbitrarily formed name..............................................................62.3
– – assigned by author...............................................................62.1+3
– – compound......................................................................62.2
– – conservation..............................................................14.11; 62.Ex.7
– – correction of epithets..........................................................23.5; 60.N.4
– – feminine when commemorating person.................................................20A.1(i)
– – irrespective of original author.................................................62.2+4, Ex.2+4–6
– – nomenclatural tradition...........................................................62.1, N.1
– – not apparent.....................................................................62.3
– – of persons................................................................60.8(a–b), N.4
– – when genus is divided...............................................................62A
Gender-denoting symbols..............................................................H.2A
General Committee, see Committee
Generic, see Genus
Genitive, see under Noun
Genus (genera) (see also Nothogenus)...................................................3; 20; 20A
– abbreviation.......................................................................5A
– monotypic.............................................................38.5–6+12; 40.6; Gl.
– name.........................................................................20; 20A
– – adjective used as noun........................................................20A.1(f); 62.3
– – as autonym epithet...........................................................22.1–4, Ex.1
– – capital initial letter.................................................................20.1
– – coinciding with technical term.........................................................20.2
– – commemorating person.......................................................20A.1(i); 60B
– – composed arbitrarily............................................................20.1; 62.3
– – conservation.....................................................10.4, N.2; 14.1+3–4; 60.N.6
– – form..........................................................................20.1
– – – advisable................................................................20A.1(a+e+i)
– – – not advisable..........................................................20A.1(b–d+f–h+j)
– – gender, see Gender
– – hyphenated..............................................................20.3; 60.12, N.6
– – illegitimate..................................................................22.5; 55.1
– – in Linnaean works............................................................13.4; 38.N.1
– – not regarded as such................................................................20.4
– – type....................................................................10.1–7, N.1–3
– – – affirmation of choice......................................................10.5; 10A.2; Gl.
– – – designation.................................................................10.1+5–9
– – – inclusion....................................................................10.2–3
– – – indication........................................................40.1–4+6, N.1–2; 40A.3
– – – supersedable................................................................10.5, N.3
– – valid publication...................................................38.5–7+11(b), N.1; 40.3+6
– – vernacular......................................................................62.3
179
– rank.............................................................................3.1
– – raised section or subgenus........................................................21B.4; 49
– subdivision, see Subdivision of genus
Geographical names, in epithets............................................23A.1+3(j); 60.9+13; 60D
– use of “St”....................................................................60C.4(d)
Grammatical correctness...............................................................Pre.1
Greek, gender of nouns...............................................................62.N.1
– personal names...................................................................60C.1
– transcription to Latin............................................18.1; 23.5, Ex.6+9; 32.2; 60.6; 60A
– word elements................................................................60.10; 60G
Guiding vote.................................Prov.1.4.fn.; Prov.2.5–6; Prov.5.5; Prov.6.1(a); Prov.8.3+11(a)
Handwritten material................................................................30.1+6
Hepaticae, starting-point..............................................................13.1(c)
Herbarium, abbreviation.........................................................40.N.4; 40A.6
– access policy.......................................................................7A
– author’s.........................................................................9A.1
– sheet....................................................................8.1; 9.14; 9A.3
– to be specified....................................................9.21–22; 9C; 40.7, N.4; 40A.6
Heterotypic synonym...............................................................14.4; Gl.
Hierarchy of ranks....................................................................2–5
– subordinate taxa.................................................................25; 36.2
Holotype (holotypus) (see also Type)................................................9.1; 10.N.1; Gl.
– automatic......................................................................7.3–5+7
– collection data..............................................................8A.2; 9.2; 40.3
– definite indication...................................................................7.5
– designation...................................................................7.5; 9.1–2
– destroyed.................................................................9.3+11+13+16
– duplicate.........................................................................9.5
– identification ambiguous...........................................................9.9; 9B.2
– illustration................................................................8.1; 8A.1–2; 9.1
– included species name...................................................10.2–3+8; 40.3; 52.2(e)
– inclusion, in subordinate taxon.........................................7.6; 22.1–2; 22A; 26.1–2; 26A
– – in other taxon................................................................48; F.3.10
– – of single element..................................................................40.3
– indication...............................................................9.11; 40.1–7; 40A
– living.........................................................................8.4; 8B
– location.........................................................................40.7
– lost....................................................................9.3+8+11+13+16
– missing.................................................................9.3+8+11+13+16
– more than one taxon.............................................................9.3+11–12
– permanently preserved........................................................8.4, Ex.7; 8B.2
– – in public herbarium.................................................................7A
– previously published species name........................................................40.3
– rediscovered......................................................................9.19
– specimen data..............................................................8A.2; 9.2; 40.3
– supporting epitype................................................................9.9, N.8
Homonym (see also Confusingly similar names).........................................14.10; 53.1; Gl.
– by conservation....................................................................14.9
– by exclusion of type..................................................................48
– choice between simultaneous...........................................................53.5
– citation......................................................................46.3; 50C
– conserved later.......................................................14.9–10; 53.1, N.2; 55.3
– disregard hybrid status...............................................................H.3.3
– earlier..................................................................14.6+10; 53.N.2
– equal priority......................................................................53.5
– illegitimate.................................................21.N.1; 24.N.2; 53.1, N.2; F.3.3, N.1
– infraspecific taxa, same species....................................................24.N.2; 53.3
– later.....................................................11.N.5; 48.1; 53.1, N.2; F.3.3, N.1; Gl.
– names likely to be confused..........................................................53.2–4
– not illegitimate...................................................................53.N.1
– of conserved name.................................................................14.10
– rejected, earlier....................................................................14.10
– – later.........................................................................53.N.2
– sanctioned..................................................................53.N.2; F.3.3
– simultaneously published............................................................53.N.1
– subdivisions of same genus.......................................................21.N.1; 53.3
180
– taxa not treated as algae, fungi, or plants.....................................................54

– unranked........................................................................37.3
Homotypic synonym...............................................................14.4; Gl.
Horticulture, organisms used in...................................................Pre.11; 4.N.3; 28
Host, adaptation to, special form..........................................................4.N.4
– scientific name of to be cited............................................................38E
Hybrid..............................................Pre.8; 3.2; 4.4; 20.N.1; 28.N.1; 32.4; 50; H.1–12
– anticipation of existence............................................................H.9.N.2
– arising in cultivation...............................................................28.N.1
– change to non-hybrid status..............................................................50
– condensed formula, see Condensed formula
– formula....................................................23.6(d); H.2; H.2A; H.4; H.10.2; Gl.
– – definition.......................................................................H.2
– – more informative................................................................H.10B
– genus, see Nothogenus and Condensed formula
– multiplication sign (×)....................................................H.1–2; H.3.1+3; H.3A
– name, see under Nothotaxon
– parental taxa, see under Nothotaxon
– prefix notho (n-)........................................................3.2; 5A; H.1; H.3.1+3
– priority..........................................................................11.9
– rank, see under Nothotaxon
– species, see Nothospecies
– statement of parentage...................................................14.3; 52.N.4; H.12.N.1
– – of secondary importance..........................................................H.10.N.2
– status, indication of..............................................................50; H.1–2
– taxon, see Nothotaxon
– variety, see Nothomorph
Hyperlink..........................................................................30.3
Hyphen, in compound epithet..............................................23.1; 23A.3(d); 60.11, N.6
– in generic name............................................................20.3; 60.12, N.6
– in hybrid designation...............................................................H.10.2
Identifier for fungal name............................................................F.5; F.5A
– citation, as condition of valid publication...................................................F.5.1
– – encouraged in choices of name, orthography, or gender.......................................F.5A.2
– – to achieve designation of a type........................................................F.5.4
– issuance by recognized repository...................................................F.5.2+5, N.4
Illegitimate name.........................................................6.4; 52–54; F.3.3; Gl.
– autonyms.............................................................22.5, Ex.7; 27.2, Ex.1
– becoming legitimate later...............................................................6.4
– – by conservation........................................................6.4; 14.1; 18.3; 19.6
– – by protection...........................................................6.4; 18.3; 19.6; F.2
– – by sanctioning...............................................................6.4; F.3.1–2
– family..........................................................................18.3
– genus.......................................................................18.3; 55.1
– homonyms...............................................21.N.1; 24.N.2; 53.1, N.2; 54; F.3.3, N.1
– hybrid.........................................................................52.N.4
– species..........................................................................55.2
– subdivision of family................................................................19.6
– type...........................................................................7.5–6
Illustration, advisable.................................................................38D.1
– algae.......................................................................44.2; 44A
– as type..................................................8.1; 8A.1–2; 9.1+3+8–9; 10.4; 40.3–5+7
– equivalent to description..............................................................38.7
– fossils.....................................................................9.15; 43.2–3
– of type..........................................................................44A
– original material...................................................................9.3–4
– published as part of protologue.........................................................9.4(b)
– scale..........................................................................38D.3
– specimen used..........................................................8A.1–2; 38D.2; 44A
– with analysis.................................................................38.7–10; Gl.
Improper, see Incorrect
“in” in citation.....................................................................46.N.2
Inadmissible, see under Epithet
Inclusion of type................................................22.1–3; 22A; 26; 26A; 40.2; 52.1–2
Incorrect (see also Orthography, correction), Latin termination.....................16.3; 18.4; 19.7; 32.2, N.2; Gl.
– name.....................................................................52.4; H.5.N.1
Indelible autograph...............................................................30.5–6; Gl.
181
Index Fungorum............................................................46A.N.1; F.5.Ex.1

Index Herbariorum..................................................................40.N.4
Index kewensis......................................................................41.7
Index of fungi..................................................................41.7, Ex.21
Indexing centre.....................................................................30A.5
Indication, of rank, see Rank
– of type, see Type
Indirect reference..............................................................38.13–14; Gl.
Infrageneric, see Epithet, Infraspecific, Species, Subdivision of genus
Infraspecific, autonym..................................................................26
– epithet (see also Epithet)...............................................24; 24A–B; 26; 26A–B; 27
– – binary combination instead of..........................................................24.4
– – cultivar...................................................................28.N.2+4–5
– – form..........................................................................24.2
– – grammatical agreement..............................................................24.2
– – inadmissible...................................................................24.3–4
– – nothotaxon......................................................H.10.N.1; H.10A–B; H.11.2
– – to be avoided..............................................................24B.1; 26A.3
– – to be retained.............................................................24B.2; 26A.1–3
– – under illegitimate species name........................................................55.2
– name.......................................................................24; 26–27
– – form..........................................................................24.1
– – homonymous within species...........................................................53.3
– – legitimate.......................................................................55.2
– – valid publication.......................................................35.1, N.1; 38.8+11(c)
– rank...........................................................................4.1–2
– – change........................................................................24B.2
– – not clearly indicated..............................................................37.1+3
– – only one admitted.................................................................37.4
– taxon............................................................24–27; H.10; H.11.2; H.12
– – assignment to species..............................................................3.N.1
– – including type of species name.................................................26.1–2; 26A; 27
Institution, see Collection and Herbarium
Institutional votes (see also Committee on Institutional Votes)..............Prov.1.fn.; Prov.3; Prov.5.9; Prov.7.9+12
– not available in Fungal Nomenclature Session.............................................Prov.8.9
Intentional latinization.................................................................60.9
Intercalated ranks.....................................................................4.3
Intergeneric hybrid, see Nothogenus
Interim designation................................................................23.Ex.16
Internal evidence in publication..................................................30.9, N.3; 45; 46.8
– absence of........................................................................46.9
International, Association for Plant Taxonomy.......................Prov.1.4; Prov.2.5; Prov.4.8; Prov.7.3+6(c)
– – President.....................................................................Prov.7.3
– – Secretary-general...............................................................Prov.7.3
– Association of Bryologists........................................................Prov.7.6(d)
– Botanical Congress (see also Nomenclature Section)...14.15, N.4, Ex.8; 34.2; 38.4, Ex.8; 53.4, Ex.18; 56.3; Prov.1.1–3;
....................Prov.2.6; Prov.3.1–2; Prov.4.1–8+12; Prov.5.2(b); Prov.7.2+4+11–12+15; Prov.8.5(a)+8+10
– – Bureau of Nomenclature..................................Prov.1.4; Prov.2.5; Prov.4.5+7+11; Prov.7.10
– – decisions......................14.15; 34.2; 38.4; 53.4; 56.3; Prov.1.4.fn.; Prov.4.4; Prov.6.1(a); Prov.7.11+15
– – Organizing Committee...........................................................Prov.4.10
– – plenary session......................................................Prov.1.2; Prov.4.1+4+6
– – publications following.............................................................Prov.6
– – publications prior to............................................................Prov.2.1–4
– Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants.........................Pre.11; 28.N.2+4–5; 54.1(c)+fn.; H.4.N.1
– Code of Nomenclature of Prokaryotes [Bacteria]..................Pre.8.fn.; 14.4.fn.; 45.Ex.3; 54.1(b)(1).fn., N.1
– Code of Zoological Nomenclature....................14.4.fn.; 45.Ex.1–2+4–7, Ex.1.fn.; 54.1(b)(1).fn., Ex.1; F.1
– Commission for the Nomenclature of Cultivated Plants.........................................Pre.11
– Federation of Palynological Societies.................................................Prov.7.6(e)
– Mycological Association.................................................Prov.7.6(f); Prov.8.3–4
– Mycological Congress (see also Nomenclature Session)..F.5.3; Prov.4.13; Prov.7.4+8; Prov.8.1+4+5(a+d+f)+6–8+10–12
– – decisions............................................F.5.3; Prov.1.4.fn.; Prov.4.4; Prov.8.10+11(a)
– – Fungal Nomenclature Bureau.................................Prov.4.13; Prov.7.8; Prov.8.1+3–4+5(f)+7
– – plenary session..........................................................Prov.8.4+6+10+12
– – publications following...........................................................Prov.8.11
– – publications prior to.............................................................Prov.8.3
– Organisation of Palaeobotany......................................................Prov.7.6(g)
– Phycological Society............................................................Prov.7.6(h)
182
– Plant Names Index...............................................................46A.N.1

– Standard Book [or Serial] Number..................................................29.1; 30.N.3
– – as evidence of intent to effectively publish work............................................30.N.3
– – inappropriate...................................................................29.N.2
– Union of Biological Sciences........................................................Prov.1.3
Isoepitype.....................................................................9.4.fn.; Gl.
Isolectotype....................................................................9.4.fn.; Gl.
Isoneotype.....................................................................9.4.fn.; Gl.
Isonym.....................................................6.N.2; 14.14, N.1; 41.8(a); 52.N.3; Gl.
Isosyntype................................................................9.4(d)+fn.+12; Gl.
Isotype................................................................9.4(d)+5+12, N.4; Gl.
Kingdom (regnum), rank.............................................................3.1; 4.2
Later homonym, see Homonym
Latin, and latinization, accepted usage.......................................................60E
– – geographical names...................................................23A.1–2; 60.9, N.5; 60D
– – personal names......................................................23A.1–2; 60.9, N.5; 60C
– – vernacular names...........................................................60.9, N.5; 62.3
– alphabet...............................................................32.1; 40A.4; 46B.2
– description or diagnosis..................................................39.1–2; 39A; 43.1; 44.1
– termination.......................................16.3; 18.4; 19.7; 32.2, N.2; 60.8, N.4; 60B; 60D; Gl.
– transliteration to, see Romanization
– word elements................................................................60.10; 60G
Lectotype (lectotypus) (see also Designation of type)......................................9.3; 10.N.1; Gl.
– designation...............................................................9.11–12; 9A; 9C
– – effective, requirements.....................................................7.10–11; 9.22–23
– destroyed......................................................................9.11+16
– identification ambiguous...............................................................9.9
– illustration...............................................................8.1; 8A.1; 9.3+15
– inclusion, in named taxon...............................................26.2; 40.2; 52.2(b), N.1–2
– location to be specified...............................................................9.22
– names of fossil-species...............................................................9.15
– precedence over neotype..............................................................9.13
– preserving current usage..............................................................9A.4
– previously designated............................................9.11+16–17; 26.2; 48.2(b); 52.2(b)
– previously published species name........................................................40.3
– supersedable................................................................9.15+19, N.7
– supporting epitype...................................................................9.9
Legitimate name........................................................6.5; 51; 52.4, N.1–3; Gl.
– by conservation....................................................................14.1
– epithet under illegitimate or rejected name.................................................55.1–3
– maintenance........................................................................51
– nothotaxon........................................................................H.4
– priority...................................................................11.3–5; 53.N.2
Letters, foreign to classical Latin.........................................32.1(b); 60.4; 60B.N.1; 60C.3
– initial............................................................16.1; 20.1; 21.2; 60.3; 60F
– used interchangeably.................................................................60.5
Lichen-forming fungi............................................................42.N.1; F.5.1
Ligatures.............................................................60.4+7; 60B.N.1; 60C.3
Limitation of priority, see under Priority
Linnaean binary system................................................................20.2
– symbols.........................................................................23.3
Lyophilization.......................................................................8.4
Mail vote, see Guiding vote
Male symbol (♂).........................................................9.Ex.8; 40.Ex.1; H.2A
Manuscript.......................................................................30.1+6
– names........................................................................23A.3(i)
– notes...........................................................................9A.3
Mechanical methods of typification..............................................9A.2; 10.5–7; 10A.2
Metabolically inactive state....................................................8.4; 8B.2; 40.8, N.3
Microfilm.........................................................................30.1
Microsporidia..............................................................Pre.8; 45.N.1; F.1
“mihi”, as author citation................................................................46D
Misapplied name.....................................................7.3; 41.N.3; 48.N.1; 50D; 57
Misplaced term...........................................................18.2; 19.2; 37.6; Gl.
183
Modification of this Code...............................Pre.7; Prov.1.2; Prov.2; Prov.5; Prov.7.11; Prov.8.12

– Appendix I.......................................................................34.1
– Appendix II–IV................................................................14.12; F.2
– Appendix V.......................................................................56.2
– Appendix VI......................................................................38.4
– Appendix VII.....................................................................53.4
Monotypic genus..........................................................38.5–6+12; 40.6; Gl.
Morph, see Fungi, pleomorphic
Morphology, technical term..............................................................20.2
Multiplication sign (×).....................................................H.1–2; H.3.1+3; H.3A
Musci, starting-point (see also Sphagnaceae)................................................13.1(b)
Name (see also Adjective, Author, Nomenclature, Personal name, Noun)...........................6.3; 12; Gl.
– abbreviated......................................................................60.14
– alternative...............................................................36.3; F.8.N.3; Gl.
– – of family..............................................................10.9; 11.1; 18.5–6
– – of subfamily.............................................................10.9; 11.1; 19.8
– ascription...................................................................46.2+5, N.5
– at new rank (status novus)............................................6.10, N.4–5; 7.3; 32A; 41; Gl.
– – restrictions......................................................................41.2
– – type...........................................................................7.3
– – valid publication...................................................................41
– avowed substitute, see Replacement name
– class or subclass.....................................................................16
– compound...................................................................60.10; 60G
– confused..........................................................................57
– confusingly similar.........................................................53.2–4; 61.5; Gl.
– conserved, see Conservation
– contrary to recommendations...........................................................Pre.6
– contrary to rules.................................................................Pre.5+12
– correct............................................Prin.IV; 6.6; 11.1+3–4; 14.5–7; F.3.5–6; H.4; Gl.
– current usage.......................................................................57
– derived, from Greek.................................................................60A
– – from person’s name................................................................60B
– etymology........................................................................60H
– euphony........................................................................Pre.1
– first syllable......................................................................60.3
– formed from generic name.....................................7.1; 10.10; 16.1; 18.1+3; 19.4–6; 40A.2
– illegitimate, see Illegitimate
– initial letter........................................................16.1; 20.1; 21.2; 60.3; 60F
– in thesis...............................................................30.9, N.3, Ex.14–19
– misapplied.......................................................7.3; 41.N.3; 48.N.1; 50D; 57
– not to be adopted...................................................................38C
– not validly published............................................14.14; 34.1; 35; 36; 37.1+6; 41.4–5
– of division or phylum.............................................................16.3, N.1
– of family.................................................................10.9; 18; 19A.1
– of genus............................................................10.1–5; 20; 20A; 21B.4
– of hybrid, see Hybrid
– of infraspecific taxon...............................................24; 24A–B; 25–26; 26A–B; 27
– of new taxon.......................................................................6.9
– of order or suborder.......................................................17; 17A; 18.2; 19.2
– of species......................................................................23; 23A
– of subdivision of family........................................................10.9; 19; 19A
– of subdivision of genus.............................................10.1–2+5; 21; 21A–B; 22; 22A
– of subdivision or subphylum..........................................................16.2–3
– of subfamily, termed suborder.......................................................19.2, N.1
– of suprafamilial taxon..............................................10.10; 11.10; 16; 16A; 17; 17A
– of taxon of lower rank than variety......................................................26A.3
– orthography, errors.....................................33.2; 50F; 60.1+3+6+8+10, N.4; 61.1, N.1; F.9
– – variants.........................................................................61
– rank, see Rank
– reasons for change.................................................................Pre.12
– regularity........................................................................Pre.1
– rejected, see Rejection
– replacement......................................6.11–13; 7.4–5; 11.4; 32A; 41; 41A.1; 49.N.1; 58; Gl.
– spelling.....................................13.4; 14.8+11; 33.2; 50E.1; 50F; 60; 60A–H; 61; F.3.2; F.9
– stability......................................................Pre.1; 14.1–2; 53.2; 56.1; F.2; F.7
– superfluous.....................................................................52.1+4
184
– type, see Type

– unavailable for use.....................................14.10; 18.N.2; 54.1(b)(1); 55.N.1; 56.N.1; F.3.4
– unpublished................................................................23A.1(i); 50G
– useless creation....................................................................Pre.1
– with question mark............................................................36.1; 52.N.1
– words, not generic names..............................................................20.4
Natural order (ordo naturalis).........................................................18.2, N.3
“nec”, in homonym citation..............................................................50C
Neotype (neotypus).................................................................9.8; Gl.
– designation..............................................................9.11+13; 9B.1; 9C
– – effective, requirements.....................................................7.10–11; 9.22–23
– illustration...............................................................8.1; 8A.1; 9.8+22
– inclusion, in named taxon...................................................26.2; 52.2(b), N.1–2
– location to be specified............................................................9.22; 9C
– precedence of lectotype...............................................................9.13
– preserving usage...................................................................9.16
– previously designated.....................................................9.9+17; 26.2; 52.2(b)
– supersedable....................................................................9.18–19
– supporting epitype...................................................................9.9
New combination.....................................................6.10, N.5; 7.3; 41; 41A; Gl.
– restrictions.......................................................................41.2
– type.............................................................................7.3
– valid publication.....................................................................41
Newspapers, non-scientific..............................................................30.7
Nixus, instead of order.................................................................17.2
“nobis”, as author citation...............................................................46D
Nomen conservandum (see also Conservation)..........................................14; 14A; 50E.1
Nomen novum, see Replacement name
Nomen nudum....................................................................50B; Gl.
Nomen rejiciendum (see also Rejected name)...................................................Gl.
Nomen specificum legitimum.........................................................23.6; 52.3
Nomen triviale......................................................................23.7
Nomen utique rejiciendum..............................................50E.2, N.1; 56; 56A; F.7; Gl.
Nomenclatural acts..............................................................34.1+fn.; Gl.
– registration with recognized repository............................................42.1+3; Prov.7.13
Nomenclatural novelties...........................................................6.N.4–5; Gl.
– authorship, as ascribed................................................................46.2
– – cite by name.....................................................................46D
– – determined by external evidence........................................................46.9
– – inclusion of “ex”.................................................................46.10
– avoid publishing in ephemeral matter.....................................................30A.4
– ensure availability through time and place..................................................30A.5
– indicate with “novus” or an abbreviation....................................................32A
– of fungi, deposit information in recognized repository.........................................F.5A.1
– mention in summary or abstract........................................................30A.6
Nomenclatural synonym................................................................14.4
Nomenclatural type, see Type
Nomenclature, biological...............................................................Pre.1
– Committees, see Committee
– contrary to rules.................................................................Pre.5+12
– disadvantageous change...........................................................14.1; 56.1
– independence.....................................................................Prin.I
– of algae, fungi, and plants........................................................Pre.2+fn.+8
– principles.....................................................................Prin.I–VI
– Section (see also International Botanical Congress).........Prov.1.1–2+4.fn.; Prov.2.1+6; Prov.3.2–4; Prov.4; Prov.6;
.................................................................Prov.7.4+6; Prov.8.1+10
– – Bureau of Nomenclature..................................Prov.1.4; Prov.2.5; Prov.4.5+7+11; Prov.7.10
– – President................................................................Prov.4.5–7+11
– – procedure and voting..............................................................Prov.5
– – Rapporteur-général.......................Prov.2.3–4; Prov.3.2; Prov.4.3(f)+5+8–12; Prov.7.3–5+7; Prov.8.8
– – Recorder..................................................................Prov.4.5+10
– – Tellers...............................................................Prov.4.5; Prov.5.10
– – Vice-presidents...............................................................Prov.4.5+7
185
– – Vice-rapporteur..............................................Prov.2.4; Prov.4.5+9; Prov.7.3–4+7

– Session, Fungal (see also International Mycological Congress)....Prov.1.4.fn.; Prov.4.13; Prov.7.4; Prov.8.1+4–6+8–12
– – Chair.....................................................................Prov.8.1+6
– – Deputy Secretary.......................................................Prov.7.8; Prov.8.1+7
– – Fungal Nomenclature Bureau.................................Prov.4.13; Prov.7.8; Prov.8.1+3–4+5(f)+7
– – Secretary.................................................Prov.4.13; Prov.7.8; Prov.8.1+5(f)+7
– stability......................................................Pre.1; 14.1–2; 53.2; 56.1; F.2; F.7
“non”, in homonym citation.............................................................50C
Non-fossil, material...................................................................13.3
– taxon....................................................................Pre.8; 13.3; Gl.
– vs fossil..................................................................11.8, N.5; 13.3
Nostocaceae, starting-point............................................................13.1(e)
“notho-”, etymology.................................................................H.1.fn.
– prefix...............................................................3.2; 5A; H.1; H.3.1+3
Nothogenus...................................................................3.2; H.9; Gl.
– name, see Condensed formula
– rank.....................................................................3.2; 4.4; H.6.1
Nothomorph................................................................H.12.2+fn.; Gl.
Nothospecies.....................................................................3.2; Gl.
– epithet.....................................................................32.4; H.10A
– name.................................................................H.10.1, N.2; H.11.1
– parents from different genera..........................................................H.11.1
– rank......................................................................3.2; 32.4; 50
Nothotaxon (see also Hybrid).........................................................H.3.1; Gl.
– circumscription.....................................................................H.4
– name (see also Condensed formula).......................................Pre.8; 28.N.1; 32.4; H.1–12
– – author citation.....................................................................50
– – correct..............................................................H.4–5; H.8; H.11–12
– – legitimate.....................................................................52.N.4
– – validly published..........................................32.4; 38.1; 40.1; H.9; H.10.1(a); H.12.2
– parental taxa........52.N.4; H.2; H.2A; H.3.2; H.4–5; H.5A; H.6.2+4; H.8–9; H.10.2, N.2; H.10A; H.11; H.12.1, N.1
– rank (see also Nothospecies, Nothogenus, Nothomorph)................3.2; 4.4; 32.4; 50; H.1; H.3.1; H.4–5; H.12
– – appropriate......................................................................H.5
– – inappropriate..................................................................H.5.N.1
– – infraspecific......................................4.4; H.3.1; H.4.N.1; H.10; H.10A–B; H.11.2; H.12
– – subdivision of genus.............................................................H.7; H.9
– variation..................................................................H.4.N.1; H.12
Noun (see also Gender), in apposition................................................23.1+5; 60.N.3
– as epithet...................................................21.2; 21B.2–3; 23.1+5+6(a); 60.N.3
– – genitive...........................................................23.1+5; 23A.1–2; 60C.1
– – genitive plural....................................................................21.2
– – section......................................................................21B.2–3
– – subgenus....................................................................21B.2–3
– as name.........................................................................20.1
– – plural adjective...............................................................18.1; 19.1
– compound...................................................................60.10; 60G
– descriptive....................................................................23.1+6(a)
Objective synonym.................................................................14.4.fn.
Oedogoniaceae, starting-point..........................................................13.1(e)
Online, definition....................................................................29.2
– publication.....................................................................29; 29A
– version of this Code.................................................................8.12
Opera utique oppressa.................................................................34.1
Order (ordo), abbreviation................................................................5A
– name.........................................................................17; 17A
– rank.............................................................................3.1
– – intended as family..............................................................18.2, N.3
– – termed otherwise..................................................................17.2
– relative, of ranks..........................................................5; 37.6–8, N.1; F.4
Organism(s), associated with fungi..........................................................F.9
– covered by this Code............................................................Pre.2+fn.+8
– in cultivation.......................................................................28
– individual, belonging to taxa..............................................................2
– living, not as types...................................................................8.4
– other than vascular plants, illustration.....................................................38.10
– parasitic.....................................................................4.N.4; 38E
– parent, of a fossil-taxon................................................................1.2
186
– small, as nomenclatural type.............................................................8.2

– special categories in agriculture, forestry, and horticulture.........................Pre.11; 4.N.3; 28.N.2+4–5
– treated as algae, fungi, and plants........................................................Pre.8
Original material......................................................9.3–4, N.2–3; F.3.N.2; Gl.
– not extant......................................................................9.8+13
– rediscovered....................................................................9.19(a)
Original spelling...........................................................60.2; 61.1; F.9; Gl.
– correction....................................................................33.2; 60.1
– indication of.......................................................................50F
– retention..............................................................60.1; 60B.N.1; 61.1
– standardization...............................................................60.4–14; F.9
– variant..........................................................................61.3
Orthographical variant..............................................................61.2; Gl.
– citation.....................................................................50F; 61.N.1
– confusingly similar...............................................................61.5; Gl.
– correction.....................................................................61.4; F.9
– in original publication................................................................61.3
– not validly published.................................................................61.1
Orthography.......................................................................60–61
– conservation..............................................................14.11; 50E; F.3.2
– correction......................................23.7; 32.2, N.2; 33.2; 60.1+3+8–14, N.4; 61.4, N.1; F.9
– epithets............................................................60.8–11+13–14; 60A–H
– error.....................................................60.1+8+10–11+13–14; 60G.1(b); 61.1
– Linnaean, generic names..............................................................13.4
– – phrase-like epithets................................................................23.7
– standardization...............................................................60.4–14; F.9
– variant, see Orthographical variant
Page reference................................................................41.5, N.1; Gl.
Pagination...................................................................30A.2–3; 31C
– citation when not included............................................................41A.2
– is not content......................................................................30.3
Parasite..........................................................................4.N.4
– host name.....................................................................38E; F.9
Paratype.................................................................9.4+7+12, N.5; Gl.
Parentage, see Nothotaxon, parental taxa
Parentheses......................................................10.N.1; 21A; 46.7; 49; 50; F.3A
Particles, in personal names........................................................46A.1; 60C.4
Patronymic prefix...........................................................60.13; 60C.4(a–b)
Period, deletion.....................................................................60.13
Periodical, date......................................................................31C
– popular........................................................................30A.4
– separates.....................................................................31.3; 31C
– taxonomic......................................................................30A.5
Personal name (see also Author), anagram.................................................60B.N.2
– diacritical signs....................................................46B.2; 60.7; 60B.N.1; 60C.3
– Greek or Latin....................................................................60C.1
– in epithets.....................................................23A.1–2; 60.8–9, N.4; 60B; 60C
– in generic name..............................................................20A.1(i); 60B
– in nothogeneric name.........................................................H.6.3–4; H.6A
– intentional latinization................................................................60.9
– romanization......................................................................46B
– well-established latinized form.......................................................60C.1–2
Phrase name......................................................................23.6–7
Phylum, see Division
Plants, see Algae, Fungi, and Plants, Cultivated, and Organisms
– originally assigned to group not covered by this Code.........................................45.N.2
Pleomorphic fungi, see Fungi, pleomorphic
Pleonasm.......................................................................23A.3(e)
Polyploid.......................................................................H.3.Ex.3
Popular periodicals..................................................................30A.4
Portable Document Format..............................................................29.1
– archival standard..................................................................29A.1
– successor to................................................................29.3; Prov.7.9
Position...........................................................Prin.IV; 6.6; 11.1; 13.2; Gl.
– anticipation.....................................................................36.1(a)
Prefix (see also Word elements)............................................................5A
187
– Eu-........................................................................21.3; 24.3
– in personal name..................................................46A.1; 60.13; 60B.N.2; 60C.4
– notho- (n-)............................................................3.2; 5A; H.1; H.3.1+4
– sub-......................................................................4.2, N.1; 5A
Preliminary guiding vote, see Guiding vote
Preparation................................................................8.2–3; 8A.4; 9.14
Preservation (see also Deposited material)
– impossible................................................................8.4; 8B.2; 40.5
– permanent...............................................................8.4; 8B.2; 40.N.3
– place..............................................................7A; 8B.1; 40.7; 40A.5–6
Pre-starting-point, author...............................................................46.7
– publication.......................................................................38A
Previous editions of this Code........................................Pre.14; 20.N.2; F.8.N.2; H.12.2.fn.
Principles..................................................................Pre.3; Prin.I–VI
Printed matter (see also Publication), accompanying specimens...................................30.8, N.2
– delivery to carrier...................................................................31A
– ephemeral.......................................................................30A.4
Priority............................................................................Gl.
– equal.......................................................................11.5; 53.5
– of autonyms......................................................................11.6
– of choice....................................................11.5, N.2; 53.5; 61.3; 62.3; F.5A.2
– of designation of type..................................................7.10–11; 9.19; 10.5; F.5.4
– of homonyms.................................................................53.5, N.1–2
– of names......................................................................11; 16A
– – based on non-fossil vs fossil type.......................................................11.8
– – legitimate.....................................................................53.N.2
– – limitation........................................................11.2–4+6–7; 13–14; F.1–3
– – – to rank........................................................................11.2
– – of fossil taxa.....................................................................11.7
– – of higher taxa................................................................11.10; 16A
– – of hybrids.......................................................................11.9
– – of pleomorphic fungi............................................................F.8.N.1–2
– – unaffected by, date of conservation....................................................14.N.3
– – – date of sanctioning.............................................................F.3.N.1
– – unranked.......................................................................37.3
– principle.......................................................................Prin.III
Prokaryotes, names...................................................................54A
– nomenclature, see International Code of Nomenclature of Prokaryotes
– taxa............................................................................54A
Pronunciation, difficult in Latin.................................................20A.1(c); 23A.3(b)
Proposal(s)
– to amend this Code............................Prov.1.4+fn.; Prov.2; Prov.4.3(b); Prov.5.1(a)+5–7; Prov.7.10
– – relating to names of organisms treated as fungi.........................F.2; F.7; Prov.1.4; Prov.7.14; Prov.8
– – synopsis of.................................................Prov.1.4.fn.; Prov.2.4–2.5; Prov.8.3
– to conserve name..............................................14.12+15; 14A; Prov.2.2; Prov.7.10
– to protect name...............................................14.15; 14A; F.2; Prov.2.2; Prov.7.10
– to reject name.............................................14.15; 14A; 56; 56A; Prov.2.2; Prov.7.10
– to suppress work..................................................34; 34A; Prov.2.2; Prov.5.1(f)
Protected name.......................................................................Gl.
Protection......................................................................Pre.9; F.2
– approval by General Committee.....................................................Prov.5.1(f)
– combination under protected homonym....................................................55.3
– family name formed from illegitimate generic name............................................18.3
– homonym........................................................................53.1
– illegitimate name............................................................6.4; 18.3; 52.1
– limitation of priority...............................................................11.3–4
– name of subdivision of a genus formed from illegitimate generic name................................19.6
– overridden by conservation.............................................................F.2
– overrides sanctioning................................................................F.3.8
– proposal....................................................14.15, N.4; 14A; Prov.1.4; Prov.2.2
Protologue....................................................................6.13.fn.; Gl.
– bibliographic reference...............................................................46.1
– conflict with...........................................................9.19(c); 9A.3–4; 10.2
– generic........................................................................10.2+4
– guide in lectotypification..............................................................9A.2
– page reference...................................................................41.N.1
Provisional name..........................................................36.1(a), Ex.4–6; Gl.
188
Pseudocompound..............................................................60G.1(b); Gl.
Pteridophyta, starting-point............................................................13.1(a)
Public meeting......................................................................30.1
Publication (see also Simultaneous).................................................37.5; 46.8, N.5
– abstracting journals................................................................30A.4
– date.......................................................................31; 31A; 33
– effective, see Effective publication
– electronic, see Electronic publication
– ephemeral printed matter.............................................................30A.4
– external evidence of authorship..........................................................46.9
– in parts.....................................................................31B.1; 37.5
– indelible autograph.............................................................30.5–6; Gl.
– independently of accompanying specimens................................................30.N.2
– index..........................................................................30A.6
– internal evidence......................................................30.9, N.3; 37.5; 45; 46.8
– – absence........................................................................46.9
– non-scientific newspapers.............................................................30.7
– online.........................................................................29.1–2
– place of, correct in all circumstances......................................................14.14
– popular periodical.................................................................30A.4
– printed herbarium labels.........................................................30.Ex.12–13
– printed matter accompanying specimens.................................................30.8, N.2
– seed-exchange lists..................................................................30.7
– separates.....................................................................31.3; 31C
– taxonomic........................................................................46.1
– theses................................................................30.9, N.3, Ex.14–19
– trade catalogues....................................................................30.7
– unpaginated.....................................................................41A.2
– valid, see Valid publication
Publications (mentioned in rules and recommendations of this Code, excluding bibliographic citations for names):
Actes Congr. Int. Bot. Bruxelles 1910: 67–83. 1912.........................................14.N.4(b)
Arthur & al., American Code of Botanical Nomenclature, in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 34: 167–178. 1907.....10.6+7(a–d)
– “Philadelphia Code”, in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 31: 249–261. 1904......................10.6+7(a–b+c+fn.+d)
Berchtold & Presl, O přirozenosti rostlin … 1820...........................................18.*Ex.5
Bornet & Flahault, Révision des Nostocacées hétérocystées, in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 7, 3: 323–381; 4: 343–373; 5: 51–129; 7: 177–262.
1886–1888 13.1(e)
Brummitt & Powell, Authors of plant names. 1992..........................................46A.N.1
Bull. Misc. Inform. Kew 1940: 81–134. 1940...........................................14.N.4(c)(1)
Don, Sweet’s Hortus britannicus, ed. 3. 1839..............................................38.*Ex.3
Fries, Elenchus fungorum. 1828.........................................................F.3.1
– Systema mycologicum. 1821–1832...................................................F.3.1; F.4
Gomont, Monographie des Oscillariées in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 7, 15: 263–368; 16: 91–264. 1892–1893.....13.1(e)
Hedwig, Species muscorum frondosorum. 1801.............................................13.1(b)
Hirn, Monographie und Iconographie der Oedogoniaceen, in Acta Soc. Sci. Fenn. 27(1). 1900..............13.1(e)
Hitchcock & Green in Sprague, Nom. Prop. Brit. Bot.: 110–199. 1929.............................7.*Ex.16
IMA Fungus....................................................................Prov.1.4
Index Fungorum.................................................................46A.N.1
Index Herbariorum................................................................40.N.4
Index kewensis.....................................................................41.7
Index of fungi.....................................................................41.7
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature
– Stockholm Code. 1952...........................................................14.N.4(c)
– Sydney Code. 1983.............................................................H.12.2.fn.
– Tokyo Code. 1994................................................................20.N.2
International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants........................54.1(c).fn.; Prov.1.1+3
– Appendices database........................................................14.N.4; 56.N.2
– Melbourne Code. 2012............................................................F.8.N.2
International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants...............Pre.11; 28.N.2+4–5; 54.1(c)+fn.; H.4.N.1
International Code of Nomenclature of Bacteria (Bacteriological Code)............................Pre.8.fn.
International Code of Nomenclature of Prokaryotes. Prokaryotic Code (2008 Revision).....Pre.8.fn.; 54.1(b)(1).fn., N.1
International Code of Zoological Nomenclature.........................14.4.fn.; 45.Ex.1.fn.; 54.1(b).fn.; F.1
International Plant Names Index......................................................46A.N.1
International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature.............................................10.7(b)
– Vienna. 1906.................................................................14.N.4(a)
– Brussels. 1912................................................................14.N.4(b)
Jussieu, Genera plantarum. 1789.....................................................13.1(a+c)
Linnaeus, Genera plantarum, ed. 5. 1754..............................................13.4; 38.N.1
189
– Genera plantarum, ed. 6. 1764....................................................13.4; 38.N.1

– Species plantarum, ed. 1. 1753......................................13.1(a+c+e)+4, N.1; 38.N.1; F.1
– Species plantarum, ed. 2. 1762–1763...............................................13.4; 38.N.1
McNeill & al., Report of the Special Committee on Publications Using a Largely Mechanical Method of Selection of Types …, in Taxon 65: 1443–
1448. 2016 10.7(c).fn.
Persoon, Synopsis methodica fungorum. 1801................................................F.3.1
Ralfs, British Desmidieae. 1848........................................................13.1(e)
Regnum Veg. 1: 549–550. 1953....................................................14.N.4(c)(2)
Schlotheim, Petrefactenkunde. 1820.....................................................13.1(f)
Sternberg, Flora der Vorwelt, Versuch 1: 1–24, t. 1–13. 1820....................................13.1(f)
Taxon........................................................................Prov.1.4
Verh. Int. Bot. Kongr. Wien 1905: 135–137. 1906..........................................14.N.4(a)
World directory of collections of cultures of microorganisms.....................................40.N.4
Publishing author, see Author
Purpose of giving a name...............................................................Pre.1
Question mark.................................................................36.1; 52.N.1
Quotation marks................................................................28.N.4; 50F
– deletion or replacement..............................................................60.13
“Radix”, not a generic name...........................................................20.Ex.6
Rank.........................................................Pre.1; Prin.IV; 2–5; 6.6; 11.1; Gl.
– alteration, author citation...............................................................49
– anticipation...............................................................36.1(a); H.9.N.2
– appropriate, for hybrid................................................................H.5
– basic.............................................................................2
– further intercalated or added.............................................................4.3
– hierarchy..........................................................................2
– inappropriate, for hybrid............................................................H.5.N.1
– indication...........................................................21.1; 21A; 24.1; 37.2+5
– not clearly indicated...............................................................37.1+3
– nothotaxon..............................................3.2; 4.4; 32.4; 50; H.1; H.3.1; H.4–5; H.12
– particular......................................................................Prin.IV
– prefix sub-..................................................................4.2, N.1; 5A
– principal...........................................................................3
– priority outside....................................................................11.2
– relative order............................................................5; 37.6–8, N.1; F.4
– secondary......................................................................4.1, N.1
– simultaneous different................................................................36.3
– single infraspecific..................................................................37.4
– term denoting.....................................................3.1; 4.1–2; 21.1; 24.1; 32.N.1
– – informal usage.................................................................37.8; Gl.
– – misplaced............................................................37.6–8, N.1; F.4; Gl.
Rapporteur-général..........................Prov.2.3–4; Prov.3.2; Prov.4.3(f)+5+8–12; Prov.7.3–5+7; Prov.8.8
Recommendations, in this Code.........................................................Pre.4+6
Recorder, see Nomenclature Section
Reference, page..................................................................41.5, N.1
– to basionym or replaced synonym........................................................41.1
– to previous description or diagnosis..........................................38.1+11–14; 38A; 44.1
– – full and direct...................................................................38.13
– – indirect........................................................................38.14
– – not acceptable....................................................................38.5
– – of a genus......................................................................38.12
– – restricted......................................................................38.11
– to previous illustration............................................................43.2; 44.2
Registration of nomenclatural novelties and/or acts (see also Repository).................................42
Regnum, see Kingdom
Reihe, instead of order.................................................................17.2
Rejected name.......................................................................Gl.
– combination based on...........................................................14.4+7, N.2
Rejection, of name..................................................Pre.9; 50E.2; 56; 56A; F.7; Gl.
– – approval by General Committee................................................56.3; Prov.5.1(f)
– – as illegitimate............................................................52–54; 58; F.3.3
– – authorized subject to decision.......................................................56.3; F.7
– – disallowed.......................................................................51
– – in favour of conserved name....................................................14.4+6–7+10
– – not affecting legitimacy...................................................14.10; 56.N.1; F.3.4
– – overriding sanctioning..............................................................F.3.8
– – proposal.............................................................14.15; 14A; 56; 56A
190
– of proposal........................................................................57
Relative order of ranks.......................................................5; 37.6–8, N.1; F.4
Replaced synonym.................................................................6.11; Gl.
– reference..................................................................41.1–3; 41A.1
– – correctable......................................................................41.8
– – full and direct.............................................................41.5+7; 41A.1
– – indirect........................................................................41.3
– – mere cross-reference to bibliography....................................................41A.1
– restrictions.......................................................................41.2
– type...........................................................................7.4–5
– without indication of rank.............................................................37.3
Replacement name (nomen novum)....................................6.11–13; 7.4–5; 41; 41A.1; 58; Gl.
– abbreviation......................................................................32A
– author citation...................................................................49.N.1
– if no earlier final epithet available........................................................11.4
– replacing illegitimate name..............................................................58
– restrictions.......................................................................41.2
– type........................................................................7.4–5; 58
– valid publication.....................................................................41
Repository, digital...................................................................29A.2
– nomenclatural........................................................42.1–2; Prov.7.6(b)+13
– – recognized (for fungal names)...............................................F.5; F.5A; Prov.7.10
– – – appointment and cancellation of...................................................F.5.3(a–b)
– – – requirements for deposition of information...............................................F.5.2
Request for a decision (see also Binding decision)...........................................38.4; 53.4
Restoration, of rejected name...........................................................14.6–7
Retention of name authorized subject to decision........................................14.15; Prov.5.4
Retroactivity of rules................................................................Prin.VI
Romanization of personal names.........................................................46B.2
Rules, absence or doubt...............................................................Pre.13
– in this Code....................................................................Pre.4–5
– retroactivity.....................................................................Prin.VI
Sanctioning......................................................................F.3; Gl.
– colon used to indicate................................................................F.3A
– competing names.................................................................F.3.5–6
– date not affecting priority............................................................F.3.N.1
– homonym...........................................................53.1; 55.3; F.3.2–4, N.1
– – creation of.....................................................................F.3.10
– – earlier not illegitimate..............................................................F.3.4
– illegitimate name................................................................6.4; 52.1
– indication by abbreviation or author citation.................................................F.3A
– overridden by conservation or rejection....................................................F.3.8
– spelling.........................................................................F.3.2
– typification of names...................................................7.5; 9.3; 10.2; F.3.9, N.2
– works..........................................................................F.3.1
Scale of figure.....................................................................38D.3
Scientific names in Latin..............................................................Prin.V
Section (sectio) (see also Subdivision of genus).........................................4.1; 21.1; 21B.2
– abbreviation.......................................................................5A
– change in rank....................................................................21B.4
– epithet, from personal name............................................................60B
– – preferably a noun.................................................................21B.2
– – same as for subgenus...............................................................22A
Seed-exchange lists...................................................................30.7
Selection of type, see Designation and Lectotype
Separates......................................................................31.3; 31C
Series (see also Subdivision of genus)....................................................4.1; 21.1
– abbreviation.......................................................................5A
– epithet, preferably a plural adjective......................................................21B.2
Sexual form, see Teleomorph
Signs, see Symbols
Simultaneous publication (see also Priority of choice)...............11.5–6; 13.1(e), N.1; 36.3; 53.5; 61.3; F.8.N.2–3
– of genus and species name...........................................................38.5–7
Small organisms, type..................................................................8.2
Special form (forma specialis)........................................................4.N.4; Gl.
Species (see also Nothospecies).......................................................3; 23; 23A
– abbreviation.......................................................................5A
191
– assignment to genus...............................................................3.1, N.1

– epithet (see also Epithet)......................................................6.7; 23.1–2; 23A
– – adjectival.........................................................23.5; 60.8(c–d)+10; 60D
– – compound...............................................................60.10–11; 60G
– – correct spelling, see Orthography
– – etymology......................................................................60H
– – formation..............................................23.1–3+5; 23A; 60.10–11+13–14; 60C–H
– – grammatical agreement.......................................................23.5; 60.8(c–d)
– – inadmissible...................................................................23.4+6
– – initial letter......................................................................60F
– – Linnaean..............................................................23.3+7–8, *Ex.23
– – termination.........................................23.5; 23A.3(a); 32.2, N.2; 38.13; 60.8, N.4; 60D
– – to adopt...................................................................23A.1+3(a)
– – to avoid.............................................................23A.2+3(b–j); 60C.1
– – two or more words.................................................................23.1
– – under illegitimate generic name.....................................................55.1, N.1
– – with apostrophe or quotation mark.............................................60.13; 60C.4(a–c)
– – with hyphen..........................................................23.1; 23A.3(d); 60.11
– – with symbol.....................................................................23.3
– name............................................................................23
– – conserved..................................................................14.1+4, N.2
– – equivalent to type..................................................................10.1
– – illegitimate................................................................52; 53.1; 55.2
– – legitimate.......................................................................55.1
– – not regarded as such................................................................23.6
– – type...........................................8; 8A–B; 9; 9A–C; 10.N.2; 40.3–8; 40A; F.3.9, N.2
– – – typifying name of supraspecific taxon..........................................10.1–4+8–9; 22.5
– – valid publication....................................23.3–7; 35; 38.5+7–8+11(c); 40.2–5+7–8; 41.2(c)
– raised infraspecific taxon.............................................................24B.2
– rank............................................................................2; 3
– tautonym................................................................10.7(b); 23.4; Gl.
– unitary designation.............................................................20.4(b), N.2
Specimen (see also Collection and Type).................................................8; 8A; Gl.
– cited in protologue...................................................9.1(a)+2+4(c)+6–7, N.1+5
– fossil............................................................8.5; 8A.3; 9.15; 13.3; 43.3
– illustrated........................................................8A.1–2; 38D.2–3; 43.3; 44A
– impossible to preserve................................................................40.5
– reference to detail.................................................................40.N.2
Spelling, see Original spelling, Orthography
Spermatophyta, starting-point...........................................................13.1(a)
Sphagnaceae, starting-point............................................................13.1(c)
“Spina”, not a generic name...........................................................20.Ex.6
Spiritus asper....................................................................60A.Ex.1
“St” in epithets............................................................60.Ex.47; 60C.4(d)
Stability of names.................................................Pre.1; 14.1–2; 53.2; 56.1; F.2; F.7
Standard species............................................................7.*Ex.16; 10.Ex.1
Starting-points, nomenclatural.........................................................13.1; F.1
– taxonomic position of type.............................................................13.2
– valid publication of names....................................................13.1; 32.1(a); F.1
Status, hybrid vs non-hybrid...............................................................50
– of name...........................................................6.1–6+9–11, N.2; 12; Gl.
– – factually incorrect statement of.........................................................6.14
Status novus, see Name, at new rank
Stem augmentation (see also Word elements).............................................60C.1(b+d)
Stratigraphic relations..................................................................13.3
sub-, in rank designation.............................................................4.2, N.1
Subclass (subclassis), name............................................................16.2–3
– rank.............................................................................4.2
Subdivision of family..............................................................4.N.2; Gl.
– including type of family name......................................................19.4–5, N.3
– name.........................................................................19; 19A
– – illegitimate......................................................................19.6
– – termination......................................................19.1+3+7; 19A.1; 32.2, N.2
– –to be formed from effectively typified generic name..........................................40A.2
– – type...........................................................................10.9
– – valid publication..........................................................38.11(a); 41.2(a)
Subdivision of genus..............................................................4.N.2; Gl.
192
– assignment to genus................................................................3.N.1
– autonyms................................................................22.1–4, N.1; 22B
– – type......................................................................7.7; 10A.1
– change in rank....................................................................21B.4
– epithet......................................................................21; 21A–B
– – capital initial letter.................................................................21.2
– – condensed formula.............................................................H.7; H.8.1
– – etymology......................................................................60H
– – final........................................................................6.10.fn.
– – form.................................................................21.2–3; 21B; 60B
– – from constituent species.............................................................10.8
– – grammatical agreement..............................................................21.2
– – inadmissible.....................................................................21.3
– – parenthetical, in species name..........................................................21A
– – same in different ranks..............................................................22A
– – to adopt..............................................................21B.2+4; 22A; 60B
– – to avoid.......................................................................21B.3
– – under illegitimate generic name.....................................................55.1, N.1
– homonyms..................................................................21.N.1; 53.3
– hybrid...................................................................H.7; H.8.1; H.9
– name...........................................................................21.1
– – illegitimate................................................................21.N.1; 53.3
– – legitimate....................................................................55.1, N.1
– – type.........................................................10.1–3+5+8, N.1; 22A; 40A.3
– – – affirmation of choice......................................................10.5; 10A.2; Gl.
– – – supersedable................................................................10.5, N.3
– – valid publication....................................................35; 38.11(b); 41.2(b); H.9
– nomenclaturally typical.....................................................10A.1; 22.1–2, N.1
Subdivision (subdivisio) or subphylum, name................................................16.2–3
– rank.............................................................................4.2
Subfamily (subfamilia) (see also Subdivision of family), name.............................10.9; 11.1; 19.1+8
– rank.............................................................................4.2
– – termed suborder...............................................................19.2, N.1
Subforma (see also Infraspecific taxon).......................................................4.2
Subgenus (see also Subdivision of genus), abbreviated as subg., not “subgen.”.............................5A
– change in rank....................................................................21B.4
– epithet, from personal name............................................................60B
– – preferably noun..................................................................21B.2
– – same in different ranks..............................................................22A
– rank......................................................................4.2; 21.1, N.1
Subjective synonym.................................................................14.4.fn.
Suborder (subordo), name...........................................................16.2; 17.1
– – improper Latin termination...........................................................32.2
– rank.............................................................................4.2
– – intended as subfamily............................................................19.2, N.1
Subordinate taxa...................................................................25; 36.2
Subphylum, see Subdivision
Subregnum.........................................................................4.2
Subsection (subsectio) (see also Subdivision of genus).............................................4.2
Subseries (see also Subdivision of genus)......................................................4.2
Subspecies (see also Infraspecific taxon)......................................................4.2
– abbreviation.......................................................................5A
– epithet, same in varietal rank.........................................................26A.1–2
– – maintenance in infravarietal ranks......................................................26A.3
Substantive, see Noun
Subtribe (subtribus) (see also Subdivision of family), name.........................................19.3
– rank.............................................................................4.2
Subvariety (subvarietas) (see also Infraspecific taxon).............................................4.2
Suffix, see Word elements
Sum of subordinate taxa.................................................................25
Summary of nomenclatural novelties......................................................30A.6
Superfluous name.................................................................52.1; Gl.
– basionym conserved or protected..........................................................6.4
– basionym legitimate.................................................................52.4
– illegitimate.......................................................................52.1
193
– not illegitimate................................................................52.4, N.1–2

Supplementary ranks...................................................................4.3
Suppressed name (nomen utique rejiciendum).................................50E.2, N.1; 56; 56A; F.7; Gl.
Suppressed works (opera utique oppressa).....................................Pre.9; 34.1; Prov.5.1(f); Gl.
– approval by General Committee.................................................34.2; Prov.5.1(f)
– proposal under study.................................................................34A
– suppression authorized subject to decision...................................................34.2
Suprageneric names...................................................................37.2
– parenthetical author citation not used......................................................49.2
– starting-point for Spermatophyta and Pteridophyta...........................................13.1(a)
– starting-point for Sphagnaceae and Hepaticae..............................................13.1(c)
Symbols (see also Multiplication sign).......................................................23.3
– female (♀).....................................................9.Ex.8; 23.Ex.2; 40.Ex.1; H.2A
– Linnaean.....................................................................23.3, Ex.2
– male (♂).............................................................9.Ex.8; 40.Ex.1; H.2A
Synonym...........................................................................Gl.
– citation as..................................................................36.1(b); 50A
– heterotypic....................................................................14.4; Gl.
– homotypic.....................................................................14.4; Gl.
– nomenclatural.....................................................................14.4
– objective......................................................................14.4.fn.
– regardless of multiplication sign........................................................H.3.3
– regardless of prefix “notho-”...........................................................H.3.3
– replaced.........................................................................41.5
– subjective......................................................................14.4.fn.
– taxonomic........................................................................14.4
Syntype(s)............................................................9.6; 10.N.1; 40.N.1; Gl.
– designated as lectotype...............................................................9.12
– duplicate.....................................................................9.4.fn.+12
– exclusion of all....................................................................48.2
– inclusion of all.....................................................................52.2
Tautonym.................................................................10.7(b); 23.4; Gl.
Taxon (taxa)...........................................................Pre.1; Prin.I–V; 1.1; Gl.
– change in rank.........................................................19A; 21B.4; 24B.2; 49
– fossil, see Fossil-taxon
– incertae sedis.....................................................................3.N.1
– new............................................................................54A
– not originally covered by this Code...................................................32.N.4; 45
– not treated as algae, fungi, or plants....................................................Prin.I; 54
– one correct name.............................................................Prin.IV; 11.1
– parental, see under Hybrid
– subordinate....................................................................25; 36.2
– transferred......................................................................49; 50
– treated as algae, fungi, or plants...............................................Pre.8; Prin.I; 45; 54
– treated as plants..................................................................45.N.2
– unranked.......................................................................37.1–3
Taxonomic, articles..................................................................30A.5
– group, see Taxon
– position, see Position
– publications..................................................................30A.5; 46.1
– rank, see Rank
– synonym.........................................................................14.4
Technical term, morphology.............................................................20.2
Teleomorph......................................................................F.8; Gl.
– names not alternative..............................................................F.8.N.3
– priority........................................................................F.8.N.2
– type..........................................................................F.8.N.2
Termination (see also Word elements).........16.1+3–4; 17.1; 18.1; 19.1+3; 19A.1; 20A.1(a); 60.8; 60B; 60D; 62.2+4;
..............................................................H.6.3–4; H.6A; H.8.2; H.10.2
– as indication of rank.................................................................37.2
– contrary to rules....................................................................60.8
– correction when improper.....................................18.4; 19.7; 23.5; 32.2, N.2; 60.8–10, N.4
– epithet, from geographical name.........................................................60D
– – from personal name...................................................60.8, N.4; 60B; 60C.1–2
– incorrect but name validly published......................................................32.2
– Latin if possible.................................................................20A.1(a)
Tetraploid................................................................28.Ex.3; H.3.Ex.3
194
Theses.................................................................30.9, N.3, Ex.14–19

Trade catalogues.....................................................................30.7
Tradition, classical..................................................60A; 60C.2; 60E; 60G; 62.N.1
– nomenclatural...............................................................60.14; 62.1–2
Transcriptions (and related subjects):
ae, for ä or æ......................................................................60.7
ao, for å.........................................................................60.7
diacritical signs...............................................................60.7; 60C.3
e, for è, é, or ê.....................................................................60.7
eu, for ευ........................................................................60.6
h, for spiritus asper..............................................................60A.Ex.1
Greek to Latin................................................18.1; 23.5, Ex.6+9; 32.2; 60.6; 60A
i and j.........................................................................60.5–6
j, for i used as a semi-vowel............................................................60.6
k, permissible in scientific names.........................................................60.4
letters foreign to classical Latin.....................................................60.4; 60C.3
ligature............................................................60.4+7; 60B.N.1; 60C.3
Linnaean symbols...................................................................23.3
mc, for M‘ or m‘...................................................................60.13
n, for ñ..........................................................................60.7
oe, for ö, ø, or œ....................................................................60.7
spiritus asper..................................................................60A.Ex.1
ss, for ß or ſs......................................................................60.4
u and v........................................................................60.5–6
ue, for ü.........................................................................60.7
w, permissible in scientific names........................................................60.4
x, used for ×....................................................................H.3A.2
y, permissible in scientific names.........................................................60.4
Transfer, hybrid/non-hybrid........................................................50; H.10.N.1
– to other genus or species................................................................49
Transliteration to Latin, see Romanization
Tribe (tribus) (see also Subdivision of family)
– abbreviation.......................................................................5A
– name...........................................................................19.3
– rank.............................................................................4.1
– – in Fries’s Systema mycologicum.........................................................F.4
Trigeneric hybrid, name...............................................................H.6.4
Type (typus) (see also Holotype, Lectotype, Neotype, etc.)..................................Prin.II; 7; 8; 10
– acceptance, by typifying author......................................................7.11, N.2
– anamorphic........................................................................F.8
– automatic.......................................................7.3–5+7; 10.8–10; 16.1(a); Gl.
– collection data..............................................................8A.2; 9.2; 40.3
– concrete detail...................................................................40.N.2
– conservation (see also Preservation)................................................10.4, N.2; 14.9
– correction of citation..............................................................9.2, Ex.3
– correction of term...............................................................9.10, N.6
– culture....................................................................8.4; 8B; 40.8
– data of illustrated material.............................................................8A.2
– definite indication...................................................................7.5
– definition.........................................................................7.2
– deposit.............................................................7A; 8.4; 40.7; 40A.5–6
– designation, see also Designation.........................................................Gl.
– duplicate....................................................................8.3+fn.; 9.5
– equivalent term....................................................7.11, Ex.12–15+*Ex.16; 40.6
– exclusion.........................................................47; 48; 52.2; 58.N.1; F.3.10
– from context of description......................................................7.8–9; 9.N.1–3
– identification ambiguous...........................................................9.9; 9B.2
– illustration............................................8.1; 8A.1–2; 9.1–3+8–9+12+21–22, N.1; 40.5
– inclusion, in named taxon................................10.2–3; 22.1–3, N.1; 22A; 26; 26A; 40.1; 52.1–2
– – in other taxon.....................................................................48
– – of single element..................................................................40.3
– indication..............................................................9.11; 24.3; 40; 40A
– interpretative.......................................................................9.9
– living................................................................8.4, Ex.11–12; 8B.2
– location.............................................................7A; 40.7, N.4; 40A.5–6
– mechanical designation.................................................9A.2; 10.5–7, N.3; 10A.2
– metabolically inactive state......................................................8.4; 8B.2; 40.8
195
– missing...................................................................9.3+8+11+13
– misuse of term..................................................................9.10, N.6
– more than one individual.............................................................8.2–3
– more than one taxon.........................................................9.3+11+14; 9A.4
– nomenclatural......................................................................Gl.
– not always typical of taxon..............................................................7.2
– not conspecific with material associated with the protologue.......................................10.2
– not conspecific with material associated with the sanctioning treatment................................10.2
– number identifying..............................................................9C; 40A.5
– of autonym........................................................................7.7
– of basionym.......................................................................7.3
– of condensed formula..............................................................H.9.N.1
– of name, alternative.................................................................36.3
– – at new rank.......................................................................7.3
– – conserved..................................................9.N.4; 10.4, N.2; 14.3+8–9; 48.N.2
– – erroneously applied.................................................................7.3
– – family....................................................................10.9; 18.N.1
– – – alternative.................................................................10.9; 18.5
– – – included in subdivision of family......................................................19.4
– – fossil-taxon..............................................................8.5; 8A.3; 13.3
– – genus...............................................................10.1–5; 10A.1; 14.3
– – illegitimate.......................................................................7.5
– – of pleomorphic fungi................................................................F.8
– – rejected........................................................................14.3
– – nothotaxon.........................................................40.1; H.9.N.1; H.10.N.2
– – sanctioned.........................................................7.5; 9.3; 10.2; F.3.9, N.2
– – species or infraspecific taxon.................................................8; 8A–B; 9; 9A–C
– – subdivision, of family............................................................7.1; 10.9
– – – of genus..............................................................10.1–5+8; 10A.1
– – subfamily, alternative...........................................................10.9; 19.8
– – suprafamilial taxon...................................................7.1; 10.10; 16.1(a); 17.1
– – validly published by reference..........................................................7.8
– – with later starting-point...............................................................7.9
– of new combination..................................................................7.3
– of orthographical variants............................................................61.2+5
– of replacement name..................................................................7.4
– original....................................................9.15; 14.Ex.10; 22.2; 48.2, N.2; 52.2
– preservation, impossible..............................................................40.5
– – permanent........................................................8.1–4; 8A.3–4; 8B.2; 40.8
– – place.................................................7A; 8.1; 9.21–22; 9C; 40.7, N.4; 40A.5–6
– previously designated......................................9.9+11+16–17; 22.2; 26.2; 48.2(b); 52.2(b)
– rediscovered......................................................................9.19
– required.........................................................................40.2
– serious conflict with protologue...........................................9.19(c), N.7; 9A.3–4; 10.2
– single specimen.....................................................................8.1
– standard species.................................................................7.*Ex.16
– stratigraphic relations................................................................13.3
– taxonomic position...........................................................13.2; H.10.N.2
– teleomorphic.......................................................................F.8
Typescripts........................................................................30.1
Typification, see Designation, Lectotype, Neotype
– date..........................................................................10.N.3
– principle...................................................................Prin.II; 10.10
Typographical error.............................................................60.1; 61.1–2
Typography, matter of.................................................................60.2
Typus, see Type
Unitary designation of species..........................................................20.4(b)
Unpaginated publications..............................................................41A.2
Unpublished, material...........................................................30.1; Prov.4.8
– names....................................................................23A.3(i); 50G
Unranked taxa.....................................................................37.1–3
Uredinales, sanctioning................................................................F.3.1
Usage, see Custom and Tradition
– current, to be followed pending General Committee’s recommendation........................14A; 34A; 56A
Ustilaginales, sanctioning..............................................................F.3.1
Valid publication............................................6.2, N.1; 32–45; F.4; F.5.1–2, N.1–2; H.9
– date.........................................................................33.1; 45
196
– – for names of taxa not originally covered by this Code...........................................45

– – unaffected by conservation..........................................................14.N.3
– – unaffected by correction of original spelling................................................33.2
– – unaffected by sanctioning..........................................................F.3.N.1
– despite taxonomic doubt..............................................................36.1
– not by mere mention of subordinate taxa....................................................36.2
– not by reference to general indices....................................................41.7, N.2
– not of name, cited as synonym........................................................36.1(b)
– – proposed in anticipation.....................................................36.1(a); H.9.N.2
– – provisional....................................................................36.1(a)
– not when misplaced term denotes rank.....................................................37.6
– of autonym................................................................22.3; 26.3; 32.3
– of basionym............................................................41.5+8, N.1; 41A.1
– of combination......................................................................35
– of name, algae..............................................................13.1(e); 44; 45
– – alternative......................................................................36.3
– – at new rank.......................................................................41
– – family....................................................................18; 38.11(a)
– – fossil-taxon.......................................................................43
– – fungal fossil-taxon...............................................................43.N.2
– – fungi.....................................................................45; F.5.1–2
– – genus................................................................38.5–7+11(b); 40.3
– – – Linnaean.................................................................13.4; 38.N.1
– – hybrid................................................................32.4; H.9; H.10.1
– – infraspecific taxon.............................................35.1, N.1; 38.8+11(c); 40.2–5+7–8
– – monotypic new genus.........................................................38.5–7; 40.6
– – new taxon........................................................................38
– – organisms other than vascular plants....................................................38.10
– – nothogenus......................................................................H.9
– – nothospecies or lower-ranked hybrid...................................................H.10.1
– – species..........................................23.3–7; 35; 38.5+7–8+11(c); 40.2–5+7–8; 41.2(c)
– – subdivision of family.......................................................38.11(a); 41.2(a)
– – subdivision of genus.................................................35; 38.11(b); 41.2(b); H.9
– – taxon not originally covered by this Code...................................................45
– of new combination...................................................................41
– of orthographical variant..............................................................61.1
– of replacement name..................................................................41
– requirements........................................................32–45; F.4; F.5.1–2; H.9
– – acceptance of name.............................................................33.1; 36.1
– – association of epithet with name........................................................35.2
– – citation of basionym or replaced synonym..............................................41.1+3+5
– – – despite bibliographic error...........................................................41.6
– – – despite incorrect author citation.......................................................41.6
– – citation of identifier issued by recognized repository..........................................F.5.1
– – compliance with provisions on form of name............................................32.1(c)+2
– – description or diagnosis.....................................................38.1+4–5+11+13
– – – any language............................................................43.N.1; 44.N.1
– – – binding decision on adequacy of.......................................................38.4
– – – English...................................................................39.2; 43.1
– – – Latin..................................................................39; 43.1; 44.1
– – effective publication..............................................................32.1(a)
– – illustration..........................................................38.7+10–11; 43.2; 44.2
– – – with analysis..............................................................38.7–10; Gl.
– – indication of rank..................................................................37.1
– – indication of type...................................................................40
– – reference, to basionym or replaced synonym.................................................41
– – – to date........................................................................41.5
– – – to description or diagnosis......................................7.8; 38.1+11–14; 39.1–2; 43.1; 44.1
– – – – full and direct.................................................................38.13
– – – – indirect...................................................................38.13–14
– – – – not acceptable.................................................................38.5
– – – – of a genus...................................................................38.12
– – – – restricted....................................................................38.11
– – – to illustration................................................................43.2; 44.2
– – – to page or plate...............................................................41.5, N.1
– – – to place(s) where requirements previously fulfilled..........................................33.1
– – – to detail of type................................................................40.N.2
197
– – specification of type herbarium.........................................................40.7

– – specification that type culture preserved in metabolically inactive state...............................40.8
– – statement of parentage...............................................................H.9
– starting-points..................................................................13.1; F.1
Variant, see under Orthography
Variety (varietas) (see also Infraspecific taxon and Nothomorph).................................H.12.2+fn.
– abbreviation.......................................................................5A
– epithet, different from infravarietal......................................................26A.3
– – same as subspecific.............................................................26A.1–2
– rank.............................................................................4.1
– single infraspecific rank...............................................................37.4
Vascular Plants, Nomenclature Committee for.............................................Prov.7.1(e)
Vernacular name.................................................................60.9; 62.3
Version of Record...........................................................30.Ex.5–6; 30A.1
Vice-rapporteur.................................................Prov.2.4; Prov.4.5+9; Prov.7.3–4+7
Vote (see also Nomenclature Section, Nomenclature Session)
– entitlement to.........................................................Prov.2.5(a–c); Prov.4.2
– institutional....................................................Prov.3; Prov.5.9(b); Prov.7.9+12
– guiding...................................Prov.1.4.fn.; Prov.2.5–6; Prov.5.5; Prov.6.1(a); Prov.8.3+11(a)
– personal................................................................Prov.5.9; Prov.8.9
Vowel, connecting...........................................16.1(a); 60.10, Ex.34–35+37; H.6.2+4(a)
– final............................................................60.8(a+c)+9(b)(2); 60B.1(a)
– transcription.....................................................................60.5+7
Watermark.......................................................................30.Ex.7
Wild, organisms from in cultivation..........................................................28
Wood, fossil.......................................................................8A.3
Word, Greek or Latin.............................................................60.10; 60G
– last in compound, gender..............................................................62.2
– not epithet or name...........................................................20.4(a); 35.N.1
– standing independently..............................................................60.11
Word element, omitted in suprafamilial name..................................................16.4
Word elements:
-a.................................................................60.8(a+c); 60B.1(a–b)
-aceae...........................................................18.1; 19.1; 19A.1; 37.2.fn.
-achne........................................................................62.2(b)
-ae..................................................................18.1; 60.8(a)+10(a)
-ae-.........................................................................60.Ex.37
-ales.....................................................................17.1; 37.2.fn.
-an-........................................................................60.8(c–d)
-ana..........................................................................60.8(c)
-anthes..........................................................................62.4
-anthos, -anthus..................................................................62.2(c)
-anum.........................................................................60.8(c)
-anus.....................................................................60.8(c); 60D
-ara................................................................H.6.3–4; H.6A; H.8.2
-as......................................................................18.1; 60.10(a)
-aster (-asteris), -astrum (-astri).......................................................61.Ex.3
-botrys........................................................................62.2(a)
calli-........................................................................60G.Ex.1
-carpa, -aea, -ium, -on, -os, -um, -us....................................................62.Ex.3
-ceras.........................................................................62.2(c)
-cheilos, -chilos, -chilus.............................................................62.2(c)
-chlamys.......................................................................62.2(b)
-clad-...........................................................................16.4
-cocc-...........................................................................16.4
-codon........................................................................62.2(a)
-cola.......................................................................23.5, Ex.11
-cyst-...........................................................................16.4
-daphne.......................................................................62.2(b)
-dendron.......................................................................62.2(c)
-e............................................................................60.8(a)
-ea..........................................................................60B.1(a)
-eae...........................................................19.3+7; 19A.1; 37.2.fn., Ex.1
-ensis....................................................................60.Ex.19; 60D
-eos.....................................................................18.1; 60.10(a)
-er..................................................................60.8(a–b); 60B.1(b)
-es......................................................................18.1; 60.10(a)
198
Eu-............................................................................21.3
-folia......................................................................60.Ex.34–35
-gaster........................................................................62.2(b)
-glochin.......................................................................62.2(b)
hydr-, hydro-..................................................................60G.Ex.1
-i..................................................................18.1; 60.8(a); 60.10(a)
-i-...........................................................60.8(b+d)+10(b), Ex.34–35+37
-ia..........................................................................60B.1(b)
-iae..........................................................................60.8(b)
-ianus, -iana, -ianum...............................................................60.8(d)
-iarum........................................................................60.8(b)
-icus...........................................................................60D
-idae.....................................................................16.3; 37.2.fn.
-ii...........................................................................60.8(b)
-inae................................................................19.3; 19A.1; 37.2.fn.
-ineae.....................................................................17.1; 37.2.fn.
-inus...........................................................................60D
-iorum........................................................................60.8(b)
-is.......................................................................18.1; 60.10(a)
-ites............................................................................62.4
-lotus.......................................................................60G.Ex.1
-mecon........................................................................62.2(b)
meli-........................................................................60G.Ex.1
-monad-.........................................................................16.4
-myces........................................................................62.2(a)
-mycet-..........................................................................16.4
-mycetes...................................................................16.3; 37.2.fn.
-mycetidae.................................................................16.3; 37.2.fn.
-mycota...................................................................16.3; 37.2.fn.
-mycotina..................................................................16.3; 37.2.fn.
-n-...........................................................................60.8(c)
-nema.........................................................................62.2(c)
-nemat-..........................................................................16.4
-nus, -na, -num...............................................................60.8(c); 60D
-o-......................................................................16.1; 60.10(b)
-odes...........................................................................62.4
-odon.........................................................................62.2(a)
-oideae.............................................................19.1+7; 19A.1; 37.2.fn.
-oides....................................................................60.Ex.39; 62.4
-opsida....................................................................16.3; 37.2.fn.
-opsidis.........................................................................18.1
-opsis...........................................................................18.1
-orum.........................................................................60.8(a)
-os......................................................................18.1; 60.10(a)
-osma.................................................................60G.Ex.1; 62.2(b)
-ou......................................................................18.1; 60.10(a)
-ous.....................................................................18.1; 60.10(a)
-panax........................................................................62.2(a)
-phyceae...................................................................16.3; 37.2.fn.
-phycidae..................................................................16.3; 37.2.fn.
-phycos, -phycus, -phykos............................................................62.2(c)
-phyllum.....................................................................60G.Ex.1
-phyt-...........................................................................16.4
-phyta, -phyton.............................................................16.3–4; 37.2.fn.
-phytina...................................................................16.3; 37.2.fn.
-pogon........................................................................62.2(a)
-rum..........................................................................60.8(a)
-stemon................................................................60G.Ex.1; 62.2(a)
-stigma........................................................................62.2(c)
-stoma........................................................................62.2(c)
-us...........................................................18.1; 60.10(a), Ex.37; 60B.1(c)
-virales..........................................................................17.1
-viridae.........................................................................16.3
-virinae.........................................................................19.3
-virus...........................................................................20.1
Work, see Publication
World directory of collections of cultures of microorganisms......................................40.N.4
199
World Wide Web....................................................................29.2

Zoological, names....................................................................54A
– nomenclature, see International Code of Zoological Nomenclature
– taxa............................................................................54A
200
International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and

plants: Appendices I–VII
(with an accounting of all proposals to conserve, protect, and reject names, to
suppress works, and requests for binding decisions)
In 1950, the International Botanical Congress founded the International Association for Plant
Taxonomy (IAPT), which initiated the journal Taxon. All proposals for conservation or rejection of
scientific names (see guidelines), for suppression of botanical works, and requests for binding
decisions on valid publication or confusability of names (see guidelines) are now published
in Taxon and proposals for protection of fungal names in IMA Fungus. The proposal number series
for conservation/rejection proposals was started in 1955 and continues today; the numbering of
other proposals or requests only began in 2013. This database, which succeeds the "Proposals and
Disposals" database initiated by Dan Nicolson in 2000, contains records of all such proposals or
requests and their histories since the first ones appeared in 1892, and two reports are available
from the data. A Proposals/Requests report details the history of selected proposals or requests,
providing citations of all Nomenclature Committee reports regarding their status, and indicating the final disposition,
the representation, if any, in subsequent Codes, and any resulting entries in the Shenzhen Code Appendices. A Code
Appendices report reproduces all entries matching any set of search criteria within the content of Shenzhen
Code Appendices I–VII. For a full explanation of these criteria, see the help file. [Dan Nicolson, March 2000–February
2009; John Wiersema, April 2009–present (8311 entries)].
http://botany.si.edu/references/codes/props/
201
Cite this Code as: Turland, N. J., Wiersema, J. H., Barrie, F. R., Greuter, W., Hawksworth, D. L., Herendeen, P. S., Knapp,
S., Kusber, W.-H., Li, D.-Z., Marhold, K., May, T. W., McNeill, J., Monro, A. M., Prado, J., Price, M. J. & Smith, G. F. (eds.)
2018: International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants (Shenzhen Code) adopted by the Nineteenth
International Botanical Congress Shenzhen, China, July 2017. Regnum Vegetabile 159. Glashütten: Koeltz Botanical
Books. DOI https://doi.org/10.12705/Code.2018

International Code of Nomenclature Algae, Fungi, and Plants: Prepared and Edited by

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

International Code of Nomenclature Algae, Fungi, and Plants: Prepared and Edited by

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1

prepared and edited by

NICHOLAS J. TURLAND, Chair

Koeltz Botanical Books

Regnum Vegetabile Volume 159

EDITORIAL COMMITTEE FOR THIS CODE

Registration of algal and plant names

KEY TO THE RE-NUMBERING OF ARTICLES, NOTES,

1. MELBOURNE CODE TO SHENZHEN CODE

Art. 6 Note 3.............................................Art. 6 Note 4

Art. 30 Note 2 (amended) ....... Art. 30.3

Rec. 60C.3 ................. Rec. 60C.2

KEY TO THE RE-NUMBERING OF ARTICLES, NOTES,

2. SHENZHEN CODE TO MELBOURNE CODE

Art. 6.1 footnote ............. Art. 8.1 footnote

Art. 30.3 .................. Art. 30 Note 2 (amended)

Art. 60 *Ex. 2 ............... new

Div. III Prov. 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, and 5.9

IMPORTANT DATES IN THE CODE

DATES UPON WHICH PARTICULAR PROVISIONS OF THE CODE

1 May 1753 Art. 7.9, 13.1(a, c, e), 13 Note 1, F.1.1

PROVISIONS INVOLVING DATES APPLICABLE TO PARTICULAR GROUPS

PROVISIONS DEFINING THE DATES OF CERTAIN WORKS

Art. 13.1(a–c, e, f), 13 Note 1, F.1.1

INTERNATIONAL CODE OF NOMENCLATURE

traditionally studied by botanists, mycologists, and phycologists (see Pre. 8).

them. A Glossary defining terms used in this Code is included.

an organism, e.g. a drawing, a picture of a herbarium specimen, or a scanning electron micrograph.

a subdivision of a genus, a species, or an infraspecific taxon.

individual or more than one.

gathering of a single species or infraspecific taxon.

9.5. An isotype is any duplicate of the holotype; it is always a specimen.

9.23. On or after 1 January 2001, lectotypification, neotypification, or epitypification of a name of a species or

the American Code);

and against all combinations based on the rejected names.

heterotypic synonym, respectively.

14.13. Entries of conserved names may not be deleted.

SEE ART. F.3 IN CHAPTER F

20.4. The following are not to be regarded as generic names:

(b) Unitary designations of species.

23.6. The following designations are not to be regarded as species names:

(d) Formulae designating hybrids (see Art. H.10.2).

published” in this Code.

Ex. 3. Glechoma L. 1753, orth. cons., ‘Glecoma’.

the International Code of Nomenclature of Prokaryotes.

in the International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants.

(NAMES OF FUNGI WITH A PLEOMORPHIC LIFE CYCLE)

SEE ART. F.8 IN CHAPTER F

denoting the rank of the taxon.

(see Art. 50).

4.3. The Nomenclature Section has the following functions:

5.9. There are two kinds of votes at the Nomenclature Section:

8.5. The Fungal Nomenclature Session has the following functions:

isoneotype. A duplicate specimen of the neotype (Art. 9.4 footnote).

INDEX OF SCIENTIFIC NAMES

Abies alcoquiana Veitch ex Lindl..............................60.Ex.28

Anthyllis sect. Aspalathoides DC...............................41.Ex.1; 49.Ex.2

– tenue var. paucefulcrans C. Y. Wu ex R. H. Shan & Yin Li...........46.Ex.20

Caulokaempferia dinabandhuana Biseshwori & Bipin, ‘dinabandhuensis’...60.Ex.19

Equisetum palustre var. americanum Vict.........................6.Ex.6

– neoebudarum Summerh., ‘neo-ebudarum’.......................60.Ex.40

Goniopteris tenera Fée....................................11.Ex.17

Racodium rupestre Pers....................................7.Ex.3